JP7073018B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

Conventional gaming machines are generally installed in island equipment installed in a gaming hall, and specifically, a plurality of gaming machines are installed in a row on one side of the island equipment. , It is known that a plurality of gaming machines are installed in a row on both sides of an island facility (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-147545

However, the conventional gaming machine has not been devised on the back side thereof, and the circumstances of the gaming machine installed in the island facility have not been taken into consideration.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a back surface side in a new aspect which has never existed before.

The present invention
In a gaming machine that displays a variation of a symbol based on the satisfaction of a predetermined start condition and gives a profit to a player based on the result of the variation display of the symbol.
A game board on which a predetermined game area is formed,
A light emitting portion provided on the gaming board and light emitting and decorating a predetermined decorative portion visible from the front side of the gaming machine.
A rear bulging portion provided on the gaming board and bulging toward the rear side of the gaming machine,
The transmissive portion provided in the rear bulging portion and the transmissive portion
A movable body provided on the gaming board and operating so as to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine is provided.
The light emitting unit is provided separately from the movable body, and is arranged and configured so that the light emitted by the light emitting unit can be visually recognized from the rear side of the gaming machine through the transmitting unit.
The mode of viewing the light of the light emitting portion, which is visible from the rear side of the gaming machine through the transmitting portion, changes depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the movable body.
Further, a predetermined front body having the decorative portion is located in front of the light emitting portion, and at least a part of the light of the light emitting portion can be reflected by the front body, and the reflected light is the reflected light. It becomes visible from the rear side of the game machine through the transmissive part.
It is characterized by that.

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new aspect in which the back surface side is not conventionally used.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the staging operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a staging operation unit is in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front and upper, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front and lower. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a top view which looked at the staging operation unit in a dish unit from the advancing / retreating direction of a staging operation part button unit. (A) is a perspective view of the staging operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the staging operation unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the staging operation ring of the staging operation unit as seen from the top front, and (b) is a perspective view of the staging operation ring as seen from the bottom front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation ring disassembled and viewed from the top front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the staging operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and looked at from the front right. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and looked at from the left front. It is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation button unit of the staging operation unit disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front and bottom. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the staging operation ring and the staging operation ring decorative substrate in the plan view which saw the staging operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when is pressed. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front and bottom. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. (A) to (c) are explanatory views showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout vane. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the movable ball-extracting piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the board unit from the rear lower part. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main composition and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main composition and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which shows the upper part enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 10 (a) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) viewed from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area where the game ball overflowing from a ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which enlarges and shows the vicinity of a tank rail in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back on the hinge side. It is a front view of the game board in which the front component, the game panel, the front unit, etc. are opaque in the pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the front right. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a state where a front component, a game panel, a front unit and the like are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the back. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 107. It is a front view of the game board which shows the inside of the game area where a game ball circulates, and the obstacle nail by cutting the table unit parallel to the surface of a game panel. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit in the front unit from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit in the front unit from the back, and (c) is a perspective view. It is a left side view of a start port unit, and (d) is a left side view of a side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front surface of a general winning opening and the inclination of the door member of a variable winning opening in an open state. It is an enlarged front view which shows the part of the start opening unit and the side unit in a game board. (A) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the first attacker unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the first attacker unit and looked at from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the 1st prize winning door in the 1st attacker unit from the left side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passage of the game ball in the 1st attacker unit in the cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of a center accessory. (A) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, the side right middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit, and (b) is the second attacker unit, the side right middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit. Is a perspective view seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passage of the game ball in the 2nd attacker unit and the side right middle unit in the cross section. FIG. 115 is an enlarged explanatory view of a right portion in the game area in FIG. 115. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main composition and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main composition and looked at from the back. It is the front view of the pachinko machine which enlarged and shows the upper left corner of the game board with the door frame made transparent. (A) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back-back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back and rear staging unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-and-forth effect unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable composition of the back-and-forth effect unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back-and-forth effect unit. It is a front view which shows the back-rear movable decorative body together with the back-rear decorative substrate. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 142, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 142. (A) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the movable decorative body after the back and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the movable decorative body after the back and looked at from the back. It is the front view which shows the part of the movable decorative body after the back enlarged. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate by the broken line in the front view of FIG. 147. (A) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-rear movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body of (a), and (c). ) Is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate in the same portion as the decorative body of (a). FIG. 3 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing an enlarged upper portion of FIG. 143 (a). FIG. 5 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 in an exploded manner. It is explanatory drawing which enlarges a part of the front surface of the back-rear movable decorative body, and shows the relationship between the decoration by a decorative body and a decorative sheet, and the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate. (A) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the light guide emitting plate and the back-rear decorative substrate in the portion of the first LED in a cross section, and (b) is an explanatory view in which the second LED is located on the optical axis of the first LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the light guide radiation plate in the part which is from the front, (c) is the LED accommodating part of the light guide radiation plate with respect to the 2nd decorative part in a decorative body and a decorative sheet, and the 1st LED of a back-rear decorative substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement example of. It is the front view which shows by enlarging a part of the back-rear decorative substrate together with the copper foil of a circuit pattern. (A) is a front view of the back-rear decorative substrate, and (b) is a rear view of the back-rear decorative substrate. (A) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-rear movable decorative body, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a different form from (a). FIG. 3C is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of a decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a form further different from that of (a) and (b). (A) is an explanatory view showing the configuration of the back-rear movable decoration body of the second embodiment different from the back-rear movable decoration body of FIG. 142 in a cross section, and (b) is the back-rear movable decoration body of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of this in the cross section, and (c) is the explanatory view which shows the structure of the back-rear movable decorative body of 4th Embodiment by the cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower back left effect unit and the lower right effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower back left effect unit and the lower right effect unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable composition of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back bottom middle staging unit as seen from the front by disassembling the back bottom middle elevating mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the back bottom middle staging unit as seen from the front by disassembling the back bottom middle elevating mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the underside middle decoration unit of the underside middle staging unit as seen from the front by disassembling it. It is an exploded perspective view of the under-back middle-decorative body unit as seen from behind by disassembling the under-back middle staging unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the elevating and lowering of the back lower middle decorative body unit by the back lower middle elevating mechanism in the back lower middle staging unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing from the front the configuration of the back lower middle decorative body unit in the back lower middle staging unit regarding the rotation of the back lower middle rotating decorative body, and (b) is the stop position of the back lower middle rotating decorative body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship with each detection sensor in a table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement of LED of the decoration body unit under the back under the back in the staging unit under the back from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up staging unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up staging unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up elevating decoration unit in the back-up staging unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at from the back by disassembling the back-up elevating decorative body unit in the back unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotation decoration body in the back-up effect unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view showing the elevating mechanism of the back-up elevating decorative body unit in the back-up staging unit from the front, and (b) is the back-up elevating decoration with the back-up elevating decorative body unit moved to the appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the elevating mechanism of a body unit, and the rotation mechanism of a back-up-post-rotation decorative body from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decorative substrate from the front in the state which moved the back-up elevating decorative body unit to the appearance position in the back-up staging unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear left staging unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear left staging unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decorative body unit seen from the front by disassembling the back rear left staging unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decorative body unit seen from behind by disassembling the back rear left staging unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back-rear left staging unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear left decorative body unit in the back rear left staging unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back and rear right staging unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-to-right staging unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right decorative body unit seen from the front by disassembling the back rear right staging unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-back-right staging unit as seen from behind by disassembling the back-back-right decorative unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back-right effect unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear right decorative body unit in the back rear right staging unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left staging unit disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left staging unit disassembled and seen from the back. (A) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the closed state, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the open state. (A) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right staging unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right staging unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in the closed state, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in the open state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the back-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the rotating decoration body under the back bottom of the back bottom middle effect unit is moved from the descending position to the rising position. The back-up-back-effect unit's back-up-back-rotating ornament is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-back-left-effect unit's back-back-left-rotating ornament is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back-back-right-effect unit is back. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the rear right rotation decoration body was moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, respectively. The back-to-left effect unit has been moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-to-right effect unit has been moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown by. It is a front view of the game board which shows the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit from the closed state to the open state, respectively. The back-back movable decoration of the back-back effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-up and back-rotating decoration of the back-up and rear-effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the back-back-left effect unit is back-left-rotated. From the retracted position to the first appearance position, from the retracted position to the first appearance position of the back rear right effect unit, and from the lower back middle effect unit to the lower middle rotating ornament. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the state of being moved to the position, respectively. It is a block diagram which shows the control composition of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-supporting member. It is a front perspective view (a) and the rear perspective view (b) of the drawer connector mounted on the relay board provided in the main body frame. It is a figure (a)-(c) which prevents the solder bridge of each terminal of a drawer connector (concave type) of a main body frame side, and is a small DIP type connector which is electrically connected to a drawer connector (concave type) of a main body frame side. It is a figure (d)-(f) which prevents the solder bridge of each terminal of. It is a figure (a) which shows the modification of FIG. 209 (c), and is the figure (b) which shows the modification of FIG. 209 (f). It is a figure which shows the modification which forms the terminal of a final stage and a solder escape pattern separated by a predetermined distance. It is a schematic diagram (a) of the over resist applied to each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side, and is the schematic diagram (b) of the cross section of the X-ray line in (a). It is a schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the substrate on which a surface mount type connector is mounted, and is the schematic (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate. It is a continuation of FIG. 213, is an enlarged view of a part A of FIG. 213 (b), and is a schematic view (c) of an overresist applied to a housing fixing land of a surface mount type connector, in FIG. It is a schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the YY line. It is a schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the substrate on which the surface mount type connector in the modification is mounted, and is the schematic (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. It is a continuation of FIG. 215, is an enlarged view of a portion B of FIG. 215 (b), and is a schematic view (c) of an overresist applied to a housing fixing land of a surface mount type connector, in FIG. It is a schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the ZZ line. It is the front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit. It is a front view of the peripheral control unit. It is a figure which shows the shape of the betta land in the part where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib part formed in a base body abuts on the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board, and is the copper foil of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board. It is the schematic (a) of the surface, and is the schematic (b) of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. It is a figure which shows the shape of the resist with respect to the land when flowing a peripheral control board into a solder bath. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XX of FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment. It is the A arrow view of FIG. 224 which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is the A arrow view of FIG. 224 which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. Taking out the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board according to the third embodiment to improve the contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board and the conductive elastic member. It is a figure which shows the method, and is the schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board (bare example (a)), and the schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board (bare example (b)). , Schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (example (c) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged), schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (through having lands). This is an example (d) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the mounting procedure of the peripheral control board and the like which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure (a) which shows the land formed around the through hole on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board, etc. which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and the figure (b) which shows the foil removal area. The figure (a) which shows the land formed around the through hole on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board which concerns on 4th Embodiment, the figure (b) which shows the land and the screwing designation symbol, and the foil removal area. It is a figure (c) which shows. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 5th Embodiment. FIG. 1A shows a part of the rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and the figure shows a part of the base body constituting the peripheral control unit so that the state in which the conductive elastic member is inserted can be seen. It is a figure (b) which shows a part of the rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit cut out by the CL line in (a). A rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit in which a part of the peripheral control unit is cut out so that the state in which the conductive elastic member is pressed against the metal back cover of the staging display device 1600 and deformed can be seen, which is a continuation of FIG. 238. It is a figure (c) which shows a part. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a front portion of a cover body constituting a peripheral control unit having an opening through which a tip portion of a contact probe according to a fifth embodiment can be inserted and brought into contact with the contact probe. Taking out the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the specific substrate to improve the contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the specific substrate and the conductive elastic member according to the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the method, and is the schematic diagram (bare example (a)) of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate, and the schematic diagram (bare example (b)) of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate. , Schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (example (c) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged), schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (through having lands). This is an example (d) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. It is a front perspective view of a flexible flat cable. It is a figure (a) which shows the state which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector on the back side of an effect display device, and is the figure which shows the state which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector of a liquid crystal output board (a). b), which is a partially enlarged view of part B shown in (a) and part C shown in (b), showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to each connector through a notch. FIG. 3C. It is a figure (a) which shows the state which the flexible flat cable is not electrically connected normally with the connector on the back side of the effect display device, and the flexible flat cable is electrically connected normally with the connector of a liquid crystal output board. It is a figure (b) which shows the absence state. It is a figure (a) which shows the arrangement of the connector of a relay board, and is the figure (b) which shows the state which the connector of a wiring and a harness is normally connected to the connector of a relay board, and is the figure (b) with respect to the connector of a relay board. It is a figure (c) which shows the state which the connector of a wiring and a harness is not connected normally. It is a modification of FIG. 245 and is a figure (a) which shows the arrangement of the connector of a relay board and the arrangement line of a part product, and shows the state which the connector of a wiring and a harness is normally connected to the connector of a relay board. FIG. 3B is a diagram (c) showing a state in which the wiring or harness connector is not normally connected to the connector of the relay board. It is a partial perspective view (a) which explains the area which attaches the wiring groove, and is the figure (b) which shows the state which the wiring groove which concerns on 1st Embodiment is attached to the back surface side of a game board. FIG. 247 is a continuation of FIG. 247, which is a diagram (c) showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back surface side of the game board. It is a perspective view which shows the state of various wirings when the wiring groove which concerns on 1st Embodiment is attached to the back surface side of a game board, and the game board is seen from the back. It is a perspective view which shows the state of various wirings when the wiring groove which concerns on 1st Embodiment is attached to the back surface side of a game board, and the game board is seen from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the state of various wirings when the wiring groove which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is attached to the back surface side of the game board, and the game board is seen from the back. It is a perspective view which shows the state of various wirings when the wiring groove which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is attached to the back surface side of the game board, and the game board is seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the light emitting production unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the light emitting production unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the light emitting effect unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the light emitting effect unit and looked at from the back. It is a front view which shows the arrangement relation of the LED bare chip and a light guide plate. It is a front view which shows the diffusion sheet arranged on the surface of a light guide plate. It is a figure (a) which shows the state which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected with the connector of the LED board, and is the enlarged view of the Z part shown in (a), and the difference of the flexible flat cable to the connector of the LED board. It is a figure (b) which shows the state which the insertion is normal | (C). It is a side view schematically showing the light from the light emitting decoration which is in the standby position when the pachinko machine is seen from the side. It is a side view schematically showing the light from the light emitting ornament at the appearance position when the pachinko machine is viewed from the side. It is a figure which shows the back-rear decorative substrate provided with a plurality of holes. It is a front view which shows the light emitting region on the back side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the light emitting region on the side surface side which looked at the game board from the left front. It is a perspective view which shows the light emitting region on the side surface side which saw the game board from the left rear. It is a figure which shows the opening provided on the back surface side of the staging display device. FIG. 9 is an enlarged schematic view showing a part of a cross section cut along the line CC of FIG. 99 (a). It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the staging operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the staging operation unit is in the raised position. be. Further, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back after being disassembled into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame having a front view extending vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4 and the main body are formed by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame and the hinge member 60 below the outer frame. The hinge under-frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated to the front, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 having a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The hinge member 510 above the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game. A ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. Covers the payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. It includes a back cover 640, an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and at the same time, pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is openably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into a substantially square shape in front view, and a front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 having the cage main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the periphery arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a table unit 2000 mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. , A back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B. (For example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) General winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, gate portion 2003, second starting opening 2004, first large winning opening 2005, and second large winning opening 2006 And have. The obstacle nail N is planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000.

A player can drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B becomes the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. , It is possible to entertain the player with the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

Further, the game board 5 may display a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state changed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, or may display a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, or the back-back effect unit 3100 and the back bottom. Left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700, back front right production The unit 3800 or the like can be used to perform a light emitting effect, a movable effect, or the like to entertain the player.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame having a front view extending vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame can detachably support the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for mounting the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 is increased by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. It is provided with a pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b to the right from the rear side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to the outside. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, in the outer frame right assembly 20, the outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a certain width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It is provided with a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the left side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 is increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. It is provided with a pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the left from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends shortly toward the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is attached to the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook hook member 24 and the lower hook hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. A flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hook piece portion 25b in the front-rear direction. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating up and down at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is mounted on the mounting step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 has an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. It is equipped with a mechanism 44.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating up and down at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and has a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and is removed from the position toward the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as wide as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 has a length in the left-right direction extending to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 to become a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. It forms a space 40a. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates back and forth and extends left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Is to prevent being pinched.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. The first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and the second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface moves backward. It is provided with a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forward protruding upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and further invades. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. When the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or on the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders that are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extend back and forth. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided with a locking member 52 and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a that is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a and the end edge extending downward from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 described later of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 has a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b behind the bearing groove 51c by the mounting screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space that can accommodate the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion posterior to the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. It is provided with a hinge pin 60c under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through the horizontal portion 60a up and down. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is columnar and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the member 43 behind the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the cloaca and the cloaca is gradually narrowed, the cloaca is rolled to the rear side where the distance is wide, and the cloaca can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a front view extending vertically, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450, which is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame, is provided.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates back and forth, and a front right of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the speaker duct 103 mounted near the right end of the rear view in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view. Covers the rear relay board 106 after the handle, the door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a relay board cover 108 after the handle and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached above the relay board 106 after the handle on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by a player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game to be driven into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed, and the game board attached to the main body frame 4 is closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, and a handle mounting member 102. It is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the rear view of the board 104, and the rear handle relay board mounted on the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached above the relay board 106 after the handle on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth, and includes a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The cylinder lock 130 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, and penetrates back and forth between the insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted and the insertion recess 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the upper plate ball passage port 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. It is provided with a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i that penetrate the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is rearward. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a cylinder. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) ridges 102c that project into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the cylinder portion 102a and are arranged at irregular intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 102a. And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d which connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in a plurality of directions in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 102a.

The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 101.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the tubular portion 102a is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same tilted state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. It can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1 through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211.

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which the quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the front view of the upper part of the quadrangles extending vertically, and the outer shape is formed in an inverted L shape. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is the handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the side of the door frame right side unit 410. The purpose is to relay the connection between the decorative board 413 of the decorative portion in the window, the decorative board 418 on the right side of the door frame, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered with the handle rear relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a portion extending up and down in an inverted L shape) are rear. It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and has a wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112 with the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and hooks 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 are hooked. The hooking member 116 and the hooking member 116 are provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends to the left and right in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a which is notched downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b which penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear pieces that are formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear pieces that face each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a rear piece on the left side mounted on the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a rear piece on the right side mounted on the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the portion of the insertion hole penetrating the front and rear on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. The hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched out metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled so as to be along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. , Is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a rectangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. In the state where the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the flange member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged and rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a square flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 under the door frame is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is located coaxially with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b in a state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 so as to be rotatable with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can be done.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locks. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular columnar cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 is inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to be rotated.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is in a state of substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a to which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b which opens to the lower side of the entrance 141a. A game ball that has entered from the entrance 141a of the box-shaped front cover 141 that is open and the front cover 141 that is open in the front and rear while closing the rear end of the front cover 141. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. A ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 are rear-covered 142 one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is equipped with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in the front view, and the ball feeding member 143 is ball feeding on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing rear unit 240 And the portion of the ball ejection taxiway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144, which is below the entrance 141a and between the entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball ejection port 141b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The actuating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance entrance 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis core side, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position and the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hit ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the advance entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end portion of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip swinging in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operating rod 146. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is rotatably attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is attracted to the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 is centered on the right end portion. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation rod 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding operating solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 206) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 rotatably supported by the shaft or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b under the normal state, and is on the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 242b to move downward of the operation transmission unit 242b. Along with this, the operating plate 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball pulling member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 on which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the plate is vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is the partition portion. It is possible to prevent it from bouncing off at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) recessed forward in the upper right corner of the ball feeding port 142a in the rear cover 142 when viewed from the rear. The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It is provided with a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of the side facing each other of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b. .. The upper piece portion 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent so that the right end of the front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 and attached to the fraudulent game ball B. The illegal game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launcher 540 when an illegal act such as operating the string to move the illegal game ball B in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed. A string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b by the momentum, and then a V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion of the shape, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and the front side open, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a of the dish unit 200. A full tank receiver that opens toward the rear on the lower right side of the front view of the ball passage 150a and the penetrating ball passage 150a and can communicate with the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. It has a mouth 150b and.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is launched by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 150c that receives the foul ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. The ball discharge port 150d communicates with the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200 while discharging the ball forward.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower ends are rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the person in charge of the game hall, or the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the full tank of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The actuating protrusion 613a of the 613 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 150f that can be contacted (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the actuating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the downstream end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is detachably mounted. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the region 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It is provided with a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 is a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer sides of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To mount the glass unit 160 on the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit mounting member 163 mounted on the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body portion 171 having a predetermined outer periphery and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, which will be described later, an out guide portion 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and by being operated by the player, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and the front end side of the handle 182. Covers the disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181 and the handle decorative board 184 mounted on the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having multiple LEDs mounted on the front side, and the front side of the handle decorative board 184. The handle cover 185, which is attached to the cover pedestal 183, is provided.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is viewed clockwise through the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urging in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and the tip side of the handle unit 180 protrudes outward from the left side of the front outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from a cylindrical base 181a extending back and forth, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and an outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, in a state where the three groove portions 181c are aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c are respectively formed in the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes in a state where it cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. It is provided with a locking protrusion 182f and the like.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and is the opposite side of the anti-city area. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 182b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 182b is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges outward so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. It is recessed in the shape of the first protrusion 182a and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first protrusion 182a.

In the third protrusion 182c, the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the third protrusion 182a has a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 182d is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed into a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 is rounded forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately causing the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 to emit light.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 is attached. The handle unit 180 attached via the slingshot unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without any discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The steering wheel touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 182 or the like, the static electricity acting from the player is detected and the static electricity acting on the steering wheel 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of the 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original method to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 determines. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, before operating the single-shot button 193. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d on the handle 182, and rotates the handle 182 most in the front-view clockwise direction. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d of the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is almost the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201, a plate base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and a production operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. The mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and protruding forward, the dish unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, and the ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the lower plate main body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the lower plate main body 251 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, a plate upper left decoration unit 270, and a plate upper left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below each of the plate upper right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. For an annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring.

Further, the staging operation unit 300 is attached to the staging operation ring decorative substrate 352 that emits and decorates the staging operation ring 330, the decorative substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the staging operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the staging operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the staging operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the staging operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has a ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Guidance passage portion 201a (FIG. 46). See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is submerged below the ball lending operation unit 220.

In the state where the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) to the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and is capable of discharging the game ball B. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed so as to be openable and closable by the lower plate ball extraction unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in which the shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and below the staging operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and at the same time, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the staging operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The main body 212, the mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and protruding forward, and the mounting base 213 mounted on the front side of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting base 213. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

Further, the plate base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper plate ball pulling-out unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 240, which is attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230, is provided.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (shallow with the rear open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. The speaker port 211b to which the punching metal is attached on the front side, the lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side with respect to the center of the left and right sides of the front view and extends to the rear in a tubular shape, and the lower plate. A notch 211d cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion extending in a tubular shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and is on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It penetrates back and forth under the plate body and penetrates back and forth at the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is inserted and in the lower right corner of the front view. Cylinder insertion through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted and the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 which penetrates back and forth near the right corner of the front view. It is equipped with a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the taxiway 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 222. After the dish ball is pulled out, the dish is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball pulling guide path 241c of the unit 240, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied to the ball feeding guide path 241b from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is removed.

[3-5c-2. Precision plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 is retracted backward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper part of the upper plate main body 212 is closed near the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part near the right end is closed is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, a staging operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper part, and a part of the staging operation unit 300 is mounted on the staging operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open upper part. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a that penetrates vertically near the left end and a through opening 213b that penetrates vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball removal unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, the through port 213b is inserted with a wiring cable for connecting the ball rental operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish lower left decorative board 283, and the dish lower right decorative board 288. , And to relay the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the mounting base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or is a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 (not shown). After inserting cash or prepaid card for (omitted), a predetermined number of game balls B can be lent out into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, or the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is displayed. The purpose is to return the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine after deducting the amount of the rented game ball B.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper plate ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the pull-out button 222 and has transparency, a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. It includes a return button 225 arranged on the right side of the front part of the base 223, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223.

The upper plate ball removal button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is returned after deducting the amount of the rented game ball B. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the upper plate 201 This is for discharging the game ball B stored in the lower plate 202 to the lower plate 202.

The upper plate ball removal unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball removal unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has a vertically extending tubular front base 231 and a front that is movably inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 in the vertical direction. The slider 232 and the like are provided. The front base 231 is attached near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The front slider 232 extends up and down, and the upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball removal button 222, and the lower end is the actuating receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball removal. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball has a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball pulling slider 242 mounted so as to be slidable to, a spring 243 for urging the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. It is equipped with.

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from the portion where the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, so that the ball receiving port 241a and the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass can be used. A game from a position below the ball feeding taxiway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and a ball feeding taxiway 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward. It is provided with a taxiway 241c for guiding the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201, the ball receiving port 241a is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance / exit 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion extending to the left and right of the ball removal taxiway 241c protrudes to the right of the rear view from the portion where the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side of the rear view is lower. It is open on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball removal taxiway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape in front view, and protrudes rearward from the actuating receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and the rear surface on the rear side of the actuating receiving portion 242a. The operation transmission unit 242b and the like are provided. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a is formed flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface thereof extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuating receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the actuating receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the above. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects to the rear of the rear base 241 and operates on the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. The door 143c is in contact with the door.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper plate ball removal button 222 is positioned upward at the moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a. Further, since the countersunk ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the working rod 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the working transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launcher 540 side via the entrance entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmitting portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that is open below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball ejection port 141b is guided into the lower plate ball supply port 211c from the notch portion 211d through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is passed through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the actuating receiving portion 242a. As the ball pulling button 222 rises, the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the working rod 143c in contact with the working transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. It will return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240. It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the staging operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively, separated from each other to the left and right. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate, and the lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit of the plate attached below the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in which the shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating up and down in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a supplies the lower plate ball. It is located in front of the mouth 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated to the left and right, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and the upper left decorative unit 270 and the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate, the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the lower right decorative unit of the plate are formed in front of each of them. 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so as to become wider in the vertical direction toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 has a front notch portion 252e cut upward from the lower front end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. It is provided with a bottom surface notch 252f, which is notched in a portion below the above. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion port 252 g through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252 g. It is formed between the cylinder insertion port 252h, which penetrates the decorative portion 252b back and forth and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and the pair of upper side bulging portions 252a which are centered in the left-right direction. It is provided with a staging operation unit mounting portion 252i to which the 300 is mounted. The staging operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to completely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. .. Further, in the state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are on the same surface.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removal base 261 having a through hole penetrating up and down in the right front corner in a plan view, and a lower plate ball removal unit. A slider 262 that is slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower plate ball removal button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that urges the slider 262 forward. It is provided with a lower plate ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically located at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole is formed through. The through hole of the lower plate ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is slidably attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left from the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that projects upward in a columnar shape.

The lower plate ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 so that the left end side can rotate around the axis extending vertically at a position to the left of the slider 262, and the right end side is the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the above, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower plate ball removing lid 265 is formed with a slit extending to the left and right into which the protrusion pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 is It is located on the same surface as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the lower plate ball removing unit 260, under normal conditions, the slider 262 is located at the moving end on the front side due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front surface notch portion 252e in the front surface of the lower front surface decorative portion 252b.

In the normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward and moved backward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower plate ball removal button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves backward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 pushes the lower plate ball removal lid 265 backward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 moves backward with the left end side as the center. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 located directly above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved backward by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in the open state, and the game balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously played. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball extraction button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. To. Then, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state of matching the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removal lid 265. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the staging operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish upper left decorative unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical, left-right extending dish upper left decorative body 271 and a dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271. It is equipped with a dish upper left decorative board 273 which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and the central axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate is formed to be milky white.

The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted from the rear inside the dish upper left decorative body 271, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper left decorative body 271 can be luminescently decorated.

In the state where the plate upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the staging operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the plate upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the plate upper left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper left decorative body 271 is emitted. It can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decorative unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical, left-right extending dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish upper right decorative body 276 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277. It is equipped with a dish upper right decorative board 278, which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semi-circular bulging forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper right decorative body 276 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted from the rear inside the dish upper right decorative body 276, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative substrate 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decorative body 276 can be light-emitting and decorated.

In the state where the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the staging operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the plate upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the plate upper right decorative unit 276, when a plurality of LEDs of the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper right decorative body 276 is emitted. It can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

A part of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, in a state of being assembled on the door frame 3, protrudes upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250. It is possible to form a step in which the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate and the decorative unit 275 on the upper right of the plate are raised between the upper side bulging portion 252a. As a result, the player can hook his finger by using the step between the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when operating the effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. Further, the step between the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the plate upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Lower left decorative unit of the plate and lower right decorative unit of the plate]
The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, respectively. Be done. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 cooperate with the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the staging operation unit 300. ..

The lower left dish decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right to have translucency, a lower left dish decorative body 281, and a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decorative body 281. It is equipped with a lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish, which is attached to the rear side of the lower left reflector 282 of the dish and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower left decorative body 281 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view, and is on the left side. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the above. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a semi-cylinder is bent. The left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semi-arc of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left dish decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the lower left dish decorative substrate 283. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 281 on the lower left of the plate can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The left end of the dish lower left decorative unit 280 is located below the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the staging operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. Since the left end of the lower left decorative unit 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower left decorative unit 280 seems to have the left end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left decorative unit 280 of the dish does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the dish is emitted. It can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right and has transparency, and the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate and the lower right of the plate attached to the rear side of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate. It includes a reflector 287 and a decorative substrate 288 on the lower right side of the plate, which is attached to the rear side of the reflector 287 on the lower right side of the plate and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower right decorative body 286 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the shape is such that the semi-cylinder is bent. The right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semi-arc of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the dish is formed in a milky white color.

The lower right reflector 287 of the dish is inserted from the rear inside the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the dish. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 286 on the lower right of the plate can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the left end is the lower right decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the staging operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the right end of the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right decorative unit 285 seems to have the right end submerged in the door frame 3. Since the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower right decorative unit 286, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are made to emit light, the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate is emitted. The entire front surface of the plate can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the staging operation unit]
The overall configuration of the staging operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the staging operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the staging operation button. 52 (a) is a perspective view of the staging operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 (b) is a perspective view of the staging operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The staging operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The staging operation unit 300 includes a staging operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that allows the player to perform a rotation operation, and a pressing operation unit 303 that allows the player to perform a pressing operation. In the staging operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b arranged between the inner circumference and the inner circumference.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. It includes a transmission gear 350 for an operation ring that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably attaches the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring to the operation unit base 320.

Further, the staging operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the staging operation ring 330, and the staging operation ring decorative board 352 and the staging operation ring decorative board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the inside of the ring of the staging operation ring 330. It includes an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The staging operation unit cover unit 310 of the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200. The staging operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in the shape of a container with the upper and rear sides open.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and the front of the unit. A reflector 313 on the center of the dish mounted from the rear inside the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the reflector 313 on the center of the dish and capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light toward the front. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of illuminating the plate are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the rear side in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the staging operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to the 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis perpendicular to the virtual plane formed on the upper end edge extending in the shape of a semicircle at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the unit lower cover 311 is assembled to the dish unit 200, a plurality of drain holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape in which the plan view shape is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and is formed on the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. It is installed. The unit front cover 312 has a semi-circular arc extending forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semi-arc shape, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the lower plate center upper decorative body 312a forward. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative body 312b in which a bulging semicircle extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by dividing a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extending the split surface toward the center in a semicircular shape. It is formed in such a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It is formed in the shape of a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled in the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state of being assembled in the plate unit 200, the left and right ends of the plate center upper decoration unit 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively, and the plate center lower decoration body. The left and right ends of the 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. The reflector 313 on the center of the plate blocks the light from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate from leaking to the rear (inside). The decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is formed in a semicircular shape along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate can be luminescently decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking to the rear (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b can be luminescently decorated by emitting light.

Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a rib for reinforcement in the middle of extending in a semi-arc shape in the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, the dish When the LED of the decorative substrate 314 on the upper center and the LED of the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate are made to emit light, the whole of each can be luminescent and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The front end of the staging operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decorative body 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decorative body 271 and the plate upper right decorative body 276, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is the plate lower left decorative body 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286. As a result, the staging operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit attachment of the upper plate body 212 on the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body portion 321 whose outer shape is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and whose upper portion is open, and a main body portion 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 and has a circular outer circumference. The flange portion 322, the plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321 and the upper mounting formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. It is provided with a portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that rotatably supports the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring, which is open upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321.

The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body portion 321 has a vibration speaker 354 attached to the bottom wall from below, and a portion on the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into a sound such as voice or music and output. can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 in the staging operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 has a diameter whose outer circumference substantially coincides with the inner circumference of the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The staging operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring mounting base 331 of the staging operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the staging operation unit cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for the operation ring around the axis extending to the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is a flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the staging operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state of being assembled to the staging operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The staging operation ring 330 of the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the staging operation ring of the staging operation unit as viewed from the top front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the staging operation ring as viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation ring disassembled and viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and has a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the staging operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the staging operation ring 330 is set to about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and are rotatably mounted around the axis extending vertically on the ring mounting base 331, and the rotation base 332 that is mounted on the ring mounting base 331 and moves upward. It is equipped with a regulated ring retaining member 334.

Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 and the ring outer upper cover 335 which form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. The ring outer lower cover 336, which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and the ring outer upper cover 335, which are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. It is equipped with a ring inner cover 337 and a cover. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. The boss portion 331b, which protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (here, four) parts and for rotatably mounting the bush 333, and the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface are spaced outward from each other in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a through-hole 331c that penetrates up and down in a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

The rotation base 332 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331 and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed on the bevel gear so as to project downward toward the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the staging operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the staging operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which the arcs constituting the outer and upper parts of the circle extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a decorative portion 335b that is provided, and an outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center side and is arranged in a plurality of circumferential directions. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in the range of 1/4 of the circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The ring outer lower cover 336 has a plurality of outer lower surface portions 336a in which the arcs constituting the outer and lower parts of the circle extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer lower surface portions 336a projecting upward and toward the center from the inside and in the circumferential direction. It is provided with an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b, which is arranged. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the outer lower cover 336 of the ring is formed in a shape in which an arc in the range of 1/8 of the circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover mounting portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 is a cylinder having an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc constituting the inner and upper parts of a circle extends in an annular shape and a cylinder extending downward in parallel with the central axis from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a. It is provided with a cylindrical surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the tubular surface portion 337b and arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in the range of 1/8 of the circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner diameter of the cylinder surface portion 337b is the same as the inner diameter of the rotary base 332. The inner cover mounting portion 337c is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the staging operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion in a range of 1/2 or more of the circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The staging operation ring 330 can be light-emitting decorated by the staging operation ring decorative substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the staging operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57 (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for driving the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to rotate and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects to the left. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a speed change gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the speed change gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. A gear cover that rotatably attaches the 345, the speed change gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, the speed change gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. It is equipped with 346.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348, which are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed with a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a gear portion 345a projecting to the left from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. A plurality of detection pieces 345b, which are arranged in a row at regular intervals, are provided. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length as the interval in which the length in the circumferential direction is separated in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple with respect to the spacing between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them first detects the detection piece 345b. It has become like. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. To mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located in the staging operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled in the staging operation unit 300.

The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the transmission gear for the operation ring by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 can reciprocate and vibrate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive gear 343 by the operation ring drive motor 342 within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, it is possible to assist the player in the rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling according to the content of the player participation type staging, or to give a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a in the shape of a bevel gear that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the transmission detection of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles having the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the staging operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then the gear mounting member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320. Be done.

In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotation drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and at the same time, the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Direction operation ring decorative board]
The staging operation ring decorative substrate 352 in the staging operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The staging operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached below the staging operation ring 330, and the staging operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be light-lit and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The staging operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer circumference on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The staging operation ring decorative substrate 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the staging operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the staging operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a transparent decorative substrate cover 353 on the upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form like the staging operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. It is composed of a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, thereby passing through the decorative substrate cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331, and above the ring constituting the rotation operation unit 302. The cover 335, the outer and lower cover 336 of the ring, and the inner cover 337 of the ring can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration as if an LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output a sound (sound) such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire staging operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. This vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a more diverse effect to the player.

[3-5e-8. Direction operation button unit]
The staging operation button unit 360 in the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation button unit of the staging operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and FIG. 62 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the staging operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer circumference and is arranged on the target with the button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A disk-shaped guide shaft 362 that extends upward in a columnar shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is movably attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 by a pair of guide shafts 362 in the vertical direction, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. It is provided with a disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted to urge the elevating base 364 upward.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and having an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 rotated by the driven gear 369. The 370, the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected, and the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached. It includes a 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362. The center button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 that are arranged between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urge the center button body 373 upward, and the center button body 373 are substantially the same. The central button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed cylinder shape with the upper end side closed by diameter and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. It is equipped with a central button decorative substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the staging operation button unit 360, the center button main body 373 and the center button cover 375 constitute a center pressing operation unit 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the central button body 373, and has an annular outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative board 377 and the outer circumference of the central button main body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer circumference of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side and has a three-dimensional decoration and has translucency, and is moved up and down so as to cover the outer circumference and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. It is attached to the base 364 and has a transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 in which the central button cover 375 faces upward in the center. The effect operation button unit 360 includes an outer peripheral substrate cover 378, an outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an outer peripheral button cover 380, and constitutes an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

Further, the staging operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the press detection sensor 381 to detect the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. It is equipped with an elevating detection sensor 382 that detects the elevating of the elevating base 364 by detecting the rotation position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 321 in the operation unit base 320. A pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevating detection sensor 382 are attached to the lower surface. Is attached. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the center shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, the lower end of which is in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and the upper end of which is in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed so that the outer diameter is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b in which the elevating cam member 371 is vertically penetrated in a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other near the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 has a space in which the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c abuts on the upper base 363 to restrict upward movement and the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 can move between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which protrudes downward from the top in a cylindrical shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and a first cam 371b. The second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis, and the third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end opposite to the second cam 371d of the first cam 371b. (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view. It is formed like this. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

The center button body 373 has a pair of guide shafts that penetrate the cylindrical cylinder portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b that closes the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and a downward direction from the bottom 373b. It includes a pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrudes rearward from the bottom 373b in a cylindrical shape and is inserted through the button spring 374.

The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed so that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends downward shortly, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 to restrict the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 abuts on the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373.

The central button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower end penetrates the elevating base 364 and extends downward, and a screw having a washer inserted is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f abuts on the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the center button body 373.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is the elevating base when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button main body 373 abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The center button body 373 is formed opaquely. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker urging force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button main body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

In the central button decorative substrate 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can make the center button cover 375 emit light by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 can illuminate and decorate the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 has an annular board portion 378a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364, and the outer peripheral board portion 378 that extends upward from the inner circumference of the board portion 378a in a cylindrical shape. It is provided with a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparently.

In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction toward the upward direction are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in a state where the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365. It is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the descending position moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button main body 373 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the staging operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the staging operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 is moved downward. The pressing detection piece 373e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is detected. In the state where the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height substantially coincided with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

Further, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward in this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

When the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 in this descending position, the elevating cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the elevating drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the third. One cam 371b rolls to the left portion of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d and the guide pin 364d. At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises and is in the ascending position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62B, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. Further, in the ascending position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) in the descending position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in the state of being assembled to the staging operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of protruding more than the upper surface of the staging operation ring 330 (FIG. 65 (b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the center button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364. In the state where the center button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. The press detection piece 373e is not detected by the press detection sensor 381 because it is separated from the press detection piece 373e.

When the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374. After the center button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

In this way, when the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361 while the center button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364e. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation unit 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward by a force higher than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 via the outer peripheral button cover 380 raises and lowers the spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) protrudes upward due to the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button main body The press detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the press detection piece 373e is not detected by the press detection sensor 381.

To return the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 364d), so that the third cam The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original descending position is restored.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 installed in the substrate box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled to the staging operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decorative board 314, a dish center lower decorative board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decorative board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevating drive motor 367, center button decorative board 376, outer peripheral button decorative board 377, press detection sensor 381, and elevating detection sensor 382, relaying the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210. There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of staging operation unit]
Next, the operation of the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the staging operation ring and the staging operation ring decorative substrate in a plan view of the staging operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 65C is a central pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

The staging operation unit 300 is provided with a staging operation unit 301 on the upper surface thereof, which can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit arranged between the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the staging operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral board cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operating unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the staging operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the staging operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is passed through the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The rotation operation unit 302 of the above rotates in the clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeatedly rotating forward and reverse within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is not only rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342, but can also be rotated by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring and rotates. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 separated in the circumferential direction is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. As a result, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured so as not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) in the order of detecting the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotationally driven in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. .. Alternatively, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 to make the rotation operation heavier or give a click feeling.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a way that is easy for the player to do, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated while the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the descending position or the ascending position. Since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the staging operation unit 300 includes a staging operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the staging operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting and decorated by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. Further, in the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating rotation operation unit 302 can be light-emitting and decorated. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state of the staging operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65A, the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface thereof more than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a descending position that protrudes slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a (center button cover 375) descends to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressing is detected. Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowering position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing is detected. No pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation unit 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project significantly upward from the upper surface of the staging operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, first, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect the press. Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a remains projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). .. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect the press.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the descending position or the ascending position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the center pressing operation unit 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the staging operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , Player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation unit 303 may be used as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be an obstacle to perform the rotation operation. The operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the front surface of the door frame left side base 401. The door frame left side decorative board 402 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and the left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. A door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 is provided.

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative board 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a formed in the front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semi-arc bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of the door.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and makes it appear that a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and the side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. And, a plurality of light emitting side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a are provided. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 is a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration members 410b mounted on the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the portion corresponding to the window decoration portion 410b, and the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window decoration members 412. It is provided with an internal reflector 414 inserted into each of the side window interior decoration portions 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side reflector 415, which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and extends vertically, and the door frame right side base 411, and is attached to the door frame. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and also has a through opening 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat plate in the vertical and front-back directions so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. It is provided with a door frame right side inner panel 417 which extends in a shape and penetrates in the left-right direction to form a through opening 417a forming a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. It is provided with a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The side window interior decorative member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) side window interior decoration members 410b arranged in a vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than that of the rear end side on the front end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The decorative member 412 in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a position lower to the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The decorative member 412 in the side window is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

The decorative substrate 413 for the decorative portion in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame, which is behind the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrate 413 of the decorative portion in the side window are considered to be full-color LEDs. In the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape up, down, left and right around the axis of the side window interior decorative portion 410b at a portion behind each of the plurality of side window interior decorative portions 410b. Has been done.

The internal reflector 414 has an X-shaped front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wavy shape that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a through which the LED of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 faces forward are formed.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends vertically and back and forth, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. In the door frame right side outer panel 416, the through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The outer panel 416 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is flat and extends vertically and back and forth, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The decorative body 419 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semi-arc bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 is formed so as to be continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy shape so that the portion 1/4 from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a tsuitate shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Therefore, the decorative portion 410b in the side window can be decorated by light emission. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b in the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b is turned off, so that the side window The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (the end of the island equipment) of the pachinko machine 1 through between the three side window decoration portions 410b in the 410a. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without having to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make the entire game area 5a difficult for the player to see, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if it is being seen by another player, so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Further, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are columnar, light is radiated in a band-like and radial manner. It is possible to make it difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as those next to each other to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, and the attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because he / she cannot concentrate on the game, or feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, and by devoting the player to the game, he / she can enjoy the game more. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a top bottom cover removed. It is the bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in this state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the left and right sides and the front upper portion of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. The door frame top bottom plate 454, which is connected to the lower end of the door frame, is attached.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door. A door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 has a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and the door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is provided with a top right reflector 460, which is arranged in and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. To cover the pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. The top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, the lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and the door frame top. The door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and the door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending left and right with the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. It is provided with a front protruding portion 451b that protrudes forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the lower side thereof is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is located upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move backward as the front ends move downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side of the front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed so that the front view shape is substantially the same as that of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed so as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect between the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 projects most forward in the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface, which is largely cut out from the rear end toward the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which a semi-arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature toward the center in the left-right direction from both left and right ends, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top cover 452. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, which are separated in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape, and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the outer left and right sides of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top center decorative board 455, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative board 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top center speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b in the door frame top base 451. The top-side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. The purpose is to relay the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, forming an integrated decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

Plate upper left decorative body 271, plate upper right decorative body 276, plate center upper decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since the 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the dish upper right decorative body 276, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is arranged coaxially in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) large-diameter upper dish center upper decorative body 312a and dish center lower decorative body 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and above the center of the dish. Door frame left side decorative body 404 of door frame left side unit 400 and door frame right side decorative body of door frame right side unit 410 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of decorative body 312a and dish center lower decorative body 312b. The 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation unit 302, the two dish center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer periphery thereof. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

Further, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, and the dish lower left decorative body 281, the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged below the dish central upper decorative body 312a are half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the staging operation unit 300 becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 arranged on the upper side can be operated by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the player's head (face) seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation operation unit 302 rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since it is easy to understand the whole picture of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player immediately rotates when the player participation type effect is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding forward from the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and at the same time, pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is operably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame, which is attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached, and the main body frame. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It is equipped with a three-dimensional 520.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 and the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for driving a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is openable and closable and is attached to the main body frame base 501, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. It also includes a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 is a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 has a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It is equipped with a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIGS. 84A to 84C are explanatory views showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is inserted from the front to the rear into the frame of the outer frame 2, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the shape of the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. It is provided with a connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth and for holding the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a whose front view shape is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the range of the height of the game board and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It includes a mounting portion 501c and a gaming board regulating section 501d that projects upward from the center in the left-right direction of the gaming board mounting section 501c and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501 g for the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501 g. It is provided with a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that is rotatably attached and is formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being fastened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and covers the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pressed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is exerted due to the folding habit. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is closer to the door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle between the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 122 above the frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 is attached. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The hinge member 510 on the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to rotatably attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 is attached. The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and the lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c for the outer frame of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame is formed coaxially with the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 for the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion to regulate the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove portion 530a is inserted into the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in a plan view, and an illegal tool is used from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. It is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat plate-shaped launch base 541 attached to the launcher mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 in front view and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the launch base 541, the hitting mallet 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the hitting mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the rear. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right with a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the front side of the lower side of the left side plate 551b to the right. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided at the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 that is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and is open upward in a box shape that extends to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is located at the upper end of the tank rail 553, separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the left-right direction and leftward in the front view. The second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is low. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 555, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal board 558 attached to the left side of the front view of the ball tank 552 on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 is provided with a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 has a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball ejection passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow, and closes a box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572, the movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is equipped with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of a ball (see FIG. 92).

In the ball guidance unit 570, the shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 in front view is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends back and forth at the right outer portion of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a part of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence / absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence / absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 90 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the movable ball-extracting piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate in the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can be distributed, and a payout device main body 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the payout motor 584, which is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581 and whose rotary shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, is meshed with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and has a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the width of the left and right and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is formed between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball ejection passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view, and is seen in the back view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The guide wall 581a on the main body side and the guide wall 582a on the rear lid side branch from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball ejection passage 580b. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 rotates between the guide wall 581a on the main body side and the guide wall 582a on the rear lid side.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from above toward the rotation axis in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the space between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage becomes narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a with an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are formed. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball pulling passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction of the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. See 90).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball ejection passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball ejection passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball-extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball-extracting movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-extracting passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball-extracting movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball-extracting movable piece 592 can move to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b due to the contact force, the ball-extracting movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the pull-out passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pull-out movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

For this reason, since the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly, so that the pachinko machine can be used. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the game ball B comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving to the outside through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the space between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, and the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball pulling passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects to the right from the right side of the front view, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and downwards from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank payout passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view from the center of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e, which is open downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 92).

In the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side of the front view on the lower surface. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is open just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e is open just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B discharged (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is released downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is low, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. The 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a closing spring 614, which is in force.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left when viewed from the front on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball ejection passage 610c extends forward along the front right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction in the front view by the closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a front view shape in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank ball path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, in a normal state (a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f. Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball ejection passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected by the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent to the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 555. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. Will be.

Then, the game ball B in the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a moves. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 is normally arranged through the upper ball storage passage 600b and directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the game ball B is further discharged while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B, the upper normal payout passage 600c is in the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the full tank ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharging port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further discharged. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B (the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full. The player is informed that the tank is full), and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 becomes a non-detection state.

When discharging the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, move the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 upward from the position of the lower end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction of the rear view, and the ball-extracting movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball ejection passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball-pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B abuts more strongly on the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a than the ball-pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball-pulling movable piece 592 Is less likely to be damaged.

Then, the gaming ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 has a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 621 faces forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and is composed of a plurality of vertically extending slits, and is a circular speaker mounting portion 621a and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connection portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 in which the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 contain the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621 in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The space of the above and the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c are extended. Since it is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of the 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, a large sound with deep bass can be output.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 Allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

Further, the speaker unit 620a is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess for space 621b in the speaker cover 621, and the speaker box 623. A through-cylinder 623a that communicates with the through-hole 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates back and forth is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit mounted on the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guide portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guidance portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It is provided with a 628 and a ball discharge port 629 for downwardly discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball ejection guidance unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B ejected from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and the ejecting ball receiving portion 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 has a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d has a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. 97) and. The payout control board 633 provides a payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and a payout command from the main control board 1310 or the like of the game board 5. It is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect an unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and the deterrence against the unauthorized activity is enhanced.

The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 mounted on the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 mounted on the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (main body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends up and down the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 around the axis extending up and down, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the above and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate back and forth and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 that project rearward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the outer frame 2, and door frame that protrudes forward from the lower part of the front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the lock unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is equipped with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled on the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It stands out. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame and the hook 653 for the outer frame are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the lock is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. 99 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on a ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game ball overflowing from the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is removable and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped base that is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, the ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and the ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. The tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the 555, the ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at the position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 555. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side. It is equipped with.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a which is formed in a quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the left side is lowered in a front view, and the bottom wall 552a from the front side and the rear side, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with the upper side open. Has been done. The ball tank 552 stores the game ball B supplied from the island equipment such as the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. This overflow portion 552f has a length of about 3/4 of the lateral length of the front wall 552b from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side). It is formed over the length.

The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can be distributed in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so as to be lower toward the left side of the front view. Further, in the plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends to the left from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side. It is formed in a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes toward it, and extends parallel to the axis line extending in the left-right direction to the left end. .. In the tank rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail extends to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the game balls B are mainly arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that narrows in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side and changes to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. With this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b so that the width directions become one line toward the downstream side and the downward side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has the center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 is slightly at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the generation of ball shavings in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B is difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball shaving) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the reaction force flows inside. By dispersing the pushed directions of the plurality of game balls B to be pushed, it is possible to make it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape, and it is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging (ball shavings) to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball gummy) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be achieved. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553, so that the game board 5 can be visually recognized. When a movable defect occurs in the movable staging unit or the like, the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to play the action effect of.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in the front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B, which extends to the left (left) and overflows forward from the ball tank 552, to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the rear end side is at the same height as the detour portion 552f and the front end side is higher. It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m and the overflow surface portion 501 m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B that overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m because it is tilted so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 is lowered in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a detour passage 552 g for guiding the vehicle.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides of the detour passage 552 g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball and the bottom surface. It is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501 m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552 g between the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open and the discharge portion 551j. It covers the upper side of an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558), and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. It is equipped with a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501 m has a flat plate shape from a position lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B by a distance of 2 to 4 times from the upper side on the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with the shape of the front view extending vertically. It has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in the front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The height of the overflow surface portion 501 m from the front end to the rear end is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. In the overflow surface portion 501m, a gap having a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. The upper ends of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o are higher than those of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o on both lateral sides in the left-right direction, and extend in a strip shape in the front-rear direction, and are outside the game ball B in the left-right direction. It has a plurality of ribs 501p, which are arranged in rows at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left-stage portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view. The right-stage portion 501o is formed to have a length in the left-right direction longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between the ball and the ball B is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501 m. The left end of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end of the detour passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right end wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is inclined so as to be low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. As for the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g, the left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so that it moves forward toward the right end. The passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined in the left-right direction horizontally.

The detour passage 552g is assembled on the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction is along the front end side of the portion extending diagonally in the left-right direction. It is extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552 g changes from the slanted rear end so that its distribution direction is perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g is discharged at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552 g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

Since the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. By releasing it to a wide area of the tank rail 553, it is possible to suppress the generation of ball shavings in the tank rail 553.

Further, the portion for guiding the game ball B by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion of the rear wall 552c in the front view in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that has submerged under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) is distributed from inside the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the detour passage 552 g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (of the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) will not be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked on the upper side. The game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c in the front-rear direction. Further, the guide surface portion 552j has the right end side in the front view from the position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b, and the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends diagonally backward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the anteroposterior direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c. From there, it is formed in a shape extending parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the ball tank 552, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape in a plan view, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The area surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat plate-shaped flange extending in the lateral direction and the vertical direction on the same surface as the front wall 552b, respectively, on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a portion 552 liters. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange portions 552l is the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). It is formed higher than the left step portion 501n and the upper surface of the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 555 are assembled from each other, the upstream end (right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located rearward (protruding) from the ball tank 552. )are doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j is in the ball tank 552 so as to be stepped rearward from a height lower than the detour passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. After extending backward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends backwards.

The external terminal board 558 is attached with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by operating the lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the portion closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 on the upper side of the tank rail 555 in the state of being assembled on the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l in the ball tank 552.

Next, the action and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are such that the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. 103. The left corner portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lowered, and the right stage portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end side thereof is lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

Then, when the amount of the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to being supplied from the island equipment, first of all, it exceeds the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest height among the upper edge of the outer circumference. It can be discharged to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, and the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501 m, and is also discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501 m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by tilting the overflow surface portion 501 m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other (increase in the ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball shaving) due to the engagement between the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Further, since the detour passage 552 g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501 m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m can be prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other in the tank rail 553.

Further, since the height of the remaining upper end edges other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the game ball B, which overflows from the ball tank 552 beyond the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m and is distributed from the overflow surface portion 501m to the detour passage 552g, is on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h in which the game ball B in the detour passage 552g rolls). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552 g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552 g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552 g is rearward from the overflow surface portion 501 m on the front end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be in a fixed direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and biting each other due to the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B in the tank rail 553, and the game balls B are clogged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a in a row in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. Further, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in a portion where the upper side is open, the game released from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g. The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Since they are changed to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned so as to be in a line with respect to the width direction as the plurality of game balls B are directed toward the downstream side in the bulging portion 553b. Further, since the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side). By distributing a plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction to the downstream side through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced in a row. Can be aligned with. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulge portion 553 b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal board 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the detour passage 552 g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the electric wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be far from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , There is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed to the rear and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (right direction in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m, and rides on the left stage portion 501n and the right stage portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m. However, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g by their inclination, and the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4, which causes a problem. Can be prevented.

Further, since the game ball B is configured to pass under the guide surface portion 552j when the game ball B is distributed from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 552 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , The game ball B guided by the detour passage 552 g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B can be dropped. The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the gaming board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 to 115. FIG. 107 is a front view of a gaming board in which the front components, the gaming panel, the front unit, and the like are opaque in the pachinko machine. FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 from the front right, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 from the front left, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board from the back. .. FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board in a state where the front components, the game panel, the front unit, and the like are transparent. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 114 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 107. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area in which the game ball is distributed and the obstacle nail.

In the following, when the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is square when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate, the LED irradiates light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate. When the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is rectangular, it indicates that the LED irradiates light in a direction parallel to the surface of the decorative substrate (side view LED). The detailed explanation is omitted.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is driven by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, and a gate portion that grant a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first major winning opening 2005, and a second major winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first major winning opening 2005, and a second major winning opening in the game area 5a. The purpose is to perform a game in which the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed so as to be accepted or passed in 2006 or the like.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square shape in front view, and divides the rear end of the game area 5a. It is equipped with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 115 and the like) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. Further, the game board 5 is a game played by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 114 and 206, etc.) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. Further, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the staging display device 1600.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparently formed. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

The game panel 1100 holds a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front constituent member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 116 and the like), which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. It includes a production drive board 1720 for driving a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like, and a drive board box 1730 for accommodating a panel relay board 1710 and a production drive board 1720. The drive board box 1730 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 on the left side in the rear view, and is detachably attached to the rear surface in the staging display device 1600 on the right side in the rear view.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the gaming ball B driven into the gaming area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are in the gaming area. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. The first big winning opening 2005 and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening that can accept the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B. It is provided with a first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B in 2004 or a second big winning opening 2006 capable of accepting the game ball B according to the second special lottery result.

Further, the table unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a and has an out port 2010 for discharging the game ball B from the game area 5a, and is provided in the middle of the game area 5a in the vertical direction and is provided in the game ball B. The game area 5a is provided with a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012.

Further, the table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the front view of the side unit 2200. It is provided on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has a second start port 2004, a first prize winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011. The first attacker unit 2400, the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and the center role. The second attacker unit 2600, which is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the object 2500 and has the second large winning opening 2006, and the second attacker unit 2600, which is provided above the second attacker unit 2600, are one. A side right middle unit 2700 having a general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012, and a gate member 2800 provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and having a gate portion 2003 are provided. There is.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-shaped opening at the front and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and the back surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010, the flat plate-shaped back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, respectively. The back guide unit 3050 is provided, the back rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end in the back box 3010, and the back guide unit 3050 at the lower part of the back box 3010 are separated from each other to the left and right. The back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250, and the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided behind the back top effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back back effect unit 3100 in the upper part of the back box 3010 and the back front left decoration body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back-back-left staging unit 3500, the back-back-right staging unit 3600 provided behind the back-front-right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010, and the back-front-left decorative body 3030 and the back-back-left in the back box 3010. The back front left effect unit 3700 provided between the effect unit 3500, and the back front right effect unit provided between the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010. It is equipped with 3800.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the rear.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparently formed. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending to the upper right diagonally. A game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear (out port 2010).

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the front view of the out guide portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closing position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the outer rail 1001. Backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 2010 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The out port 2010 penetrates the two game balls B with a width sufficiently aligned in the left-right direction. The game ball B guided backward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out ball detection member 3080 of the out port 2010 and the back unit 3000 described later.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projection piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner in the front view, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparently, and the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. Since the front component 1000 is transparently formed together with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, it is possible to reduce that the boundary of the game area 5a is clearly visible when assembled on the game board 5. It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the player, and to make the game area 5a look larger (wider) to the player, although the size of the actual game area 5a does not change.

Further, since the front component 1000 is transparent together with the game panel 1100, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (on the player side). By doing so, it can be made to appear to emit light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 116 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 115 and the like).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is separated from each other in the left-right direction at the upper edge and the lower edge by a plurality of positioning holes formed in a round hole penetrating the front and rear and a short elongated hole. It is provided with a plurality of engaging step portions, which are formed to have a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step portion is for being detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engaging claw (not shown) or the engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. be.

As shown in FIG. 116, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 offset to the upper right of the center in the front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the game ball B in the front view is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The width is wide so that the balls B can be lined up, and the upper side has a narrow width where a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially square outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step portion is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. It is provided with a through port 1121 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a cutout portion 1122 that is cut out upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch and lowers. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper portion of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 2010. A tubular portion 3081 of the out ball detection member 3080 in the back guidance unit 3050 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, is inserted into the out recess 1123.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step portion and a plurality of protruding pins each projecting forward from the holding step portion and being inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110. Three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging step portion of the inclined portion on the upper side and the lower left of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 protruding upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion. It comprises two engaging steps on the lower side and a pair of engaging pieces that engage with each other. The panel holder 1120 tilts the upper side and the lower left by moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 backward after engaging the engaging step portion of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion to be engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since the game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce that the boundary of the game area 5a is clearly visible when assembled on the game board 5. It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the player, and to make the game area 5a look larger (wider) to the player, although the size of the actual game area 5a does not change.

Further, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component 1000, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (on the player side). By doing so, it can be made to appear to emit light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the back unit 3000 is out. It is located directly below the ball detection member 3080. The board holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the discharge unit 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving unit 628 below. Can be done.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 206) that controls the game content, the payout of the game ball B, and the like, and the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first start port sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second start port sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3051, a first major winning opening sensor 2402, and a second major winning opening. It is connected to a sensor 2601, an out port sensor 3053, a first sub out port sensor 2403, a second sub out port sensor 3054, a magnetic sensor 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 is not shown in detail. The shin displays a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and a normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate unit 2003. It includes a normal symbol display consisting of one LED and a normal holding display consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball B at the gate unit 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 has a first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening / closing pattern of the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "hit" or the like. It is equipped with a round display, which consists of five LEDs to display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, the design, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LED provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110, 113, 114 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 206) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is covered with a protective cover body 1601 molded of a non-conductive transparent resin except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. On the back surface side of the protective cover body 1601, a plurality of L-shaped wiring processing pieces 1601a for locking various wirings along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601 are formed, and a long ventilation length in the vertical direction is formed. A plurality of holes are formed in a state where the holes are aligned vertically and horizontally.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED, and has substantially the same width as the width of the rear wall in the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601b protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixing piece 1601c protruding downward from the lower end surface. The effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the upper inner peripheral surface in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601b diagonally from the rear of 3010, the lower fixing piece 1601c side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1601c is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates through and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which can accept the game ball B according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. The first big winning opening 2005, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B, is different from the first big winning opening 2005. It is possible to accept the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, which is provided at the position and is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is equipped with the second major winning opening 2006.

Three (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is in the vertical direction in the right part in the game area 5a. It is located above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 2010 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the vertical direction near the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end in the lower right corner of the game area 5a. The first prize-winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The second major winning opening 2006 is located above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

The first sub-out port 2011 is arranged below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2012 is arranged on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

Further, the table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the front view of the side unit 2200. It is provided on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has a second start port 2004, a first prize winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011. It is provided with a first attacker unit 2400, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a. ing.

Further, the front unit 2000 is a second attacker unit 2600 and a second attacker unit 2600, which are provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and have a second major winning opening 2006. It has a side right middle unit 2700 which is provided above the side right middle unit 2001 and has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub out opening 2012, and a gate portion 2003 which is provided above the side right middle unit 2700. The gate member 2800 and the gate member 2800 are provided.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. FIG. 118 (a) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 (b) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the rear, (c). ) Is a left side view of the starting port unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening and the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing the portions of the start port unit and the side unit in the game board. The start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 2010, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be accepted.

The starting port unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2103 extending outward from the middle in the front-rear direction, and is entirely formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 is formed so that the shape of the front view is a combination of a rectangular portion long to the left and right and a semi-circular portion having the lower side of the rectangular portion as a chord. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the peripheral edge excluding the upper side of the front wall portion 2101, and is formed in the shape of a gutter with an open upper portion. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side is low, and the game ball B can be guided backward.

The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the flange portion 2103 extending in the left-right direction from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The start port unit 2100, in a state of being attached to the panel plate 1110, has a first start port 2002 capable of receiving the game ball B by the front wall portion 2101 and the peripheral wall portion 2102 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110. Is forming.

By attaching the start port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first start port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, so that the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is in a state of being opened upward. Located just below the center of. Therefore, when the game ball B is discharged downward from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

The start port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the inclination of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102 in a state of being attached to the game panel 1100, and the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the above. The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 is detected by the first start port sensor 3052 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

Although not shown, a decorative sticker is attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2101 so as to be more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. As a result, the player's attention can be directed to the first starting port 2002 rather than the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be urged to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002. At the same time, by letting the first starting port 2002 accept the game ball B, a special lottery result (first special lottery result) is drawn in which an advantageous game state occurs in which the player such as a "big hit" game is advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation for the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

In this starting port unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B to the rear is inclined at a gentler angle (an angle close to horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B to the rear is relatively slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002, the accepted game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted by the first starting port 2002, and at the same time, the general winning opening 2001 gives the joy (superiority complex) that the game ball B has been accepted by the first starting port 2002. It can be tasted for a longer time than when it was accepted.

Further, in the state where the start port unit 2100 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located behind and is provided in the back bottom middle effect unit 3300. The light from the LEDs of the lower back middle decorative substrate unit 3320, such as the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329, is used for light emission decoration.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the starting port unit 2100 may be provided with a rib straddling the front wall portion 2101 and the bottom portion of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the first starting port 2002. The ribs are formed in a triangular shape (which may be partially rounded) in a side view, and the upper surface is inclined from the right side of the side unit 2200 to the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning openings 2001. The distance to the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 is longer than the distance from the upper end to the inclined part in the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 while inclining at substantially the same angle as the portion. (The position of the rib is lower than the inclined portion in the first front wall portion 2203). As a result, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is in the first front wall portion 2203 at the timing when the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 abuts on the rib and is guided backward. It can be delayed from the timing at which it comes into contact with the inclined portion and is guided backward, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 extends to the left of the starting port unit 2100 along the inner rail 1002 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be accepted at all times. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side open upward, and the general winning opening 2001 on the left side opens toward the upper left.

The side unit 2200 has a flat plate and a gutter-shaped extension back and forth from the base plate, and the front end is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward, and is separated from each other to the left and right. One gutter, the first front wall that closes the front end side of each of the two first gutters, and the left side of the two first gutters, extending from the base plate back and forth in a gutter shape. It is equipped with a second guide gutter and a second front wall portion that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter. The side unit 2200 is entirely formed of a transparent member.

The first lead gutter 2202 and the second lead gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. In the first guide gutter 2202, the U-shaped open portion is directed upward, and in the second guide gutter 2204, the U-shaped open portion is directed upward. The front end of the first guide gutter 2202 extends vertically on the upper side with a portion at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom as a boundary, and near the base plate 2201 so that the lower side moves backward as it goes downward. It extends diagonally to. Therefore, the first front wall portion 2203 that closes the front end side of the first guide gutter 2202 is at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom, and the lower side is bent backward.

The front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 is vertical. Therefore, the second front wall portion 2205 that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201.

The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the base plate 2201 is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Then, the game ball B can be received by the portion of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 that protrudes forward from the panel plate 1110, and the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205. It forms a general winning opening 2001. Further, when the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, a portion of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 that protrudes rearward from the base plate 2201 penetrates the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Then, it protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The bottom surface of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear, and the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001 can be guided backward.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the three general winning openings 2001 project forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the third delivery port 3063 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064. The game ball B delivered to any of the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port 3064 of the back guidance unit 3050 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051 and then lowered. It is discharged onto the board holder 1200.

Unlike the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 does not have a decorative sticker attached to the first front wall portion 2203 or the second front wall portion 2205 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001. It is less noticeable than the first starting port 2002. Since the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200 are inclined, the three-dimensional effect of the general winning openings 2001 can be emphasized, even if a decorative sticker is not attached to the front surface. , It doesn't look bad.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the back lower left effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is located behind, and the back lower left decoration of the back lower left effect unit 3200. The light emitted from the LED of the substrate 3203 can be used for light emission decoration, and the lower back left rotation decoration body 3201 can be visually recognized in a good state. Further, since the side unit 2200 has a portion inclined to the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001, the lower left of the back unit 3000 in the back unit 3000 due to the portion. The light radiated forward from the lower left decorative substrate 3203 of the staging unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) near the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. It can improve the appearance.

In this side unit 2200, since the bent and diagonally extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 is relatively rearward. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is high. The bottom surfaces of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the starting port unit 2100. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B cannot be seen in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. As a result, it is possible to make the player surely recognize the acceptance of the game ball B into the general winning opening 2001, and to prevent the player's interest from being attracted to the general winning opening 2001 unnecessarily for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to easily direct the player's interest to the next game ball B, the first starting opening 2002, the first major winning opening 2005, the second major winning opening 2006, and other winning openings, and the game continues. It is possible to entertain the game in the game area 5a and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In other words, since the bent and diagonally extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in. Therefore, when the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002, the accepted game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted by the first starting port 2002, and at the same time, the general winning opening 2001 gives the joy (superiority complex) that the game ball B has been accepted by the first starting port 2002. It can be tasted for a longer time than when it was accepted.

By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 is inclined, the first front wall portion 2203 is tilted from the side of the first guide gutter 2202. The game ball B can pass in front of the inclined portion of the gutter. When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front, so that the game ball B is accepted by the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. If the game ball B is not paid out, the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side may feel distrustful, which may reduce the interest in the game. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of the present embodiment, as described above, the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guide gutter 2202 are accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and moved backward. Since the guided game ball B can be visually recognized by the player for a short time, it is possible to recognize that the game ball B has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, even if it is an illusion that the game ball B that has passed in front of the first front wall portion 2203 has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

Further, in this side unit 2200, since a part of the game ball B can pass in front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball is in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001. When B passes, if most of the game ball B (at least half or more of the game ball B) overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in the front view, the game ball B becomes the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. It can give the illusion of being accepted and entertain the player. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001, and it may be an illusion. Therefore, even if the privilege (payout of game ball B or lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given after that, it is possible to avoid feeling distrust toward the pachinko machine 1 or the game hall side. It is possible to keep the player entertained and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (leftmost) general winning opening 2001 by the second front wall portion 2205 in parallel with the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) among the three general winning openings 2001. The shape is similar to that of the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is received in the leftmost general winning opening 2001, it is possible for some players to have the illusion that the game ball B has been accepted in the starting opening. Then, even if the game ball B is accepted in the general winning opening 2001, which is an illusion that it is the starting opening, the lottery of the special lottery result is not performed, so that the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side feel distrust. There is a fear. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 (a position that cannot be accepted by "right-handed") away from the first starting opening 2002 in the center in the left-right direction to the left, and the second Since there is no decorative sticker attached to the front of the front wall 2205 to indicate the starting port, it is possible to reconfirm that it is not the starting port, and the player feels distrust and enjoys the game. It is possible to avoid lowering it.

Further, since the side unit 2200 has the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 inclined, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 is compared with the case where the front ends thereof are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Since the decorative sticker is not attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

The angle of inclination from the horizontal on the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general winning opening 2001) is not shown, but the variable winning openings such as the large winning opening and the accessory winning opening can be opened and closed. The winning opening door is larger than the horizontal inclination angle when the game ball B is rotated around the lower side so as to move forward so as to guide the game ball B to the winning opening side. It is an angle. More specifically, depending on the player, when the number of game balls B paid out by accepting the game ball B to the variable winning opening is larger than that of the general winning opening 2001, many of the game balls B to the variable winning opening are used. I will hope for a prize. Alternatively, even if the variable winning opening (large winning opening) has a specified number of winnings, the player will wish to win more than the specified number. Therefore, by making the inclination of the winning opening door of the variable winning opening gentler than that of the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall portion 2203), the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slow. Therefore, as described above, when the game ball B is accepted in the variable winning opening, the accepted game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001. In addition to being able to reliably recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning opening, the general winning opening 2001 is given the joy (superiority complex) that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning opening. You can enjoy it for a longer time than when it was accepted. In addition, since the angle of the winning door in the open state is loose, it takes a long time for the winning door in the open state to close, so that the player can win more game balls B than the specified number. It can make you think that you will.

Further, in the two general winning openings 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200, the portion extending diagonally downward from the lower end of the portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is longer than the distance of the portion extending vertically downward from the upper end. The distance of is formed longer. As a result, since the winning opening is the general winning opening 2001, the game ball B is paid out, but the lottery such as the normal lottery or the special lottery is not performed. Therefore, the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001. Can be made invisible from the player's field of vision at an early stage.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the side unit 2200, among a plurality of general winning openings 2001, the one in which the front surface of the specific general winning opening 2001 is inclined is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all the general winning openings 2001 are general. The front surface of the winning opening 2001 may be tilted. Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball B launched at the launch position (so-called “left-handed”) in the normal gaming state can enter the general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is not tilted. The one provided at the position is shown, but it is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2001 whose front is not tilted is in an advantageous gaming state (during "time saving", "probability change", or "big hit"). The game ball B launched at the launch position (so-called “right-handed”) may be provided at a position where the ball can enter, or may be provided at both.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the inclination angle of the general winning opening 2001 having an inclination on the front surface is larger than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening) is opened from the time when it is closed. It has a narrow angle. If the number of game balls B paid out when winning a prize in the large winning opening is larger than that in the general winning opening 2001, the player will win more than the specified number even in the large winning opening for which the specified number of winnings is set. I hope. Therefore, it is said that the speed at which the game ball B that has won the big prize opening rolls to the back side is slower than the speed at which the game ball B that has won the general winning opening 2001 with the front tilted rolls to the back side. There is. In other words, if you win a prize in the general winning slot 2001, which is less than the number of payouts when you win in the big winning slot, it is said that the speed at which the game ball B winning in the big winning slot rolls to the back side is faster. ing. In other words, it can be said that the more payouts are made, the slower the time it takes for the player to disappear from the player's field of view. As a result, the more payouts are made, the longer the time of joy when winning can be provided.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
The side upper left unit 2300 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 inclined so as to be lowered to the right. The side upper left unit 2300 is entirely transparently formed.

In the state where the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf portion 2301.

[5-8d. First attacker unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125 and the like. FIG. 121 (a) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the first prize-winning door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 125 is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in the first attacker unit in a cross section.

The first attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is arranged from the front on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is installed. The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port 2004, a first winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 (see FIG. 130 and the like). In the first attacker unit 2400, the second starting port 2004 is provided in the upper part on the right side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and the first prize-winning opening 2005 is on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and more than the second starting port 2004. It is provided at a lower position, and the first sub-out port 2011 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a position lower than the first big winning opening 2005.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 has a second start port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a first that detects the game ball B received in the first big winning opening 2005. It includes a large winning opening sensor 2402, a first sub-out opening sensor 2403 that detects a game ball B received in the first sub-out opening 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 that detects illegal magnetism. The first large winning opening sensor 2402 and the magnetic sensor 2404 are provided in twos each.

The first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, the front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 to form the flow path of the game ball B, and the rear side of the unit base 2411. The rear cover 2413, the second starting port door 2414 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port door 2414 are moved to open and close the second starting port 2004. The start port solenoid 2415 for making the start port solenoid 2415, the solenoid cover 2416 covering the start port solenoid 2415, the first prize opening door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first prize opening 2005, and the first The first attacker solenoid 2418 for moving the first prize opening door 2417 to open and close the first prize opening 2005, and the transmission to move the first prize opening door 2417 by transmitting the advance and retreat of the first attacker solenoid 2418. It is provided with a member 2419.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413, and is attached to the first prize opening decorative substrate 2420 for light-emitting decoration of the first prize opening 2005 and the rear surface of the rear cover 2413. Second start port sensor 2401, first prize opening sensor 2402, first sub-out port sensor 2403, magnetic sensor 2404, start port solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, and first prize opening decorative board 2420 and panel relay board. It includes a first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying the connection with the 1710.

The unit base 2411 is formed of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 has a first opening 2411a penetrating back and forth near the upper end to the right from the center in the left-right direction, and a first guide hole 2411b penetrating back and forth below the first opening 2411a. A second opening 2411c that penetrates long left and right in the upper part on the left side from the center, and two second guide holes 2411d that line up side by side and penetrate front and back below the second opening 2411c. It has a first sub-out port 2011 that penetrates back and forth below one guide hole 2411b.

The left and right widths of the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 are formed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 is inserted through the first opening 2411a. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position below the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b projects rearward in a cylindrical shape and is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered. The second opening 2411c extends to the left and right with a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2417a of the first prize-winning door 2417 is inserted through the second opening 2411c. Each of the second guide holes 2411d projects rearward in a cylindrical shape and is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered.

Further, the unit base 2411 is arranged side by side along the upper side of the second opening 2411c, and has two contact portions 2411e protruding forward in a triangular shape. These contact portions 2411e use the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 as the contact portion of the front cover 2412 when the first prize opening 2005 is closed. In cooperation with each other, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-back direction.

A second start port sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 directly above the first guide hole 2411b with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, directly above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first large winning opening sensor 2402 is attached with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes match. Further, magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to a portion on the rear surface of the unit base 2411 on the left side of the first guide hole 2411b and a portion on the right side of the two second guide holes 2411d, respectively.

The front cover 2412 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and is transparently formed in a member. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage for the game ball B on the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. 125, the front cover 2412 has a first shelf portion 2412a extending so as to be lowered to the left from the vicinity of the upper right corner and a game ball from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the left in the front view. It extends slightly longer than the diameter of B and is shorter than the first shelf 2412a so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf 2412a, and is between the first shelf 2412a and the first shelf 2412a. The second shelf 2412b forming the second starting port 2004 and the second shelf so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the diameter of the game ball B on the left side of the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The third shelf 2412c, which extends shorter than the portion 2412b, and the third shelf 2412c are spaced from the left end to the left by a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the third shelf 2412c. It has a fourth shelf portion 2412d, which extends from a lower position to the left and forms a first large winning opening 2005 with the third shelf portion 2412c.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2412a is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B and is separated to the left from the right side of the front cover 2412. The first shelf 2412a, the second shelf 2412b, and the third shelf 2412c are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2412a and the like. ing.

Further, the front cover 2412 is the same as the first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a and the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. The second standing wall portion 2412f extending to the height, the third standing wall portion 2412g extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e, and the third shelf portion 2412c. The fourth standing wall portion 2412h extending vertically downward from the right end to the lower side of the front cover 2412, the fifth standing wall portion 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c, and the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. It has a sixth vertical wall portion 2412j extending downward from the surface and a seventh vertical wall portion 2412k extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

The fifth standing wall portion 2412i extends downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lower to the left. Further downward, it extends to the lower side of the front cover 2412. Further, the sixth standing wall portion 2412j extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to extend downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then lower to the right. Above, further down, extends to the bottom of the front cover 2412. The distance between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j in the left-right direction is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Further, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2412l connecting the lower ends of the first standing wall portion 2412e, the second standing wall portion 2412f, and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and the first standing wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of 2412e, after inclining so that the game ball B is lowered to the left with a space between the first lateral wall portion 2412l and the first lateral wall portion 2412l, and then to the middle of the fourth standing wall portion 2412h on the left side. It has a second side wall portion of 2412 m, which is inclined so as to be higher toward it. The first lateral wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. The second lateral wall portion 2412 m is formed so that the portion of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends from the lower part of each of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j to the vicinity of the center between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j in the direction of approaching each other. It has a third lateral wall portion 2412n extending and a partition portion 2412o extending upward while connecting the opposite ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2412n to each other. The third lateral wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends stepwise along the upper side of the front cover so as to be lowered to the left, and the interval at which the game ball B can be distributed between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c. It is provided with an open space. It has an upper shelf portion 2412p. The right end of the upper shelf portion 2412p is located directly above the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a, and the left end is located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. Further, the upper shelf portion 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

Further, although not shown, the front cover 2412 is located in front of the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and is triangular at a portion that is alternated in the left-right direction with respect to the two contact portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two abutting portions that project rearward in shape. These contact portions refer the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 when the first prize opening 2005 is closed. In cooperation with each other, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-back direction.

The rear cover 2413 is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold the second starting door 2414, the solenoid cover 2416, the first prize-winning door 2417, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. Further, the rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to hold the second starting port sensor 2401, the first large winning opening sensor 2402, and the first sub-out port sensor 2403 so as to sandwich it.

The second start port door 2414 extends in the left-right direction from the flat plate-shaped door portion 2414a, the arm portion 2414b extending downward from the door portion 2414a, and the lower end of the arm portion 2414b, with respect to the unit base 2411. It has a rotating shaft 2414c that is rotatably attached to the arm portion 2414b, and a connecting portion 2414d that is provided at a portion of the lower part of the arm portion 2414b away from the rotating shaft 2414c and is connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415. ..

The door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The arm portion 2414b of the second starting port door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a and then bends forward to a position substantially the same as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided on the side of the arm portion 2414b closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotating shaft 2414c.

The second starting port door 2414 can close the second starting port 2004 by the door portion 2414a. The second start port door 2414 rotates (rotates) around the rotation shaft 2414c due to the advancement and retreat of the plunger of the start port solenoid 2415 in the front-rear direction, so that the door portion 2414a moves in the front-rear direction and the second The starting port 2004 can be opened and closed.

The starting port solenoid 2415 is attached so that the direction in which the plunger protrudes is directed forward. When the starting port solenoid 2415 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the plunger retracts when energized.

The first prize-winning door 2417 has a flat plate-shaped door portion 2417a that is long to the left and right, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from both ends in the left-right direction of the door portion 2417a, and a pair of arm portions 2417b, respectively. It has a rotating shaft 2417c extending coaxially with each other in the left-right direction from the lower end, and a columnar link pin 2417d protruding to the right from the lower part of the right arm portion 2417b.

The door portion 2417a of the first prize-winning door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The pair of arm portions 2417b extend downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a and then bend forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided on the lower side of the arm portion 2417b on the side closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotating shaft 2417c. The link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into the slit 2419c extending vertically and vertically of the transmission member 2419 described later.

The first prize-winning door 2417 can close the first prize-winning door 2005 by the door portion 2417a. The first prize-winning door 2417 rotates (rotates) around the rotation shaft 2417c due to the advancement and retreat of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 in the front-rear direction, so that the door portion 2417a moves in the front-rear direction. The first prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

The first attacker solenoid 2418 is attached so that the direction in which the plunger protrudes is directed forward. When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the plunger retracts when energized.

The transmission member 2419 penetrates in the left-right direction near the front end of the base portion 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the extension portion 2419b extending forward from the base portion 2419a, and the extension portion 2419b. It also has a slit 2419c that extends up and down. The link pin 2417d of the first prize-winning door 2417 is slidably inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419.

A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front surface of the first large winning opening decorative substrate 2420. The plurality of LEDs of the first grand prize opening decorative board 2420 are full-color LEDs. The first prize-winning opening decoration substrate 2420 can make the first prize-winning opening 2005 emit light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

In the first attacker unit 2400, in a normal state, the start port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are in a non-energized (OFF) state, respectively. In this normal state, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2415 protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second start port door 2414 passes through the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411. Protruding forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the door portion 2414a cannot accept the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. It has become. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 125).

Further, in a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first prize-winning door 2417 is the second opening of the unit base 2411. It projects forward through 2411c. In this state, the door portion 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 is located above the first prize opening 2005, and the door portion 2417a cannot accept the game ball B into the first prize opening 2005. It is in a state of being. That is, the first prize-winning door 2005 is closed by the first prize-winning door 2417 (door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 124 and 125).

When the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf portion 2412a in this normal state, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf portion 2412a, and the door portion 2414a of the second start opening door 2414 After rolling the upper surface and the second shelf portion 2412b, the second shelf portion 2412b is discharged from the left end to the left. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b falls on the third shelf 2412c or the door 2417a of the first prize-winning door 2417 according to its momentum, and is left due to their inclination. Roll to the direction. When the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b abuts on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and bounces to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c May enter.

At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a that closes the first prize-winning opening 2005 with respect to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412. They will come into contact with each other alternately, and will roll to the left while zigzag in the front-back direction. The game ball B that has rolled to the left on the door portion 2417a is released from the left end thereof to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 after rolling the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf portion 2412a, it passes through the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e and falls near the right end of the second side wall portion 2412 m, and falls near the right end of the second side wall portion 2412 m. Due to the inclination of the part 2412m, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2011. Further, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c, the second horizontal wall portion 2412m passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h. It falls near the left end, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second side wall portion 2412 m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and then enters the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a. It is delivered and discharged from the back induction unit 3050 onto the lower substrate holder 1200. In the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B circulating on the right side of the first shelf portion 2412a and the game ball B passing through the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c are both first. It is formed so as to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

In this normal state, when the start port solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) according to the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, the plunger is resisted against the urging force of the spring. 2414d is retracted, and the connection portion 2414d on the upper side (door portion 2414a side) of the rotation shaft 2414c in the arm portion 2414b of the second starting port door 2414 is pulled backward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second start opening door 2414 rotates about the rotation shaft 2414c in the direction in which the door portion 2414a moves rearward. Then, by rotating the door portion 2414a so as to retract from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper part of the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. Will be. That is, the second starting port 2004 is in the open state.

When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g and becomes the second starting port sensor 2401. After being detected, it falls on the first lateral wall portion 2412 l. The portion of the first lateral wall portion 2412l between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g is inclined so as to be lowered rearward, and the game ball B rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit. It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged rearward from its trailing end. The game ball B discharged rearward from the rear end of the first guide hole 2411b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is delivered onto the substrate holder 1200 below the back guide unit 3050. It is discharged.

On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger retracts together with the transmission member 2419 attached to the tip thereof against the urging force of the spring. When the transmission member 2419 retracts, the link pin 2417d of the first prize-winning door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 is pressed backward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c while sliding in the slit 2419c. It will be.

As a result, the first prize-winning door 2417 rotates around the rotation shaft 2417c so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward, and the front end of the door portion 2417a is rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. It will move. By moving the door portion 2417a of the first prize-winning door 2417 to the rear of the front surface of the unit base 2411, the first prize-winning door 2005 is opened upward and the first prize-winning door 2005 is reached. The game ball B is ready to be accepted (see FIG. 124). That is, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened.

When the game ball B is accepted into the first prize opening 2005 when the first prize opening 2005 is open, it passes between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j, and then the fifth standing wall. After passing between the portion 2412i and the partition portion 2412o or between the sixth standing wall portion 2412j and the partition portion 2412o, the first major winning opening sensor 2402 detects the first. (3) It falls on the side wall portion 2412n. The third side wall portion 2412n is inclined so as to be lowered from the upper surface toward the rear, and the game ball B that has fallen on the third side wall portion 2412n rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit base 2411 It is discharged backward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B discharged rearward from the second guide hole 2411d is delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. ..

As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, in the first prize opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first prize opening 2005, the vicinity of the front end of the door portion 2417a that closes the first prize opening 2005. Since the door portion 2417a is rotated around the rotation shaft 2417c extending to the left and right at the same position in the front-rear direction to open and close the first prize opening 2005, the first prize opening 2005 (first prize opening 2005) The depth of the attacker unit 2400) in the front-rear direction can be shortened as much as possible. This effect is the same in the second starting port 2004 opened and closed by the second starting port door 2414. As a result, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

Further, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first big winning opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition portion 2412o, and each is detected by the different first big winning opening sensor 2402, and the unit base 2411 Since it is released to the rear of the game ball B, it is possible to suppress the game ball B from being stuck between the first prize opening 2005 and the first prize opening sensor 2402, and many game balls are released in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126 (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 126 (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 127 is a front view of the center accessory. The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. ..

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is placed in the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped portion protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 protruding from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening portion 1112 into which the center accessory 2500 in the panel plate 1110 is inserted. The peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from invading from the outside of the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the frame in a state of being assembled on the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed to be thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (thickness of 1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 project from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 has an end portion protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 having a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or is formed in a straight line so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), and the player can exert the effect as reinforcement. I try to make it inconspicuous.

More specifically, a plurality of support units 2503 of the center accessory 2500 are provided. For example, in the support portion 2503 provided at the portion above the warp inlet 2511 described later and where the peripheral wall portion 2501 protrudes to the leftmost position, the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the portion is intermediate between the portions extending vertically. Is shaped like a bulge to the left. The tip edge of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on both the upper and lower sides of the portion bulging to the left of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and at the portion bulging to the left of the peripheral wall portion 2501. It has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and is formed in a straight line so as to connect the upper and lower portions (see FIG. 135). In the state where the support portion 2503 of this portion is assembled on the game board 5, the portion extending linearly up and down at the tip side of the support portion 2503 is a back front left decorative body in the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. It is approximately along a part of the right side of 3030. Therefore, since the tip edge of the support portion 2503 coincides with the edge of the back front left decoration body 3030, it becomes difficult for the support portion 2503 to discriminate, and the back front left decoration provided relatively behind. The decoration of the body 3030 can be made to stand out.

Further, among the plurality of support portions 2503, the support portion 2503 on the lower side of the warp inlet 2511 extends to the right in a quadrangular shape while the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends diagonally. The support portion 2503 of this portion is located in front of the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in the back front left staging unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5 (see FIG. 107 and the like). ). Since the tip side extending to the left and right of the support portion 2503 extends in parallel with the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C, it seems to be a part of the shape of the shutter 3732. The support unit 2503 is difficult to discriminate (see FIG. 111).

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter at the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the left side of the front view and in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). 2511, the warp outlet 2512 which is open in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100 and the game ball B which has entered the warp inlet 2511, and the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2512. It includes a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in the left-right direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided so as to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 127 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the frame from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 by bouncing the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and is located at a position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the panel plate of the game panel 1100. When attached to 1110, it is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than that on both the left and right sides. In this stage 2513, a portion slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction (central emission portion 2513a) and the lowest portion on both the left and right sides (side emission portion 2513b) are directed toward the front. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (central discharge portion 2513a) in the center of the stage 2513 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the upper right corner and includes a guide passage group 2520 composed of two passages through which the game ball B can be distributed. In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the abutment of the front component 1000). The game ball B, which is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005) near the portion 1006 and is driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the vertical direction is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in a groove shape that is open to the front, and the game ball B circulating inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good state.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided on the outside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521 separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the first guide passage 2521. It is composed of a second guide passage 2522 extending from the center and a second guide passage 2522. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated from each other to the left and right. Further, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and are opened diagonally to the lower right along the arc of the upper part of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate portion 2003 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. Further, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly below the lower end of the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B in contact with the abutting portion 1006 are the first guides. It is formed to enter the passage 2521.

Further, the center accessory 2500 projects to the right from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and includes a lower right guide passage 2530 that guides the game ball B from above to the right and then discharges it downward. In this lower right guide passage 2530, the entrance opens upward over the front width in the left-right direction, and the exit opens diagonally to the lower left with the width of one game ball B.

The right end of the lower right guide passage 2530 is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, a second attacker unit 2600, a side right middle unit 2700, and a gate member 2800 are arranged between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the center accessory 2500 at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it is an outer edge, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be relatively widened, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 and the back unit can be passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to make 3000 decorations and the like more visible.

Further, since the support portion 2503 projecting inward is provided in the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. As a result, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, it is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the support portion 2503 can increase the strength of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection molding without being deformed.

Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is projected shortly from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided with respect to the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided at the rear. It is possible to reduce the obstruction of visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600. In addition, the center accessory 2500 such as the support unit 2503 is made transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are located as close as possible to the rear surface of the center accessory 2500. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decorations of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left staging unit 3700 on the rear side from being blurred due to the lens effect of the transparent center accessory 2500. Therefore, according to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the visibility of the decorative bodies and the like provided at the rear, and it is possible to surely exert the decorative effect by them.

Further, since the support unit 2503 and the like are made transparent and the support unit 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body and the effect display device 1600 capable of luminescent decoration, the luminescent decoration can be performed by the light from them, and the appearance is good. can do. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, behind the support portion 2503 (cross-hatching portion in FIG. 135), the back front left effect unit 3700 and the effect display device 1600 in the back unit 3000 are provided. , The light radiated forward from the LED of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 in the back front left effect unit 3700, the effect display device 1600, etc. is transmitted, reflected, refracted, and diffused to create a gorgeous light emitting decoration. It can be shown to the player. It should be noted that the support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like, and the light from the rear can be diffused by the step or the like, so that the light can be made to look more gorgeous.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided so as to have a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) has a portion. At a close portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. As a result, the area of the game with the plurality of obstacle nails N can be widened as much as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed in the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same surface as the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Is provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, so that the support portion 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Further, since the support unit 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be further improved as compared with the case where the support unit 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. It can be made wider, and the display screen of the staging display device 1600 provided at the rear can be made easier to see. In other words, if it is desired to make the non-distribution area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look large, the support portion 2503 should be provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support unit 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap with the display screen of the staging display device 1600 provided at the rear in the front view.

The edge of the support portion 2503 may have a shape similar to the shape of the front cover 3711 (the shape of the decorative body) of the back front left effect unit 3700 provided at the rear. As a result, since the support portion 2503 is different from the rear decoration, it is possible to prevent the support portion 2503 from conspicuously lowering the decorativeness of the rear decorative body, and at the same time, the support portion 2503 also has decorativeness. Can be enhanced.

Further, in the above embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position close to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left staging unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, and those decorations are provided by the lens effect. Although the one that suppresses the appearance of blurring is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the support portion 2503 is provided near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 away from the rear back unit 3000. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left staging unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear may be intentionally made to look blurry.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 has an opening 1112 penetrating through the panel plate 1110, and the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. It is not limited to the above, and it may be that there is no rear portion to be inserted into the opening 1112 in the peripheral wall portion 2501. In this case, it may be attached to the game panel 1100 which does not have the opening 1112. .. Further, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 which does not have the opening 1112, the support portion 2503 may be attached to the game panel 1100. In this case, the center accessory 2500 is not provided with the flange portion 2502. You may do so.

[5-8f. Second attacker unit]
Subsequently, the second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG. 128 (a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, the side right middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit, and FIG. 128 (b) shows the second attacker unit, the side right middle unit, and the side right middle unit in the front unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the gate member from the back. FIG. 129 is an explanatory view showing a cross-sectional view of the passage of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit.

The second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is arranged on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 is provided with a second large winning opening 2006 that is openable and closable toward the left (see FIG. 129).

The second attacker unit 2600 has a second major winning opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2006, and a magnetic sensor that detects an illegal time acting near the second major winning opening 2006. It is equipped with 2602. In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second major winning opening door 2611 for closing the second major winning opening 2006 so as to be openable and closable, and the second major winning opening door 2611 to move the second major winning opening 2006. The second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, the transmission member (not shown) that transmits the advance and retreat of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second prize-winning door 2611, and the second prize-winning door 2006. It has a guide passage 2613 that guides the received game ball B and discharges it backward.

In the second attacker unit 2600, the second major winning opening 2006 opens to the left at a position to the right from the center in the left-right direction, and the second major winning opening 2006 is closed from the left. A winning door 2611 is provided.

The second prize-winning door 2611 has a semicircular lower side that bulges downward, a right side that extends linearly upward in contact with the right end of the lower side, and a bulge to the left from the upper end of the right side. It is formed in a so-called wing shape, which is composed of an arc-shaped left side in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second prize-winning door 2611 has a columnar rotating shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircle as the axis, and a link protruding rearward from a position distant from the rotating shaft. It has a pin (not shown). The second prize-winning door 2611 is rotatably attached with a lower rotation shaft so that the upper end moves to the left.

The second attacker solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger protrudes downward, although detailed illustration is omitted. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates the base attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so that the link pin of the second prize-winning door 2611 can slide. It has a slit to be inserted, and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The second attacker unit 2600 is located so that the right side is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the second large winning opening 2006 and the peripheral wall portion of the center accessory 2500 are located. A space through which the game ball B can be distributed is formed between the right side and the right side of the 2501. Further, in the state of the second attacker unit 2600 assembled on the game board 5, the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100.

In the second attacker unit 2600, in a normal state, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second prize-winning door 2611 is upright, and the second prize-winning door 2006 is closed by the second prize-winning door 2611. That is, under the normal state, the game ball B cannot be accepted for the second big winning opening 2006.

In this normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the first When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second prize-winning door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward. At the same time, by sliding in the slit, the second prize-winning door 2611 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the rotation shaft 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the second prize-winning door 2611 moves to the left, the second prize-winning door 2006 is opened to the left, and the right end side of the second prize-winning door 2611 becomes lower. It will be in an inclined state. That is, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the second big winning opening door 2611, it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is accepted by the second big winning opening 2006. The game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006 is guided by the guidance passage 2613 after being detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2601, and is discharged backward. The game ball B discharged rearward from the guidance passage 2613 is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guidance unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8 g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right middle unit 2700 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. The side right middle unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. The side right middle unit 2700 includes one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012.

In the side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward with the width of one game ball B in the left-right direction, and the game is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001 in the left-right direction. The second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with the width of two balls B.

Further, the side right middle unit 2700 has a first guide passage 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear, and a second guide passage B that guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear. It has a two-guide passage 2702. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape, which extends backward from the general winning opening 2001, then bends to the right and then bends further to the rear. The second guide passage 2702 extends rearward from the second sub-out port 2012 below the first guide passage 2701. The exit of the first guide passage 2701 and the exit of the second guide passage 2702 are arranged one above the other.

In the state where the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled on the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. There is.

Further, in the state where the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and the lower end is substantially in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600. A space through which the game ball B can be distributed is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500. In this side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 opens upward at a position slightly to the left of the second major winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 has the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It opens upward over substantially the entire space (see FIG. 130 and the like).

The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide passage 2701, and then the back side provided behind. It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200. Further, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 by the second guide passage 2702, and is provided behind the back unit. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in 3000. The game ball B delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 128. The gate member 2800 of the table unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. Has been done. The gate member 2800 is a gate sensor 2003 for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate portion 2003 and the gate portion 2003 in which the lottery of the normal lottery result for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 by the passage of the game ball B is performed. It has 2801 and. The detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is the gate portion 2003.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 protruding diagonally from the vicinity of the right end of the lower surface toward the lower left. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 to the lower left. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the guide piece 2802 is inclined so that its extension line passes near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700.

The gate member 2800 is located substantially in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the game is played on both the left and right sides. The sphere B forms a gap through which it can flow. This gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 130. FIG. 130 is an enlarged explanatory view of the right portion in the game area in FIG. 115. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the left and right outer parts and the lower part of the center accessory 2500. Further, a windmill W that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500 mainly enter the game ball B driven on the left side of the center accessory 2500 into the portion on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W. It is adjusted so as to enter the part on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability than those. As a result, the game ball B can be driven into the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 with a certain probability by hitting it so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate member 2800 are more than the game ball B distributed through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game ball B that has circulated through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 is adjusted to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game ball B mainly circulates on the left side of the right side portion of the gate member 2800. ing.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are mainly adjusted so that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and driven from the left side to the upper part along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is driven so as to circulate on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 115, a plurality of obstacle nails planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500. N induces the user to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or the part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W, and the part on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability. You will be guided to enter.

The game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is guided to the right by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that the side unit 2200 will be accepted by the three general winning openings 2001. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It is handed over to any of 3064, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, and then discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given. The game ball B guided to the portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is hardly accepted by the first starting port 2002. Then, the game ball B not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 is discharged from the out opening 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W is centered in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N diagonally arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It may be guided to the side and accepted by the first starting port 2002. Further, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W may pass between a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally and flow down onto the side unit 2200, and the side unit 2200 may flow down. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general winning opening 2001.

The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so that there is a high probability that the first Accepted at the start port 2002. When the game ball B is discharged from the left and right side discharge portions 2513b of the central discharge portion 2513a, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then is delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and the first start port sensor. After being detected by 3052, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first start port sensor 3052, the first special lottery result is drawn and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B that has circulated on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003 and is accepted into the second starting port 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006. There is no possibility of being killed.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven to the left side of the center character 2500 is compared with the probability that the game ball B driven to the right side of the center character 2500 is accepted by the second starting port 2004. The probability of being accepted by the first starting port 2002 is set higher. As a result, when the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is not in the open state, it is possible to prompt the operation of driving the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500 (“left-handed”).

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed on the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 with the strength that the game ball B enters above the portion that becomes lower from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction toward the right. When driven, the game ball B circulates in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

More specifically, the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts on the abutment portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed striking). Then, the game ball B in contact with the abutment portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is discharged downward at a position slightly to the right of the position directly above the gate portion 2003.

The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 has a gate portion on the left side of the gate member 2800 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. In 2003, the right side of the gate member 2800 is guided so that the probability becomes lower, and the side right middle unit 2700 side flows down.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, it is on the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Is released downward from. The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 have substantially the same probability and the right side of the gate member 2800 has a lower probability. Then, it flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received in the second sub-out port 2012. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and is delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and then the second sub-out port sensor. After being detected by 3054, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged to the side right middle unit 2700 side after being detected by the gate sensor 2801. By detecting the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery of the normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes is performed.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate portion 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of being the side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down the left side of the door and is occasionally accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely by the second sub-out opening 2012. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then handed over to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. After being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, it is discharged onto the board holder 1200. At this time, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. Flow down to the left of.

At this time, if the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, the second big prize is won. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is highly likely to be accepted by the second big winning mouth 2006.

The game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006 is detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2601 and is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a, and then in the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back induction unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. By detecting the game ball B by the second large winning opening sensor 2601, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

The game ball B, which was not accepted by the second prize opening 2006 and flowed down to the left of the second prize opening 2006, entered the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 and exited the lower right guide passage 2530. Is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B discharged downward (diagonally lower left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf portion 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is directly connected to the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and pushes the upper surface of the door 2414a of the second starting door 2414 and the second shelf 2412b. After rolling, it is discharged from the left end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the left. Then, the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b falls on the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first large winning opening door 2417 according to the momentum, and tilts them. After rolling to the left from the door portion 2417a and rolling the fourth shelf portion 2412d, it is discharged from the fourth shelf portion 2412d to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the game balls B may come into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N so as not to flow down to the first shelf portion 2412a but to the upper shelf portion 2412p. It may flow down. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf portion 2412p rolls to the left due to its inclination, is discharged from the left end of the upper shelf portion 2412p to the left, and then hits the obstacle nail N planted on the left. After abutting and turning downward and flowing down near the left end of the upper surface of the door portion 2417a in the first prize-winning door 2417, the door portion 2417a and the fourth shelf portion 2412d are rolled to the left and the first It is released to the outside of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, depending on the timing when the game ball B is released from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing when the first prize opening 2005 is opened, the first prize is the first prize. It may be accepted in the winning opening 2005.

Further, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the first shelf portion 2412a bounces to the right due to contact with the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf portion 2412p. By flowing down, the first shelf portion 2412a may be rolled to the right against the inclination and discharged from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the right (downward). The game ball B discharged to the right from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a passes between the first standing wall portion 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down near the right end of the second side wall portion 2412 m. Then, due to the inclination of the second side wall portion 2412 m, it rolls to the left and is received by the first sub-out port 2011. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and is not returned to the game area 5a. It is delivered to the back guide unit 3050 and discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, if the "normal hit" is drawn as a result of the normal lottery due to the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003, the second start Since the mouth door 2414 is movable and the second starting port 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling the first shelf portion 2412a to the left is received by the second starting port 2004. there is a possibility. Then, when the game ball B is received by the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2401, the second special lottery result is drawn and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

Further, when the game ball B is discharged to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery are performed. As a result, when the "big hit" was drawn, the first big prize opening door 2417 was moved and the first big winning opening 2005 was opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, so that it was released from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left. The game ball B will be accepted into the first prize opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first prize opening 2005 is detected by the first prize opening sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. By detecting the game ball B by the first large winning opening sensor 2402, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b, the game ball B may come into contact with the step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and flow diagonally to the lower right to flow down to the second shelf 2412b and the third. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf and the shelf 2412c. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h and is near the left end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. It falls and rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second side wall portion 2412 m and is received by the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is accepted by any of the second starting port 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2011. If not, the outlets 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a and the like are discharged downward to the rear of the game panel 1100 which is outside the game area 5a.

Therefore, in order to open and close the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 is made to accept the game ball B, and a "small hit" is made. It is necessary to have the lottery of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result such as "big hit". While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 needs to let the gate portion 2003 pass the game ball B to draw (assign) the "normal hit" as the result of the normal lottery. Therefore, the opportunity for the second starting port 2004 to accept the game ball B is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, in a normal state, the game ball B is driven into the player so that the game ball B flows down on the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received at the first starting port 2002. The operation can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 can be enjoyed. It is possible to raise the expectation for acceptance of.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and a "small hit" or a "big hit" is drawn as a result of the first special lottery, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 To open and close, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right-handed" so that the game ball B can be accepted in the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006, and the first prize opening It is possible to raise expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B in 2005 or the second prize opening 2006.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and it is easy to pass through the gate portion 2003 by the guide passage to be distributed. Since it is easy to be accepted by the second sub-out port 2012, the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B circulates in the desired guide passage, and the player can be made to use the game ball. You can enjoy the driving operation of B.

In addition, there is a possibility that a "normal hit" in which the second starting port 2004 is opened by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003 by performing "right-handed" may be drawn, and the open state may be drawn. Since there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the second starting port 2004 and a "small hit" or a "big hit" will be drawn, it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest. Can be done.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box-shaped opening at the front and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and the back surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010, the flat plate-shaped back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, respectively. The back guide unit 3050 is provided, the back rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end in the back box 3010, and the back guide unit 3050 at the lower part of the back box 3010 are separated from each other to the left and right. The back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250, and the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided behind the back top effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back back effect unit 3100 in the upper part of the back box 3010 and the back front left decoration body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back-back-left staging unit 3500, the back-back-right staging unit 3600 provided behind the back-front-right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010, and the back-front-left decorative body 3030 and the back-back-left in the back box 3010. The back front left effect unit 3700 provided between the effect unit 3500, and the back front right effect unit provided between the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010. It is equipped with 3800.

[5-9a. Back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, the back front left decorative body 3030, the back front right decorative body 3040, and various staging units are mounted, and the staging display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are mounted on the rear side. The back box 3010 is transparently formed of a synthetic resin.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped projecting rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the upper fixing piece 1601b of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. It is provided with a notch 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached, near the center in the left-right direction of the lower side.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the effect display device 1600 into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the left and right sides of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting decorative bodies, staging units, and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the back box 3010 has a strip-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is reinforced by the reinforcing plate 3011.

[5-9b. Back front left decoration and back front right decoration]
Subsequently, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of a pachinko machine in which the upper left corner of the game board is enlarged and shown with the door frame transparent. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at a distance from each other to the left and right.

The back front left decorative body 3030 includes a flat plate-shaped base 3031 extending vertically and a decorative sticker 3032 attached to the front surface of the base 3031. The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and the left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative sticker 3032 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The back front left decorative body 3030 is formed opaquely, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

The back front right decorative body 3040 includes a flat plate-shaped base 3041 extending vertically and a decorative sticker 3042 attached to the front surface of the base 3041. The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and the right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative sticker 3042 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The back front right decorative body 3040 is formed opaquely, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

When the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are assembled on the game board 5, the outer peripheral edge on the outside extends in a flat plate shape so as to be located outside the game area 5a in the front view. (See FIGS. 111 and 135, etc.). Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outer side when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, is located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3. It has been extended to.

More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, in front view, the back front left decorative body 3030 is halved from the bottom of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 provided in the upper left corner of the back rear left staging unit 3500. It is extended to the position of. In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 in the front view. Further, in other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the door window 101a in the door frame 3.

As a result, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the lower half of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 can be covered with the back front left decorative body 3030 (shaded portion in FIG. 135), and the back rear left from the player side. The lift drive motor 3554 can be obscured. Further, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 is outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (hatched portion in FIG. 135). Since it extends to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 can be made invisible (invisible) from the player side. Therefore, functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided behind the back front left decorative body 3030 can be made invisible from the player side, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. can do.

Further, in the back front left decorative body 3030, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 is extended so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554. A part (upper half) can be seen from the front, but by assembling it in the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554 can be covered and hidden by the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to extend the back front left decorative body 3030 so as to cover the entire back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and it is possible to prevent the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming unnecessarily large. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the upper left corner of the front view in the front component 1000, the function display unit Instead of 1400, the back front left decorative body 3030 can hide the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 (functional component) provided at the rear.

On the other hand, in the back front right decorative body 3040, in front view, it extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 in the back rear right staging unit 3600, and is transparent in front. Even through the constituent members 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is made invisible from the front (player side). Therefore, by making functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 invisible from the player side, the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. It is possible to exert the same action and effect as the back front left decorative body 3030.

As described above, according to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the present embodiment, at least a part of functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided at the rear is covered. Therefore, it is possible to make the functional parts difficult to see from the player side, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as described above, since the front of the functional parts provided behind can be covered by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the front constituent members 1000 and the game panel 1100 are made transparent. However, the functional parts can be made invisible from the player side. That is, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, the transparent front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, give the player a feeling of openness, and give the player a feeling of openness, and the actual game area 5a. Although the size of the game area does not change, the game area 5a can be made larger (wider) to the player. At this time, the parts outside the game area 5a in the decorative seal 3032 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the decorative seal 3042 of the back front right decorative body 3040, which are provided with predetermined decorations, are the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100. Since it can be visually recognized from the front through, the outside of the game area 5a can be decorated, and the game area 5a can be made to look larger than it actually is, which can strongly attract the attention of the player. It can be a board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as described above, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, and the back unit can be made transparent. Light from 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (on the player side) by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. It can be shown, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

It should be noted that the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided in the rear are provided from the player side by the portions extending outward from the game area 5a in the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040. Since it can be made invisible, all the functional parts may be provided outside the game area 5a in front view. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, in order to secure a space for providing all the functional parts outside the game area 5a, the size of the game area 5a is relatively reduced. Since there is a possibility that a problem that must be generated may occur, a part of the functional parts is placed outside the game area 5a in a balance that allows a large game area 5a to be taken with respect to the size of the game board 5, as in the present embodiment. It is desirable to provide it.

Further, it is desirable that the decorations of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 be decorations related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a in the front view. As a result, the design inside the game area 5a can be extended to the outside of the game area 5a by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The pachinko machine 1 can make the 5a look larger than it actually is, and can strongly attract the attention of the player.

[5-9c. Back guidance unit]
Next, the back induction unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 136 and the like. FIG. 136 (a) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 (b) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. The back guide unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010, and is formed in a shape in which both ends extending to the left and right are bent upward. The back guide unit 3050 is formed substantially entirely transparently.

The back guidance unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a first starting port sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, and the like. The out port sensor 3053 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010, the second sub out port sensor 3054 that detects the game ball B received in the second sub out port 2012, and the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500. It is equipped with a magnetic sensor 3055, which is provided in a portion behind the above and detects illegal magnetism.

Further, the back guidance unit 3050 was received in the first delivery port 3061 to which the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 is delivered, and in the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. The second delivery port 3062 to which the game ball B is delivered, the third delivery port 3063 to which the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the middle side of the side unit 2200 is delivered, and the general on the left side of the side unit 2200. The fourth delivery port 3064 to which the game ball B received in the winning opening 2001 is delivered, and the game ball B received to the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 are delivered. The 5th delivery port 3065, the 6th delivery port 3066 to which the game ball B received in the 1st big winning opening 2005 of the 1st attacker unit 2400 is delivered, and the 2nd big winning opening 2006 of the 2nd attacker unit 2600 are received. The seventh delivery port 3067 to which the game ball B is delivered, the eighth delivery port 3068 to which the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is delivered, and the side right middle unit 2700. It is provided with a ninth delivery port 3069 to which the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is delivered.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back guidance unit 3050 has a first discharge path for guiding the game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 to the right and then discharging it downward, and a second receiver. The game ball B delivered to the delivery port 3062 and the game ball B delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are merged and then delivered to the second discharge path and the fourth delivery port 3064. A third discharge path that guides the game ball B downward and then discharges it diagonally to the lower right, and a position where the game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is below the sixth delivery port 3066. It is provided with a fourth discharge passage that is guided downward to the left, guided to the left to a position on the left side of the sixth delivery port 3066, and then discharged diagonally to the lower left. The fifth delivery port 3065, the sixth delivery port 3066, the seventh delivery port 3067, and the ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with the fourth discharge channel.

The game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and delivered to the first delivery port 3061 is discharged downward after being detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path. Will be done. The game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the second delivery port 3062, and the game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 on the middle side and delivered to the third delivery port 3063. The ball B merges in the second discharge path, is detected by the general winning opening 2001, and then is discharged downward. The game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001 in the middle of the third discharge path. ..

It is received by the second start port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 and is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 and is received by the game ball B and the first big winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 and the game ball B received by the second major winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 are the fourth. It is discharged through the discharge channel.

The game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is on the upstream side of the part communicating with the ninth delivery port 3069 in the fourth discharge channel. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 merges with the fourth discharge path after being detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054, and is the second. (Iv) It is discharged through the discharge channel.

The back guidance unit 3050 includes an out ball detection member 3080 that detects a game ball B received in the out port 2010. The out-ball detection member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a and is received by the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first major winning opening 2005, and the second major winning opening 2006. To detect the game ball B received in the out opening 2010 opened at the lower end of the game area 5a among the game balls B that did not have (the game ball B to which the privilege was not given, also referred to as "out ball"). belongs to.

The out-ball detection member 3080 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 from the rear, and the tubular portion 3081 and the tubular portion 3081 in which the game ball B extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction so as to be circulated can be distributed. A partition portion 3082 that divides the inside into left and right, a flange portion 3083 that protrudes in a flat plate shape in the left-right direction from the outer periphery of the rear end of the cylinder portion 3081, and a game ball B that is continuous with the rear end of the cylinder portion 3081. It is equipped with a rear cover 3084 that can be guided to and discharged (see FIG. 114). The out-ball detection member 3080 is provided with an out-port sensor 3053 between the tubular portion 3081 and the rear cover 3084.

The tubular portion 3081 has substantially the same size as the out port 2010, and has a width in the left-right direction in which two game balls B are sufficiently lined up (a width in which three game balls B are not lined up), and the lower inner surface is It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear side. The partition portion 3082 is provided near the rear end of the tubular portion 3081, and is partitioned to a size that allows one game ball B to pass on both the left and right sides. The partition portion 3082 is curved so that the front end side projects forward as it goes downward, and is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B and projects forward.

In the out ball detection member 3080, two out port sensors 3053 are provided side by side. The left out port sensor 3053 detects the game ball B circulating on the left side of the partition portion 3082 in the cylinder portion 3081, and the right out port sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition portion 3082 in the cylinder portion 3081. It detects the distributed game ball B. The outlet sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

The two out-port sensors 3053 are provided so that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the inner surface on the lower side of the tubular portion 3081. As a result, since the distribution direction of the game ball B circulating in the tubular portion 3081 does not change even at the portion of the out port sensor 3053, the game ball B can be smoothly detected by the out port sensor 3053, and the game ball B can be detected. Can be quickly discharged to prevent stagnation on the front side of the outlet sensor 3053.

The out-ball detection member 3080 has a tubular portion 3081 inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5 (see FIG. 114).

In the state of the out ball detection member 3080 assembled on the game board 5, the upper portion of the front end of the tubular portion 3081 projects forward from the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 (see FIG. 114). That is, the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 is inserted into the tubular portion 3081. Further, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 passes through the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200.

The out-ball detection member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 or the lower right rail 1004 in the game area 5a, and then is guided backward by the out-guide unit 1003 to be received in the out-port 2010. The game ball B is detected by one of the two out-port sensors 3053 through the cylinder portion 3081, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 and discharged. The out-ball detection member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the main body frame 4 without contacting the game ball B on the substrate holder 1200.

According to the out-ball detection member 3080 of the present embodiment, since the partition portion 3082 partitions between the two out-port sensors 3053 provided on the left and right, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 can be seen. The game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be guided to the right side of the out port sensor 3053 while being guided to the left side of the out port sensor 3053. Therefore, in each of the left and right out-port sensors 3053, it is determined whether the player tends to be "left-handed" or "right-handed" based on the number of game balls B detected per hour. Based on the discrimination, it is possible to promote the optimum driving operation for the game situation and enjoy the intended game.

Further, in the out-ball detection member 3080, the protrusion of the partition portion 3082 to the front is shortened so that the game ball B can easily get over it. Therefore, when many game balls B enter the out port 2010 per hour, the partition is made. The game ball B can be released to the left side or the right side where the distribution amount of the game ball B of the unit 3082 is relatively small, and the game ball B can be discharged without delay at the out port 2010.

Further, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 is projected downward from the discharge portion 1201 of the board holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the first large winning opening 2005, The game ball B received by the second big winning opening 2006, the first sub-out opening 2011, and the second sub-out opening 2012 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 flows back in the out-ball detection member 3080 and is used in the out-port sensor 3053. It is possible to prevent the detection from being detected, and it is possible to accurately detect only the "out ball" received in the out port 2010.

In this embodiment, the out-ball detection member 3080 is provided on the back unit 3000, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the out-ball detection member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has an out recess 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so that it can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1123. At the same time, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006 are driven into the game area 5a. Since the game ball B (“out ball”) that was not accepted by any of them can be detected by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub out port sensor 2403, and the second sub out port sensor 3054, for example, a specific winning prize. If the "out ball" is not detected even though the acceptance of the game ball B into the mouth is continuously detected, it means that a fraudulent act has been performed on a specific winning mouth. It is possible to notify that cheating is being carried out.

In addition, since the number can be counted by detecting the "out ball", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first major winning opening 2005, and the second major winning opening The number of "winning balls" and the number of "out balls" counted by the detection of the game ball B received in 2006, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the first large From the number of "safe balls" paid out by accepting the game ball B to the winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006, the "ball ejection rate" in the pachinko machine 1 can be known. Although not shown, a display unit for displaying the "ball ejection rate" is provided on the rear side of the game board 5.

Further, in the game board 5, all the game balls B (“global balls”) driven into the game area 5a are detected, and all the game balls B (“global balls”) discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ) Is detected, since only the "out ball" is detected by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub out port sensor 2403, and the second sub out port sensor 3054, the "out ball" and the "winning ball" are detected. By comparing the numbers of "" and "global", it is possible to detect the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5.

[5-9d. Back-to-back production unit]
Next, the back-back effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141 and the like. FIG. 137 (a) is a perspective view of the back-back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 137 (b) is a perspective view of the back-back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the back-back effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 140 is an explanatory view showing the movable configuration of the back-and-forth effect unit from the front. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-and-forth effect unit.

The back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost part (front surface of the rear wall) in the back box 3010. The back-back effect unit 3100 has a U-shape with the front view open downward, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back-rear effect unit 3100 includes a back-rear movable decorative body 3110 extending in the left-right direction and a back-rear movable mechanism 3120 for moving the back-rear movable decoration 3110 in the vertical direction.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a translucent decorative body 3111 extending in the left-right direction and having a relief-like decoration on the front surface, and a plurality of decorative bodies 3111 provided behind the decorative body 3111 on the front surface. It includes a back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are mounted, and a decorative base 3115 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are each full-color LEDs. The decorative body 3111 (back-back movable decorative body 3110) can be light-emittingly decorated by the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-back decorative substrate 3114.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a left slider 3116 extending vertically on the left side of the decorative body 3111 and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111. The left slider 3116 has a movable protrusion 3116a protruding to the left from the vicinity of the lower end, a locking protrusion 3116b protruding to the left from the vicinity of the upper end in a triangular shape, and a detection piece 3116c provided at the upper end. Have.

The back-rear movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U-shape with the front view open downward, and extends vertically in a columnar shape on the left side of the unit base 3121 mounted in the back box 3010 and the unit base 3121. The slide shaft 3122, which supports the left slider 3116 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, extends vertically in parallel with the slide shaft 3122 on the left side of the slide shaft 3122, and spirals on the outer circumference. It includes a spiral shaft 3123 and a spiral shaft 3123 in which a groove is formed.

Further, in the back-rear movable mechanism 3120, a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3124 attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3125 meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and a motor gear 3125 as a rotating shaft. The back-rear drive motor 3126 attached, the motor base 3127 in which the back-rear drive motor 3126 is attached to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 are rotatably attached to the unit base 3121. It includes a bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123.

Further, the back-rear movable mechanism 3120 is screwed into the spiral shaft 3123, and the slide guide 3130 that can abut from below against the movable protrusion 3116a of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and the left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 that extends up and down and can be raised and lowered so that the lower end side can come into contact with the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 that urges the transmission slider 3131 upward, and a transmission slider 3131. A link member 3133 that rotates around an axis in the front-rear direction by moving up and down, and a lock member 3134 that slides left and right by the rotation of the link member 3133 and can come into contact with the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110. It is equipped with.

Further, the back / rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a back / rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the back / rear movable decorative body 3110, a back / rear / lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, and a back / rear. The front left cover 3137 attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decoration body 3110 from the front, and the right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 from the front. Connection between the front right cover 3138 attached, the back rear drive motor 3126, the back rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the back rear lower detection sensor 3136, which are attached to the lower front surface of the front left cover 3137, and the effect drive board 1720. The connection between the back-rear decorative board 3114, which is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138, and the back-rear decorative board 3114 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and the effect drive board 1720. It is equipped with a back-right relay board 3140 that is relaying.

The unit base 3121 has a shock absorbing member 3121a that abuts on the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 that has moved downward to absorb the shock. The upper end and the lower end of the slide shaft 3122 are sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.

The slide guide 3130 projects to the right from the vicinity of the lower end, and has a detection piece 3130a detected by the back / rear lower detection sensor 3136. The slide guide 3130 is provided so as to be slidable in the vertical direction between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and by contacting them, the slide guide 3130 is made non-rotatable with respect to the axis of the spiral shaft 3123. In the slide guide 3130, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface. Further, in the slide guide 3130, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 can be brought into contact with the lower surface thereof.

The transmission slider 3131 is mounted so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 is movable in the vertical direction only within a predetermined range by the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower protrusion 3131a protruding to the right on the lower end side, an upper protrusion 3131b protruding to the right on the upper end side, and a cylindrical protrusion from the vicinity of the upper end of the upper protrusion 3131b to the rear. It is provided with a protrusion pin 3131c. The lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131. Further, in the transmission slider 3131, the protrusion pin 3131c is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133.

The upper end side of the spring 3132 is attached to the unit base 3121, and the lower end side is attached to the upper protrusion 3131b of the transmission slider 3131 to urge the transmission slider 3131 upward.

The link member 3133 has a front view shape formed into a triangle whose vertices are R-chamfered. The link member 3133 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near one apex with respect to the axis in the front-rear direction. The link member 3133 has a long hole-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left apex from the rotation axis and a long hole-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the apex above the rotation axis. It has a second slit 3133b and. In the link member 3133, the protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

The lock member 3134 is slidably attached in the left-right direction by the front left cover 3137 between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.
The lock member 3134 projects rearward in a columnar shape, forms a transmission pin 3134a slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and a flat upper end surface, and also forms a flat upper end surface in the left-right direction. The lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is extended and inclined so as to move to the left from the contact surface 3134b to which the contact surface 3134b can be contacted and from the right end of the contact surface 3134b downward. It has a guide surface 3134c to which the locking projection 3116b can abut.

The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to slidably support the right slider 3117 of the back / rear movable decorative body 3110 in the vertical direction.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-and-forth effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state of the back-back effect unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 140 (FIG. 141 (a)), the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is in a retracted position in which the back-back movable decorative body 3110 has moved upward, and the slide guide 3130. Is located near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 moves to the right and is located at the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the back-rear movable decoration body is in contact with the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134. The lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of 3110 is in contact with the lower surface.

Under normal conditions, the transmission slider 3131 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the spring 3132. The protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133. The urging force of the 3132 acts in the clockwise direction around the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the locking member 3134 is urged in the direction of sliding to the right. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained in the locked position by the urging force of the spring 3132.

In this state, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is restricted from moving downward by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134. Therefore, even if either the slide guide 3130 or the lock member 3134 moves from the position for some reason (defect), the rest may prevent the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 from moving (falling) downward. can.

Further, in a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is located above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b into which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. It is located to the right of the axis. Further, the back / rear upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the back / rear movable decorative body 3110, and the back / rear / lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

The back-up effect unit 3100 is located behind the back-up effect unit 3400 in the normal state of the retracted position, and is invisible from the front (player side).

In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view) by the back-rear drive motor 3126, the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 is lowered. Move to. Even if the slide guide 3130 moves downward, the lock protrusion 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is in contact with the lock member 3134, so that the back-rear movable decoration 3110 cannot move downward from the retracted position. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward away from the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110.

Then, when the slide guide 3130 moves downward due to the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123 and the detection piece 3130a is detected by the back-rear lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 is the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131. It abuts on the upper end surface (see FIG. 141 (b)). When the slide guide 3130 further moves downward while the back-back lower detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward. The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the urging force of the spring 3132.

When the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 into which the protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 counterclockwise around its rotation axis. It will rotate in the clockwise direction. Then, as the link member 3133 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and the second slit 3133b is inserted into the second slit 3133b via the transmission pin 3134a. The lock member 3134 will move to the left (see FIG. 141 (c)).

When the lock member 3134 moves to the left of the locking projection 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the lock (downward restriction) by the lock member 3134 is released, and the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 moving downward is in a non-detection state with respect to the back rear lower detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the back rear drive motor 3126 is stopped.

Then, the dropped back-rear movable decorative body 3110 comes into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121, so that the falling stops and the state of the appearance position is reached (see FIG. 141 (c)). In this state of appearance, the slide guide 3130 is located below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 does not come into contact with the slide guide 3110.

In the back-back effect unit 3100, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 becomes visible from the front (player side) in the state of the appearance position where the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 has fallen. In this state, by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111) can be light-emitting and decorated, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made to emit light. The light emitting decoration can entertain the player.

When returning the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 from the position where the lower moving end appears to the retracted position in the normal state, the rear-rear drive motor 3126 causes the spiral shaft 3123 to move in the opposite direction (here, clockwise in a plan view). Rotate in the direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 due to the urging force of the spring 3132. Then, when the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 rotates in the clockwise direction and the lock member 3134 moves to the right and stops at the lock position, contrary to the above. Become.

Further, as the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable protrusion 3116a upward. By pressing to, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves upward (see FIG. 141 (d)).

Then, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward by the slide guide 3130 to the vicinity of the retracted position, the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 from below. When the locking projection 3116b abuts on the guide surface 3134c from below and the locking projection 3116b presses the guide surface 3134c upward, the tilt of the guide surface 3134c causes the locking member 3134 to move to the left. The lock member 3134 slides to the right against the urging force of the spring 3132 that acts and tries to move to the right via the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133.

When the locking projection 3116b is located above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 due to the upward movement of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the upward pressure by the locking projection 3116b on the guide surface 3134c is eliminated. The lock member 3134 slides to the right due to the urging force of the spring 3132 and is in the locked position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is located below the locking projection 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and the lock member 3134 moves the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 downward. Can be regulated.

At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is detected by the back-rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the back-rear drive motor 3126 is stopped. In this way, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 can return from the appearance position to the state of the retracted position which is the normal state.

According to the back-back effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 extending to the left and right is dropped from a state of a retracted position invisible to the player side to a state of an appearance position that can be seen. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

In addition, since the lock member 3134 that locks (regulates) the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the retracted position is moved to the left to unlock it, it rotates around the axis in the front-rear direction. Compared with the case where the lock is released by moving the lock, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward when the lock is released.

[5-9d-1. Movable decoration after the back]
Subsequently, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 in the back-back effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. FIG. 142 is a front view showing the back-rear movable decorative body together with the back-rear decorative substrate. 143 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 143 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 142. FIG. 144 (a) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body as viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body as viewed from the back. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the back-rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 148 is an explanatory view showing the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate with broken lines in the front view of FIG. 147. FIG. 149 (a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 149 (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same portion as the decorative body of (a). (C) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate in the same portion as the decorative body of (a).

Further, FIG. 150 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing an enlarged upper portion of FIG. 143 (a). FIG. 151 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 in an exploded manner. FIG. 152 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decoration by the decorative body and the decorative sheet and the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the back-rear movable decorative body. FIG. 153 (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate at the portion of the first LED in a cross section, and FIG. 153 (b) shows the position of the second LED on the optical axis of the first LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the light guide radiation plate in the part which is doing from the front, and (c) is the LED accommodating part of the light guide radiation plate with respect to the 2nd decorative part in a decorative body and a decorative sheet, and the back and rear decorative substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement example of one LED from the front. FIG. 154 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the back-rear decorative substrate together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. FIG. 155 (a) is a front view of the back-rear decorative substrate, and FIG. 155 (b) is a rear view of the back-rear decorative substrate. FIG. 156 (a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 156 (b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a different form from that of (a). It is an enlarged cross-sectional view, and (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view which shows a part of the decorative body which had the metal decorative part of the form further different from (a) and (b).

As shown in FIG. 142 and the like, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction, and is provided with a decorative portion 3150 made of a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. More specifically, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is located in the left-right direction between the two first decorative portions 3151 provided near the left and right ends and the two first decorative portions 3151 in the front view. It has a plurality of second decorative portions 3152, which are arranged in a row. The first decoration section 3151 each imitates one cherry blossom. Further, although not shown, the second decorative portion 3152 imitates a predetermined character, and is arranged in rows on the left and right to form a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. ing. In this way, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is decorated with a logo between the two cherry blossoms.

As shown in FIGS. 142 to 146, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back-rear effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction and forms a part of the decorative portion 3150 by the unevenness of the relief shape. A transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 having a 3112, a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the decorative sheet 3112, and a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113 and mounted on the front surface. The back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the flat plate-shaped decorative base 3115 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the decorative body 3111 extending vertically on the left side. It includes a left slider 3116 and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111.

[5-9d-2. Back and rear movable decorative body decoration body]
The decorative body 3111 has a flat general surface on the front surface side and the rear surface side. The decorative body 3111 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a projecting forward from the general surface on the front side, a second decorative protrusion 3111b shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and protruding forward, and a second decorative protrusion 3111b. It has a third decorative protrusion 3111c, which is shorter than the portion 3111b and projects forward. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided at a portion serving as an outline of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The first decorative protrusion 3111a in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is formed at the outer periphery of the petals of the first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom, and the portion that imitates the central stamen and pistil, respectively. .. The first decorative protrusion 3111a in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 is formed so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the second decorative portions 3152 in a double (two rows). The first decorative protrusion 3111a is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

The second decorative protrusion 3111b is provided on the outside of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms and petals smaller than the first decorative protrusion 3151. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

The third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided in the frame of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the portion corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 is curved. Further, the front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the portion corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 is flat.

The first decorative protrusion 3111a and the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 form a part of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 in the decorative portion 3150.

Further, the decorative body 3111 has a metallic luster in a portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes forward from the second decorative protrusion 3111b (first foil pressing region (see FIG. 156 (a))). It has a metal decorative portion 3111d (a shaded portion having a dark shade in FIGS. 147 to 149). The entire decorative body 3111 except for the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed to be colorless and transparent. As shown in FIGS. 150 and 156 (a), the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment is provided on a curved front portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided. It is not provided on the side surface of the. As a result, the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is made longer than in the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is also provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is possible to improve the insulation against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d can give a high-class feeling. At the same time, the curvature of the metal decorative portion 3111d can further emphasize the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. As shown in FIG. 148 and the like, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided in the second decorative portion 3152 at a portion in front of the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the first LED 3114a and the light guide radiation plate 3113. The first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the above is made difficult to see from the front.

Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the light from the first LED 3114a or the like of the rear back decorative substrate 3114 is emitted by the back surface (rear surface) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. It can be reflected rearward to illuminate the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided behind, and the decoration of the decorative sheet 3112 (first contour portion 3112a) can be made more visible.

The metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by stamping a metal foil having a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by hot stamping. More specifically, first, an unfinished intermediate product of the decorative body 3111 is molded by injection molding of a synthetic resin. The intermediate product of the formed decorative body 3111 is attached to a predetermined position of the hot stamping device in a state where the front side on which the first decorative protrusion 3111a or the like protrudes faces upward. At this time, above the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat plate-shaped hot plate having elasticity on the lower surface side and heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged. .. Then, the hot plate is lowered from the upper end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111 to a position at a predetermined distance (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative protrusion 3111b) of the hot plate. The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (stamped) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed in the portion of the first foil pressing region FS1 above (front) of the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111 (see FIG. 156 (a)). ..

In the hot plate of the hot stamping apparatus used for forming the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment, the portion in contact with the decorative body 3111 which is the transfer destination of the metal foil of the transfer sheet has elasticity, so that the transfer destination ( Even if the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a) is not flat and curved, it can be elastically deformed along the surface, and the metal leaf is in good condition even on a three-dimensionally shaped part such as a curved surface. It can be transferred (pressed with foil) with. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily formed without requiring large-scale equipment as compared with the case of forming the metal decorative portion 3111d by plating or thin-film deposition, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d only at the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when forming the metal decorative protrusion 3111d by the hot stamping device, the hot plate is lowered to a position lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c, thereby causing the first decorative protrusion. A metal decorative portion 3111d can be provided at the tip portions of the portion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b to form the decorative body 3111.

Alternatively, with the unfinished intermediate product of the decorative body 3111 attached to the hot stamping device, first, a hot plate is formed using a transfer sheet having a metal leaf (first metal leaf) of a predetermined color. It is lowered to a position lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c (second foil stamping area FS2), and first at the tip portions of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b. Transfer the metal leaf. Subsequently, the hot plate is made lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b by using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) having a color different from that of the first metal foil. The second metal leaf is transferred to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a by lowering it to the position (first foil pressing region FS1) (see FIG. 156 (b)). As a result, the decorative body 3111 having different colored metal decorative portions 3111d is formed between the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b without masking the intermediate product of the decorative protrusion 3111. be able to.

Further, in the above embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil stamping), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after forming a metal film on the surface of the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 by plating or vapor deposition, the metal film of the portion excluding the first decorative protrusion 3111a is peeled off (laser peeling) by laser light. , The decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d may be formed on the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, as shown in FIG. 156 (c), the metal decorative portion 3111d may be provided on the side surface portion in addition to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a.

The decorative body 3111 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a rear concave portion 3111e that is recessed forward from the general surface on the rear surface side. The rear recess 3111e is provided so as to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. After that, the concave portion 3111e equalizes the plate thickness of the decorative body 3111 so that deformation due to sink marks of the resin during injection molding can be suppressed.

The rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be recessed forward in a portion corresponding to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c on the flat rear surface. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear recess 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a described later in the decorative sheet 3112. As a result, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 are in close contact with each other, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. The pattern or the like of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly visually recognized through the transparent decorative body 3111.

Further, since the rear recess 3111e is provided at a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, it is in front of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d described later in the decorative sheet 3112. It is provided at the site. As a result, a gap is formed between the rear recess 3111e and the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, the light radiated from the front to the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is emitted from the gap. , The front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e are diffusely reflected, and the portion of the rear recess 3111e becomes bright due to the light from the front. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are not emitted, the portions of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112 by the light from the front, that is, , The first decorative part 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the plurality of second decorative parts 3152 that make up the logo become brighter and easier to see from the front.

Further, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f protruding from the rear surface to the rear in a columnar shape. The mounting boss 3111f is for mounting the decorative body base 3115 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111. The mounting boss 3111f is provided at a portion directly behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c. As a result, the mounting boss 3111f is difficult to see from the front (player side) due to the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c. In other words, the third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided in the portion in front of the mounting boss 3111f, and the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Decorative sheet of movable decorative body after the back]
The decorative sheet 3112 is in the form of a thin sheet, and is formed in an outer shape having substantially the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 is a transparent resin sheet having a pattern on the back surface. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152, except for the rear portion of the second decorative protrusion 3111b of the decorative body 3111, and the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151. A second contour portion 3112b provided at a portion between the first contour portion 3112a and the first decorative protrusion 3111a corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 and formed in a double manner of the decorative body 3111. The first light diffusing portion 3112c provided in the portion inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 (the portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c) corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151, and the first (Ii) The second light provided in the part inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a (the part behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c) which corresponds to the decoration part 3152 and is provided in the double direction of the decoration body 3111. It has a diffusion unit 3112d and.

Further, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transparent portion 3112e provided in a portion of the decorative body 3111 behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Have.

As shown in FIG. 149 (b), the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a portion having a pattern imitating a cherry blossom smaller than the first decorative portion 3151, and the remaining portion has a portion. It is said to be the part where the interference fringes of light are displayed by the hologram. The first contour portion 3112a is formed opaquely. In the present embodiment, the portion of the hologram in the first contour portion 3112a is the same gold color as the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111. Further, the portion of the first contour portion 3112a that imitates a cherry blossom is colored using white or pink. In addition, the ink (paint) used for a pattern or the like may be an ink having glitter in the form of particles.

The first contour portion 3112a is located behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front, and is made of metal. Since it has a portion having the same color (gold in this embodiment) as the decorative portion 3111d, it is possible to impart continuity to the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d, and it is possible to make it difficult to feel the thinness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110.

Further, the rear surface side of the first contour portion 3112a is formed to be light gray or white. This improves the color development of the pattern and hologram on the front side. Further, since the light gray or white rear surface of the first contour portion 3112a can reflect the light radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 to the rear and return it to the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light guide radiation can be returned to the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the plate 3113 can be made to emit light brighter, the amount of light radiated forward from the translucent portion of the decorative sheet 3112 can be increased, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made to emit light more brightly. At the same time, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be more uniformly radiated and decorated.

Further, since the first contour portion 3112a is provided outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111, it is flat except for the rear recess 3111e on the rear surface of the decorative body 3111. It is provided behind the site. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into close contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a on the surface, so that light is emitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. There is no diffuse reflection, and the pattern or hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111.

As shown in the figure, the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed in the shape of a black line having a predetermined width. The second contour portion 3112b is located behind the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 between the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) provided on the double side of the decorative body 3111. That is, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the double-formed golden metal decorative portions 3111d, the black color of the second contour portion 3112b enhances the double metal decorative portion 3111d. The decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be further enhanced.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has translucency and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the first light diffusing portion 3112c is formed in a pear-skin-like pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in a random direction. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149 (b), at the site of the first light diffusing portion 3112c, in one petal of the cherry blossom flower modeled by the first decorative portion 3151, from the center to the periphery of the petal. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) toward the direction of the print. Therefore, when the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 for radiating light from the rear is made to emit light to the first light diffusing portion 3112c, it is slightly due to the satin-like pattern of the first light diffusing portion 3112c. The shades will appear, and it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the light-emitting decoration of the first decoration part 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom.

The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 has translucency and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. The second light diffusing portion 3112d is provided on the entire inside of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative portions 3152, as shown by light shading in FIGS. 147 to 149. Has been done. The second light diffusing portion 3112d has translucency and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. The plurality of fine irregularities forming the second light diffusing portion 3112d are formed in a halftone dot pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the present embodiment is formed in a translucent milky white color. Therefore, when the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 for radiating light from the rear is made to emit light to the second light diffusing portion 3112d, it is determined by the halftone dot pattern of the second light diffusing portion 3112d. The second decorative portion 3152 composed of the characters of can be light-emitting decorated with uniform brightness.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind the portion inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111, and the rear surface of the portion of the decorative body 3111. Is provided with a rear recess 3111e recessed forward. Therefore, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed in the front surface of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d due to the presence of the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111. It will be in the state of being done. Due to the gap, the light radiated from the front to the portion of the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is diffusely reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the first light is generated by the light from the front. The diffuser 3112c and the second light diffuser 3112d become brighter. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are not emitted, the portions of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112 by the light from the front, that is, , The first decorative part 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the plurality of second decorative parts 3152 that make up the logo become brighter and easier to see from the front.

The decorative sheet 3112 forms a predetermined pattern by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d, and decorates the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. It constitutes the rest excluding the decoration by the decorative body 3111 in the part 3150. In the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment, the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d are provided on the rear surface side of the transparent sheet as a base. There is. The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. Further, the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by attaching a predetermined light diffusing film (diffuser film). The first light diffusing unit 3112c and the second light diffusing unit 3112d may be used as a lens film or a prism film.

The transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed transparently. Since the transmissive portion 3112e is provided behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the light emitting from the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 causes the light guide radiation plate 3113 to emit light. A part of the light radiated forward can be transmitted to irradiate the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metal decorative protrusion 3111d is provided only on the front side, and the side surface side remains transparent. Therefore, the first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided from the rear through the transparent portion 3112e. The light radiated to the surface leaks to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration as if a halo is shining on the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) by the light transmitted through the transmitting portion 3112e. Further, the light transmitted from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a through the transmission portion 3112e and radiated to the outside may illuminate the first contour portion 3112a located outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a from the front. Therefore, the pattern or hologram provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be made easier to see, and the decorative effect of the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exhibited.

Since the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated by the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or a hologram. The decoration of the movable decorative body 3110 after the back can be made to look large. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered, so that the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the appearance position. At that time, by displaying an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 on the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear, it is possible to show the player an effect with a sense of unity. It is possible to give a person a visual impact and attract attention, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain a large decoration, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

In the decorative sheet 3112 of the above embodiment, a transparent transparent portion 3112e is provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) of the decorative body 3111, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, the first contour portion 3112a may be provided in a portion behind the metal decorative portion 3111d. As a result, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed diagonally from the front, the rear side can be seen through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transparent portion 3112e in the decorative sheet 3112. It is possible to prevent the decorative portion 3150 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 from being unsightly. Further, by providing the first contour portion 3112a up to the portion behind the metal decorative portion 3111d, the first decorative protrusion in the first contour portion 3112a is passed through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a can be seen, the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated by the portion of the first contour portion 3112a, and the metal decorative protrusion 3111d is the first decorative protrusion. Even if it is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiation plate of movable decoration after back]
As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the light guide emitting plate 3113 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body portion 3113a extending to the left and right, a flange portion 3113b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3113a, and a main body. A plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c that penetrate the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and into which the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is inserted, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 that penetrates the main body portion 3113a in the front-rear direction. A plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d into which the second LED 3114b is inserted, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and a first LED accommodating portion on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. It has a leg portion 3113f projecting rearward from the peripheral edge of the 3113c, and an auxiliary reflection portion 3113g provided along the rear end side of the leg portion 3113f opposite to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. ..

Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the front view right end of the main body portion 3113a.

The front surface of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiating plate 3113 to which the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112 abuts is formed flat. The flange portion 3113b protrudes rearward by about 1.5 times the thickness of the main body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3113b has a rear end protruding rearward from the back rear decorative substrate 3114 in a state of being assembled to the back rear movable decorative body 3110.

The inner peripheral shape of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is formed to be rectangular. As shown in FIG. 148, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided behind the low-transparency portion of the decorative portion 3150 when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. More specifically, in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151, a plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided behind the portion in the first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 where the pink shades are darkened by dots. ing. More specifically, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c provided in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is located on the center side of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms. The center of the long side of the rectangular inner circumference is provided so as to be located on the center line of the petals.

On the other hand, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c provided in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 are provided so as to be located behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. Has been done. For this reason, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c (first LED 3114a) are difficult to see from the front.

Further, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decorative portion 3152 at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152. Further, when the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are close to each other to some extent, the first LED accommodating portions 3113c are connected to each other as shown in FIGS. 149 (c) and 153 (c). It is formed in a state of being. By connecting the first LED accommodating portions 3113c that are close to each other, it is possible to prevent the formation of a portion thinner than the thickness of the main body portion 3113a, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 is damaged. It can be difficult.

By the way, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c has a rectangular inner circumference and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a (inside the plate thickness) reaches the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, the light is emitted. A part is reflected straight to the inside of the main body 3113a by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, and the rest passes through the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c to the first LED accommodating portion. It will be radiated to the inside of 3113c. Then, when the light radiated from one of the four surfaces of the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c reaches another surface of the inner peripheral surface, a part of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is formed on that surface. It reflects inward and the rest is incident on the inside of the main body 3113a. That is, inside the main body 3113a, the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body 3113a radiates to the inside of the first LED housing 3113c when it tries to pass through the first LED housing 3113c. Since a part of the light is reflected at the portion of the inner peripheral surface and the portion of the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that is incident on the main body portion 3113a side, the light that has passed through the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. The amount of light in the light will be greatly reduced as compared with before passing through.

Therefore, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can block the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a. Since the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is accommodated inside the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, the light trying to pass through the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can be blocked by the first LED 3114a. At the site where the first LED 3114a is housed, light does not pass to the opposite side of the first LED housing part 3113c. As a result, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at an optimum position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decorative portion 3152, the light from the first LED 3114a accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can be generated. It is possible to prevent the light emission decoration from being guided to another second decoration portion 3152, and it is possible to reliably emit light decoration only the desired second decoration portion 3152 in the plurality of second decoration portions 3152. ..

More specifically, the operation of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c as described above will be described in more detail. For example, as shown in FIG. A first LED accommodating portion 3113c is provided on the outer periphery of each of the second decorative portions 3152, and light is emitted toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152 in each of the first LED accommodating portions 3113c. The first LED 3114a is provided so as to be used. In this embodiment, since the first LED accommodating portions 3113c provided between "i" and "ro" and between "ro" and "ha" are close to each other, they are connected to each other. It is one hole. As a result, a thin portion that is easily damaged is not formed in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Further, in this embodiment, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the first LED 3114a for illuminating and decorating the “☆” arranged below the “I” are provided under the “☆”. Therefore, if the first LED 3114a for luminescent decoration of "☆" is made to emit light, the "i" provided above the "☆" may be luminescently decorated, but it is provided at the upper left of the "☆". The first LED accommodating portion 3113c in which the first LED 3114a for illuminating and decorating a part of the "i" is provided with an extending portion 3113j extending so as to cover the upper part of the "☆". ing. With this extending portion 3113j, it is possible to reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for illuminating and decorating the "☆" from being guided to the "I" side. As a result, even if "☆" is luminescently decorated, "i" is not luminescently decorated. Further, it is possible to reduce (block) the light for illuminating and decorating the "i" to be guided to the "☆" side by the extending portion 3113j. Only the desired second decorative portion 3152 such as "i" or "☆" can be reliably luminescently decorated, and the desired effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the inner circumference of the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is formed in a circular shape. The plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d are provided behind the five circular portions imitating the stamens provided around the center in the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom. More specifically, the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided behind each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom, behind a circular portion imitating a stamen located on the centerline of the petals. As a result, in each of the five petals, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are provided one by one on the center line of the petals.

The second LED accommodating portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a (inside the plate thickness) reaches the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the light is emitted. A part of the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 3113a so as to diffuse in a fan shape. In the present embodiment, since the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a in each of the five petals in the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom, FIG. 153 (b) shows. As shown, the light radiated from the first LED 3114a to the inside of the main body 3113a is reflected in a fan shape toward the first LED 3114a by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED accommodating portion 3113d. Light can make the petals brighter and more luminescent.

One of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e is formed in a square pyramid, and is arranged in a row so as to be continuous in the vertical and horizontal directions. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e exclude a portion of the flange portion 3113b on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, a portion around the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, and a portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed on almost the entire surface. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e can mainly reflect the light radiated in the direction along the plate surface forward within the plate thickness of the main body portion 3113a and radiate it from the front surface of the main body portion 3113a to the front. The light guide radiating plate 3113 of the present embodiment is formed so that the rear is difficult to see when viewed from the front due to the presence of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e.

Further, since the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide emitting plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, light can be radiated forward from the substantially entire surface, so that the model can be changed or designed. Even if the design of the decorative portion 3150 by the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 is changed due to the change or the like, it is not necessary to change the light guide radiating plate 3113, and it is possible to easily respond to the design change and the cost. Can be suppressed from increasing.

The leg portion 3113f projects rearward from the rear end side of the portion facing the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to be inserted on the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the leg portion 3113f is provided with a surface on the first LED accommodating portion 3113c side on the same surface as the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. As a result, the area of the light receiving portion 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body portion 3113a can be widened, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be irradiated into the main body portion 3113a. Can be done. Further, when the legs 3113f are assembled to the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear surface abuts on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and a gap is provided between the rear surface of the main body 3113a and the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Can be formed.

The auxiliary reflection portion 3113g is provided in a C chamfer shape along the side opposite to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at the rear end of the leg portion 3113f. The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is for reflecting the light radiated from the first LED 3114a to the leg portion 3113f forward.

The right slider front portion 3113h is for forming the right slider 3117 in cooperation with the right slider rear portion 3115d described later of the decorative body base 3115.

When the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is assembled to the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the flange portion 3113b covers the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, the flange portion 3113b covers the outer circumference of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The surface can be made difficult to see, and it is possible to prevent the appearance from becoming unattractive. Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flange portion 3113b protruding rearward from the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the back-rear decorative substrate is provided from the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. The creepage distance EL to 3114 (copper foil 3114d and electronic component 3114e) can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is damaged. It is possible to prevent it from being radiated.

In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment, since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are holes penetrating the main body portion 3113a, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. The heat from the second LED 3114b housed in the LED 3114a and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d can be released to the front of the main body portion 3113a, and the thermal influence on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

Further, since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are through holes, the front side of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is blocked by the decorative sheet 3112, the decorative body 3111, or the like. Even if it is, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion are compared with the case where the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are formed in a bottomed concave shape (groove shape). The volume (heat capacity) of the 3113d can be increased. As a result, it is possible to alleviate a rapid temperature rise due to heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed therein, and it is possible to suppress the thermal influence on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and the like. Further, in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c which is close to each other and is connected to each other and the first LED accommodating portion 3113c having the extending portion 3113j, the volume of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is large. For the same reason as described above, it is possible to dissipate more heat from the first LED 3114a and further alleviate a rapid temperature rise.

Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED accommodating portion 3113c and a second LED accommodating portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a is as close as possible to the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

Further, since the light guide radiating plate 3113 has the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f is brought into contact with the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114. A gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. As a result, heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be released through the gap, and the temperature rise in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is suppressed to be affected by the heat. Can be reduced. It should be noted that the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the substrate main body 3114c of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is set to "half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a" to "from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the first. It is desirable that the distance is within the range of "a distance to the front surface of the LED 3114a". This is because if the gap is smaller than this, heat may not be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Further, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident on the main body 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113 from the first LED 3114a decreases, so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a risk that it will not be possible to decorate it.

Further, the light guide radiating plate 3113 guides the light from the first LED 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and is forward by the reflecting portion 3113e on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. Since it can be radiated to, the light from the first LED 3114a can be radiated forward even in a portion of the main body 3113a where the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is not provided. In other words, even if the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is made smaller than the size of the main body 3113a, light can be radiated forward from substantially the entire surface of the main body 3113a. Therefore, since the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made smaller than the main body 3113a, the distance between the outer circumference of the main body 3113a and the outer circumference of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made longer, and the decorative body 3111 can be made longer. The creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface can be made longer to make it easier to exert the above-mentioned effects.

[5-9d-5. Back-back decorative board of movable decorative body]
A plurality of side-view type first LEDs 3114a and a plurality of top-view type second LEDs 3114b are mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 includes a flat plate-shaped substrate main body 3114c, a copper foil 3114d (see FIG. 154 and the like) provided on the front surface and the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, respectively, to form a predetermined circuit pattern, and a substrate. It has an electronic component 3114e (see FIG. 155 (b)) such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface of the main body 3114c.

Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has a coating film (not shown) made of white solder resist on the surface excluding the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like. Further, although not shown, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is a notation unit indicating the mounted component in the vicinity of the mounted component such as the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, which are mounted. have. The notation portion is provided by silk printing from above the coating film in a predetermined color (for example, yellow) that is inconspicuous.

The back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner circumference of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and has a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b between the back and rear decorative substrate 3114 and the flange portion 3113b. It is formed to a size that is formed substantially constant. Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner circumference of the flange portion 3115b in the decorative body base 3115 described later, and a slight gap is substantially formed between the outer peripheral shape and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3115b. It is formed to a size that is constantly formed. That is, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is formed to have a size accommodated inside the flange portion 3115b in the decorative body base 3115.

At the site of the first decorative portion 3151 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, as shown in FIG. 152 and the like, on the center line of each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom, the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111a It is provided so that light is emitted toward the center of the flower near the tip inside the (metal decorative portion 3111d). As a result, each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom can be luminescently decorated by the first LED 3114a of the portion of the first decoration portion 3151.

Further, in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, in each of the second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right, the first decorative protrusions provided in double on the decorative body 3111 are provided. Near the rear of the 3111a, the light is provided so as to be emitted toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152. As a result, the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right can be light-lit and decorated one by one by the first LED 3114a of the portion of the second decorative portion 3152.

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are central portions that imitate cherry blossoms in the first decorative portion 3151, and are circular portions that imitate stamens located on the center lines of the five petals. It is provided at the rear. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a corresponding to one petal imitating a cherry blossom in the first decorative portion 3151. As a result, the second LED 3114b can illuminate and decorate each of the five portions of the first decorative portion 3151 that imitate the stamens of the central portion.

Since the second LED 3114b is a top view type capable of irradiating light toward the front, when the second LED 3114b is made to emit light, the portion imitating the stamen in the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is formed from other portions. It can also emit light with high brightness, which can strongly attract the attention of the player. Therefore, in the light emitting decoration of the decorative portion 3150, a portion that emits light in a planar manner by the first LED 3114a and a portion that emits light in a dot shape by the second LED 3114b can be provided. It is possible to perform a variety of light emission effects, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

The substrate main body 3114c is a rigid substrate whose thickness is slightly thinner than that of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The substrate main body 3114c of the present embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the substrate main body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to have a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and forms a circuit pattern by an etching process (shaded portion in FIG. 154). As shown in FIG. 154, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is separated from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (SL = 1 mm in this embodiment) inward. ing. By this predetermined distance SL, the creepage distance EL and the space distance from the external conductive member of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 (for example, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111) to the copper foil 3114d are gained, and static electricity or the like is discharged. Insulation against short circuits can be improved, and damage to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 due to electric discharge or the like can be suppressed.

Further, the outer peripheral edge of the copper foil 3114d is provided from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c to a portion inside a predetermined distance regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, and the area of the copper foil 3114d is provided. Is as wide as possible. As a result, a part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e can be transferred to the copper foil 3114d to dissipate heat from the copper foil 3114d, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be dissipated. , And the cooling effect on the electronic component 3114e can be enhanced to prevent damage due to heat.

Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has a predetermined size for easily reflecting the light radiated from the first LED 3114a to the substrate main body 3114c side on the light emitting surface side of the side view type first LED 3114a on the front side. It has a light reflection auxiliary region 3114f (a region surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 154). As shown in FIGS. 151 and 153 (a), the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of the present embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d. As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted. (1) The angle of the light emitted from the LED 3114a into the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is such that the angle approaches the vertical line on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c, so that the light emitted to the substrate main body 3114c side can be easily reflected forward. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 153 (a) and the like, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided so that the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f. Since the contact is made, the leg portion 3113f can be lengthened rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be enlarged, and the light (amount of light) radiated forward from the light guide emitting plate 3113 is increased to increase the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111). And the decorative sheet 3112) can be decorated with light emission brighter.

Further, in the light reflection assisting region 3114f, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is brought into contact with the rear end (see FIG. 153 (a) and the like). As a result, even if the coating film (solder resist) applied to the surface due to the contact of the leg portion 3113f is worn or rolled up, only the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c is exposed, and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. There is no such thing. Therefore, the insulation property is lowered by the exposure of the copper foil 3114d, and damage due to a short circuit such as static electricity can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 of the present embodiment is assembled on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 to form a flange portion 3115b to be described later of the decorative body base 3115 and a flange portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113. With 3113b, the outer peripheral surface is double-enclosed, so that the outer peripheral surface is difficult to see from the outside, and deterioration of the appearance is prevented. Further, in the state where the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is assembled on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. The flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 is inserted from the rear into the gap between the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange portion 3113b, and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the decorative substrate 3114 on the back side is the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since it meanders so as to wrap around, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is damaged. Can be prevented. In this embodiment, the creepage distance EL is set to a distance that can correspond to an emission voltage of 10 mm or more or 10 kV.

Further, since the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the member provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 by the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 (in the present embodiment). The light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 from being irradiated with the light from the staging display device 1600 or the like provided at the rear, so that the decorative portion 3150 is light-emitting and decorated in an unintended state. It is possible to prevent it from being lost, and it is possible to reliably perform a desired light emission effect on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. Further, since the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiating plate 3113, it is possible to prevent the rear from being seen through the light guide radiating plate 3113 by the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back-rear movable decoration. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110.

Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b accommodated from the rear with respect to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113 on the front surface. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is as close as possible to the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. The thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has an electronic component 3114e such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface. Since the LED driver IC and the resistor as the electronic component 3114e are generally black components, the black electronic component 3114e cannot be seen from the front by providing the electronic component 3114e on the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to improve the appearance of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. Further, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 which cannot be seen from the front, it is not necessary to apply a paint having a color such as white to make the electronic component 3114e difficult to see. The cost of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

[5-9d-6. Decorative base of movable decorative body after the back]
The decorative body base 3115 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The decorative body base 3115 penetrates the flat plate-shaped covering plate portion 3115a that covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the flange portion 3115b that protrudes forward from the outer peripheral edge of the covering plate portion 3115a, and the covering plate portion 3115a. It is provided with a plurality of openings 3115c, and a right slider rear portion 3115d extending downward from the front view right end of the covering plate portion 3115a.

The outer peripheral shape of the covering plate portion 3115a has a shape substantially along the inner circumference of the flange portion 3113b in the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed substantially constant between the covering plate portion 3115a and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3113b. It is formed in a large size. That is, the covering plate portion 3115a (decorative body base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b in the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the covering plate portion 3115a covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, it is possible to prevent other members from coming into contact with the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 from the rear and protect the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to prevent the decorative substrate 3114 from being damaged after the back.

As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3115b enters the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the front end is forward of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Is protruding so that The flange portion 3115b is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 from the outside, and improving the appearance. Further, since the flange portion 3115b is in a state of being assembled in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, it is inserted in the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The shortest route from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the decorative substrate 3114 on the back side can be meandered around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Out. Therefore, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d can be prevented from flowing to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and damaging the back-rear decorative substrate 3114.

The plurality of openings 3115c have a slit-shaped portion that is long to the left and right and a portion that is larger than the slit-shaped portion. The plurality of openings 3115c allow heat from the electronic component 3114e mounted on the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 to escape to the outside of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and the heat effect on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Can be reduced.

The right slider rear portion 3115d is for forming the right slider 3117 in cooperation with the right slider front portion 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113.

Further, the decorative body base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e slightly protruding from the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a. The plurality of protrusions 3115e are arranged so as to come into contact with a portion of the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 where the copper foil 3114d is not provided near the outer peripheral edge. The plurality of protrusions 3115e can form a gap between the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a by abutting the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on the front surface thereof. .. As a result, heat from the electronic component 3114e can be easily dissipated through the gap between the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main effects of the movable back and back decoration body]
Subsequently, the main functions and effects of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the present embodiment will be described. The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the present embodiment sandwiches the decorative sheet 3112 between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and also sandwiches the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body. It is assembled by attaching the mounting boss 3111f of the decorative body 3111 to the decorative body base 3115 with the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 sandwiched between the base 3115 and the base (see FIG. 143 and the like). As a result, the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction is made relatively thin.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c projecting forward on the transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111. Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has a first contour portion 3112a having a hologram on which a pattern or light interference fringes are displayed, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided. The first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c can give a three-dimensional effect, and the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c provide a lens effect. And a hologram can give a sense of depth. As a result, even if the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction is thin, the player does not feel the thinness, and the decorative effect of the decorative portion 3150 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is sufficient. It can be demonstrated and entertained by the player.

Further, as described above, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, the first contour portion 3112a, and the like can give a three-dimensional effect and a sense of depth. The thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner. As a result, the space required for installing the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be increased, and it becomes a more effective part inside the game board 5. By providing the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, it is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player. Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner, it is possible to relatively easily secure a space for arranging other decorative bodies. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good, and a pachinko machine 1 that can be enjoyed in various productions. can do.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative portion 3111d made of metal leaf on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. Therefore, the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d makes the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 stand out, and can strongly attract the interest of the player. Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the metal decorative portion 3111d and to give a high-class feeling. As a result, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves from the retracted position invisible to the player to the visible appearance position, the high-class decorative portion 3150 can be seen, which gives the player a premium feeling. Because it is possible to give the player a strong feeling that there may be something good for the player, it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flattened and the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the outer circumference of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or a hologram is used. , The outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated, and the decoration of the movable decorative body 3110 after the back can be made to look large. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in a state where the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear displays an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, thereby creating a unified effect. It can be shown to the person, can give the player an visual impact and attract attention, and can entertain the large decoration, and can suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112, the metal decorative portion 3111d and the first LED 3114a are provided. The two contour portions 3112b can make the first LED 3114a difficult to see from the front, and can suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 and sufficiently exert the decorative effect.

Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 3114a so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152, the first decorative portion 3151 is provided. And the second decoration part 3152 can be individually luminescently decorated. As a result, it is possible to sequentially illuminate a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right, or to illuminate only a specific first decorative portion 3151 or a second decorative portion 3152. By appropriately illuminating the first decorative section 3151 and the plurality of second decorative sections 3152, it is possible to show the player a variety of light emitting effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the deterioration of the interest. can.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a plurality of side-view type first LEDs 3114a after irradiating light in the plate thickness of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 in a direction along the surface thereof. Since the light is radiated forward by the reflecting portion 3113e of the above to radiate and decorate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the light from the first LED is radiated from the front surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113 to the front. Can increase the distance to. As a result, the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and radiated forward from the light guide emitting plate 3113. Therefore, even if the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is thin in the front-rear direction, the decorative body 3111 And the decorative sheet 3112 can be evenly and uniformly luminescently decorated, and the luminescent decoration with good appearance can entertain the player. Further, since the light guide radiating plate 3113 and the side view type first LED 3114a can uniformly illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be increased. It can be made thinner, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied.

Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 uses the first LED 3114a as a side-view type for planar light emission and the second LED 3114b as a top-view type, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative portion 3150). ), It is possible to add a portion that emits light with high brightness in a dot shape to the portion that is light-emitting decorated in a plane shape by the first LED 3114a. As a result, the light emission of the second LED 3114b can give a sharp impression to the light emission effect, so that it is possible to easily present the optimum light emission effect according to the game state, and the player can be more entertained and the game can be played. It is possible to raise the expectation for the player and suppress the decline in the interest of the player.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a first LED accommodating portion 3113c into which the side view type first LED 3114a is inserted in the light guide emitting plate 3113, and receives light on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. The portion 3113i is irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a so that the light is incident on the inside of the main body portion 3113a. As a result, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at a position close to the desired portion to be light-emitting and decorated by the first LED 3114a, the desired portion can be light-emitting and decorated more brightly. The high LED decoration can be entertained by the player.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear into the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since it has the accommodating portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a is backed to the front surface of the decorative substrate 3114 by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d. The thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner in the front-rear direction.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 abuts on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and is between the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Since a gap is formed in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be released through the gap, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 It is possible to suppress the temperature rise and reduce the influence of heat. It should be noted that the gap between the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the substrate main body 3114c of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is set to "half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a" to "the substrate". It is desirable that the distance is within the range of "the distance from the front surface of the main body 3114c to the front surface of the first LED 3114a". This is because if the gap is smaller than this, heat may not be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Further, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident on the main body 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113 from the first LED 3114a decreases, so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a risk that it will not be possible to decorate it.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can form a gap between the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 by the leg portion 3113f, and has a plurality of openings in the decorative body base 3115. Since the portion 3115c is provided, the surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated through the gap and the opening 3115c by raising and lowering the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, And the heat from the electronic component 3114e and the like can be dissipated to suppress the temperature rise of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114.

A temperature sensor is provided on the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and when the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (back-rear decorative substrate 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 moves up and down. May be made to increase the frequency (probability) of execution. As a result, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be moved up and down to ventilate the surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be cooled to suppress the occurrence of defects due to heat.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 from the rear side by the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, and the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b is surrounded by the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by a flange portion 3113b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the metal leaf provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is guided by the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since it meanders around the flange portion 3113b of the plate 3113, it is possible to obtain a long creepage distance EL, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 to cause the back-rear decorative substrate. It is possible to prevent the 3114 from being damaged.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit is provided in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 at a position separated from the outer periphery of the substrate main body 3114c to the inside of the SL by a predetermined distance. Even with this predetermined distance SL, the creepage distance EL and the space distance can be lengthened, the insulation against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit can be enhanced, and damage to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Not. As a result, the creepage distance EL to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be lengthened by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decorative portion 3111d is larger than that in the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It can be made smaller, and the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d can be reduced. Therefore, since the discharge voltage can be lowered, even if a discharge occurs in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the influence thereof can be reduced.

By the way, as described above, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down (movable) between the retracted position moved upward and the appearance position moved downward by the drive of the rear-rear drive motor 3126. Therefore, friction occurs in the left slider 3116, the right slider 3117, and the like each time the vehicle is moved up and down, and the static electricity generated by the friction is likely to be accumulated on the surface of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 constituting the surface of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 are made of synthetic resin having low conductivity, even if a large amount of static electricity is accumulated, their surfaces are formed. It is difficult for the static electricity accumulated in the whole to be discharged at once. On the other hand, since the metal decorative portion 3111d made of the metal foil of the decorative body 3111 has high conductivity, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decorative portion 3111d is easily discharged at once. For this reason, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the present embodiment, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111, but as described above, from the metal decorative portion 3111d. Since the creepage distance EL to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is sufficiently long, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is not damaged by the discharge of static electricity, and the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 moves up and down and the back-rear movable decoration body 3110. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be enjoyed both with a light emitting effect in which the 3110 is light-emitting and decorated.

When the area of the metal decorative portion 3111d where static electricity is accumulated is a predetermined area or more (for example, 100 cm2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decorative portion 3111d to the GND (ground). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from being discharged to the decorative substrate 3114 after the backing.

[5-9d-8. Another embodiment of the back-back movable ornament]
Next, with respect to the back-rear movable decoration 3160, the back-rear movable decoration 3170, the back-rear movable decoration 3180, and the like, which are different from the above-mentioned back-rear movable decoration 3110, mainly with reference to FIG. 157. It will be explained in detail. FIG. 157 (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross-sectional view of the configuration of the back-rear movable decorative body of the second embodiment, which is different from the back-rear movable decoration body of FIG. 142, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the decorative body in the cross section, and (c) is the explanatory view which shows the structure of the back-rear movable decorative body of 4th Embodiment by the cross section.

As shown schematically in FIG. 157 (a), the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 of the second embodiment is provided behind the decorative body 3161 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and the rear side of the decorative body 3161. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3162 with a predetermined decoration, a light guide radiation plate 3163 provided behind the decorative sheet 3162 and radiating light in a direction along the front surface forward, and a light guide radiation plate. It includes a back-rear decorative substrate 3164 on which a plurality of LEDs 3164a that irradiate the inside of the 3163 with light in a direction along the front surface are mounted on the front surface.

The decorative body 3161 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 has a transparent flat plate-shaped main body portion 3161a, a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3161a, and a metal provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a. It has a decorative portion 3161c and. The main body portion 3161a may be flat or may be decorated in a relief shape with irregularities. The metal decoration portion 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3161a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3161c may be formed by stamping foil, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by thin film deposition.

The decorative sheet 3162 is a transparent sheet on which a predetermined decoration (picture) is printed. In this decorative sheet 3162, a portion having low transparency in decoration is located in a portion in front of LED3164a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed in a size smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161b in the decorative body 3161.

The light guide radiating plate 3163 is formed in a flat plate shape having the same size as the decorative sheet 3162, and has an LED accommodating portion 3163a into which the LED3164a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of rear surfaces provided. It has a reflecting portion 3163b and. The LED accommodating portion 3163a is a hole penetrating the light guide emitting plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference is formed in a quadrangle along the outer circumference of the LED 3164a. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is recessed forward in a triangular cross section, and is provided only at a predetermined portion. The plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are provided so as to reflect the light from the determined LED accommodating portion 3163a forward, and are arranged in a concentric fan shape centered on the determined LED accommodating portion 3163a. .. That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b can reflect light from an unspecified direction forward, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide emitting plate 3113 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. It may be provided on almost the entire surface of the rear surface.

The back-rear decorative substrate 3164 is formed to have the same size as the decorative sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163. A plurality of side-view type LEDs 3164a, which are inserted from the rear into the LED accommodating portion 3163a of the light guide emitting plate 3163, are mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164. Although not shown, the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed by copper foil at a portion inside the SL at a predetermined distance from the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 on the front surface and the rear surface. Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 has a coating film made of a white solder resist formed on the surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 of the present embodiment, the decorative sheet 3162 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161, and the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163 is attached to the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162. Is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 is in contact with the rear surface. As a result, the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 in the front-rear direction is thin. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164. As a result, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer periphery of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 is covered with the flange portion 3161b, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surfaces thereof from the outside. It looks good.

In this back-rear movable decorative body 3160, since the flange portion 3161b extends rearward from the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164, the metal decorative portion on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a. The creepage distance EL from 3161c to the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 (copper foil) can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3161c flows to the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 to perform the back-rear decoration. It is possible to prevent the substrate 3164 from being damaged.

As described above, according to the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 of the present embodiment, the same action and effect as the above-mentioned back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be obtained. In the back-rear movable decorative body 3160, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 may be provided.

Subsequently, the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 of the third embodiment has the outer decorative body 3171 formed in a frame shape and the inner side (frame) of the outer decorative body 3171 as schematically shown in FIG. 157 (b). A flat plate-shaped interior decoration body 3172 that closes the inside), and a light guide radiation plate 3173 that is provided behind the interior decoration body 3172 and radiates light in a direction along the entire surface forward. The back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 3174a mounted on the front surface to irradiate the inside of the light guide radiation plate 3173 with light in a direction along the front surface.

The outer decorative body 3171 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 has a main body portion 3171a that is frame-shaped and extends back and forth, a support portion 3171b that protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 3171a in a flat plate shape, and a main body portion 3171a. It has a metal decorative portion 3171c provided on the front surface of the above. The distance from the front end of the main body portion 3171a to the front surface of the support portion 3171b is the same as the thickness of the interior decoration body 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration portion 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3171a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3171c may be formed by stamping foil, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by thin film deposition.

Although not shown, the interior decoration body 3172 is formed with a relief-like decoration having irregularities. The inner decorative body 3172 is attached so as to close the opening on the front side of the frame-shaped outer decorative body 3171.

The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have substantially the same size as the interior decoration body 3172. The light guide radiating plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiating plate 3173 has an LED accommodating portion 3173a into which the LED 3174a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of reflecting portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED accommodating portion 3173a is a hole penetrating the light guide emitting plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference is formed in a quadrangle along the outer circumference of the LED 3174a. The reflecting portions 3173b extend in an arc shape around the determined LED accommodating portion 3173a, and are provided in a plurality of concentric circles. The reflective portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. The plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are provided so as to reflect the light from the LED accommodating portion 3173a, which is determined by each, forward. That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b can reflect light from an unspecified direction forward, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide emitting plate 3113 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. It may be provided on almost the entire surface of the rear surface.

The back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is formed to have the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173. A plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a, which are inserted from the rear into the LED accommodating portion 3173a of the light guide emitting plate 3173, are mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174. Although not shown, the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed by copper foil at a portion inside the SL at a predetermined distance from the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 on the front surface and the rear surface. Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 has a coating film made of a white solder resist formed on the surface (both sides).

In the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, in the assembled state, the inner decorative body 3172 is fitted from the front into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171, and the front surface of the outer decorative body 3171 and the front surface of the inner decorative body 3172. The vicinity of the outer periphery of the rear surface of the interior decoration 3172 is in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3170, the light guide radiating plate 3173 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 are inserted from the rear into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171, and the light guide radiating plate 3173 is inserted on the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact, and the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As a result, the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 in the front-rear direction is thin. In the back-rear movable decorative body 3170, a gap having a thickness of the support portion 3171b is formed between the inner decorative body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173.

The main body portion 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174. In the back-rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is covered with the main body portion 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171, and the outer peripheral surfaces thereof are covered from the outside. It makes it hard to see and makes it look good.

Since the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 covers the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 by the main body portion 3171a extending to the rear of the outer decorative body 3171, the metal decorative portion 3171c on the front surface of the main body portion 3171a is used. The creepage distance EL to the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 (copper foil) can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3171c flows to the back-rear decorative substrate 3174, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 Can be prevented from being damaged.

As described above, according to the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, the same action and effect as the above-mentioned back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be obtained. A metal decorative portion may also be provided on the front surface of the internal decorative body 3172. Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3170, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 may be provided.

Subsequently, the back-rear movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment has the outer decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape and the inner side (frame) of the outer decorative body 3181 as schematically shown in FIG. 157 (c). A translucent interior decoration body 3182 that closes the inside) and a back-rear decorative substrate 3183 on which a plurality of LEDs 3183a provided behind the interior decoration body 3182 and capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front surface. And have.

The outer decorative body 3181 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3180 includes a flat plate frame-shaped main body portion 3181a, a flange portion 3181b extending rearward from the outer circumference of the main body portion 3181a, and the entire surface of the main body portion 3181a and the flange portion 3181b. It has a metal decorative portion 3181c that covers it. The metal decorative portion 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the outer decorative body 3181. The metal decorative portion 3181c may be formed by plating or may be formed by thin film deposition.

The interior decoration body 3182 is formed of a transparent member. The inner decorative body 3182 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 3182a whose outer shape is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body portion 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3181b, and the outer peripheral portion 3182a to the rear. It has a flange portion 3182b extending to the surface and a flange portion 3182b. Although not shown, the main body portion 3182a is formed with a relief-like decoration having irregularities on substantially the entire surface.

The back-rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed to have an outer shape smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b in the inner decorative body 3182. That is, the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed in such a size that a gap of a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer periphery and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. A plurality of top view type LEDs 3183a are mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3183. Although not shown, the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed by copper foil at a portion inside the SL at a predetermined distance from the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 on the front surface and the rear surface. Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 has a coating film made of a white solder resist formed on the surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the back-rear movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, the inner decorative body 3182 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 are inserted into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decorative body 3181 from the rear. In the back-rear movable decorative body 3180, the front surface near the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181, and the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is the outer decorative body 3181. It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 is covered with the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. In other words, the outer periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is covered with the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181. Therefore, the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 hides the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 from the outside.

In the back-rear movable decorative body 3180, the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is provided inside the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 provided with the metal decorative portion 3181c, and the inner decorative body 3182 is provided with the flange portion 3182b. Since the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body 3182a is separated from the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182, the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 (copper) is separated from the metal decorative portion 3181c. The creepage distance EL to the foil) can be set to a sufficient distance to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3181c from flowing to the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 and damaging the back-rear decorative substrate 3183. can do.

As described above, according to the back-rear movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, the same action and effect as the back-back movable decorative body 3110 can be obtained. A metal decorative portion may also be provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3182a of the internal decorative body 3182. Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3180, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 may be provided.

[5-9e. Back bottom left production unit and back bottom right production unit]
Next, the back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 158 to 161 and the like. FIG. 158 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 158 (b) shows the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit behind. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 160 shows the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 161 is an explanatory view showing the movable configuration of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit from the front.

The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the back rear effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250 are located on the left and right sides of the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and are located on both the left and right sides of the lower back middle decorative unit 3320. It is visible through a transparent game panel 1100, a front unit 2000, and the like.

First, the back lower left staging unit 3200 will be described. The lower back left effect unit 3200 is provided behind the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 having a translucent lower left rotating decorative body 3201a having a shaft shaft 3201a protruding rearward, and the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201. The lower back left decorative board 3202, which is provided behind the lower back left decorative body 3202 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the rear lower left decorative board 3203 The lower back left decorative body 3201 is rotatably attached and the lower back left decorative body 3202 is attached to the unit base 3204 attached to the lower end of the left side of the back lower left decorative unit 3100. , Is equipped.

Further, the lower back left effect unit 3200 is attached to the lower back left drive motor 3205 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3204 so that the rotary shaft projects rearward, and the lower back left drive motor 3205. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3206 and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3207, which are meshed with the drive gear 3206 and are rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, are meshed with the first transmission gear 3207. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3208 rotatably attached to the unit base 3204 and the second transmission gear 3208 are meshed with each other and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3201a of the lower back left rotation decorative body 3201. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped third transmission gear 3209 and a front cover 3210 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 below the back lower left decorative body 3202.

The lower left-handed decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3201a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed to have a length that penetrates the lower back left decorative body 3202, the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, and the unit base 3204. .. The lower back left decorative body 3202 is formed by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 on the front and back, and rotating the petals on the rear side so that they are located between the petals on the front side. It is formed in a shape that looks like it was made.

In the back lower left decorative board 3203, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is provided with a lower back left detection sensor 3203a on the rear surface thereof to detect the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left back detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and projects rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a of the back bottom left decorative substrate 3203. In the state where the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the back lower left detection sensor 3203a, the back lower left rotation decorative body 3201 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3206 is rotated by the back bottom left drive motor 3205, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment is backed via the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotation decoration body 3201 can be rotated around an axis in the front-rear direction. Further, the back lower left effect unit 3200 can make the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 and the back lower left decorative body 3202 emit light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the back lower left decorative substrate 3203.

Next, the lower back right staging unit 3250 will be described. The lower back right effect unit 3250 is provided behind a translucent lower right rotating decorative body 3251 having a shaft shaft 3251a protruding rearward and a lower right rotating decorative body 3251, and is translucent. 3252 on the lower right side of the back, and 3253 on the lower right side of the back, which is provided behind the lower right decorative body 3252 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and 3253 on the lower right side of the back. The lower right decorative body 3251 is rotatably attached to the lower back right decorative body 3252, and the lower right decorative body 3252 is attached to the unit base 3254 attached to the lower end of the right side of the back rear effect unit 3100. , Is equipped.

Further, the lower back right effect unit 3250 is attached to the lower right drive motor 3255 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 so that the rotary shaft projects rearward, and to the rotary shaft of the lower right drive motor 3255. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3256 and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257, which are meshed with the drive gear 3256 and are rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, are meshed with the first transmission gear 3257. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3258 rotatably attached to the unit base 3254 and the second transmission gear 3258 are meshed with each other and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3251a of the lower right rotating decorative body 3251. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped third transmission gear 3259 and a front cover 3260 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 below the lower right decorative body 3252.

The lower right rotation decoration body 3251 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3251a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed to have a length that penetrates the lower back right decorative body 3252, the lower back right decorative substrate 3253, and the unit base 3254. .. The lower back right decorative body 3252 is formed by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 on the front and back, and rotating the petals on the rear side so that they are located between the petals on the front side. It is formed in a shape that looks like it was made.

In the lower back right decorative board 3253, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The lower back right decorative substrate 3253 is provided with a lower back right detection sensor 3253a on the rear surface thereof to detect the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right back detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and projects rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back bottom right detection sensor 3253a of the back bottom right decorative substrate 3253. In the state where the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the back lower right detection sensor 3253a, the back lower right rotation decoration body 3251 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the back lower right drive motor 3255, the back lower right effect unit 3250 of the present embodiment is backed via the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right rotation decoration body 3251 can be rotated around an axis in the front-rear direction. Further, the lower back right effect unit 3250 can make the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252 emit light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253.

[5-9f. Under the back production unit]
Subsequently, the back lower middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 162 to 169 and the like. FIG. 162 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 162 (b) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 164 shows the back lower middle elevating mechanism of the back lower middle effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the under-back middle decoration unit of the under-back middle effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 166 shows the under-back middle decoration unit of the under-back middle effect unit disassembled from behind. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing the raising and lowering of the lower back middle decorative body unit by the lower back middle raising and lowering mechanism in the lower back middle staging unit. FIG. 168 (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the configuration of the under-back middle decorative body unit regarding the rotation of the under-back middle rotating decorative body in the under-back middle staging unit, and FIG. 168 (b) is an explanatory view of the under-back middle rotating decorative body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the stop position and each detection sensor in a table. FIG. 169 is an explanatory view showing the arrangement of the LEDs of the under-back middle decoration unit in the under-back middle staging unit from the front.

The back lower middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back middle effect unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250. The under-back middle effect unit 3300 has a under-back middle decorative body unit 3320 having a under-back middle decorative body 3310 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction, and an under-back middle decorative body unit 3320 that raises and lowers the under-back middle decorative body unit 3320. It is equipped with 3350.

The under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 of the under-back middle effect unit 3300 is formed in a regular hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. This under-the-back middle-rotating ornament 3310 has six number decorations formed in relief shape from "1" to "6" on the entire surface, and circles at every 60 degree angle in the clockwise direction around the center. It is placed on the circumference. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has translucency. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a recess 3311 on the rear surface capable of accommodating the diffusion lens 3321 in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 described later, the first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322, and the front end side of the substrate fixing member 3323. Have.

As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is provided behind the diffuser lens 3321 provided behind the lower middle middle decorative body 3310 and behind the diffuser lens 3321. It is attached to the diffuser lens 3321 so as to sandwich the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front side and the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 from the rear side, and protrudes rearward in a columnar shape. Rotation that has a substrate fixing member 3323 having a shaft portion 3323a and a shaft hole 3324a into which the shaft portion 3323a of the substrate fixing member 3323 is rotatably inserted and is attached to the rear side of the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310. It has a base 3324 and.

Further, the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 has a region detection piece 3325 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 and extending in a semi-arc on the same axis as the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference coaxial with the region detection piece 3325. It includes a position detection piece 3326 protruding from the rotation base 3324, and a spur gear-shaped rotation gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotation base 3324.

Further, the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 is provided behind the rotation base 3324 and has a penetrating opening 3328a through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass, so that the translucency is improved. The lower back middle decorative body 3328, the lower back middle second decorative board 3329 provided behind the back lower middle decorative body 3328 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the lower back middle second decorative board 3329. Multiple area identification sensors 3330 that can detect the area detection piece 3325 and the position identification that can detect the position detection piece 3326 that is attached to the front of the second decorative board 3329 under the back. It is equipped with a sensor 3331.

Further, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is provided behind the lower back middle decorative board 3329, and the rear end of the shaft portion 3323a of the board fixing member 3323 is attached and the back lower middle decorative body 3328 is attached. The movable base 3332 is attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3332 so that the rotation shaft projects forward, and the bottom middle rotation drive motor 3333 is attached to the rotation shaft of the bottom middle rotation drive motor 3333. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3334 that meshes with the rotary gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 that is attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a rear lower middle elevating mechanism 3350 that is attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. The elevating slider 3336 is slidably guided in the vertical direction by the slide rail 3360 of the above.

The front end side of the diffuser lens 3321, the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, and the substrate fixing member 3323 is located between the rotating decorative body 3310 in the lower back and the rotating base 3324 in the assembled state, and is in the lower back. It is housed in the recess 3311 of the rotating decoration body 3310, and is not in contact with either the rotating decoration body 3310 or the rotation base 3324 under the back. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, it is possible to make the portion of the numerical decoration (relief) in the rotating decorative body 3310 in the lower back to emit light. The LED of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is a full-color LED. Further, the LED of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back is a full-color LED.

The region detection piece 3325 has a diameter larger than that of the rotary gear 3327 and projects rearward from the rear surface of the rotary base 3324. As shown in FIG. 168 (a), the area detection piece 3325 has a number of "3", "4", and "5" between the numerical decorations of "2" and "3" in the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310. Through the number decoration, it is formed in an arc shape within a range of 180 degrees around the rotation axis from between the number decorations of "5" and "6".

Each of the plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 on a circumference having a diameter larger than that of the area detection piece 3325. The position detection pieces 3326 are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) so that each position detection piece 3326 is located at the center of the numerical decoration of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310. .. In the present embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape within a predetermined angle of α degrees (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) about the rotation axis, and is adjacent to the position detection piece 3326. There is an interval of 2 × β degrees (θ degree-α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) with the position detection piece 3326 as the center of the rotation axis (see FIG. 168 (a)). ..

A plurality of (here, three) area identification sensors 3330 are provided so as to be arranged at intervals of θ degrees (60 degrees) around the rotation axis of the underside middle rotation decoration body 3310. The three region identification sensors 3330 are provided in the order of clockwise, the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c. In the present embodiment, the three area identification sensors 3330 of "3", "4", and "5" are in a state where the decoration of "1" of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is positioned directly above the rotation center. It is provided at a position corresponding to the numerical decoration (see FIG. 168 (a)).

The position specifying sensor 3331 is provided at a position at an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) in a counterclockwise direction about the rotation axis of the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 from the first area specifying sensor 3330a. ing.

The movable base 3332 has an elevating pin 3332a projecting from the lower part of the rear surface to the rear in a columnar shape. The elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 in the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350. The lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting the rotation position.

The lower back middle decoration unit 3320 rotates the drive gear 3334 by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333, and rotates the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3327. Can be done. Further, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 and the back lower middle second decorative board 3329, respectively, so that the lower back middle decorative body 3310 emits light. And the lower back middle decorative body 3328 can be luminescently decorated.

As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 extends to the left and right, and both ends are a unit base 3351 attached to the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250, and a unit base 3351. The flat bottom middle lift drive motor 3352 mounted on the front surface of the unit so that the rotary shaft protrudes rearward, and the flat bottom middle lift drive motor 3352 mounted on the rotary shaft and partly facing the front side of the unit base 3351. The gear-shaped drive gear 3353 and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3354, which are meshed with the drive gear 3353 and are rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, are meshed with the first transmission gear 3354. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3355 rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3356a meshing with the second transmission gear 3355, and an outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a. It has a drive pin 3356b projecting forward in a columnar shape from the vicinity, and includes an elevating cam gear 3356 rotatably attached at the upper center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit base 3351.

Further, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 on the base end side extending in the left-right direction, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted in the longitudinal direction. The first slit 3357a extends in the longitudinal direction on the tip side of the first slit 3357a, and the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b. , And an elevating arm 3357 having a detection piece 3357c provided at the tip thereof, and an underside middle elevating detection sensor 3358a capable of detecting the detection piece 3357c of the elevating arm 3357 are provided, and the unit base 3351 is provided. It is provided with a relay board 3358 under the back, which is attached to the front surface.

Further, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the elevating cam gear 3356, and the elevating arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 having a vertically extending elevating slit 3359a through which an elevating pin 3332a of a movable base 3332 in the decorative body unit 3320 is inserted, and an elevating / lowering in the lower middle decorative body unit 3320 attached to the front surface of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 that guides the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, the gear cover 3361 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the drive gear 3353 from the rear, and the tip side of the elevating arm 3357 move upward (front). It is provided with a spring 3362 that is urged to rotate the elevating arm 3357 in a clockwise direction with respect to the view).

The lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 is attached to the lower part on the left side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit base 3351. The elevating arm 3357 is rotatably attached so that the base end side is on the right side of the elevating cam gear 3356 and at the same height as the center of the elevating cam gear 3356. The tip side of the elevating arm 3357 extends to the left of the elevating cam gear 3356.

The lower back middle relay board 3358 is the lower lower middle first decorative board 3322, the lower lower middle second decorative board 3329, the area identification sensor 3330, the position identification sensor 3331, the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333, and the lower back middle lift drive motor. The connection between the 3352, the lower back middle lift detection sensor 3358a, and the staging drive board 1720 is relayed.

The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and the elevating slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 is provided on the right side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the front cover 3359 in the left-right direction. The elevating slit 3359a and the slide rail 3360 can support the decorative body unit 3320 under the back so as to slide straight in the vertical direction.

When the drive gear 3353 is rotated by the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 uses the elevating cam gear via the gear portion 3356a of the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the elevating cam gear 3356. The 3356 can be rotated. Then, the elevating arm 3357 can be rotated through the first slit 3357a into which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted by the drive pin 3356b that revolves due to the rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356, and the elevating arm 3357 can be rotated. The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be moved up and down together with the lower middle middle decorative body 3310 via the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 slidably inserted into the two slits 3357b.

Next, the movements of the under-back middle decorative body 3310 and the under-back middle decorative body unit 3320 in the under-back middle effect unit 3300 will be described in detail. In the normal state, the underside middle staging unit 3300 is in a state of a descending position in which the underside middle decorative unit 3320 has moved most downward. In this normal state, the elevating arm 3357 in the back lower middle elevating mechanism 3350 is located at the tip side below the base end side, and the detection piece 3357c at the tip is the back lower middle elevating / lowering of the back lower middle relay board 3358. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 167 (a)).

In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is located below the center of revolution and near the end of the elevating arm 3357 in the first slit 3357a on the proximal end side. .. More specifically, a normal passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if an urging force for rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction is applied by the spring 3362, the force line of the urging force is in contact with the first slit 3357a. Since the elevating cam gear 3356 passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, and the decorative body unit 3320 under the back does not move from the descending position by the urging force of the spring 3362, and the spring. The urging force of 3362 does not act on the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 via the elevating arm 3357 and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the end portion of the first slit 3357a on the proximal end side. As a result, when the elevating arm 3357 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction due to the urging force of the spring 3362, the elevating cam gear 3356 moves in the counterclockwise direction due to the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the base end side of the elevating arm 3357, but the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the end portion of the first slit 3357a on the base end side. , The drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, so that the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be prevented from moving upward.

In the normal state of the underside middle effect unit 3300, among the plurality of number decorations in the underside middle rotation decoration body 3310, the number decoration located at the uppermost side is inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is located and can be clearly seen from the front (player side) (see FIG. 111 and the like). Further, in the normal state, the numerical decoration located at the lowermost position is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and is the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 or the back lower middle first. (Ii) By emitting light from the LED of the decorative substrate 3329, in addition to the light emitting decoration of the rotating decoration under the back, the first starting port 2002 formed of the transparent member can also be made to emit light (see FIG. 120 and the like). ).

In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view by the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352, the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a are used. As a result, the elevating cam gear 3356 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 rotates in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a in contact with the drive pin 3356b is pressed upward, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the tip side, and the elevating arm. It rotates in the clockwise direction around the proximal end side so that the distal end side of the 3357 moves upward.

By rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction, the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted in the second slit 3357b on the tip end side of the elevating arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. The decorative body unit 3320 under the back is moved upward via the elevating pin 3332a. Then, when the drive pin 3356b moves upward from the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the proximal end side. At this time, in the elevating arm 3357, a urging force in the clockwise direction is applied by the spring 3362, so that the urging force assists the upward movement of the decorative body unit 3320 in the lower back, and is in the lower back. The load applied to the lift drive motor 3352 is reduced.

When the drive pin 3356b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end portion on the base end side of the first slit 3357a, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 is stopped and at the same time, the drive is driven. The revolution of pin 3356b stops. As a result, the movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 by the elevating arm 3357 is stopped, and the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the raised position where it has moved most upward.

In the state where the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 is in the raised position, the normal line passing through the contact point with the first slit 3357a in the drive pin 3356b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if a force that tries to rotate the elevating arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction is exerted by the weight of the decorative body unit 3320 under the back, the force line of the force hits the first slit 3357a. Since the elevating cam gear 3356 passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356 via the contacting drive pin 3356b, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the ascending position, and the back lower middle decoration unit does not revolve. The weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 via the elevating arm 3357 and the like.

In the state where the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevating cam gear 3356 may be further revolved so that the drive pin 3356b comes into contact with the end portion of the first slit 3357a on the base end side. As a result, when the elevating arm 3357 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the decorative body unit 3320 under the back, the elevating cam gear 3356 is clocked by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the base end side of the elevating arm 3357, but the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the end portion of the first slit 3357a on the base end side. , The drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, so that the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be prevented from moving downward.

In the state where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the ascending position, most of the lower middle middle decorative body 3310 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (furthermore, a game ball that rolls in the game area 5a). B is located above the anti-rebound member (stage cover 2515) provided in the center accessory 2500 that prevents B from rebounding from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501), and is forward (player). All numerical decorations can be seen well from the side) (see FIG. 201).

When returning the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 from the raised position to the lower position, the lower middle raising / lowering drive motor 3352 rotates the drive gear 3353 in the opposite direction to the above, and the raising / lowering arm 3357 Rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 moves downward from the ascending position. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the elevating arm 3357 is detected by the underside middle elevating detection sensor 3358a of the underside middle relay board 3358, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 is stopped by the underside middle elevating drive motor 3352. , The center that prevents the lower middle decorative unit 3320 from bouncing from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501) in the descending position (furthermore, the game ball B that rolls in the game area 5a) in the normal state. The bounce prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the position where it overlaps when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

The under-back middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment rotates the drive gear 3334 by the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 in the under-back middle decorative body unit 3320, thereby rotating the under-back middle rotary decorative body 3310 via the rotary gear 3327. Can be rotated around an axis in the front-back direction. By rotating the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, the six numerical decorations provided on the front surface rotate like a roulette wheel. The lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 at any position such as a lowering position or an ascending position of the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320.

In the underside middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, under normal conditions, one of the plurality of (here, 6) numerical decorations in the underside middle rotation decoration body 3310 is located directly above the center of rotation (stop position). are doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), in a state where the numerical decoration of "1" in the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is located at the top, the area detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 is specified as the first area. The sensor 3330a, the second area identification sensor 3330b, and the third area identification sensor 3330c are detected by the three area identification sensors 3330, and a plurality of (here, 6) position detection pieces 3326 are detected by the position identification sensor 3331. Is not detected.

Here, first, the relationship between the three area identification sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the underside middle rotation decoration body 3310 will be described. In the state where the number decoration of "1" is set to the stop position, as described above, the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c are the region detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324. Is detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), when the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c are detected, the numerical decoration of "1" is centered on the stop position. It is located within the range of ± 30 degrees.

Further, when the first area identification sensor 3330a and the second area identification sensor 3330b detect and the third area identification sensor 3330c does not detect, the numerical decoration of "2" is in the area of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

Further, when the first area identification sensor 3330a is detected and the second area identification sensor 3330b and the third area identification sensor 3330c are not detected, the numerical decoration of "3" is in the area of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

Further, when the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c are not detected, the numerical decoration of "4" is in the range of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located inside.

Further, when the first area identification sensor 3330a and the second area identification sensor 3330b are not detected and the third area identification sensor 3330c is detected, the numerical decoration of "5" is in the area of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

Further, when the first area identification sensor 3330a is not detected and the second area identification sensor 3330b and the third area identification sensor 3330c are detected, the numerical decoration of "6" is in the area of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

In this way, by the combination of detection / non-detection of the three area identification sensors 3330 of the first area identification sensor 3330a, the second area identification sensor 3330b, and the third area identification sensor 3330c, any numerical decoration can determine the stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether or not it is located in the included stop area.

Since the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 of the present embodiment is a stepping motor, when the area identification sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325 and then rotates 30 degrees, the under-back middle rotation drive is driven. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it is possible to stop the desired numerical decoration of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 at the stop position. However, in the case of such control, it is necessary to recognize the origin for stopping at the stop position while specifying the area of the stop position by the three area identification sensors 3330. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of the 3310 becomes complicated and the load becomes high. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of position detecting pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specifying sensor 3331 for detecting the position detecting piece 3326 are provided, and the origin is recognized by the position specifying sensor 3331. Therefore, the complicated control of the rotation stop of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is suppressed, and the load is reduced.

Specifically, when it is desired to stop the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 at the desired numerical decoration at the stop position, the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 rotates and the three area identification sensors 3330 stop at the desired stop position. When the combination satisfies the position, the position identification sensor 3331 is displaced in the rotation direction at an angle of 30 degrees with respect to the first region identification sensor 3330a, so that the position identification sensor 3331 detects the center of the position detection piece 3326. ing. In this state, the desired number is separated from the stop position by a rotation angle of 30 degrees.

In this state, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates α / 2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees), which is the length of the position detection piece 3326, and further rotates, the position detection piece 3326 separates from the position identification sensor 3331. Therefore, the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected. The angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected is set as the origin. Then, when it is rotated by β degree (here, 18.33 degrees) from there (from the origin), the rotation of the underside middle rotation decoration body 3310 by the underside middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped, so that a desired number is obtained. The decoration can be stopped exactly at the stop position.

In the above, the rotation stop of the underside middle rotation decoration body 3310 has been described by an angle, but the rotation may be stopped by the rotation step of the underside middle rotation drive motor 3333 made of a stepping motor. For example, when one rotation is 396 steps, the position detection piece 3326 is rotated 13 steps further when the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 is in a combination in which the three area identification sensors 3330 satisfy the desired stop positions. Apart from the position identification sensor 3331, the position identification sensor 3331 becomes non-detection. When the position identification sensor 3331 rotates 20 steps from the non-detected angle, the rotation of the underside middle rotation decoration body 3310 by the underside middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped to stop the desired numerical decoration. It can be stopped exactly at the position.

Next, the light emitting decoration in the underside middle staging unit 3300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 169, in the underside middle effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. It includes a decorative substrate 3322 and a second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. The plurality of LEDs of the lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 are located behind the six numerical decorations in the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, and each of the numerical decorations can be independently luminescently decorated.

On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 are located behind the portion outside the plurality of numerical decorations in the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, and are located outside the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310. The periphery can be luminescently decorated.

As described above, the underside middle effect unit 3300 can detect the rotation position of the underside middle rotation decoration body 3310 to some extent by the three area identification sensors 3330, and therefore, based on the detection of the area identification sensor 3330. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, the number decorations can be rotated in a state in which only specific number decorations are light-emittingly decorated or in a state in which each number decoration is light-emitting decorated in different colors. It is possible to show the player a production that strongly attracts the player's attention.

Further, in the state where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the numerical decoration on the lower side of the lower lower middle decorative body 3310 is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. The first starting port 2002 can be light-emitting and decorated by causing the LED of the portion of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back to emit light. As a result, the player's attention can be directed to the first starting port 2002. Further, when the game ball B wins a prize in the first starting port 2002, the LED of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is emitted (or, one emission mode is determined from a plurality of light emitting modes and the light is emitted. ) May be made.

As described above, according to the under-back middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the rotating under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions detects a region having a length over three stop positions. A piece 3325 and six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position are provided, and a three-region identification sensor 3330 for detecting the area detection piece 3325 and one position identification for detecting the position detection piece 3326 are provided. Since the sensor 3331 and the sensor 3331 are provided, when the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back is rotated, the three area identification sensors 3330 that detect the area detection piece 3325 increase in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. This is repeated, and even until the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back is rotated to the next stop position, all the area identification sensors 3330 are not temporarily undetected, and the area detection piece 3325 is detected. By the combination of the area specifying sensor 3330, the current rotation position of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

Since the under-back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is provided with six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the under-back middle rotation is performed by the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the three area identification sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position identification sensor 3331, and the deviation of the stop position can be prevented. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions by reducing the number as much as possible.

In addition, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the game is played by shifting the stop position. It is possible to prevent the person from giving a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to entertain the effect (movable effect) by the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is increased, the deviation of the stop position can be suppressed and the back side can be suppressed. By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is higher than that in the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be faster. Therefore, the fast-rotating under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player, and can strongly attract the player's attention, and at the same time, the rotation of the under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 can be performed. It can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is supposed to rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction and a plurality of number decorations are provided on the front surface, the roulette wheel that rotates and stops at an arbitrary stop position after rotating round and round. Since such an effect can be shown to the player, the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the desired number decoration stops rotating at the stop position, and the movable effect by the rotating decoration body 3310 under the back is provided. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the number of stop positions of the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of area identification sensors 3330 required to detect movement to an arbitrary stop position is used. , The number of the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back is the same as the stop position, the ability (grasp of the stop position) by the multiple area identification sensors 3330 can be maximized, and there are more stop positions. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest by the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back.

Further, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates together with the underside middle rotation decoration body 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 is possible. It can be made larger, and the positioning accuracy of the stop position can be made higher.

In the above embodiment, the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally (together) with the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is provided with the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326. The region detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member that rotates with the rotation of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, such as the drive gear 3334.

[5-9 g. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Subsequently, the backside staging unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 177 and the like. FIG. 170 (a) is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 170 (b) is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. be. FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up elevating decorative body unit in the back-up staging unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up elevating decorative body unit in the back unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is a figure.

FIG. 175 is an explanatory view showing the rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotation decoration body in the back-up effect unit from the front. FIG. 176 (a) is an explanatory view showing the elevating mechanism of the back-up elevating decorative body unit in the back-up staging unit from the front, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the elevating mechanism of the elevating decorative body unit, and the rotating mechanism of a back-up-post-rotating decorative body from the front. FIG. 177 is an explanatory view showing the decorative substrate from the front in a state where the back-up elevating decorative body unit is moved to the appearance position in the back-up effect unit.

The back-up effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back-back effect unit 3100 above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the back-up effect unit 3400 has a back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 having a shaft shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface, and a back-up front rotation decoration body 3410. The back upper front decoration body 3421 extending to the left and right through which the shaft shaft 3410a penetrates in the center in the left-right direction, and the back upper front decoration body 3421 provided behind the back upper front decoration body 3421 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The front decorative substrate 3422 and the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 are provided behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, and the back upper front decorative body 3421 is attached to the front surface to rotatably support the shaft shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410. It is equipped with a unit base 3423 and.

Further, the back-up effect unit 3400 is between the rear cover 3424 which is attached so as to form a space between the rear surface of the unit base 3423 and the unit base 3423 whose rotation axis is forward on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3426 mounted on the rotating shaft of the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425 and the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425 mounted so as to project into the space of the above-mentioned space, and the drive gear 3426 are engaged. A rotary gear 3427 which is spur gear-shaped and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3410a of the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 and has a detection piece 3427a protruding forward, and a back-up front decoration substrate 3422. It is equipped with a backside rotation detection sensor 3428, which is attached to the rear surface and can detect the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427.

Further, the back-up effect unit 3400 has a back-up lift drive motor 3249 mounted on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that the rotation shaft protrudes into the space between the front unit base 3423 and the back-up lift drive. The spur gear-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3429, the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430, and the gear portion 3431a penetrate the rear cover 3424 from a portion protruding outward from the circumference. With a drive pin 3431b projecting rearward in a columnar shape and a detection piece 3431c projecting forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3431a, the elevating cam gear 3431 rotatably attached to the rear cover 3424. The back-up elevating detection sensor 3432, which is attached to the rear surface of the back-up front decorative board 3422 and can detect the detection piece 3431c of the elevating cam gear 3431, and the elevating cam gear 3431 on the tip side where the back-up rear rotation decorative body 3440 is provided. The back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 and the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 whose base end side is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 around the axis in the front-rear direction so as to move up and down by the rotation of the drive pin 3431b of the above. A spring 3433 that urges the 3450 to rotate in a direction in which the tip side moves upward, and a spring 3433 that is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424 to restrict the upward movement of the back-up elevating decorative unit 3450. It is provided with a rod-shaped regulating member 3434 and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 has a back-up rear decoration in which a shaft shaft 3440a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440 penetrates in the center. The body 3451, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the back-up rear decorative body 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 from the rear to the back-up rear decorative body 3451. Is mounted on the front surface, and is rotatably mounted on the unit base 3423, and includes an elevating unit base 3453 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3440a of the back-up / rear-rotating decorative body 3440.

Further, the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 includes a back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and a rotation shaft of the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3455 attached to the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3456 and the first transmission gear 3456 meshed with the drive gear 3455 and rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3457, which is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453, and the shaft shaft 3440a of the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440, which is meshed with the second transmission gear 3457. It includes a spur gear-shaped rotary gear 3458 attached to the rear end.

Further, the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the drive gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotary gear 3458 from the rear. It includes a 3459 and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

The back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 of the back-up effect unit 3400 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. The shaft shaft 3410a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 penetrates the back-up front decorative body 3421, the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, and the unit base 3423, and penetrates the unit base 3423 and the rear. It extends to the space between the cover 3424. In the back-up front decoration body 3421, two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 are stacked in the center in the left-right direction, and the petals on the rear side are between the petals on the front side. It has a decoration that looks like it has been rotated so that it is located in. The back-up front decorative body 3421 has translucency as a whole.

The back-up front decorative substrate 3422 extends to the left and right over substantially the entire length of the back-up front decorative body 3421 in the left-right direction. By emitting the LED of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421 can be light-emitting and decorated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 are full-color LEDs.

The unit base 3423 has a through hole 3423a through which the back-up rotation detection sensor 3428 and the back-up elevating detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 are inserted. The rear cover 3424 has an arc shape in which a cylindrical support shaft 3424a projecting rearward from the rear surface and a drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 are inserted coaxially with the shaft shaft 3410a of the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410. It has an extended slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453.

The detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427 is detected by the backside rotation detection sensor 3428 that penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward. The elevating cam gear 3431 has a gear portion 3431a formed in a semicircular shape, and a drive pin 3431b projecting rearward is provided at a portion bulging outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 penetrates the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 in the back-up elevating decorative unit 3450. Further, the detection piece 3431c of the elevating cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-up elevating detection sensor 3432 that penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward.

The back-up and post-rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. The shaft shaft 3440a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 penetrates the back-up rear decorative body 3451, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, and the elevating unit base 3453, and the elevating unit base 3453. It extends to the rear side. The back-up posterior decoration 3451 is made by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440 on the front and back, and rotating the rear petals so that they are located between the front petals. It has a decoration with a shape that makes it look like it was made. The back-up rear decorative body 3451 has translucency as a whole.

The back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 can emit and decorate the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The LED of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 is a full-color LED.

The elevating unit base 3453 is provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a and the shaft hole 3453a, which penetrate the base end side (right end side in the front view) and the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable. It has an elongated slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453. The motor cover 3460 has a decoration imitating a cherry blossom on the front surface.

Next, the movements of the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, and the back-up elevating decoration body unit 3450 in the back-up effect unit 3400 will be described. In the back-up effect unit 3400, in a normal state, the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427 attached to the shaft shaft 3410a of the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 is detected by the back-up rotation detection sensor 3428, and the back side. The upper front rotating ornament 3410 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 175). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425, the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

Further, in a normal state, the back-up evacuation decoration unit 3450 provided with the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440 on the tip side is in a state of extending in the left-right direction, and the whole except the tip side is in a state of extending. It is located behind the front decorative body 3421 on the back side and is in a retracted position invisible from the front (see FIG. 176 (a)). The portion of the back-up / down decorative body unit 3450 that protrudes to the left from the back-up front decorative body 3421 is located behind the back-front left-effect unit 3700 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5. It is invisible from the front.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3431c of the elevating cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-up elevating detection sensor 3432. Further, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is located below the center of revolution thereof, and is located near the end of the elevating unit base 3453 of the back-up elevating decorative unit 3450 in the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. positioned.

More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 with the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force is applied to rotate the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward due to the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, the force of the elevating unit base 3453 is exerted. Since the field line passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b abutting on the slit 3453b, the elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 also does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back-up evacuation decorative unit 3450 rotates so that the tip side moves downward from the retracted position. There is no. Therefore, the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back-up elevating drive motor 3249 via the elevating unit base 3453 and the elevating cam gear 3431.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the elevating unit base 3453 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, the elevating cam gear 3431 counterclockwise due to the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b abuts on the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating unit base 3453 can be locked to prevent the back-up elevating decorative unit 3450 from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. ..

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back-up elevating drive motor 3429, the elevating cam gear 3431 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3431b revolves in the clockwise direction, the drive pin 3431b moves to the left and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a, and at the same time. Due to the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, the elevating unit base 3453 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the shaft hole 3453a so that the tip side thereof moves downward.

When the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction and moves above the straight line connecting the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b moves. It slides in the slit 3453b in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a. Then, when the drive pin 3431b revolves further in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 is stopped by the back-up elevating drive motor 3429, and at the same time, the drive pin 3431b is stopped. Revolution stops.

As a result, the rotation of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 via the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction is stopped, and the tip end side of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 including the back-up rear-rotating decorative body 3440 is , It is in the state of the appearance position moved below the front decoration body 3421 on the back side (see FIG. 176 (b)). In the state of this appearance position, the tip side of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is located below the back upper front decorative body 3421, so that the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the like can be visually recognized from the front. It will be possible.

In the state where the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the normal line passing through the contact point with the slit 3453b in the drive pin 3431b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force that tries to further rotate the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction is exerted by the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, the force line of the force hits the slit 3453b. The elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the contacting drive pin 3431b. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back-up elevating decorative unit 3450 moves counterclockwise so that the tip side further moves downward from the appearance position. The weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back-up elevating drive motor 3429 via the elevating cam gear 3431.

In the state where the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3431 may be further revolved so that the drive pin 3431b is brought into contact with the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the elevating unit base 3453 tries to rotate further in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, the elevating cam gear 3431 is clocked by the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b abuts on the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating unit base 3453 can be locked to prevent the back-up elevating decorative unit 3450 from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. ..

In a state where the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 provided on the tip side can be visually recognized from the front. In the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back-up rear rotation decoration is performed via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotary gear 3458. The body 3440 can be rotated about an axis in the anteroposterior direction (see FIG. 176 (b)). Therefore, when the back-up / rear-rotating decorative body 3440 is visible from the front, if the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back-up / rear-rotating drive motor 3454, the rotating back-up / rear-rotating decorative body 3440 can be visually recognized. ..

When returning the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 from the appearance position to the retracted position, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is moved up and down by rotating the motor gear 3430 in the opposite direction to the above by the back-up elevating drive motor 3429. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the evacuation unit base 3453 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the tip end side of the back-up evacuation decorative unit 3450 moves upward. Then, when the detection piece 3431c of the elevating cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-up elevating detection sensor 3432, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the back-up elevating drive motor 3429 is stopped, so that the back-up evacuation decorative body unit 3450 is moved to the retracted position. It can be restored.

At this time, the spring 3433 urges the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, assists the rotation of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 to the retracted position side, and raises and lowers the back-up. The load applied to the drive motor 3249 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 177, the back-up effect unit 3400 of the present embodiment is provided with the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 behind the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 can be light-emitting and decorated. Further, since the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 is provided behind the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3451, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 are appropriately emitted. By doing so, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up back decoration body 3451 can be light-emittingly decorated.

At this time, in a state where the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the LED of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 is made to emit light, so that the back-up rear rotation decoration is decorated with light emission. The body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Back left production unit]
Subsequently, the back rear left staging unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to the main FIGS. 178 to 184 and the like. FIG. 178 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 178 (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear left staging unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 180 is an disassembled perspective view of the back-rear left staging unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure. FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decoration unit of the back rear left staging unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 182 disassembles the back rear left decoration unit of the back rear left staging unit and views it from behind. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 183 is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the back rear left staging unit from the front. FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back rear left decorative body unit in the back rear left staging unit.

The back rear left effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the left end in the back box 3010 and in front of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100. The back-rear left effect unit 3500 rotatably supports the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3510 having translucency that can rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction and the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3510 on the lower end side. It includes a rear left decorative unit 3520 and a back rear left drive unit 3550 mounted in a back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the back rear left decorative unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction. ..

The back-back-left rotation decoration body 3510 of the back-back-left staging unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. The back-rear left-handed decorative body 3510 has a shaft shaft 3510a projecting from the center of the rear surface to the rear in a columnar shape (see FIG. 182).

As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 includes a back rear left decorative body 3521 through which the shaft shaft 3510a of the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 penetrates in the center, and a back rear left decorative body. It is attached to the back rear left decorative board 3522, which is provided behind the 3521 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and from the rear of the back rear left decorative board 3522 to the rear side of the back rear left decorative body 3521. The front cover 3523 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3510a of the back-rear left-handed decorative body 3510, and the front cover 3523 are attached to the rear side, and the upper end side can be rotated to the back-rear left drive unit 3550. It is equipped with a movable base 3524 to be attached.

Further, the back-rear left decorative unit 3520 includes a back-rear left rotation drive motor 3525 and a back-rear left-handed rotation drive motor 3525, which are attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3524 so that the rotation shaft projects between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3526 attached to the rotary shaft of the counterclockwise rotary drive motor 3525 and a spur gear 3526 meshed with the drive gear 3526 and mounted on the rear end of the shaft shaft 3510a of the rear left rotary decorative body 3510. It is provided with a gear-shaped rotary gear 3527.

The back-rear left decoration unit 3520 has a translucent property, and two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-rear left rotation decoration 3510 are stacked back and forth and then rear. The petals on the side are formed in a shape that is rotated so as to be located between the petals on the front side. The plurality of LEDs on the back left decorative substrate 3522 are full-color LEDs.

The front cover 3523 is formed in a shape that is a combination of a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear left decorative body 3521 and a portion extending upward from the upper left of the portion in a quadrangular shape. .. The front cover 3523 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a quadrangle. The front cover 3523 is formed in the shape of a shallow container that is open to the rear.

The movable base 3524 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523, and the upper end side extends upward from the upper end of the front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a penetrating back and forth on the upper end side, and an actuating pin 3524b protruding forward in a columnar position at a position away from the shaft hole 3524a. In the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524, the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 of the back rear left drive unit 3550 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable. Further, the actuating pin 3524b projects forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

When the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 moves the back rear left rotation decoration unit 3510 back and forth via the rotary gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the back rear left drive unit 3550 has a vertically extending flat plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3551 having a support shaft 3551a that rotatably supports the back rear left decorative unit 3520. , The vertically extending unit base 3552 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3551 and installed in the back box 3010, the unit cover 3553 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3552, and the rotation to the upper part of the front surface of the unit cover 3553. Spur gear-shaped motor gears attached to the rotating shafts of the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554 so that the shaft protrudes between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553. It is equipped with 3555.

Further, the rear left drive unit 3550 has a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3556 that meshes with the motor gear 3555 and is rotatably attached to the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a that meshes with the transmission gear 3556. The elevating cam gear 3557 and the elevating cam gear having a drive pin 3557b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a and a detection piece 3557c protruding forward from the vicinity of the front outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a. The drive pin 3557b of the 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a extending to the left and right, and the actuating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative unit 3520 extending to the left and right below the first slit 3558a. It has a second slit 3558b, which is slidably inserted, and includes a link member 3558 which is slidably attached vertically between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553.

Further, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 that urges the link member 3558 upward, a flat plate-shaped partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevating cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. A back-rear left relay board 3651 attached to the front surface of the 3553, and a back-rear left elevating detection sensor 3562 attached to the rear surface of the back-rear left relay board 3651 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557. It is equipped with.

The reinforcing plate 3551 of the back-rear left drive unit 3550 is a metal plate extending vertically, and the support shaft 3551a projects forward at the upper portion. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative unit 3520 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3552 extends vertically longer than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is located near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 has substantially the same length as the unit base 3552 and extends vertically, and is formed in the shape of a shallow container that is open to the rear.

The elevating cam gear 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558 through the slit 3560a of the partition plate 3560 with the drive pin 3557b. The detection piece 3557c is detected by the back-rear left elevating detection sensor 3562 that penetrates the unit cover 3553 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically, and has a first slit 3558a near the upper end and a second slit 3558b at the lower end. The lower end of the spring 3559 is attached to the link member 3558, and the upper end is attached to the partition plate 3560.

The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semicircular shape through which the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is inserted. The back rear left relay board 3651 relays the connection between the back rear left decorative board 3522, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and the back rear left elevating detection sensor 3562, and the staging drive board 1720. It is for doing.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-back left effect unit 3500 will be described. In the normal state, the back-back-left effect unit 3500 is a back-back-left decorative body in which the back-back-left rotating decoration body 3510 is provided on the lower end side (tip side) as shown in FIGS. 183 and 184 (a). The unit 3520 is in the hanging retracted position. In this normal state, the back-rear left decorative unit 3520 (back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3510) is located behind the back-front-left staging unit 3700, and cannot be seen from the front (player side). It has become.

Further, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, most of the back-rear left effect unit 3500 is located behind the back-front left decorative body 3030 and the back-front left effect unit 3700, and the back-rear left elevating drive motor. Only a part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 131 and the like). The portion of the back-rear left lift drive motor 3554 facing the front is covered by a portion outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the player It becomes invisible from the side (see FIG. 135).

In this normal state, the detection piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557 is detected by the back-rear left elevating detection sensor 3562. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is located directly below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557 and is located near the left end in the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558. Further, in the normal state, the link member 3558 is located at the lower moving end, and the actuating pin 3524b located to the right of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative unit 3520 It is located near the left end in the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558.

In this normal state, the link member 3558 is urged in the direction of moving upward by the spring 3559, but the normal line passing through the contact point in contact with the first slit 3558a in the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 Since it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3557 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3557b via the first slit 3558a due to the urging force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) is centered on the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the urging force of the spring 3559 does not act on the back-rear left evacuation drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the evacuation cam gear 3557, and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. As a result, when the link member 3558 tries to move upward due to the urging force of the spring 3559, the elevating cam gear 3557 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction due to the force acting from the first slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the evacuation cam gear 3557 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the left, but the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, so that the drive pin 3557b Cannot revolve, and the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3557, and the rotation of the back rear left decorative unit 3520 from the retracted position can be prevented.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3555 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554, the elevating cam gear 3557 rotates in the counterclockwise direction via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 revolves in the counterclockwise direction. When the drive pin 3557b revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the link member 3558 slides to the right in the first slit 3558a while pushing the inner surface of the first slit 3558a upward, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It will be.

When the link member 3558 moves upward, the actuating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the back rear left decorative unit 3520 projecting downward and to the right of the support shaft 3551a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. The movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a while the actuating pin 3524b slides to the right in the second slit 3558b, and the back rear left decorative unit 3520 It will rotate in the counterclockwise direction from the retracted position (see FIGS. 184 (a) and 184 (b)). At this time, the urging force of the spring 3559 assists the link member 3558 to move upward, reducing the load applied to the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554.

In this way, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the support shaft 3551a, so that the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side moves to the right. While moving upward, the back-back left-rotating decorative body 3510 moves to the right of the back-front-left staging unit 3700, and becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the back-rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the back-rear left decorative unit 3520 rotates when the elevating cam gear 3557 is rotated about 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state (retracted state). The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 184 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 is rotated about 44 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3557 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b slides to the left in the first slit 3558a. Then, when the drive pin 3557b moves to just above the center of revolution (when it revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. ..

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, the rotation of the back-rear left decorative unit 3520 in the counterclockwise direction is stopped, and the state of the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 184 (c). ). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 is rotated about 74 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

In the state where the back left decorative unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3557b is located directly above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557. In this state, due to the weight of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520, a force that causes the back rear left decorative unit 3520 to rotate in the clockwise direction around the support shaft 3551a acts, and the force causes the movable base. The link member 3558 tries to move downward via the actuating pin 3524b and the second slit 3558b of the 3524, but the drive pin 3557b inserted in the first slit 3558a is located directly above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3557 does not rotate either, so that the link member 3558 does not move downward and the back rear left decorative unit 3520 rotates from the state of the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the own weight of the back rear left decorative unit 3520 does not act on the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the elevating cam gear 3557, and the like.

In the state where the back rear left decorative unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3557 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction so that the drive pin 3557b is brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. Is also good. As a result, when the back rear left decorative unit 3520 tries to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a due to its own weight, the link member 3558 tries to move downward via the actuating pin 3524b. The elevating cam gear 3557 tends to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the force acting from the one slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b tries to revolve so as to move to the left, but since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b can revolve. Instead, the link member 3558 is prevented from moving downward, and the back rear left decorative unit 3520 can be non-rotatably locked in the state of the second appearance position.

In a state where the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). It becomes visible from.

In this back-rear left decorative unit 3520, the back-rear left rotation decoration unit 3510 is rotated by the back-rear left rotation drive motor 3525, and the back-rear left rotation decoration unit 3510 is rotated via the rotation gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated about an axis in the anteroposterior direction (see FIG. 183). Therefore, when the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510 is visible from the front (player side), when the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When returning the back rear left decorative unit 3520 from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the motor gear 3555 is reversed by the back rear left evacuation drive motor 3554. By rotating in the direction of, the link member 3558 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3557b of the evacuation cam gear 3557, and the back rear left decorative unit 3520 moves downward as the link member 3558 moves downward. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (clockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557 is detected by the back-rear left elevating detection sensor 3562, the back-rear left decorative unit 3520 is retracted by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554. It can be returned to the state of the position.

As shown in FIG. 183, the back rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 behind the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear left decorative substrate 3522, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521 can be light-emitting decorated. At this time, the LED of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 is made to emit light in a state where the back rear left decorative unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side. The back-rear left rotation decoration body 3510 and the back-back left decoration body 3521 can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Back right production unit]
Subsequently, the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to the main FIGS. 185 to 191 and the like. FIG. 185 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 185 (b) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 186 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear right staging unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 187 is an disassembled perspective view of the back-rear right staging unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure. FIG. 188 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right staging unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 189 is a disassembled back rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right staging unit and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 190 is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the back-rear right staging unit from the front. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back rear right decorative body unit in the back rear right staging unit.

The back rear right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the right end in the back box 3010 and in front of the right side of the back rear effect unit 3100. The back-back right effect unit 3600 rotatably supports the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3610 having translucency that can rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction and the back-back-right rotating decorative body 3610 on the lower end side. It is provided with a rear right decorative body unit 3620 and a back rear right drive unit 3650 mounted in a back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the back rear right decorative unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction. ..

The back-to-right rotating decorative body 3610 of the back-to-right effect unit 3600 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. The back-to-right rotating ornament 3610 has a shaft shaft 3610a projecting from the center of the rear surface to the rear in a columnar shape (see FIG. 188).

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a back rear right decorative body 3621 through which the shaft shaft 3610a of the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 penetrates in the center, and a back rear right decorative body 3621. It is attached to the back rear right decorative board 3622, which is provided behind the 3621 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and from the rear of the back rear right decorative board 3622 to the rear side of the back rear right decorative body 3621. The front cover 3623 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3610a of the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 and the front cover 3623 are attached to the rear side, and the upper end side can be rotated to the back rear right drive unit 3650. It is equipped with a movable base 3624 that can be attached.

Further, the back / rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a back / rear right rotation drive motor 3625 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that the rotation shaft projects between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623, and a back / rear right decorative body unit 3620. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3626 attached to the rotating shaft of the right-handed rotary drive motor 3625 and a flat gear 3626 that meshes with the drive gear 3626 and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3610a of the rear right-handed decorative body 3610. It is provided with a gear-shaped rotary gear 3627.

The back rear right decorative body 3621 of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 has translucency, and two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 are stacked back and forth and then rear. The petals on the side are formed in a shape that is rotated so as to be located between the petals on the front side. The plurality of LEDs on the back-right decorative substrate 3622 are full-color LEDs.

The front cover 3623 is formed in a shape in which a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear right decorative body 3621 and a portion extending upward from the upper right of the portion in a quadrangular shape are combined. .. The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a quadrangle. The front cover 3623 is formed in the shape of a shallow container that is open to the rear.

The movable base 3624 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623, and the upper end side extends upward from the upper end of the front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a penetrating back and forth on the upper end side, and an actuating pin 3624b projecting forward in a columnar shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3624a. In the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624, the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 of the back rear right drive unit 3650 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable. Further, the actuating pin 3624b projects forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

When the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back-rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back-rear right decorative body unit 3620 moves the back-rear right decorative body 3610 back and forth via the rotary gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the back rear right drive unit 3650 has a vertically extending flat plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3651 having a support shaft 3651a that rotatably supports the back rear right decorative unit 3620. , The vertically extending unit base 3652 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and installed in the back box 3010, the vertically extending unit cover 3653 whose upper part is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3652, and the unit cover. The rotating shaft is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the 3653 so as to project between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653. It is equipped with a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3655.

Further, the rear right drive unit 3650 has a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3657a that meshes with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b that protrudes rearward from the vicinity of the outer circumference of the gear portion 3657a in a cylindrical shape, and the front surface of the gear portion 3657a. An elevating cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer circumference, a first slit 3658a extending to the left and right into which a drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit. It has a second slit 3658b, which extends to the left and right below the 3658a and into which the actuating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decorative unit 3620 is slidably inserted, the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653. A link member 3658, which is slidably attached to and from the link member 3658, is provided.

Further, the back rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3569 that urges the link member 3658 upward, a flat plate-shaped partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevating cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. A back-rear right relay board 3661 attached to the front surface of the 3653, and a back-rear right elevating detection sensor 3662 attached to the rear surface of the back-rear right relay board 3661 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3657c of the elevating cam gear 3657. It is provided with a lower base 3663, which is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652 and to which the lower portion of the unit cover 3653 is attached to the front surface.

The reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate extending vertically, and the support shaft 3651a projects forward at the upper portion. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3652 extends upward from the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically from the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663) with substantially the same length, and is formed in the shape of a shallow container open to the rear.

The elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658 with the drive pin 3657b passing through the slit 3660a of the partition plate 3660. The detection piece 3657c is detected by the back-rear right elevating detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically, and a first slit 3658a is provided near the upper end and a second slit 3658b is provided at the lower end. The lower end of the spring 3659 is attached to the link member 3658, and the upper end is attached to the partition plate 3660.

The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semicircular shape through which the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is inserted. The back rear right relay board 3661 relays the connection between the back rear right decorative board 3622, the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, and the back rear right elevating detection sensor 3662, and the staging drive board 1720. It is for doing.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-to-right effect unit 3600 will be described. In the normal state, the back-back right effect unit 3600 is a back-back right decorative body provided with a back-back right rotating decorative body 3610 on the lower end side (tip side) as shown in FIGS. 190 and 191 (a). The unit 3620 is in the hanging retracted position. In this normal state, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is located behind the back front right staging unit 3800, and is invisible from the front (player side). It has become.

Further, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, the back front right effect unit 3600 is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back front right effect unit 3800, and the whole is forward (player side). It is invisible from.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3657c of the elevating cam gear 3657 is detected by the back-rear right elevating detection sensor 3662. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is located directly below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657, and is located near the right end in the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658. Further, in the normal state, the link member 3658 is located at the lower moving end, and the actuating pin 3624b located to the left of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decorative unit 3620 is located. It is located near the right end in the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658.

In this normal state, the link member 3658 is urged in the direction of moving upward by the spring 3659, but the normal line passing through the contact point in contact with the first slit 3658a in the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is formed. Since it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3657 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3657b via the first slit 3658a due to the urging force of the spring 3569, the drive pin 3657b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3658 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is centered on the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the urging force of the spring 3569 does not act on the back-rear right evacuation drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the evacuation cam gear 3657, and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. As a result, when the link member 3658 tries to move upward due to the urging force of the spring 3569, the elevating cam gear 3657 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b. .. At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the evacuation cam gear 3657 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the right, but the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, so that the drive pin 3657b Cannot revolve, and the upward movement of the link member 3658 can be locked via the elevating cam gear 3657 to prevent the back rear right decorative unit 3620 from rotating from the retracted position.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654, the elevating cam gear 3657 is rotated in the clockwise direction via the gear portion 3657a, and the elevating cam gear 3657 The drive pin 3657b of the above revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction, it slides to the left in the first slit 3658a while pushing the inner surface of the first slit 3658a upward, and the link member 3658 moves upward. It becomes.

When the link member 3658 moves upward, the actuating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the back rear right decorative unit 3620 protruding below and to the left of the support shaft 3651a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. The movable base 3624 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a while the actuating pin 3624b slides to the left in the second slit 3658b, and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 retracts. It will rotate clockwise from the position (see FIGS. 191 (a) and 191 (b)). At this time, the urging force of the spring 3569 assists the upward movement of the link member 3658, reducing the load applied to the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654.

In this way, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, so that the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side moves to the left. It will move upward, and the back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3610 will move to the left of the back-front-right effect unit 3800, and will be visible from the front (player side).

In the back-rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment, the rotation position of the back-rear right decorative unit 3620 when the elevating cam gear 3657 is rotated about 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state (retracted state). Is the first appearance position (see FIG. 191 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated about 44 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3657 further rotates in the clockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b slides to the right in the first slit 3658a. Then, when the drive pin 3657b moves to just above the center of revolution (when it revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back-to-right elevating drive motor 3654 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. ..

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, the rotation of the back rear right decorative unit 3620 in the clockwise direction is stopped, and the state of the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 191 (c)). See). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated about 74 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

In the state where the rear right decorative unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3657b is located directly above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657. In this state, due to the own weight of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620, a force that causes the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction around the support shaft 3651a acts, and the force causes the movement. The link member 3658 tries to move downward via the actuating pin 3624b and the second slit 3658b of the base 3624, but the drive pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is located directly above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3657 does not rotate either, so that the link member 3658 does not move downward and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 rotates from the state of the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the own weight of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 does not act on the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the elevating cam gear 3657, and the like.

In the state where the rear right decorative unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3657 is further rotated in the clockwise direction so that the drive pin 3657b comes into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. As a result, when the back-rear right decorative unit 3620 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a due to its own weight, the link member 3658 tries to move downward via the actuating pin 3624b. The elevating cam gear 3657 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve so as to move to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b can revolve. Instead, the link member 3658 is prevented from moving downward, and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 can be non-rotatably locked in the state of the second appearance position.

When the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). It becomes visible from.

In this back-rear right decorative body unit 3620, by rotating the drive gear 3626 by the back-rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back-rear right rotation decoration body 3610 is rotated via the rotary gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated about an axis in the anteroposterior direction (see Figure 190). Therefore, when the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 is visible from the front (player side), when the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When returning the back rear right decorative unit 3620 from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the motor gear 3655 is reversed by the back rear right evacuation drive motor 3654. By rotating in the direction of, the link member 3658 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3657b of the evacuation cam gear 3657, and the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 moves downward as the link member 3658 moves downward. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (counterclockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3657c of the elevating cam gear 3657 is detected by the back / rear right elevating detection sensor 3662, the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back / rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is stopped to retract the back / rear right decorative unit 3620. It can be returned to the state of the position.

As shown in FIG. 190, the back rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 behind the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back rear right decorative body 3621. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear right decorative substrate 3622, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back rear right decorative body 3621 can be light-emitting decorated. At this time, the LED of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 is made to emit light in a state where the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side. The back-back right rotation decoration body 3610 and the back-back right decoration body 3621 can be shown to the player.

[5-9j. Back front left production unit]
Subsequently, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195 and the like. FIG. 192 (a) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 192 (b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 193 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left staging unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 194 disassembles one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left staging unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 195 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the closed state, and FIG. 195 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the open state.

The back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left effect unit 3500 so that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back front left staging unit 3700 has three back front left decorations, the first back front left decoration unit 3710A, the second back front left decoration unit 3710B, and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C, in order from the top. It is composed of a body unit 3710.

In the back front left staging unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195, the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. It is tilted diagonally so that the upper end side moves to the right. Further, the shape of the rear cover 3715 of the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is slightly different from that of the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C.

As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 has a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating the front and rear and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. The shape of the shutter support member 3712 and the front surface of the shutter support member 3712 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and each of them is rotatably supported around the axis in the left-right direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. It is equipped with a shutter unit 3730.

Further, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from the rear, and has a transparent flat plate-shaped back front left decorative body 3713 and a back front left decorative body 3713. The back front left decorative board 3714, which is provided at the rear and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front, and the back front left decorative board 3714, which is attached to the front cover 3711 so as to cover the back front left decorative board 3714 from the rear, are the back front left effect unit. It is equipped with a rear cover 3715, which is attached to the front surface of the 3500.

Further, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, and a back front. The transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger in the left drive solenoid 3717 and the transmission member 3718 rotatably attached to the support plate 3716 around the axis in the left-right direction, and the transmission member 3718 is moved forward and backward by the back front left drive solenoid 3717. It includes a rotating link member 3719 and an opening / closing slider 3720 that slides in the vertical direction by the rotation of the link member 3719 to open / close the shutter unit 3730.

The front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative unit 3710 is formed in an outer shape such that the "convex" character is tilted to the right and the corners are rounded (a shape in which a "pine" is stylized). The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3712a rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3733 of each shutter member 3731 in the shutter unit 3730 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the left end of the front surface. The boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening / closing slider 3720, and a support plate 3716 is attached to the tip thereof.

The shutter unit 3730 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3731. The shutter member 3731 has a flat plate-shaped shutter 3732 extending to the left and right, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a columnar shape from both ends in the left-right direction of the shutter 3732, and a left side after projecting from the tip of the left shaft portion 3733 in the direction perpendicular to the axis. It has a crank shaft 3734 that extends in a columnar direction in the direction of the shaft.

The shutter 3732 is formed in a length and shape corresponding to the height in which the shutter member 3731 is arranged with respect to the shape in the frame of the front cover 3711. The shaft portion 3733 projects from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crank shaft 3734 is located behind the shaft portion 3733.

The shutter member 3731 can rotate about an axis in the left-right direction about the shaft portion 3733 by rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3733 by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712. The crank shaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the open / close slider 3720.

Although not shown, the back front left decorative body 3713 is decorated with characters, items, logos, and the like in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back front left decorative body 3713 can diffuse the light from the LED of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. The plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3714 are full-color LEDs.

The support plate 3716 extends vertically with the plate surface facing left and right, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent to the right. In the support plate 3716, a portion bent to the right on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion projects rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. There is. Further, the support plate 3716 has a support pin 3716a protruding from the vicinity of the lower end to the right in a columnar shape. The support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719.

The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 with the plunger moving downward. The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is urged by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. The link member 3719 can rotate about an axis in the left-right direction about the support pin 3716a by inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716. The link member 3719 is provided with a first connecting portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side thereof with a portion in which the support pin 3716a is inserted, and is connected to the opening / closing slider 3720. A connecting portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

The opening / closing slider 3720 extends vertically at substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3730 composed of a plurality of shutter members 3731, and a transmission groove into which each crank shaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. It has a 3720a and a slit 3720b into which the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back front left effect unit 3700 will be described. In the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195 (a), in the normal state, the shutter 3732 of the shutter member 3731 of the shutter unit 3730 is in a state where the plate surface faces forward, and there are a plurality of them. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is closed by the shutter 3732 of the above. In this normal state, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is invisible from the front (player side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front left decorative body 3713 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (plural shutters 3732). Has been done.

In the normal state, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the urging force of the spring. Further, in a normal state, the open / close slider 3720 is located at the upper moving end, and the crank shaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is located above the shaft portion 3733.

In this normal state, when the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the urging force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connection portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates about the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3719b on the opposite side of the first connecting portion 3719a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3719b of the link member 3719 causes the opening / closing slider 3720 connected to the second connecting portion 3719b to move downward.

By moving the open / close slider 3720 downward, the crank shaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted in the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter is positioned so that the crank shaft 3734 is located below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates about the shaft portion 3733. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 faces up and down, so that the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the back front provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is opened. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 195 (b)).

After that, by de-energizing (OFF) the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the plunger that had been moving upward will move downward due to the urging force of the spring, and by moving in the opposite direction to the above, The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front left effect unit 3700 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3730 by the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3730 can be changed to the back front left decoration body 3713. It is possible to switch to the decoration (picture) of, and the player can enjoy the change of decoration.

Further, since the back front left decorative board 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decorative body 3713, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front left decorative board 3714 are emitted. Then, the shutter unit 3730 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3714 are made to emit light, so that the back front left decorated with light emission is emitted. The decorative body 3713 can be shown to the player.

Further, in the back front left staging unit 3700, there are three back front left decorative body units, the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A, the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B, and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. Since the shutter unit 3730 can be opened and closed independently and the 3710 can be decorated with light emission, various effects can be given to the player by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front left decorative body units 3710. I can show you.

[5-9k. Back front right production unit]
Subsequently, the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 to 199 and the like. FIG. 196 (a) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 196 (b) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right staging unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 198 disassembles one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right staging unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 199 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in the closed state, and FIG. 199 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in the open state.

The back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear right effect unit 3600 so that the upper part near the right end is located behind the back front right decoration body 3040 in the back box 3010. .. The back front right staging unit 3800 has three back front right decorations, the first back front right decoration unit 3810A, the second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C, in order from the top. It is composed of a body unit 3810.

In the back front right staging unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199, the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. It is tilted diagonally so that the upper end side moves to the left. Further, the shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is slightly different from that of the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C.

As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 has a frame-shaped front cover 3811 penetrating the front and rear and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. The shape of the shutter support member 3812 and the front surface of the shutter support member 3812 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and each of them is rotatably supported around the axis in the horizontal direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. It is equipped with a shutter unit 3830.

Further, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from the rear, and the flat plate-shaped back front right decorative body 3813 having translucency and the back front right decorative body 3813. The back front right decorative board 3814, which is provided at the rear and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front, and the back front right decorative board 3814, which is attached to the front cover 3811 so as to cover the back front right decorative board 3814 from the rear, are attached to the back front right effect unit. It is equipped with a rear cover 3815, which is attached to the front surface of the 3600.

Further, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front right drive solenoid 3817. The transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger in the right drive solenoid 3817 and the transmission member 3818 rotatably attached to the support plate 3816 around the axis in the left-right direction. It includes a rotating link member 3819 and an opening / closing slider 3820 that slides in the vertical direction by the rotation of the link member 3819 to open and close the shutter unit 3830.

The front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 is formed in an outer shape such that the "convex" character is tilted to the left and the corners are rounded (a shape in which a "pine" is stylized). The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3812a rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3833 of each shutter member 3831 in the shutter unit 3830 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss portion 3812b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the right end of the front surface. The boss portion 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening / closing slider 3820, and a support plate 3816 is attached to the tip thereof.

The shutter unit 3830 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3831. The shutter member 3831 has a flat plate-shaped shutter 3832 extending to the left and right, a shaft portion 3833 extending in a columnar shape from both ends in the left-right direction of the shutter 3832, and a right-angled shaft portion 3833 after projecting from the tip of the right-hand shaft portion 3833 to the right. It has a crank shaft 3834 that extends in a columnar direction in the direction of the cylinder.

The shutter 3832 is formed in a length and shape corresponding to the height in which the shutter member 3831 is arranged with respect to the shape in the frame of the front cover 3811. The shaft portion 3833 projects from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crank shaft 3834 is located behind the shaft portion 3833.

The shutter member 3831 can rotate about the axis in the left-right direction about the shaft portion 3833 by the shaft portion 3833 being rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812a of the shutter support member 3812. The crank shaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the open / close slider 3820.

Although not shown, the front right decorative body 3813 is decorated with characters, items, logos, and the like in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back front right decorative body 3813 can diffuse the light from the LED of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. The plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative board 3814 are full-color LEDs.

The support plate 3816 extends vertically with the plate surface facing left and right, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent to the left. In the support plate 3816, a portion bent to the left on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion projects rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. There is. Further, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a protruding from the vicinity of the lower end to the left in a columnar shape. The support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819.

The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 so that the plunger moves downward. The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is urged by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. The link member 3819 can rotate about an axis in the left-right direction about the support pin 3816a by inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816. The link member 3819 is provided with a first connecting portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side with a portion in which the support pin 3816a is inserted, and is connected to the opening / closing slider 3820. A connecting portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

The opening / closing slider 3820 extends vertically at substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3830 composed of a plurality of shutter members 3831, and a transmission groove into which each crank shaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. It has a 3820a and a slit 3820b into which the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back front right effect unit 3800 will be described. In the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199 (a), in the normal state, the shutter 3832 of the shutter member 3831 of the shutter unit 3830 is in a state where the plate surface faces forward, and there are a plurality of them. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed by the shutter 3832. In this normal state, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is invisible from the front (player side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3830 is closed, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear front right decorative body 3813 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (plural shutters 3832). Has been done.

In the normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the urging force of the spring. Further, in a normal state, the open / close slider 3820 is located at the upper moving end, and the crank shaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is located above the shaft portion 3833.

In this normal state, when the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the urging force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connection portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates about the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3819b on the opposite side of the first connecting portion 3819a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3819b of the link member 3819 causes the opening / closing slider 3820 connected to the second connecting portion 3819b to move downward.

By moving the open / close slider 3820 downward, the crank shaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted in the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is positioned so that the crank shaft 3834 is located below the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 rotates about the shaft portion 3833. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3832 faces up and down, so that the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832, and the back front provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is opened. The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 199 (b)).

After that, by de-energizing (OFF) the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the plunger that had been moving upward will move downward due to the urging force of the spring, and by moving in the opposite direction to the above, The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front right effect unit 3800 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3830 by the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3830 can be changed to the back front right decoration body 3813. It is possible to switch to the decoration (picture) of, and the player can enjoy the change of decoration.

Further, since the back front right decorative board 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back front right decorative body 3813, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front right decorative board 3814 are emitted. Then, the shutter unit 3830 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative board 3814 are made to emit light, so that the back front right decorated with light emission is emitted. The decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player.

Further, in the back front right staging unit 3800, there are three back front right decorative body units 3810A, a second back front right decorative body unit 3810B, and a third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. Since the shutter unit 3830 can be opened and closed independently and the 3810 can be decorated with light emission, various effects can be given to the player by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front right decorative body units 3810. I can show you.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main effect (movable effect) on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 200 to 205 and the like. FIG. 200 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 201 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the lower back middle rotation decoration body of the lower back middle effect unit is moved from a lower position to an ascending position. In FIG. 202, the back-up / rear-rotating decorative body of the back-up / rear-effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-rear left-rotating decorative body of the back-up / left-effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back-rear right. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the back right rotation decoration body of the production unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, respectively. FIG. 203 shows the back-rear left-rotating decorative body of the back-rear left-effect unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-rear-right-effect unit's back-rear right-rotating decorative body from the retracted position to the second appearance position, respectively. It is a front view of the game board shown in the moved state. FIG. 204 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit from the closed state to the open state, respectively.

In FIG. 205, the back-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-up-rear-rotating decorative body of the back-up-rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the back-rear left effect unit is back-rear. Move the left-handed decorative body from the retracted position to the first appearance position, move the back-back right-turning decorative body from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and move the back-lower middle-rotating decorative body to the back-lower middle-rotating decorative body. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which it moved from the descending position to the ascending position, respectively.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that divides the rear end side of the game area 5a, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side. Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed almost entirely transparently, under normal conditions. , As shown in FIG. 111, through them, the back front left decorative body 3030, the back front right decorative body 3040, and the back lower left effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100. Decorative body 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251 of back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310 of back bottom middle effect unit 3300, back top front rotation decoration body 3410 and back top of back top effect unit 3400 The front decorative body 3421, the front cover 3711 and the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left effect unit 3700, the front cover 3811 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right effect unit 3800, etc. can be clearly seen, and the center accessory 2500. The staging image displayed on the staging display device 1600 can be satisfactorily visually recognized through the frame of.

Further, in detail, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 is from the abutment portion 1006 of the front component 1000 to the right rail 1005. It is located along the side right middle unit up to the vicinity of 2700. Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the back-up effect unit 3400 and cannot be visually recognized from the player side.

Further, the lower back left rotation decoration body 3201 is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the center of the side unit 2200 and behind the general winning opening 2001 on the left side, and the lower back right rotation decoration body 3251. Is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the first prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The lower back left rotation decoration body 3201 and the lower back right rotation decoration body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and the front unit 2000.

Further, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the lowered position, and is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 so that the upper portion protrudes into the frame of the center accessory 2500. ing. Since the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is viewed from diagonally above from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, the number decoration above the rotation center is displayed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be visually recognized well.

Further, the back-up front decorative body 3421 of the back-up effect unit 3400 extends left and right at the upper part of the game area 5a in the front view, and the upper part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction is the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory. It can be visually recognized through 2500, and the rest can be visually recognized well through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 has one petal facing upward at the center in the left-right direction in front of the back-up front decoration body 3421, and is good from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Can be visually recognized. The back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 having the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 of the back-up effect unit 3400 is in a retracted position behind the back-up front decoration body 3421 in a normal state. It is invisible from the side.

Further, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 having the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 of the back rear left effect unit 3500 is in a retracted position behind the back front left effect unit 3700 in a normal state. , It is invisible from the player side. Further, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 having the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 of the back rear right effect unit 3600 is in a retracted position behind the back front right effect unit 3800 in a normal state. , It is invisible from the player side.

Further, the three back front left decorative body units 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 are arranged vertically along the left side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in the front view, and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the frame of the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the center accessory 2500. The upper first back front left decoration unit 3710A of the three back front left decoration units 3710 is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in the front view. The lower part is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second back front left decorative unit 3710B on the middle side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the front view. Most of the lower third back front left decorative unit 3710C is located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in the front view, and the right part is in the frame of the center accessory 2500. positioned.

In the back front left staging unit 3700, in the normal state, the shutter unit 3730 is closed in each of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, and the back front left decorative body 3713 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

Further, the three back front right decorative body units 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 are arranged vertically along the right side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in the front view, and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the frame of the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the center accessory 2500. The upper first back front right decorative body unit 3810A of the three back front right decorative body units 3810 is located on the right side behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in the front view. The left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second back front right decorative body unit 3810B on the middle side and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C on the lower side are the transparent game panel 1100 and the center on the right side from the part to the left of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. It is located behind the accessory 2500, and the remaining left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500.

In the back front right staging unit 3800, in the normal state, the shutter unit 3830 is closed in each of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, and the back front right decorative body 3813 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

The game board 5 is produced behind the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Unit 3100, back bottom left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700 , And the back front right effect unit 3800 performs a predetermined effect (movable effect or light emission effect).

Specifically, as an effect using the back-rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 200, by moving the slide guide 3130 downward by the back-rear drive motor 3126, the lock member 3134 The lock is released by, and the movable decorative body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position. As a result, the player can see the effect (movable effect) in which the large back-rear movable decorative body 3110 straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It can make you think that it is, and you can raise the expectation for the game.

In this back-rear effect unit 3100, although not shown, after the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is dropped to the appearance position, the back-rear drive motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 upward to move the back-rear movable decoration. By appropriately changing the forward / reverse rotation of the back-rear drive motor 3126 when returning the 3110 to the retracted position, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved up and down the display screen of the staging display device 1600 via the slide guide 3130. It may be reciprocated up and down near the center of the direction. As a result, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the vertical center of the display screen of the staging display device 1600, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the back-rear movable decoration body 3110. The movable decorative body 3110 can be noticed, and the movement of the movable decorative body 3110 after the back can be enjoyed.

As an effect using the back lower middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 201, the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 rotates the elevating arm 3357 to rotate the lower back middle decorative unit 3320. Is moved from the descending position to the ascending position, and the under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction by the under-back middle-rotating drive motor 3333. As a result, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward so as to block a part of the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500, which is good from the player side. Since it can be visually recognized and rotates around, it can give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player.

Since the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is provided with six number decorations, by rotating the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, the player feels as if the roulette is rotating. Can be given. Therefore, when the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is rotated, the effect display device 1600 is displayed with an effect image such as "Sugoroku", and the number decoration of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 that has stopped rotating is displayed. Depending on the situation, the "piece" may be advanced. As a result, the player is harassed by whether or not the rotating underside middle rotating decoration body 3310 stops rotating at the position of the desired number decoration so that the "piece" advances to the desired "box". It can be thrilling and entertaining to the player. In addition, it is possible to make the player feel that the expected value is increasing by advancing the "piece", and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

Examples of the production using the back lower left effect unit 3200, the back lower right effect unit 3250, the back upper effect unit 3400, the back rear left effect unit 3500, and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 are shown in FIG. 202. As shown, in the back lower left effect unit 3200, the back lower left drive motor 3205 rotates the back lower left rotation decoration body 3201, and in the back lower right effect unit 3250, the back lower right drive motor 3255 rotates the back lower right rotation decoration body. Rotate 3251. Further, in the back-up effect unit 3400, the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425 rotates the back-up front rotation decoration unit 3410, and the back-up lift drive motor 3429 lowers the back-up lift decoration unit 3450 from the retracted position. At the same time as rotating to the appearance position, the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 rotates the back-up rear rotation decorative body 3440. Further, in the back-rear left staging unit 3500, the back-rear left decorative unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position on the upper right by the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and the back-rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is used to move the back-rear left decorative unit 3520 to the first appearance position. Rotate the counterclockwise ornament 3510. Further, in the back-rear right effect unit 3600, the back-rear right decorative body unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position on the upper left by the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654, and the back-rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is used to move the back-rear right decorative body unit 3620 to the first appearance position. Rotate the right-handed decorative body 3610.

As a result, the back-up / rear-rotating decorative body 3440, the back-back-left-rotating decorative body 3510, and the back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3610 move to the front of the effect display device 1600 and become visible, and the back-lower left-rotating decorative body becomes visible. Because the body 3201, the back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251, the back top front rotation decoration body 3410, the back top back rotation decoration body 3440, the back back left rotation decoration body 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration body 3610 rotate respectively. By rotating the six ornaments round and round, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game by making them think that something good will happen.

At this time, the back-up elevating drive motor 3249, the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654 are repeatedly rotated forward and backward as appropriate to form the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 and the back-rear left decoration. The body unit 3520 and the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 may be swung, respectively. As a result, the back-up / rear-rotating decorative body 3440, the back-back-left-rotating decorative body 3510, and the back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3610 rotate while swaying, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It can entertain the player.

Further, at this time, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be rotated. As a result, the seven ornaments rotate round and round, which makes the player strongly think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous may occur. It is possible to raise expectations for the game.

As an effect using the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 203, the back rear left effect unit 3500 is backed by the back rear left evacuation drive motor 3554. The left decoration unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper right, and the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 rotates the back rear left rotation decoration 3510. Further, in the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the upper left second appearance position by the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back rear right decoration unit 3620. Rotate the decorative body 3610 to rotate. As a result, the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and the two ornaments rotate around at a position of approximately height, so there is something good that surprises the player. It can make you think that it is, and you can raise the expectation for the game.

At this time, in the staging display device 1600, the positions of the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3510 and the back-rear-right-rotating decorative body 3610 at the second appearance position are the eyes of the face of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. It is also possible to display a staging image that is a position. As a result, it is possible to show the player the effect that the character's eyes are spinning, and it is possible to entertain the player.

As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 204, in the back front left effect unit 3700, the shutter unit 3730 is operated by the back front left drive solenoid 3717. The shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the back front right drive solenoid 3817 in the back front right effect unit 3800. As a result, the back front left decorative body 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 can be visually recognized from the player side, so that the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right The decoration of the decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

As the effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, each has three back front left decorative body units 3710 and three back front right decorative body units 3810. The shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decorative unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decorative unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed, and the combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 to be opened and closed may be opened and closed individually. As a result, various effects can be shown to the player, and the player can be less likely to get bored.

Back back production unit 3100, back bottom left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600 As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 205, all the decorative objects and the like may be movable. As a result, it is possible to be convinced that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) will occur for the player by moving all the decorative bodies, and it is possible to raise expectations for the advantageous gaming state. can. In this case, in the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 are moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is avoided.

In the above, the movement of each decorative body has been described, but when each decorative body is moved, the LED of the decorative substrate provided at the rear is appropriately emitted to emit light, so that the player can produce the light emitting effect of the decorative body. It can be shown and can attract the attention of the player even more.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emission effect as described above can be appropriately combined, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of patterns to the player by appropriately combining light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc., and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and various effects can be used. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[5-11. Main effects of the game board]
Next, the main functions and effects of the game board 5 of the present embodiment having the above-mentioned configuration will be described. The game board 5 of the present embodiment is provided with a penetrating opening 1112 in the game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a on the front side, and then the game area 5a is distributed to the distribution area where the game ball B can be distributed. The frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, which is divided into an impossible non-distribution area and is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112, has a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112 in this state, the outside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is likely to be the distribution region, and the inside is the non-distribution region. Then, a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is extended from a position in the peripheral wall portion 2501 from the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 to the non-distribution region side (inside). At the same time, since the flange portion 2502 that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided from the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is not provided to the distribution region side (outside), the peripheral wall portion 2501 Since nothing extends to the distribution area side of the part where the support part 2503 is provided, it is possible to plant the obstacle nail N at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall part 2501. Therefore, the substantial distribution area can be set to a position in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, and the substantial distribution area can be made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. That is, even if the non-distribution area (within the frame of the center accessory 2500) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is increased, the actual distribution area does not become smaller as in the conventional pachinko machine. .. Therefore, the non-distribution area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is increased while suppressing the distribution area in which the game ball B is distributed in the game area 5a from becoming substantially small. It is possible to make it easier to see the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as the effect device provided behind the area, the movable body and the decorative body of the effect unit, and the game and non-distribution area in the distribution area by the game ball B. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be enjoyed in any of the productions in.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced from the non-circulation region side (inside) by the support portion 2503, and the peripheral wall portion 2502 is provided in the portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. Since the portion 2501 can be reinforced from the distribution region side (outside) and the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved. Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a comes into contact with (contacts) the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained by the support portion 2503 or the like. It is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged.

Further, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by attaching to the support portion 2503, the flange portion 2502, the game panel 1100, etc., the peripheral wall portion 2501 is brought into contact with the game ball B. Can be prevented from elastically deforming and flipping the game ball B like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a from making a strange movement different from the conventional one by coming into contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, which causes discomfort to the player. Can be prevented and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support unit 2503 is made transparent, the support unit 2503 extending from the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-distribution area side can be made difficult to see, and the support unit 2503 (center) can be made difficult to see. Since the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as the effect device provided behind the accessory 2500) and the movable body and the decorative body of the effect unit provided on the back unit 3000 can be seen, it is a non-distribution area. It is possible to increase the visible range of the staging image, movable body, decorative body, etc. provided behind the staging device, make it easier to exert the staging effect by the staging device, and provide it behind the non-distribution area. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out by having a large visible range of the staging image, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. of the staging display device 1600, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player. can.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed or the pachinko machine 1 is provided by the transparent part. Since it is possible to reflect, refract, diffuse, and transmit light from a light emitting means (LED, effect display device 1600, etc.), transparent parts such as the support portion 2503 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 are illuminated. It can be made to look brilliant, improve its appearance, and enhance its appeal to players. At this time, the transparent support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like to further enhance the diffusion effect.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support unit 2503 is made transparent, it is provided in a movable body (for example, a back front left effect unit 3700 or a back rear left effect unit 3500) provided behind the support unit 2503. The light emission by the light emitting means (LED) obtains the above-mentioned effect, and the transparent support portion 2503 makes it possible for the player to recognize the existence of the movable body.

Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is extended to the game panel. The lens effect of the support unit 2503 can be reduced as compared with the case where the lens is extended to the same thickness as the 1100, and the support unit 2503 has a rear back front left decorative body 3030 and an effect device (effect display device 1600). Etc.), the lens effect of the transparent support part 2503 becomes even lower, and the part behind the support part 2503 in the back front left decorative body 3030, the staging image of the staging device, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. (design) ) Can be improved, and the back front left decorative body 3030, the staging image, and the like can be made easier to see.

Further, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is formed in a portion of the tip end side of the support portion 2503 having a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Since it is possible to show a line different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 depending on the tip side of the frame, it is difficult to see a single design as compared with the case where the shape is formed along the peripheral wall portion 2501, and it seems that attention is paid to details. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a deep design.

Further, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant and is different at the relevant portion of the support portion 2503. Therefore, by setting the extension amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the reinforcing effect of the peripheral wall portion 2501 by the support portion 2503 can be improved.

Further, since the support portion 2503 extends from the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. It is possible to make an illusion as if, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the support unit 2503.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and extends from the middle (middle) of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the front-rear direction, it is behind the peripheral wall portion 2501. Compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is extended from the end side, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the reinforcing effect of the support portion 2503 with respect to the tip end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, so that the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is sufficient. It can be maintained, and it is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged even if the game medium comes into contact with the game medium.

Further, since the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is formed so as to have a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 and the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112, the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 is inserted. The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or obscured by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is formed along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is in a state where the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100. It seems that it protrudes forward from the peripheral edge of the opening 1112, and it is possible to give a sense of unity to the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) and the game panel 1100, and it is a good-looking pachinko machine in the game area 5a. Machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, whether the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque, it is partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. The staging image of the staging display device 1600 provided behind the non-distribution area, the movable body of the staging unit, the decorative body, etc. can be clearly seen from the front (player side), and the staging display device 1600 can be visually recognized. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of fully exerting the effect of the effect of the above.

Further, since the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is projected forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed from an angle, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since it looks protruding to the top, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the existence of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and it is also possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the distribution area and the non-distribution area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, a flange portion 2502 extending to the distribution region side (outside) is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 where the support portion 2503 does not extend, and the portion where the flange portion 2502 is provided is provided. Does not provide a support unit 2503 extending to the non-distribution area side (inside), so that the support unit 2503 interferes with the visibility of the staging device (the staging unit of the staging display device 1600 and the back unit 3000). It is possible to increase the area where the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the movable body of the effect unit can be seen, and it is possible to make it easier to exert the effect of the effect device, and the effect device for the player. It is possible to entertain the production by and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, since the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained at the same level as the conventional product by the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502, the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the support portion 2503 are integrally molded with resin and gold. It is possible to prevent the molded product from being deformed when it is removed from the mold.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is extended into a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is integrally molded with synthetic resin, only the portion of the support portion 2503 is different from other parts. It is possible to prevent the difference in the amount of shrinkage from becoming large, and it is possible to prevent the center accessory 2500 from being deformed during molding.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the frame-shaped front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 from the rear side are provided. The back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 as functional parts of the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The motor 3654 is arranged so that at least a part of the motor 3654 is outside the game area 5a in the front view, and is placed between the game panel 1100 and the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a so as to at least cover the portion in the game area 5a of the elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. Through the transparent front component 1000, the game panel 1100, and the game area 5a, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 can be obscured from the player side, and the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be obscured. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can be seen instead of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 as a whole can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have an enhanced appeal to the player.

Further, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the boundary of the game area 5a partitioned by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 is difficult to understand, so that the outer periphery of the game area 5a is not partitioned. It is possible to give a feeling of openness by making it look like this, and even if the game area 5a is the same size as the conventional pachinko machine, the game area 5a can be made to look larger. Therefore, since the gaming area 5a looks larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, raise the expectation for the game with the pachinko machine 1, and play the game. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine, and can be a pachinko machine 1 that can enhance the appeal to the player.

Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 cover at least a portion in the game area 5a in front of functional parts such as the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area 5a, so that the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved. In addition to being able to exert the same effects as described above, it is possible to make the functional parts difficult to see even when viewed from the center side of the game area 5a.

Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided with continuous decorations over the entire surface, and the back front extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a in front view. Since the decorations of the left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the continuous decoration makes it difficult to understand the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area 5a, giving a feeling of openness to the game. The size of the area 5a can be made to appear larger than the actual size, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look better by the decoration of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040. It is possible to make it stand out and enhance the appeal to the player.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are made opaque, the back front left staging unit 3500 and the back front left effect unit 3500 provided on the rear side through the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040. It is possible to prevent the back rear right effect unit 3600 and the like from being seen, and the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 and the like can be seen from the player side through the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100. It is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 by preventing it from becoming worse.

Further, in front view, at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 as functional parts is arranged outside the game area 5a (in the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554). (The whole is arranged outside the game area 5a), so that the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a are arranged in order to arrange the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. The back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 can be arranged without increasing the space between them, and the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 can be arranged. By balancing, it is possible to prevent the space of the game area 5a from becoming smaller. In other words, since a part of the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is arranged in the game area 5a in the front view, the space between the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a should be reduced. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of relatively increasing the space of the game area 5a and further exerting the above-mentioned action and effect. Further, by providing a part of the drive source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the accessory that can move in the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space in the game area 5a can be increased, in which case. The range of effects performed within the game area 5a is expanded. All drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) of the accessory that can move in the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

Further, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 1600, etc. It is possible to transmit, reflect, refract, and diffuse the light from the pachinko machine, making it appear as if the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are emitting light, and the entire pachinko machine 1 can be seen. Can improve the appearance of. Further, although the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided with the opaque decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042, the base 3031 of each of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 is provided. And since the base 3041 (which may include the decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042) is made of a transparent member, the light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be emitted from the back front left decorative body 3030 or the back. It is possible to give the impression that the front right decorative body 3040 reaches the front right decorative body 3040 and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 emit light. It can be said that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged at positions where the light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 reaches.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 covers at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 as a functional component, it can be seen that it is a functional component by covering at least a part without covering the whole. It can be spicy and look like part of a decoration. Therefore, even if the back front left decorative body 3030 is not sized to cover the entire back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained, so that the back front left decorative body can be obtained. It is possible to make the game area 5a look larger while reducing the cost of 3030. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, but some of them are pachinko machines. It is desirable that the portion is closer to the center of 1 (the portion closer to the boundary line that divides the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). Further, it extends from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a even for a predetermined place where there is no drive source outside the game area 5a (a place in the lower left in FIG. 131, that is, a place in the lower left corner of the game board 5). By providing the decorative body, the game area 5a can be made to look large.

Further, the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a is closed from the rear by the transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is located on the front side of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided on the rear side of the game area 5a. Therefore, in front view, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from the rear by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The same effect can be obtained, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 do not interfere with the game ball B in the game area 5a, and the game is smoothly performed in the game area 5a. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 are extended to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the front view, the back front left decoration body is formed in the door window 101a. The back-back left effect unit 3500 and the back-back right effect unit 3600 behind the back front right decoration body 3040 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can be made invisible, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the extent that the inner part of the door window 101a in the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the back front left decorative body 3030 is used to elevate the back rear left. Even if the entire drive motor 3554 is not covered, the uncovered portion can be covered by the frame-shaped door frame 3, so that it is possible to prevent the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming longer than necessary. The cost of the back front left decorative body 3030 (pachinko machine 1) can be reduced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is inclined toward the game panel 1100. On the other hand, in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the front wall portion 2101 forming the front surface is made parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front surface is decorated with translucency. Since (a sticker is attached), the front surface of the first starting port 2002 faces forward (player side), and the first starting port 2002 can be made more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, since it is possible to make it easier for the player's consciousness to be directed toward the first starting port 2002 than the general winning opening 2001, the number of game balls B accepted by the first starting port 2002 is reduced (or the first starting). It is possible to avoid that the player's consciousness is concentrated on the general winning opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002), and the lottery of the first special lottery result performed by accepting the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002. It is possible to raise the expectation for the player and suppress the decline in interest, and at the same time, it is possible to make the player surely recognize the position of the first starting port 2002 that the player should aim at, and the player aimed at the first starting port 2002. You can entertain the game.

Then, depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is accepted by the first starting port 2002, the player can be disturbed, and when the game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002, the game ball B can be disturbed. Depending on whether or not a winning (for example, "big hit") in which an advantageous gaming state is generated by the lottery of the first special lottery result is drawn, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the expectation for the game is raised. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. After that, when the winning is drawn by the lottery of the first special lottery result, an advantageous gaming state in which the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 open and close in a predetermined pattern occurs, so that the player is greatly enjoyed. It is possible to avoid the decline in the interest in the game. At this time, if the game ball B aimed at the first starting port 2002 is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the game ball B is paid out as a privilege although the lottery of the first special lottery result is not performed. , The player is not discouraged, and the game can be continuously enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting port 2002 is made parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Since the form (appearance) of the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 will be significantly different, a seal is attached to the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 and a seal is attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, it does not give a sense of discomfort to the player, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 from becoming unattractive, and the player is made to enjoy the game with the pachinko machine 1 and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 are formed of a transparent member, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 is visually recognized through the transparent member. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002, and to fully enjoy the joy of being accepted. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 are formed of transparent members, the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emission provided in the pachinko machine 1. Since the light from the means (LED of the decorative substrate) can be reflected, refracted, or diffused, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be made to look gorgeous and look good. Therefore, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced.

Further, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the accepted game ball B is used as the general winning opening. Since the game ball B is guided to the rear later than the game ball B received in 2001, the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is used as the general winning opening 2001. Since the game ball B can be guided backward at a later timing than the received game ball B, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, the joy (superiority complex) due to the acceptance of the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 is given to the general prize. It is possible to allow the player to enjoy the game ball B for a longer time than when the game ball B is received in the mouth 2001, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is immediately rearward (). Since it can be guided to the game panel 1100 side) and discharged faster than the game ball B accepted in the first starting port 2002, it is useless for the game ball B being accepted in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to suppress the realization of the game for a long time, the player's attention can be directed to the next game ball B, the game can be advanced smoothly, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the general winning opening 2001, a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 after inclining the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface with respect to the game panel 1100. In order to make it possible, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in the front view. Depending on the player, the game ball B can be made to have the illusion that it has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001, and it may be an illusion. Therefore, even if the privilege (lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given after that, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side. It is possible to continue to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning opening 2001 can be reduced. Decoration such as a seal can be omitted on the front surface of the mouth 2001. Therefore, since the cost for the general winning opening 2001 can be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining to the player by turning that amount into a staging device or the like.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 of the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, the rotating back bottom middle rotation having a plurality of even-numbered (here, 6 places) stop positions. The decorative body 3310 is provided with an area detection piece 3325 having a length extending to half of the stop positions and a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position (here, six), and the area detection piece 3325. Multiple (here, three) area identification sensors 3330 consisting of half of the stop positions for detecting, and one position identification sensor 3331 for detecting the position detection piece 3326, and multiple (here, four) sensors. Since it is provided, when the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back is rotated, the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 for detecting the area detection piece 3325 are repeatedly increased and then decreased in order from one side in the rotation direction. By the combination of the area identification sensor 3330 that detects the area detection piece 3325, the current rotation position of the underside middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

More specifically, in the case of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, three side-by-side stop positions in which the area detection piece 3325 is half. The minimum number of area identification sensors 3330 required for detecting the movement to an arbitrary stop position is three, which is half of the number of stop positions. Then, the three area identification sensors 3330 are set as the first area identification sensor 3330a, the second area identification sensor 3330b, and the third area identification sensor 3330c in the rotation direction, and the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310 is in the first stop position. It is assumed that only the first region identification sensor 3330a detects the region detection piece 3325 at the time of (position of the decorative digit of "3"). When the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the second stop position (the position of the decorative number of "2") from this state, the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detection piece 3325. do. Further, when the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back is rotated to the third stop position (the position of the decorative number of "1"), the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c are activated. The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fourth stop position (the position of the decorative number of "6"), the first region identification sensor 3330a is not detected, and the second region identification sensor 3330b and the third region identification are specified. The sensor 3330c detects the area detection piece 3325. Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fifth stop position (the position of the decorative number of "5"), the second area specifying sensor 3330b is not detected, and only the third area specifying sensor 3330c is the area detection piece. Detects 3325. Then, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position of the decorative number of "4"), the third area specifying sensor 3330c is also not detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 are the area detecting pieces 3325. Is not detected. After that, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, it rotates to the first stop position (the position of the decorative number of "3"), and only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detection piece 3325. In the initial state, the detection / non-detection of the region specifying sensor 3330 as described above is repeated as the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back is rotated.

In this way, since the area detection piece 3325 having a length extending over half of the stop positions is provided, the combination of the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 results in the rotation decoration under the back. Since the rotation of the body 3310 can be detected and all the area identification sensors 3330 are not undetected even until the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back rotates to the next stop position, the underside of the back The current position of the medium-rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

Further, since the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is provided with a plurality of (six here) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 are provided. It is possible to accurately detect the stop position by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position identification sensor 3331 after roughly detecting the rotation of the underside middle rotation decoration body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position by the detection. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the underside middle rotation decoration body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions by minimizing the deviation of the stop position.

In addition, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the game is played by shifting the stop position. It is possible to prevent the person from giving a sense of discomfort (discomfort), to entertain the effect (movable effect) by the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back, and to suppress the decline in interest. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of realizing the operation of the movable body (rotating decorative body 3310 under the back) that does not cause discomfort to the player.

Further, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is increased, the deviation of the stop position can be suppressed and the back side can be suppressed. By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is higher than that in the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be faster. Therefore, the fast-rotating under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player, and can strongly attract the player's attention, and at the same time, the rotation of the under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 can be performed. It can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, by rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotating surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 faces the player side in front, and it is arbitrary after rotating round and round. Since it is possible to show the player a roulette-like effect that stops rotating at the stop position of, the player is excited and excited by whether or not the rotating ornament 3310 under the back bottom stops rotating at the desired stop position. It is possible to entertain the movable effect by the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the number of stop positions of the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back is an even number, the stop positions that can be supported by the minimum number of sensors (area identification sensor 3330) necessary for detecting the movement to an arbitrary stop position. The number of the number is the same as the number of the stop position of the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back, and the ability (grasp of the stop position) by a plurality of sensors (area identification sensor 3330 and position identification sensor 3331) is maximized. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest by the back-bottom middle-rotating decorative body 3310 having more stop positions.

In the above embodiment, the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 has the back bottom middle rotation decorative body 3310 having six stop positions, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may have 4 to 10 stop positions.

Further, in the above embodiment, a movable body having a plurality of stop positions (a movable body having a plurality of stop positions) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body has a plurality of stop positions. As such, "a thing that goes around", "a thing that moves in a straight line", "a thing that moves in an arc shape", "a thing that moves in a curved shape", and the like may be used.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the above. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls payout and the like of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to input detection signals from various detection switches, and main control solenoid drive to drive various solenoids. It includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, a gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and a second. It was accepted by the second starting port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the starting port 2004, the general winning opening sensor 3051 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and the first large winning opening 2005. The first big winning opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B, the second big winning opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006, and the game ball B received in the out opening 2010 are detected. Out port sensor 3053, first sub out port sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the first sub out port 2011, second sub out port sensor 3054 that detects the game ball B received in the second sub out port 2012, And the detection signals from the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. that detect the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are input via the main control I / O ports, respectively.

The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid are output. It outputs a drive signal to 2612, etc., and displays the status display, normal symbol display, normal hold display, first special symbol display, and first special hold number display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port. A drive signal is output to a device, a second special symbol display, a second special hold number display, a round display, and the like.

In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first large winning opening sensor 2402, the second large winning opening sensor 2601, and the out opening sensor 3053 are not included. While a contact-type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, the general winning port sensor 3051, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 have a contact-type ON / OFF operation type mechanical. A switch is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the gate portion 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the second starting port sensor 2401 are used. The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball B frequently enters. , The detection of the game ball B by the first prize opening sensor 2402 and the second prize opening sensor 2601 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the first prize opening sensor 2402 and the second prize opening sensor 2601. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3051 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3051 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, since the game ball B frequently enters the out port 2010, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life is used for the out port sensor 3053. On the other hand, since the game ball B does not frequently enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 have a shorter life than the proximity switch. Is used.

Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or something. Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the details of the main control MPU will be described later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is equipped with.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B is a payout control unit 633a that controls various payouts, a launch control by the launch solenoid 542, and a launch control by the ball feed solenoid 145. The control unit 633b, the error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, the error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, the ball tank 552, and the tank rail during maintenance. It is provided with a ball pulling switch for discharging the game ball B in the 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper plate 201) and starting the ball pulling operation. ..

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the apparatus 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout serially via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cutout detection sensor 574 is paid out. Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. It is input to the MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumericals, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, it is a ball. Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "count switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has a problem based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it means that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (meaning that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the areas from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a launch It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182, is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the firing reference pulse generates a driving current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 182. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 is stored. One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power cutoff process even when the power supply is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 206, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the effect on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above, and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5. , The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to the drive motor of the game board 5 or. Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive solenoid and outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the like, and each decorative board of the door frame 3. The door-side drive light emission data composed of the door-side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided in the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port. In addition to transmitting from to the door frame 3 side, or transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. , A control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Further, the detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the staging operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and has a vibration speaker 354, a top center speaker 462, and a top side provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects are played from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information. By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic acoustic effect (acoustic effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has a built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side lighting / blinking command, game board side lighting / blinking command, movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the game board 5 side are performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display commands. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

[6-3b. Direction display control unit]
The staging display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the staging display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays and controls a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a production display device 1600. (Abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. If the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and control data (display command). Multiple corresponding non-residential area transfer schedule data, etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed on the staging display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

The sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in a width of 2 x a height of 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The staging display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along a pixel and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by a sub-scan that is performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the staging display control unit 1512 is input to the staging display device 1600, the staging display device 1600 sequentially performs one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the staging display device 1600 as the main scan. It is output to each pixel of. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, outputs are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115, 130 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and it can be driven strongly enough to rotate in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously driven per minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N to cause the game ball. The flow speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N while abutting against the plurality of obstacle nails N. It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2511 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2512 to the stage 2513.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so that there is a high probability that the first Accepted at the start port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction)" A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates "win" is drawn.

The game ball B discharged from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the guide of the center accessory 2500 is guided. A plurality of passages are discharged above the gate portion 2003 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 and are planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003. After coming into contact with the obstacle nail N, it passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

In the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the first guide passage 2521 having an entrance opened in the vicinity of the abutment portion 1006 and the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 opened at a distance to the left. It is composed of the second guide passage 2522 and the second guide passage. As a result, when the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts on the abutting portion 1006 (so-called right-handed striking), it enters the first guide passage 2521 and has a strength that does not abut on the abutting portion 1006 (right-handed striking). If the game ball B is hit with a strength that is weaker to some extent), it will enter the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the driving strength.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability when the second guide passage 2522 is circulated than the first guide passage 2521. Further, it is configured that the circulation of the second guide passage 2522 is more likely to pass through the left side of the gate portion 2003 and the gate portion 2003 than the first guide passage 2521.

When the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the first attacker unit. The closed second starting port 2004 in the 2400 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0). 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the number of pending results is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate portion 2003 and the gate portion 2003 has a high probability of being the side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down the left side of the car and is occasionally accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely by the second sub-out opening 2012. When the game ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out in the same manner as the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out opening 2012, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without any chance of being accepted in the second big winning opening 2006, the second starting opening 2004, or the first big winning opening 2005. ..

Further, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate portion 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the general winning opening 2001, the second major winning opening 2006, and the second of the side right middle unit 2700. There is no chance of being accepted by the starting opening 2004 or the first big winning opening 2005, and the game is discharged outside the game area 5a.

In this way, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a, so that the second sub-out to the player. It is possible to urge a driving operation so that the game ball B cannot be received by the mouth 2012. In the present embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the probability of receiving the game ball B of the second sub-out port 2012 is lower in the second guide passage 2522 than in the first guide passage 2521. , It is possible to prompt the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522. That is, rather than "right-handed" in which the game ball B abuts on the abutment portion 1006, it is possible to prompt a driving operation that requires a delicate adjustment for the rotation operation of the handle 182, and the driving operation of the game ball B can be promoted. You can enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1 that mainly uses.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. After passing to the left of the center, it is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500.

At this time, if the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, the second big prize is won. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is highly likely to be accepted by the second big winning mouth 2006. When the game ball B is received in the second big winning opening 2006 when the second big winning opening 2006 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 10) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201.

The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the second large winning opening 2006 has the first shelf portion 2412a, the second starting opening door 2414, and the second shelf portion 2412b, and the upper left. After rolling to the left, it is released to the left, and further, the third shelf portion 2412c, the first prize winning door 2417, and the fourth shelf portion 2412d, roll to the left and enter the game area 5a. It is released.

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second start door 2414, the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003 is "normal hit", and the second start door When the 2414 is retracted, the game ball B is received by the second starting port 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction)" A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates "win" is drawn.

Further, when the game ball B is rolling on the first large winning opening door 2417, a special lottery result (No. 1) is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. If the (1) special lottery result and the 2nd special lottery result) are special lottery results (for example, “big hit”) that generate an advantageous gaming state, the first big winning opening 2005 has a predetermined opening / closing pattern after the special fluctuation time has elapsed. Then, the game ball B can be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first prize opening 2005 when the first prize opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 10) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first major winning opening 2005 allows the game ball B to be accepted, by having the first major winning opening 2005 accept the game ball B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out, and the player can be made to pay out. Can be entertained.

When the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit") in the main control board 1310, which is advantageous to the player. A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit" is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, the game ball B is drawn by being accepted in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The special lottery results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction)", and " There are "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", "second big hit", etc.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that closes after that is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed or the first big prize has passed after the first big prize opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B to the winning opening 2005 is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is 1) that makes the game balls B unacceptable. (Referred to as a round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R jackpot", 5 rounds for "5R jackpot", and 15 rounds for "15R jackpot" are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the effect image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is "second big hit", the first big winning opening 2005 makes it possible to accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, and then ST (special) is set as an advantageous game state.・ Time) is generated. This ST is to maintain a probable change or a time saving state during a predetermined specific number of fluctuations.

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the period from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result due to the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It is put on hold. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lighting LEDs.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the suggestion of the special lottery result is performed as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern sequence in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is varied to display the pattern. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three picture rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

The time for suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time for suggesting the special lottery result in the staging display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed). It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type production, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, the rotation operation can be hindered, and the operation button elevating drive motor can be used. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised to stand out by 367, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the back-to-back effect unit 3100 and the back of the back unit 3000 are provided. Bottom left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700, and back front It is possible to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the right effect unit 3800, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type staging in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated, the correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is required, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect display device 1600 may display to that effect.

[8. Independence assisting member]
Subsequently, the self-supporting member 7 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-supporting member. The self-supporting member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted between the lower surface of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 and the plate 8 of the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the island equipment. When installing (installing) the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 assists independence and prevents the pachinko machine 1 from tipping over. The self-supporting member 7 is formed in a block shape. Further, the self-supporting member 7 is formed by using at least one of hard foamed resin, plastic, corrugated cardboard, wood, pulp mold, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the lower surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3. On the other hand, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a mounted portion to be mounted on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200. In the present embodiment, the dish unit 200 is provided with a groove extending in the front-rear direction as a mounting portion, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a ridge to be inserted into the groove of the dish unit 200 as a mounting portion. ing. As a result, the self-supporting member 7 is slid in the front-rear direction with respect to the dish unit 200, and the mounted portion of the self-supporting member 7 is inserted into the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, whereby the self-supporting member is inserted into the dish unit 200. 7 can be attached (attached). As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment with the independence assisting member 7 attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the independence assisting member 7 can be easily removed by sliding it forward. .. Further, when the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island equipment is removed, it can be easily attached by sliding it in the direction opposite to the time when the independence assisting member 7 is removed.

The mounting (mounting) of the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 and the mounted portion of the self-supporting member 7 is not limited to the above, but is "due to the insertion of a protrusion into the hole" and "claw. It may be "by locking", "by magnetism by magnet", "by surface fastener", "by suction plate", "by peelable adhesive", or the like. Further, the position where the mounting portion is provided in the dish unit 200 is not limited to the lower surface of the dish unit 200 as described above, but may be "inside", "at least one side surface on the left or right", "front surface", or the like. ..

After installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 and stored in the game hall side, and when the pachinko machine 1 is removed from the island equipment, the plate is again used. It is used by attaching it to the unit 200. The self-supporting member 7 may be attached to the dish unit 200 in advance when the pachinko machine 1 is shipped from the manufacturer side to the game hall side, or may be attached at the time of installation work.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the door frame 3 has the dish unit 200, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 that greatly project forward, it is forward. Although it is easy to fall down, by mounting the independence assisting member 7 on the lower mounting portion of the dish unit 200, it is possible to assist the independence of the pachinko machine 1 and prevent it from falling forward. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the self-supporting assisting member 7 is attached to the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, so that the pachinko machine 1 is between the plate unit 200 and the plate 8 of the island equipment. Since the self-supporting member 7 located at the above can prevent the pachinko machine 1 from tipping forward, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from tipping over when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility. It is a pachinko machine 1 that does not need to be kept and is easy to install.

Further, by mounting the self-supporting member 7 on the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from tipping over, so that it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being damaged due to the fall, and it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being damaged. It is a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the burden on the side.

Further, since the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is provided with a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting member 7, the self-supporting member 7 is mounted on the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 to assist the pachinko machine 1 to become self-supporting. Since it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine from tipping forward, it is possible to make the staging device, decorative member, etc. provided on the door frame 3 larger or to project it further forward. It is possible to easily configure a pachinko machine having a significantly different appearance from the machine, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to a player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the dish unit 200 and the like are greatly projected forward in the door frame 3, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In the above embodiment, the self-supporting member 7 can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 by sliding the self-supporting member 7 in the front-rear direction. The plate unit 200 of the frame 3 may be attached / detached by sliding it in the left-right direction.

Further, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachably attached to the mounting portion of the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and then the functional member (for example, the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202) is detachably provided on the door frame 3. , Door frame left side unit 400, door frame right side unit 410, door frame top unit 450, etc.) may also be used. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island equipment, the functional member removed from the door frame 3 is attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 as an independence assisting member 7, and the pachinko machine is used. Allow 1 to stand on its own in a stable state. On the other hand, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment, a part of the pachinko machine 1 is attached by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 to the door frame 3 as a functional member. It can function as a constituent functional member. Specifically, for example, in the case of a door frame left side unit 400 that bulges forward from the left side of the door window 101a in the door frame 3 as a functional member that also serves as an independence assisting member 7, the door removed from the door frame 3 By attaching the frame left side unit 400 to the lower side of the dish unit 200, it can function as an independence assisting member 7, and by removing it from the lower side of the dish unit 200 and attaching it to the left side of the door window 101a, it functions as a functional member. be able to. For this reason, when the self-supporting member 7 is made removable, it is not necessary to separately store the removed self-supporting member 7, and it is troublesome to manage the removed self-supporting member 7 so that it will not be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Alternatively, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be attached to and detached from the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and then the functional member provided to be detachable from the main body frame 4 (for example, "board cover covering the substrate", "wiring". "Wiring holding member that holds the game medium", "Protective cover that protects the rear of the staging display device, movable decorative body, etc.", "Storage tank that stores the game medium", "Induction member that distributes the game medium", etc.) You may also use it. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island equipment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the main body frame 4 is attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) to stabilize the pachinko machine 1. To be able to stand on its own in a state of being. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment, the function of forming a part of the pachinko machine 1 by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the door frame 3 to a predetermined part of the main body frame 4. It can function as a member. For this reason, when the self-supporting member 7 is made removable, it is not necessary to separately store the removed self-supporting member 7, and it is troublesome to manage the removed self-supporting member 7 so that it will not be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced. When the independence assisting member 7 is also used as the functional member provided in the main body frame 4, the player touches the removable functional member in the state where the functional member is attached to the main body frame 4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the functional member from coming off due to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can be obtained without causing discomfort to the player.

Further, when the independence assisting member 7 is also used as the functional member provided in the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 is compared with the case where the independence assisting member 7 is not also used as the functional member. The number of parts required for the door can be reduced, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, the self-supporting member 7 may be provided so as to be accommodated in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3. As a result, when it is not necessary to attach the pachinko machine 1 to the island equipment and make it self-supporting, the self-supporting member 7 is housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, and the presence of the self-supporting member 7 makes the pachinko machine 1 look good. It is possible to prevent the independence assisting member 7 from becoming an obstacle to the game. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island equipment, the independence assisting member 7 housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is taken out so that the pachinko machine 1 can become independent. Therefore, the installation work and the removal work of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. Further, in this case, as compared with the case where the self-supporting member 7 is removed and stored separately, it is not necessary to store the self-supporting member 7, and it is troublesome to manage the self-supporting member 7 so that it is not lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 having a mounted portion attached to the mounted portion of the dish unit 200 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is assumed that the plate unit 200 does not have the mounted portion. Is also good.

Further, although the self-supporting member 7 that can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 is shown, the self-supporting member 7 is not limited to this, and the self-supporting member 7 is built in the dish unit 200 (door frame 3). When the self-supporting member 7 is installed on the island facility, the self-supporting member 7 may be projected downward so as to come into contact with the plate 8. As a result, after the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment, it is not necessary to remove the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 and store it separately, and it is possible to reduce the labor required for management on the game hall side.

[9. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 in the back-back effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment are used as the decorative member of the present invention, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment are used. Is a decorative plate body of the present invention, the light guide radiation plate 3113 in the present embodiment is in the radiation plate of the present invention, and the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 in the present embodiment is in the peripheral wall portion of the present invention. The back-rear decorative substrate 3114 in the above corresponds to the decorative substrate of the present invention, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b in the present embodiment correspond to the LED of the present invention, and the first LED 3114a in the present embodiment corresponds to the specific LED of the present invention, respectively. ing.

[10. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100, on the front side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on which a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b are mounted. Since the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113 constituting the decorative member are arranged and the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front side of the decorative body 3111, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and the metal decoration are provided. Since the portion of the decorative body 3111 excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are located between the portion 3111d, the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d is the metal decoration. It is possible to prevent linear discharge from the portion 3111d to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Further, even if the static electricity of the metal decorative portion 3111d tries to discharge to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the static electricity cannot pass through the inside of the decorative body 3111, the light guide radiation plate 3113, etc., so that the decorative body 3111 It must flow along the front surface of the light guide, passing through the outer periphery, bypassing the rear end of the flange portion 3113b protruding rearward from the light guide radiation plate 3113, and flowing to the inside of the flange portion 3113b (on the back side of the decorative substrate 3114). However, the creeping distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be sufficiently obtained by the decorative body 3111, the light guide emitting plate 3113, and the like.

At this time, since the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is formed smaller than a predetermined value with respect to the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111 or the like so as to be surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the flange portion 3113b is formed. The static electricity diverted inward needs to flow along the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the amount that the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is small, and the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is further lengthened. It is possible to suppress the discharge to the decorative substrate 3114 after the back. Therefore, since the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d can be prevented from being discharged to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the first LED 3114a mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 by electric discharge (spark). It is possible to prevent the second LED 3114b and the like from being damaged, and the decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d is reliably emitted and decorated by the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to entertain the player with the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided so as to be reserved from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c to the inside of the SL by a predetermined distance, static electricity is generated from the outer peripheral side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Even if an attempt is made to discharge to the foil 3114d, the creepage distance EL can be further lengthened by a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the substrate body 3114c to the copper foil 3114d, and the backing is discharged to the decorative substrate 3114 (copper foil 3114d). It is possible to suppress the storage. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the first LED 3114a mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 by electric discharge (spark) can be prevented. (2) It is possible to prevent the LED 3114b from being damaged, and it is possible to obtain the same effects as described above.

Further, since the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided on the light guide radiation plate 3113, the flange portion 3113b protrudes outward from the decorative body 3111 when the decorative body 3111 is viewed from the front. The appearance of the decorative body 3111 can be improved without doing so.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, both sides of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100 are decorated with the decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since it is covered with the body base 3115, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Further, in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b as electronic components are mounted on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c, and a copper foil 3114d forming a circuit on both side surfaces of the substrate main body 3114c is formed. The front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with the decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 (light guide radiation plate 3113). The rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered with the covering plate portion 3115a of the decorative body base 3115 while being covered with the main body portion 3113a) of the 3113, and further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered from the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111 extends to the rear side, and the flange portion 3115b surrounding the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 extends from the covering plate portion 3115a of the decorative body base 3115 to the front side. The root of the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the surface opposite to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is on the outside of the flange portion 3113b. Proceed to the rear side, fold back inward of the flange portion 3113b at the tip (rear end) of the flange portion 3113b, proceed to the front side between the flange portion 3113b and the flange portion 3115b, and proceed to the front side at the tip end (front end) of the flange portion 3115b. It becomes a meandering route that folds back to the inside of 3115b, and the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the copper foil 3114d of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made sufficiently long, and is discharged to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is done. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from being discharged to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, a plurality of numbers mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 by electric discharge (spark). It is possible to prevent the one LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, etc. from being damaged, and the decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d can be used with the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. (2) The LED 3114b can be reliably luminescent and decorated, and the player can enjoy the luminescent decoration (light emission effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. ..

Further, since a coating film (not shown) is provided on the surface of the substrate main body 3114c of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on which the copper foil 3114d is provided, static electricity is also discharged to the copper foil 3114d by the coating film. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can inhibit the above-mentioned effect and surely exerts the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the protrusion 3115e of the decorative body base 3115 are brought into contact with the portion of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. In other words, the copper foil 3114d is not provided at the portion of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body base 3115 come into contact with each other. As a result, the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d is suppressed from being discharged to the copper foil 3114d along the portion of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body base 3115 come into contact with each other. And the same effect as above can be achieved.

Further, since the copper foil 3114d is not provided at the portion of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 where the light guide radiating plate 3113 and the decorative body base 3115 come into contact with each other, vibration in the pachinko machine 1 and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 Even if friction occurs between the light guide radiation plate 3113 or the decorative body base 3115 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 due to vibration due to movement, the copper foil 3114d does not wear or peel off due to the friction. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the circuit connecting the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, etc. is disconnected, or the circuit is short-circuited due to the peeled copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the electronic component 3114e and the like can be reliably functioned to achieve the same function and effect as described above.

Further, as described above, by covering both sides of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 with the light guide radiating plate 3113 and the decorative body base 3115, static electricity discharge from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is prevented. Therefore, the discharge resistance performance of the coating film can be lowered, the coating film can be made as thin as possible, and the cost of the coating film can be reduced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100 are made to emit light, the back from the first LED 3114a is emitted. The light emitted in the direction along the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 faces the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a on the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in which the first LED 3114a in the light guide emitting plate 3113 is accommodated. It is incident on the main body 3113a from the present portion, is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided on the rear surface of the main body 3113a, and is radiated from the front surface of the main body 3113a. The translucent decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the front side of the above are to be radiated and decorated. At this time, since the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiating plate 3113 have a flat plate shape, it is possible to reduce the thickness in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced. Further, since the leg portion 3113f is projected rearward from the main body portion 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113 so as to be continuous with the portion irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a on the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. Since the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a in the light guide emitting plate 3113 can be widened, more light from the first LED 3114a can be incident on the main body portion 3113a and is radiated forward. The amount of light emitted can be increased to make the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 brighter and luminescent. Then, in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiating plate 3113, the light in the direction along the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e, so that the first LED 3114a is forward. The distance from the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to the front part of the light guide emitting plate 3113 where the light is radiated forward becomes longer than in the case where the light is directed toward the first LED 3114a. Light can be widely diffused and radiated forward. Therefore, the entire decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be uniformly and brightly luminescently decorated, the appearance of the luminescent decoration in the decorative body 3111 and the like is not impaired, and the effect of the decorative body 3111 and the like is fully exhibited. be able to. In this way, since the size (thickness) of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the degree of freedom in arranging the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 in the pachinko machine 1 can be increased. It is possible to place the back-rear movable decoration 3110 in a part that is not placed in the pachinko machine, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is placed in an unexpected part, which strongly attracts the attention of the player. It is possible to make the pachinko machine easier to be selected by the player as a pachinko machine to play, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, since the plurality of first LEDs 3114a on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are housed in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c penetrating the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the first LED 3114a is used. The heat can be diffused into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, and the temperature rise of the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. Further, since the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward from the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiating plate 3113 forms a gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the gap is formed through the gap. The heat from one LED 3114a can be discharged, and the accumulation of heat from the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the light emission of the first LED 3114a from becoming unstable or damaged due to the heat accumulated between the light guide radiating plate 3113 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the first LED 3114a can be used. The first LED 3114a can reliably illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110), and the first LED 3114a can reliably emit light, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 emits light. It is possible to entertain the player with the decoration (light emission effect) and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the auxiliary reflection portion 3113g capable of reflecting the light from the first LED 3114a forward is provided on the side of the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 opposite to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, the auxiliary reflection is provided. The light incident from the inner surface side of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in the leg portion 3113f is radiated from the opposite surface to the outside of the leg portion 3113f (main body portion 3113a) by the portion 3113g, and the light from the first LED 3114a is emitted. Since it is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the leg portion 3113f, more light from the first LED 3114a can be incidented into the main body portion 3113a, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, copper foil 3114d constituting a circuit for causing a plurality of first LEDs 3114a (and second LEDs 3114b) to emit light is provided on substantially the entire front surface and rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the copper foil 3114d is provided. Is excellent in thermal conductivity, so that the heat from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused through the copper foil 3114d and can be dissipated from the copper foil 3114d, and the heat from the first LED 3114a is less likely to be accumulated. Therefore, the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely exhibited.

Further, on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, a light reflection assisting region 3114f that is recessed rearward on the light emitting surface side of the first LED 3114a by not providing the copper foil 3114d is provided, and then the light reflection assisting region 3114f is provided. Since the leg portion 3113f forming a part of the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a mounted on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c in the light guide radiation plate 3113 is in contact with the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light guide radiation is emitted. It is possible to increase the amount of protrusion of the leg portion 3113f to the rear without widening the gap between the main body portion 3113a of the plate 3113 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted from the main body portion. It can be incident into the 3113a, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) can be brightly radiated and decorated.

Further, since the light reflection assisting region 3114f recessed from the front surface to the rear of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided, the angle at which the first LED 3114a irradiates the bottom surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is set on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Since the angle can be set to approach perpendicular to the front surface, the light from the first LED 3114a can be easily reflected forward by the bottom surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be made brighter. It can be decorated with light emission to achieve the same effect as described above.

Further, since a part of the light from the first LED 3114a is reflected forward by the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f recessed rearward in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the first LED 3114a on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114a. Compared to the case where the projection for reflection is projected forward on the light emitting surface side of the above, the shadow of the projection due to the light from the first LED 3114a is cast on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the shadow portion is darkened. Instead, the entire back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be light-emitting decorated with uniform brightness.

Further, since the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, when forming a circuit for causing the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to emit light, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are formed. Since the light reflection assisting region 3114f can be formed together, the light reflection assisting region 3114f can be easily formed as compared with the case where the substrate main body 3114c is physically recessed by cutting, pressing, or the like. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

Further, the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is brought into contact with the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, and the leg portion 3113f is the copper of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Since it does not come into contact with the foil 3114d, even if friction occurs between the leg portion 3113f and the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f due to the vibration in the pachinko machine 1, the copper foil 3114d (and the coating film) is worn by the friction. It does not peel off or peel off. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the circuit for emitting the first LED 3114a or the like is disconnected or the circuit is short-circuited due to the peeled copper foil 3114d, and the first LED 3114a or the like is reliably emitted. It is possible to show the player a desired light emission effect.

Further, since the white coating film is provided on the front surface and the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the light emitted to the front surface side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is reflected forward by the white color of the coating film. The front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be brightened to brighten the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110).

Further, the white covering film allows the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the circuit pattern, etc. provided on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 to be forwarded through the decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since it can be made difficult to see from the back, it is possible to improve the appearance of the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exerting the decorative effect.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the flat plate-like shape provided between the decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112) of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Because the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided with the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d through which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted. Compared with the case where the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are inserted into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, which are formed in a bottomed concave shape, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are formed. The volume (heat volume) of the space into which the LED is inserted can be increased, and the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be diffused. At this time, since the adjacent (approaching) first LED accommodating portions 3113c are connected to each other, the volume (heat volume) of the space into which the first LED 3114a is inserted can be further increased. The heat from the LED 3114a can be easily diffused. Therefore, since the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be made difficult to be accumulated, the accumulated heat makes the light emission of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b unstable, or the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b become unstable. Damage can be reduced, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be reliably emitted as intended, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be used to make the decorative body 3111 (movable back-to-back decorative body). The 3110) can be reliably luminescent and decorated, and the luminescent decoration (light emitting effect) by the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be entertained by the player and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, the light guide emitting plate 3113 is continuous with the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in which the first LED 3114a that irradiates the light in the direction along the front surface is irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a. The leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the main body portion 3113a is brought into contact with the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, and the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the substrate main body 3114c of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 are brought into contact with each other. Since a gap is formed between the light and the light, heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be discharged through the gap. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from being accumulated from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and reduce the unstable or damaged light emission, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are intended. The first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be used to reliably emit light, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be reliably emitted and decorated. Can be entertained by the player and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decorative body 3111 are provided on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to generate wind. Since the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e can be dissipated by ventilating the front side and the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, it is difficult for the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. to be accumulated. It is possible to reduce the instability of light emission of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and the damage of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b due to the accumulated heat, which is the same as described above. It can play an action effect.

Further, since the electronic component 3114e for causing the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to emit light is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, the heat from the electronic component 3114e affects the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. It is possible to reduce the amount of heat given, and it is possible to prevent the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b from having a problem due to the heat from the electronic component 3114e, and to obtain the same effect as described above.

Further, since the adjacent (approaching) first LED accommodating portions 3113c are connected to each other, a thin portion is formed between the first LED accommodating portions 3113c in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is possible to prevent the light guide radiation plate 3113 from being damaged.

Further, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the board body 3114c, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the board body 3114c correspond to each other in the light guide radiation plate 3113. By inserting it into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c or the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the rear surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113 (main body portion 3113a) and the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c can be brought as close as possible. The dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) can be reduced.

Further, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, even if a dark color such as black is used as the electronic component 3114e, it can be seen from the front through the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is possible to prevent the decorative body 3111 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) from becoming unattractive, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 and fully exert the decorative effect. ..

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal) surrounding each of the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c in the decorative body 3111 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100. The first LED 3114a is mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 with the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 in between on the rear side of the decorative portion 3111d), and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be visually recognized from the front to the rear. Since it is formed so as to be difficult to see, the metal decorative portion 3111d can make the first LED 3114a and the first LED accommodating portion 3113c difficult to see from the front, and the first LED 3114a and the first LED accommodating from the front (player side). By seeing the portion 3113c, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 3111 (rear-back movable decorative body 3110) from being impaired in appearance and to be unsightly, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 is surely exhibited. It is possible to entertain the player with the decoration of the decorative body 3111 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a shape along the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111, even if the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can be seen through the decorative body 3111. Since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is along the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c looks like a part of the decoration by the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the player can see the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 3111 from being impaired in its decorativeness and its appearance to be deteriorated, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 is ensured. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can exert the same effect as described above.

Further, since the outer periphery of the third decorative protrusion 3111c is surrounded by the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative protrusion 3111d), the metal decorative protrusion 3111d acts as a frame to make the third decorative protrusion 3111c stand out. be able to. Then, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a are mounted so as to irradiate a portion of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c so that the light guide radiation plate 3113 is irradiated from the first LED 3114a. Since the light is radiated into the main body 3113a in the direction along the front surface and the light in the direction along the front surface radiated inside by the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e of the main body 3113a is radiated forward. The light from the first LED 3114a can be diffused to a wide range as much as possible in the portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the main body 3113a and then radiated forward, and the third of the decorative body 3111. A wide range of the decorative protrusion 3111c can be radiated and decorated with uniform brightness, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c surrounded by the metal decorative portion 3111d in the decorative protrusion 3111 is made more conspicuous to make the decorative protrusion 3111 more conspicuous. The decorative effect can be further exerted, and the player can enjoy the decoration of the decorative body 3111 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. At this time, since the light is emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the front surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113, the point-shaped light source of the first LED 3114a can be seen from the front through the decorative body 3111. It can be reduced. For this reason, since the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be uniformly luminescent and decorated, the player can enjoy the luminescent decoration of the decorative body 3111, which is a hobby for the game. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of.

Further, when the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 is light-emittingly decorated by the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward is provided in the portion irradiated with the light from the LED 3114a, the area of the portion (light receiving portion 3113i) where the light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated by the leg portion 3113f is widened. It is possible to make more light from the first LED 3114a enter into the main body portion 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113. Therefore, since it is possible to radiate more light from the first LED 3114a forward by the main body portion 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113, the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 is made to emit and decorate brighter. It is possible to show the player a luminescent decoration with a higher directing effect and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided with a plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c penetrating in the front-rear direction in a shape along the metal decoration portion 3111d behind the metal decoration portion 3111d. , The brightness of the light emitting decoration can be made different with the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c (metal decorative portions 3111d) as boundaries. More specifically, when the light traveling in the direction along the front surface reaches the portion (inner peripheral surface) of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that has penetrated back and forth inside the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, A part of the inner peripheral surface is reflected to the inside of the main body portion 3113a, and the rest is radiated to the inside of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, a part thereof is inside the first LED accommodating portion 3113c due to the inner peripheral surface. The rest will be incident on the inside of the main body 3113a. As a result, when the light in the main body portion 3113a tries to pass through the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, the amount of the light is greatly reduced and the light is guided to the opposite side, and the opposite side of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c becomes dark. .. For this reason, when the first LEDs 3114a are provided on both sides of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, if only the first LED 3114a on one side emits light, one side becomes brighter than the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. When only the first LED 3114a on the other side emits light, the other side becomes brighter and one side becomes darker than the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, and when both first LEDs 3114a emit light, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c Both sides of the LED become bright. Since the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d, as described above, by appropriately causing the first LED 3114a to emit light, the metal decorative portion 3111d is used as a boundary. It is possible to brighten only one side, brighten only the other side, and brighten both sides, and it is possible to show the player a variety of light emission effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored and reducing the interest. Can be suppressed.

Since the metal decorative protrusions 3111d (first decorative protrusions 3111a) surround each of the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c, the first decorative protrusions 3111a are located between the third decorative protrusions 3111c. The light from the first LED 3114a for emitting and decorating the other third decorative protrusion 3111c is reached by the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113, which is located behind the relevant portion. Since it can be made difficult, only a predetermined third decorative protrusion 3111c (first light diffusing portion 3112c or second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112) can be light-emitting decorated in a good state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player suggest a predetermined message by illuminating and decorating the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c in a predetermined order or by illuminating and decorating the special third decorative protrusion 3111c. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of light emission effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, when the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is made to emit light, the light passes directly to the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112) through the second LED accommodating portion 3113d penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3113. The portion of the decorative body 3111 to be irradiated with the light from the second LED 3114b can be illuminated and decorated in dots brighter than the portion radiated and decorated by the first LED 3114a. Therefore, since it is possible to show the player the portion that is light-lit and decorated in a plane shape by the first LED 3114a and the portion that is light-emitting and decorated in a dot shape by the second LED 3114b, the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body 3111 can be sharpened. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and at the same time, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the light emitting decoration, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as described above, since the first LED 3114a and the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can be obscured from the front by the metal decorative portion 3111d, the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Even if the size (thickness) of the decorative body 3111 is reduced, the decorativeness of the decorative body 3111 (and the decorative sheet 3112) is not impaired, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be fully exhibited. Therefore, since the dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 to the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced, the back-rear movable decorative body in the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The degree of freedom in arranging the 3110 can be increased.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the transparent decorative body 3111 in the back-back movable decorative body 3110 of the back-back effect unit 3100, the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding most forward and the first decoration Three decorative protrusions with curved front surfaces, a second decorative protrusion 3111b protruding smaller than the protrusion 3111a and a third decorative protrusion 3111c protruding smaller than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. Since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a by stamping the metal portion, the portion where the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided remains transparent. That is, since it is a single decorative body 3111 having a metal decorative portion 3111d and a transparent portion (translucent decorative portion), the structure is such that the metal decorative portion and the translucent decorative portion are assembled as in the conventional case. Since there is no need and there is no assembly structure, it is possible to suppress the increase in the dimensions in the front-rear direction, and as a result, the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced. Therefore, since the degree of freedom in arranging the decorative body 3111 (back-back movable decorative body 3110) in the pachinko machine 1 can be increased, it is possible to arrange the decorative body 3111 in a portion that is not arranged in the conventional pachinko machine. By arranging the decorative body 3111 in an unexpected part, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, make it easier for the player to select it as a pachinko machine to play, and appeal to the player. It is possible to provide a powerful pachinko machine 1.

Further, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the three decorative protrusions of the decorative body 3111, and the metal decorative portion follows the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Since the 3111d is curved, the light in the pachinko machine 1 and the light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reflected in various directions, and the metal decoration portion 3111d is shining. The player can make the metal decoration part 3111d shine and emphasize the three-dimensional effect of the metal decoration part 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a), and give a high-class feeling (premium feeling) to the metal decoration part 3111d having a three-dimensional effect. Can attract the attention of.

When the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on both the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the decoration of the decorative body 3111 has a portion having a metallic luster different in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the sense of depth can be further increased with respect to the decoration, and the three-dimensional decoration can easily attract the attention of the player.

Further, the transparent decorative body 3111 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c having different amounts of protrusions forward, and is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the decoration of the decorative body 3111 by the three decorative protrusions having different protrusion amounts. As a result, it is possible to show the player a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth. Therefore, even if the thickness (dimensions in the front-rear direction) of the decorative body 3111 is reduced, the decorative effect does not decrease, and the decorative body 3111 does not deteriorate. The size in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the degree of freedom in arranging the decorative body 3111 can be increased, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be fully exerted, which strongly attracts the attention of the player. It can be a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power.

Further, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes most forward in the decorative protrusion of the decorative body 3111, and the portion of the metal decorative portion 3111d protrudes most forward, so that the metal decoration is performed. The portion 3111d can be made more conspicuous, and the apparent difference between the metal decorative portion 3111d and the portion other than the metal decorative portion 3111d can be made to appear large, thereby giving a more three-dimensional effect to the decoration of the decorative body 3111. Can be done. Therefore, even if the dimension of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction is reduced, the three-dimensional decoration can be shown, so that the dimension of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably performed. It is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 that can be played.

Further, as described above, since the size of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction can be reduced (thickness is reduced) to increase the degree of freedom of arrangement, the staging member is provided on the front side or the rear side of the decorative body 3111. Since it can be provided, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player by providing a large number of effect members, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the metal decorative protrusion 3111d is provided on the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c, which are not provided with the metal decorative protrusion 3111d, project forward. Due to the lens effect, a sense of depth is given to the decorative pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 show the player a more three-dimensional decoration. be able to. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 is in the form of a sheet, even if the decorative sheet 3112 is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111, it is possible to suppress an increase in the thickness (dimensions) in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect member (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) composed of a decorative body 3111 and a decorative sheet 3112 having a thin thickness in the front-rear direction, and a pachinko machine having the same effect as described above. It can be 1.

Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 having the auxiliary decorative portions (first contour portion 3112a and second contour portion 3112b) is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b are used to make the decorative sheet 3112. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the rear side of the decorative body 3111 through the transparent side surface of the decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, even when the decorative body 3111 is viewed diagonally from the front, the rear side of the decorative body 3111 can be obscured by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b, so that the appearance of the decoration of the decorative body 3111 deteriorates. This can be avoided, and the decorative effect of the decoration of the decorative body 3111 can be fully exerted.

Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b, the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b provide the first decorative protrusion. The player can be illusioned as if the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the 3111a. Further, by providing the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 on the outside of the metal decoration portion 3111d in the front view, the metal decoration portion is provided by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b. The 3111d can be made to look wide. For this reason, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 make it possible to show the player a decoration with a higher decorative effect, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal that can strongly attract the player's attention. Can be provided.

Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d in the decorative body 3111 is formed by stamping, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily formed as compared with the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is immersed in a plating tank or vaporized metal is vapor-deposited. , The increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the hot stamping device for stamping the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided with an elastic flat plate-shaped hot plate, the hot plate hits the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111. When in contact, the surface of the hot plate is elastically deformed to form a shape that resembles the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the metal leaf of the transfer sheet is applied to the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It can be transferred (stamped) in good condition so as to be in close contact with the metal. Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by stamping with a hot stamping device, the transfer sheet having the metal foil first comes into contact with the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, so that the transfer sheet is pulled. The metal leaf is less likely to be wrinkled, and the metal foil can be transferred neatly without wrinkles, so that the metal decorative portion 3111d has a good appearance.

Further, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decorative body 3111 side is a flat surface having elasticity, even if the shape of the first decorative protrusion 3111a is different, the transfer sheet is not replaced. Metal leaf can be transferred. Therefore, it is possible to easily respond to model changes, design changes, and the like, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

Further, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decorative body 3111 side is made elastic, the hot plate is moved to the decorative body 3111 side according to the distance, that is, the hot plate is the first decorative protrusion. The amount (depth) of the first decorative protrusion 3111a to be immersed in the hot plate can be made different depending on the strength of pressing against the 3111a, and the hot plate in the first decorative protrusion 3111a (decorative body 3111) can be different. The range of the contact area can be widened or narrowed. That is, the range of being stamped with respect to the decorative body 3111 (decorative protrusion protruding forward) can be freely changed. As a result, when it is desired to change the range in which the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided due to a model change or a design change, the range of the metal decoration portion 3111d can be easily changed by changing the relative movement amount of the hot plate. can.

Further, as described above, the elastic surface of the hot plate allows the range of being stamped with the decorative body 3111 (first decorative protrusion 3111a, etc.) to be freely changed. Therefore, for example, the second When the metal decorative protrusion 3111d is also provided on the decorative protrusion 3111b, the color of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be different between the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b. More specifically, in the conventional technique, when trying to form a metal decorative portion having a different color for one member (decorative body), for example, after forming a metal layer of the first color as a whole, a masking process is performed. By forming a metal layer of the second color on the whole and removing the masking, the color can be different between the masked part and the unmasked part. Alternatively, after forming a metal layer of the first color as a whole, a metal layer of the second color is formed on the metal layer of the second color, and a part of the metal layer of the second color is peeled off by laser peeling or the like. The color can be different between the peeled part and the non-peeled part. However, even if any of the above techniques is used, there is a problem that it takes time and effort to manufacture the decorative body and the cost increases. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the elastic surface of the hot plate allows the range of being stamped with the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 to be freely changed. Using the transfer sheet having the metal leaf of the first color, the hot plate is moved so as to be immersed in the front surface of the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the metal leaf of the first color is applied to the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the first. Transfer to the decorative protrusion 3111a, and then, using a transfer sheet having a metal leaf of the second color, only the first decorative protrusion 3111a is immersed without contacting the front surface of the second decorative protrusion 3111b. The hot plate is moved so as to transfer the metal leaf of the second color to the first decorative protrusion 3111a. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d having a different color can be easily formed between the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and the decorativeness is more excellent. The decorative body 3111 can be provided, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided.

Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by stamping the metal, the metal foil is left unpeeled at a portion other than the metal decorative portion 3111d as compared with the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is left by laser peeling. It is possible to reduce the deterioration of the appearance of the decorative body 3111. More specifically, when laser peeling is used, if the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to be peeled has irregularities such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the focal length of the laser varies depending on the position of the decorative body 3111. Since they are different, the metal layer may not be sufficiently peeled off at a portion that is more than a predetermined distance (or close to) the focal length, and there is a possibility that the peeling residue may be left and the appearance may be deteriorated. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only in the necessary portion by stamping, and it is not necessary to peel off the metal foil to form a transparent portion after the stamping, and the appearance is good. The decorative body 3111 can be formed.

Further, as described above, since the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced to increase the degree of freedom in arrangement, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are placed in a standby position (evacuation) that cannot be visually recognized from the player side. Since the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is movable between the position) and the appearance position visible from the player side, the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided by moving the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 to the appearance position. The appearance (visible) of the highly decorative back-back movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111) makes the player think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by increasing the number of people.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100, a flat-plate-shaped decorative body 3111 having a metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface and a flat-plate-shaped light guide radiation plate After providing the 3113 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is extended rearward from the outer periphery of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is extended. Since the flange portion 3115b extends forward between the flange portion 3113b and the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 from the covering decorative base 3115, the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The route of the creepage distance EL travels rearward on the outside of the flange portion 3113b, folds back inside the flange portion 3113b at the rear end of the flange portion 3113b, and travels forward between the flange portion 3113b and the flange portion 3115b. At the front end of the portion 3115b, the route becomes a meandering route that folds back to the inside of the flange portion 3115b, and the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is sufficiently long (10 mm or more, or at least 10 kV discharge voltage). The distance that can be prevented). At this time, a decorative body 3111 having a metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface, and a back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on which a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b for emitting and decorating the decorative body 3111 are mounted. Since the decorative body base 3115 that covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 that easily generates static electricity by moving in the vertical direction, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has. Static electricity is easily accumulated, and when static electricity is accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d, the accumulated static electricity is discharged at once due to its high conductivity, and the discharge voltage becomes high, so that the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b However, as described above, the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made sufficiently long, so that the metal decorative portion 3111d can be damaged. It is possible to surely prevent the static electricity accumulated in the back and rear decorative substrate 3114 from being discharged to the back and rear decorative substrate 3114, and prevent damage to the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the back and rear decorative substrate 3114. This makes it possible to reliably illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having the metal decorative portion 3111d, and allow the player to illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110). It is possible to entertain (light emission production) and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the decorative body 3111 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110, a metal decorative protrusion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a projecting forward so as to form a predetermined decoration, and the first decorative protrusion 3111d is provided. Since the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the portion 3111a, the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the front-rear direction. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be made longer and can surely exhibit the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered with the decorative body base 3115, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. At the same time, it is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in another member (for example, the effect display device 1600) provided behind the decorative body base 3115 from being discharged to the decorative substrate 3114 after the back. It is possible to more reliably prevent damage to the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 due to static electricity discharge.

Further, since the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit pattern in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is prevented from coming into contact with the light guide radiation plate 3113 (leg portion 3113f) by the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, the metal decorative portion. The creepage distance EL from 3111d to the copper foil 3114d of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be lengthened as much as possible, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Further, since the copper foil 3114d of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided so as not to come into contact with the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, vibration from inside and outside of the pachinko machine 1 acts. However, no friction is generated between the leg portion 3113f and the copper foil 3114d, and the friction does not cause the copper foil 3114d to wear and the circuit to be disconnected. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b do not emit light, and it is possible to illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 to surely exert a desired effect.

Further, the decorative body 3111 has a metal decorative portion 3111d, a second decorative protrusion 3111b and a third decorative protrusion 3111c that transmit light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, the brilliance of the metal of the metal decorative portion 3111d can give a high-class feeling, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can give a second decorative protrusion. To provide a pachinko machine 1 in which the decorative body 3111 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) can be made to stand out by the light emitting decoration of the portion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the player's attention is strongly attracted. Can be done.

Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a projecting forward in a predetermined decorative shape, the metal decorative portion 3111d is given a three-dimensional effect, and the metal is provided. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can make the decorative portion 3111d more conspicuous, enhance the sense of quality of the metal decorative portion 3111d, and strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 double surround the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is the flange portion. It can be hidden by the 3113b and the flange portion 3115b so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be improved.

Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the light guide radiating plate 3113 that diffuses the light, the light from the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is diffused to the rear. Since it is possible to irradiate the metal decorative portion 3111d, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111, the entire decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112) is luminescently decorated with uniform brightness. It is possible to improve the appearance of the light emitting decoration, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the light emitting effect of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest. ..

Further, since the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is extended rearward from the light guide radiating plate 3113 that diffuses the light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and radiates it forward, it is guided. A part of the light incident on the inside of the light emitting plate 3113 is radiated from the flange portion 3113b to the outside, and the flange portion 3113b can also be decorated with light emission. It can be made more difficult to see from the player side, and the flange portion 3113b can also be decorated with light emission to improve the appearance of the light emission decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, which is entertaining to the player. The decrease can be suppressed.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3160, the back-rear movable decorative body 3170, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3180 can also exert the same effects as described above.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back-rear effect unit 3100, transparent light guide radiation is emitted behind the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. The plate 3113 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are provided, and are mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on each of the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c formed on the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The side view type first LED 3114a is inserted so as to be accommodated. When the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are made to emit light, the light from the first LEDs 3114a is emitted from the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c to the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiating plate 3113. It is irradiated in the direction along the light guide emitting plate 3113, is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e formed on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113, and is radiated from the front surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113 to the front. Become. Then, the light radiated forward from the light guide radiating plate 3113 is radiated forward through the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 constituting the decorative member, so that the transparent portion 3150 is provided. The decorative members having light (decorative body 3111 and decorative sheet 3112) are luminescently decorated.

At this time, the light radiated from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the plate surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113 is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e within the plate thickness of the light guide radiating plate 3113 to be a decorative body. Since the 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are radiated and decorated, the light of the first LED 3114a is emitted from the front surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113 as compared with the case where the first LED 3114a is directed to the front to irradiate the light. The distance until it is radiated forward can be lengthened, and the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused and radiated forward from the light guide emitting plate 3113. Therefore, when the first LED 3114a is made to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused, and it is possible to suppress the appearance of light emission in the form of dots. Therefore, the decorative body 3111 and the decoration The sheet 3112 can be evenly luminescent and decorated to make it look beautiful, entertaining the player and suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, since the flat-plate-shaped decorative member (decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the dimensions in the front-rear direction are thin. It is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the back-up movable decoration body 3110, and other staging members (back-up front rotation decoration body 3410, back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, etc.) are arranged. It is possible to easily secure a space for the pachinko machine, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to the player by providing various staging members.

Further, the decorative member (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) provided with the decorative portion 3150 has a relief portion such as a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since it is composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a, the decorative portion 3150 can be given a three-dimensional effect by the relief portion, and the relief portion is used. Due to the lens effect, it is possible to give a sense of depth to the design of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear. Therefore, the relief portion of the decorative body 3111 and the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can show the player a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth (decorative portion 3150), so that the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 ( Even if the dimensions in the front-back direction are made thinner, the decorative effect is not reduced, the player's attention can be attracted and entertained, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner. The above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved.

Further, a decorative sheet having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a behind the decorative body 3111 having relief portions such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since the 3112 is provided, it is possible to make the decorative body 3111 appear to be colored by the color of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 without coloring the transparent decorative body 3111, and the cost for the decorative body 3111 is reduced. Can be made to. Further, by changing the design of the decorative sheet 3112, the decoration (decorative portion 3150) of the decorative body 3111 (rear-back movable decorative body 3110) can be easily changed. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to handle.

Further, the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion in which a part of the pattern as the decorative portion 3150 is displayed due to the interference fringes of light, and the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 Light from, light from other LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, light from the effect display device 1600, etc., light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. are holograms of the first contour portion 3112a. By hitting this part, a predetermined hologram can be shown by the interference fringes of light, so that the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved by the hologram, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. Therefore, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to a part of the decorative portion 3150 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and even if the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is thinned, the player can not feel the thinness.

Further, since a part of the pattern in the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 is composed of the hologram, the hologram is formed in the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion. Since it can be seen through the transparent decorative body 3111 having a relief part such as 3111c, the lens effect of the relief part can give a sense of depth to the pattern such as a hologram, which strongly attracts the interest of the player. The possible decoration part 3150 can be shown to the player. Further, since the hologram portion is provided on the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, it is possible to use the printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

Further, in the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flattened and the outer shape of the decorative sheet 3112 is the same as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, it is a transparent decorative body. The outer peripheral edge of 3111 can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, and since there is no frame on the outer periphery of the decoration (decorative portion 3150), a feeling of openness is given to the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. You can make the decoration look bigger. Therefore, the decoration of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, the decorative effect of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 can be fully exhibited, and the back-rear movable decoration body can be fully exhibited. The decoration of 3110 can strongly attract the attention of the player, and can provide the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player.

Further, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 is flattened, the decorative sheet 3112 is in contact (contact) with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, so that light is emitted between the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. Is not diffusely reflected, and the pattern of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible through the transparent decorative body 3111, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be fully exhibited. Further, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flattened, it is possible to reduce the dimensions of the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 in the front-rear direction as much as possible. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 and embodying the above-mentioned effects.

Further, the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, and the outer peripheral edge of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111) can be decorated by the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, by making the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 continuous with the decoration of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, a large decoration with a sense of unity can be given to the player. It can be shown, it can give the player a visual impact and attract attention, and it can also entertain a large decoration, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the light guide radiating plate 3113 has a plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c in which the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is accommodated from the rear, the first LED of the light guide radiating plate 3113 is accommodated. By accommodating the first LED 3114a from the rear in the portion 3113c, it is possible to bring the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 as close as possible, and the front and rear of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. The thickness in the direction can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied.

Further, the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated from the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c into the plate thickness. Therefore, compared to the case where the light is radiated from the outer peripheral surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113, the portion of the light guide radiating plate 3113 (for example, the central portion) where the light from the outer peripheral surface is hard to reach. However, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in the relevant portion and radiating light from the inner surface thereof, the relevant portion can be made to emit light brightly, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111 and decorative sheet) can be made to emit light brightly. 3112) can be evenly luminescently decorated.

Further, since the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is of the side view type, the first LED 3114a is accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiating plate 3113 to emit light. Light can be radiated from the inner surface of the portion 3113c (light receiving portion 3113i) in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide emitting plate 3113, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned action and effect is surely embodied. be able to.

Further, since a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113 and light can be emitted to substantially the entire decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the decorative body 3111 and the decoration Even if the decoration (decorative portion 3150) provided on the sheet 3112 is changed, it is not necessary to change the reflective portion 3113e, and it is possible to easily respond to the change in the decoration of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can easily respond to model changes, design changes, and the like.

It should be noted that the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 and the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 can also exert the same action and effect as described above.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to suitable embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine (parrot machine) formed by fusing the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the decorative portion 3150 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 are used. The decoration is composed of the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the decoration by the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112, but the present invention is limited thereto. It's not something to do. For example, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 may be used as one decorative member, and the decorative portion 3150 may be applied to the decorative member.

In addition, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a reception port (general winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large)) that can accept the game medium in the gaming area where the gaming medium is driven by the operation of the player. It is equipped with a winning slot, a winning slot for a character, a V winning slot, etc.), and when a gaming medium is received at the entrance, a privilege (pachinko playing medium payout, variable winning slot opening / closing operation, etc.) is provided to the player. Since the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, etc.) is given, the player can enjoy the operation of driving the gaming medium so that the gaming medium can be received at the desired entrance. ing. As this type of gaming machine, a decorative member whose surface is metal-plated and whose cutouts penetrating the front and rear are closed by a transparent lens portion, and a decorative member provided on the rear side of the decorative member and forward through the lens portion. A decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted is proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-223485). According to the technique of this document, the appearance of the decorative member can be improved by the brilliance of the metal plating in the decorative member, and the decorative member (lens portion) is luminescently decorated by the light emission of the LED, which is of interest to the player. Can be attracted and entertained. By the way, in a decorative member having a metal decorative portion formed of metal plating on the surface as in the technique of this document, when static electricity is accumulated on the surface of the decorative member, the portion of the metal decorative portion has high conductivity. Therefore, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface is discharged at once, and the discharge (spark) voltage (discharge voltage) becomes high. In the technique of this document, since the decorative substrate is provided on the rear side of the decorative member to which the metal plating is applied, the metal plating and the decorative substrate are as close as possible to each other. There is a risk that sparks will occur due to the discharge of static electricity accumulated in the metal plating between the metal plating) and the decorative substrate. Therefore, when sparks (discharges) occur between the metal plating and the decorative substrate, the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are damaged, and it becomes impossible to perform light emission decoration (light emission effect) of the decorative member. As a result, the player could not be entertained, and there was a risk that the player's interest would be reduced.

[Electrical connection method between the main body frame and the game board 5]
Next, a method of electrically connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 is a front perspective view (a) and a rear perspective view (b) of the drawer connector mounted on the relay board provided on the main body frame. The drawer connector is a connector that can automatically make an electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4, and is arranged at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the game board 5. The game board side drawer connector (convex type) is provided on the game board side relay board, and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on the main body frame side relay board arranged at a predetermined position on the front surface of the main body frame 4. It is provided.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 (not shown) is guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 to play the game board 5. Each terminal of the panel side drawer connector (convex type) and each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 are electrically connected.

For example, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 will be described. The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is formed of a non-conductive resin, and the front side is opened in a rectangular shape. In addition, it has a box-shaped body DCNa that is long in the left-right direction, and a plate-shaped base body DCNb that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed on the rear surface side of the box-shaped body DCNa to form an alphabetic T-shape as a whole. There is.

Around the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa, a drawer connector (convex type) on the game board side of the game board 5 is provided over a predetermined distance from the front surface of the opening DCNaa toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa. Inclined portions DCNaaa for guiding toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa are formed. Opening of box-shaped body DCNa The central part (1 place) of the inner upper surface of DCNaa and the left and right parts (1 place on the left part and 1 place on the right part) of the inner upper surface are connected to the drawer connector on the game board side of the game board 5. While preventing the (convex type) from being turned over in the vertical direction different from the normal orientation and being inserted into the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is Position in the left-right direction between the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5 when inserted into the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN in the normal orientation. A groove DCNaab that prevents misalignment and enhances the fitting between the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is from the vicinity of the front surface of the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa. Each is formed toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa.

On the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa, pin-type terminal PNs arranged in two rows in the left-right direction in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (six pin-type terminal PNs lined up in one row in the left-right direction). ) Penetrates the box-shaped main body DCNa and the base body DCNb.

Mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba are formed on the left side and the right side of the base body DCNb, respectively. When mounting the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side relay board KB (see Fig. 209) in the mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba, first the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN A rivet (not shown) is inserted from the front of the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209), and the end portion is caulked and plastically deformed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209). As a result, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is fixed to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209).

Further, on the back surface of the base body DCNb, when the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is mounted on the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209), the main body frame side drawer is mounted on the main body frame side relay board. A columnar protruding portion DCNbb is formed so as to be mounted in the normal orientation of the connector (concave type) DCN.

The main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) is a DIP (Dual) electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN in addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. An Inline Package) type small connector is mounted and electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via a wiring (harness) (not shown). When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) is guided. By electrically connecting each terminal of the type) and each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side, the game board is connected via a small DIP type connector and wiring (harness) (not shown). A control signal line for transmitting various control signals is formed by the main control board 1310 provided in 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4.

The drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side electrically connects the main control board 1310 provided in the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4, and also connects various power sources from the power supply board 630. It is electrically connected to various power supply lines (including ground (GND)) that supply to various boards provided in the game board 5, and is shown separately from the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'is provided on the main body frame side relay board KB'which is different from the main body frame side relay board KB (not shown). This main body frame side relay board KB'is a DIP (Dual Inline Package) electrically connected to this main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' in addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'. A small type connector is mounted and electrically connected to each decorative board and various sensors provided in the door frame 3 via wiring (harness) (not shown). When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the other game board side different from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 that is electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The drawer connector (convex type) is guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'of the main body frame 4, and is connected to each terminal of the other game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (not shown). (Concave type) By electrically connecting each terminal PN of DCN', a peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 and a door are provided via a small DIP type connector and wiring (harness) (not shown). A control signal line for transmitting various control signals and detection signals is formed by each decorative substrate, various sensors, various speakers, and the like provided in the frame 3. The structure of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'not shown is the same as that of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'not shown. The method of fixing to the main body frame side relay board KB'not shown is the same as the method of fixing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the main body frame side relay board KB (fixing method using rivets). There is.

Further, a method of fixing the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 to the game board side relay board (not shown), the main body frame 4. Main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) Other game board side drawer connectors (convex type) guided by DCN'Other game board side relay boards (other game board side relay boards) , Main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4 This is different from the game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the DCN is mounted. The fixing method to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is the same as the fixing method to the main body frame side relay board KB (fixing method using rivets).

The rivet is used when fixing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) by using the drawer connector to make the game board 5 the main body. Although the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be automatically electrically connected only by mounting the game board 4 on the frame 4, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the drawer on the game board side of the game board 5 is used. Since a large force may be applied from the connector (convex type) to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, this large force may apply a large force to the pin type in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. This is to prevent the soldered surface of each terminal PN from peeling off on the back surface (solder surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209). The case where the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is fixed to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) using bolts and nuts, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) are shown. When the game board 5 is fixed to the relay board on the game board side, there is a drawback that the nut may be loosened by attaching or detaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4.

In the present embodiment, a pin type is used as each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side, but when a bellows type using a terminal and a contact is used, there are the following problems. For example, when each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is used as a terminal and each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is used as a contact, the pachinko machine 1 can be used. When the gaming board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 with the power turned on, the contacts between the terminal and the contacts (specifically, a large current (inrush current) flows through the contacts for various power supply lines) are welded. It becomes. If the game board 5 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 4 in this welded state and an attempt is made to attach it, the contact of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side may be bent and broken, or the game board 5 may be used in the main body frame 4. When removing from the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the contact is peeled off from the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and is damaged, and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN cannot be used.

In addition, if the terminal and contacts are welded together, various control boards may malfunction or the electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to the damage of the connector. The problem that it needs to be provided.

In the present embodiment, by using a pin type as each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side, the above-mentioned problem does not occur at all. That is, even if the worker accidentally attaches the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 while the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, each terminal and the main body of the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board side of the game board 5. The drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side of the frame 4 is not welded to each terminal PN, and it is not necessary to provide a dedicated circuit for preventing welding.

[Solder short circuit prevention]
Next, solder short circuit prevention will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIGS. 209 are views (a) to (c) for preventing solder bridge of each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and is a DIP type electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). It is a figure (d)-(f) which prevents the solder bridge of each terminal of a small connector of. In FIG. 209, various wiring patterns and a substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter, may be referred to as “betagland”) are omitted for the sake of readability of the drawings. Further, in FIG. 209, the arrow shown by the solid line indicates the direction in which the solder flows when the substrate is poured into the solder tank, and the arrow shown by the alternate long and short dash line indicates the direction in which the substrate is poured into the solder tank.

As described above, the main body frame side relay board KB arranged at a predetermined position on the front surface of the main body frame 4 includes the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. Concave type) A small DIP type connector that is electrically connected to the DCN is mounted. The terminals of this DIP type small connector are pin type terminals arranged in two rows. The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is a mounting through hole DCNba, DCNba formed in the base body DCNb of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the same straight line in the left-right direction on the main body frame side relay board KB. And while the columnar protrusion DCNbb is arranged (predetermined position for the drawer connector), the DIP type small connector is in the vertical direction on the main body frame side relay board KB, that is, the DIP type. Each terminal lined up in two rows of small connectors is arranged so that it is rotated 90 degrees from each terminal PN lined up in two rows of main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN (predetermined position for small connector). ..

When the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, each of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN The terminal PN is inserted into each through hole KTH1 (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "land KTH1") having a land, and the cylindrical protrusion DCNbb of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side is a positioning hole. The main body is inserted through KBb and the mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side and the mounting holes KBa and KBa formed at the corresponding positions of the mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba are communicated with each other. Frame-side drawer connector (concave type) A rivet (not shown) is inserted into the mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba from the front of the DCN, and the end is crimped and fixed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame-side relay board KB. .. Then, when the DIP type small connector is placed at a predetermined position for the small connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, each terminal of the DIP type small connector has a land through hole KTH2. (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "Land KTH2".).

When the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, it becomes two stages in the vertical direction and becomes the first stage from the bottom. The six terminal PNs in one row and the six terminal PNs in the second row, which are the second row from the bottom, are arranged in parallel. On the other hand, when a DIP type small connector is placed at a predetermined position for a small connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the relay board KB on the main body frame side, it becomes 6 steps in the vertical direction and becomes the 1st step from the bottom. Two terminal PNs in one row, two terminal PNs in the second row that are the second row from the bottom, two terminal PNs in the third row that are the third row from the bottom, and the fourth row from the bottom. The two terminal PNs in the fourth row, the two terminal PNs in the fifth row, which are the fifth row from the bottom, and the two terminal PNs in the sixth row, which are the sixth row from the bottom, are arranged in parallel. Will be.

The main body frame side relay board KB has a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN placed in a predetermined position for a drawer connector on its surface (mounting surface) KBx, and a DIP type small connector in a predetermined position for a small connector. When placed, each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side and each terminal of the small DIP type connector protrude from the back surface (solder surface) KBy. In such a state, by flowing the main body frame side relay board KB through its back surface (solder side) KBy to the solder tank, each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and each land KTH1 are relayed on the main body frame side. It is possible to solder to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the board KB, and to solder each terminal of the DIP type small connector and each land KTH2 to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. Can be done.

The direction in which the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side flows to the solder bath is from the bottom of the 6 terminals PN in the second row, which is the second stage from the bottom of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side. It is in the direction toward the 6 terminals PN in the 1st row, which is the 1st stage, and is the 1st stage from the bottom from the 2 terminals in the 6th row, which is the 6th stage from the bottom of the DIP type small connector. The direction is toward the two terminals in the first row. That is, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the six terminal PNs in the first row, which are the first stage from the bottom, are the final stage terminals, and in the DIP type small connector, they are the first stage from the bottom. The two terminals in the first row are the terminals in the final stage.

When the back surface (solder surface) of the board is flowed to the solder tank, the solder tank is aligned with pin type connectors such as the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and DIP type small connector terminals. If it is flowed to, a solder bridge may be generated along the flow direction, and in particular, a solder bridge is generated between the terminal in the final stage and the terminal in the stage in front of the terminal. Therefore, a solder escape pattern is formed at the terminal in the final stage.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as described above, the 6 terminal PNs in the first row, which are the first stage from the bottom, are the terminals in the final stage, so the six terminal PNs in the first row Each land KTH1 and a solder relief pattern KNP1 having a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction and has a width that is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1 are connected to each other (that is, each of the six terminal PNs in the first row). The land KTH1 and each solder relief pattern KNP1 are electrically connected to each other).

In the DIP type small connector, as described above, since the two terminals in the first row, which are the first stage from the bottom, are the terminals in the final stage, each land KTH2 of the two terminals PN in the first row and the top and bottom A solder relief pattern KNP2 having a rectangular shape that is long in the direction and has a width that is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2 is connected to each other (that is, each land KTH2 and each solder relief pattern of the two terminals in the first row). It is formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side (so that the KNP 2 is electrically connected to each other).

In this way, by forming a solder escape pattern on the terminals of the final stage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of solder bridges at the terminals of the final stage and contribute to the prevention of solder short circuits, but solder bridges other than the terminals of the final stage May occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a method capable of suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of printing horizontal lines on the boundary of each stage by silk printing on the resist (countermeasure 1 by silk printing), on the resist. A method of printing horizontal lines at the boundaries of each stage by silk printing and printing vertical lines at the boundaries of the land and solder relief patterns of adjacent terminals in the left-right direction (countermeasure 2 by silk printing), silk on the resist. A method of enclosing the land and solder escape pattern of each terminal with a predetermined figure and filling the area by printing (countermeasure 3 by silk printing) can be mentioned.

[Countermeasure 1 by silk printing]
First, as a method capable of suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of printing horizontal lines on the boundary of each stage by silk printing on the resist (countermeasure 1 by silk printing) will be described.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 209 (a), the six terminal PNs in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, and the second row, which is the second row from the bottom. A horizontal line KSH1 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side by silk printing on the boundary between the six terminals PN. That is, since the horizontal line KSH1 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side by silk printing, the horizontal line KSH1 is a vertical wall like a mountain range when viewed from the resist surface. Will be in a row. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side is flowed to the solder tank, the solder must flow over the resist and over the vertical wall such as the horizon KSH1. Vertical line KSH1 at the boundary between the 6 terminal PNs and land KTH1 in the 2nd row, which is the 2nd stage from the bottom, and the 6 terminal PNs and land KTH1 in the 1st row, which is the 1st stage from the bottom. When the solder tries to stay on the resist due to the wall, the force for separating the solder acts, so that the solder bridge can be suppressed at each terminal PN and land KTH1 adjacent to each other in the vertical direction.

As shown in FIG. 209 (d), each terminal of the DIP type small connector has two terminals in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, and two terminals in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder side) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom, and the four rows from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder side) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the 4th row, which is the eye, and the 4th row, which is the 4th row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals of the above and the two terminals of the third row, which is the third row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the boundary between the two terminals in the third row, which is the third row from the bottom, and the two terminals in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom. Handa surface) Print on KBy, and horizontal line KSH2 by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, and the two terminals in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom. Is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side. That is, since the horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side by silk printing, the horizontal line KSH2 is a vertical wall like a mountain range when viewed from the resist surface. Will be in a row. As a result, for example, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side is flowed to the solder tank, the solder must flow over the resist and flow over the vertical wall such as the mountain range called the horizontal line KSH2. , The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals in the sixth row and the land KTH2, which is the sixth row from the bottom, and the two terminals and the land KTH2 in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom. When the solder tries to stay on the resist due to the wall, the force for separating the solder acts, so that the solder bridge can be suppressed at each terminal adjacent to each other in the vertical direction. The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and land KTH2 in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom, and the two terminals and land KTH2 in the fourth row, which is the fourth row from the bottom, and the fourth row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and land KTH2 in the fourth row and the two terminals and land KTH2 in the third row, which is the third row from the bottom, and the second in the third row, which is the third row from the bottom. Horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between one terminal and land KTH2, two terminals in the second row and land KTH2 in the second row from the bottom, and two terminals in the second row and land KTH2 in the second row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals in the first row and the land KTH2, which is the first row from the bottom, is also the two terminals and the land KTH2 in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, from the bottom. Similar to the horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals in the fifth row and the land KTH2, which is the fifth stage, the solder is separated by the solder trying to stay on the resist by the vertical wall like a mountain range called the horizontal line KSH2. By exerting a force, the solder bridge can be suppressed at the terminals adjacent to each other in the vertical direction and the land KTH2.

[Countermeasure 2 by silk printing]
Next, as a method that can suppress the occurrence of solder bridges, horizontal lines are printed on the resist at the boundaries of each stage by silk printing, and vertical lines are printed on the land and solder escape pattern of each terminal adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. The method of printing on each boundary (countermeasure 2 by silk printing) will be described. This measure 2 by silk printing is different from the above-mentioned measure 1 by silk printing, and further, vertical lines are printed on the land of each terminal adjacent to each other in the left-right direction and the boundary of the solder escape pattern adjacent to each other in the left-right direction by silk printing. Therefore, the description of the measure 1 by silk printing will be omitted.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, in addition to the horizontal line KSH1 printed by silk printing shown in FIG. 209 (a), further, as shown in FIG. 209 (b), the first step from the bottom. Of the six terminal PNs and land KTH1 in the first row and the six terminal PNs and land KTH1 in the second row from the bottom, the terminal PNs and land KTH1 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. A vertical line KSV1 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the solder escape patterns KNP1 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. That is, the vertical line KSV1 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side by silk printing, so that the vertical line KSV1 looks like a mountain range when viewed from the resist surface. The vertical walls are connected. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side is flowed to the solder tank, the solder can flow over the resist and along the vertical wall called the vertical line KSV1 like a mountain range. Solder flowing on a vertical wall such as a mountain range called vertical line KSV1 flows to the left side of the vertical wall or to the right side of the vertical wall with the vertical line KSV1 as a boundary and tries to stay on the resist. By exerting a force for separating the solder, the solder bridge can be suppressed in each of the terminals PN and land KTH1 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction and the solder escape pattern KNP1 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction.

In each terminal of the DIP type small connector, in addition to the horizontal line KSH2 printed by silk printing shown in FIG. 209 (d), as shown in FIG. 209 (e), the first step from the bottom is obtained. From the two terminals in one row and the land KTH2 to the two terminals in the sixth row and the land KTH2, which are the sixth row from the bottom, the terminals and the land KTH2 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction and the solder adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. A vertical line KSV2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side by silk printing on the boundary between the relief pattern KNP2. That is, the vertical line KSV2 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side by silk printing. Therefore, when viewed from the resist surface, the vertical line KSV2 looks like a mountain range. The vertical walls are connected. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side is flowed to the solder tank, the solder can flow over the resist and flow along the vertical line KSV2, which is a vertical wall like a mountain range. Solder flowing on a vertical wall such as a mountain range called vertical line KSV2 flows to the left side of the vertical wall or to the right side of the vertical wall with the vertical line KSV2 as a boundary and tries to stay on the resist. As a result, the force for separating the solder acts to suppress the solder bridges at the terminals and land KTH2 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction and the solder escape pattern KNP2 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction.

[Countermeasure 3 by silk printing]
Next, as a method that can suppress the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of enclosing the land of each terminal and the solder escape pattern with a predetermined figure by silk printing on the resist and filling the area (countermeasure 3 by silk printing). explain.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 209 (c), the land KTH1 through which each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and each solder relief pattern KNP1. , Is surrounded by a long rectangular shape in the left-right direction by silk printing on the back surface (solder side) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side, and in the area KSA1 surrounded by this rectangular shape, each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1. Print so that the area excluding is filled. That is, each land KTH1 and each land KTH1 in the area KSA1 in which each land KTH1 and each solder relief pattern KNP1 are surrounded by a rectangular shape by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side. Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP1 is printed so as to be filled, when each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 are viewed from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA1, each land KTH2 and each solder The escape pattern KNP1 is a recessed area, and the silk-printed area KSA1 is a small plateau area when viewed from the surface of the resist. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side is flowed to the solder tank, the solder must flow over the resist and flow over the small high plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1. The amount of solder flowing over the printed area KSA1 can be suppressed, and solder is applied to each land KTH1 and each solder relief pattern KNP1 which are recessed areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1. When it flows, the force to separate the solder works by trying to stay without being able to get over the small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1 from each land KTH1 which is a recessed area and each solder escape pattern KNP1. As a result, the solder bridge can be suppressed at the terminals PN and land KTH1 adjacent to each other in the vertical and horizontal directions and the solder relief pattern KNP1 adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction.

In each terminal of the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 209 (f), the land KTH2 through which each terminal of the DIP type small connector is inserted and each solder relief pattern KNP2 are connected to the main body frame side relay board KB. The back surface (solder surface) KBy is surrounded by a long rectangular shape in the vertical direction by silk printing, and the area of the area KSA2 surrounded by this rectangular shape, excluding each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, is filled. Print. That is, each land KTH2 and each land KTH2 in the area KSA2 in which each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are surrounded by a rectangular shape by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side. Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP2 is printed so as to be filled, when each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are viewed from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA2, each land KTH2 and each solder The escape pattern KNP2 is a recessed area, and the silk-printed area KSA2 is a small plateau area when viewed from the surface of the resist. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side is flowed to the solder tank, the solder must flow over the resist and flow over the small high plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA2, and solder is applied to each land KTH2 and each solder relief pattern KNP2, which are recessed areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2. When it flows, the solder tries to stay on a small plateau called KSA2, which is a silk-printed area from each land KTH2 that becomes a recessed area and each solder escape pattern KNP2, and the force that separates the solder works, so that it moves up, down, left and right. Solder bridges can be suppressed at the terminals and land KTH2 adjacent to each other in the direction and the solder escape pattern KNP2 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction.

Compared to the above-mentioned connectors to which the silk-screened measures 1 to 3 have been applied, the silk-printed parts are extremely conspicuous compared to the connectors to which the silk-screened measures 1 to 3 have not been applied. When performing the work of visually confirming whether or not the occurrence has occurred, the operator can quickly turn his / her gaze because it serves as a mark as to where the operator should look at the substrate.

[Modification example]
In this embodiment, when the substrate is flown into the solder bath, the above-mentioned measures 1 to 3 by silk printing are applied to prevent the occurrence of the solder bridge and prevent the solder short circuit. However, the above-mentioned silk printing is used. Countermeasures 1 to 3 can also be used as a mark indicating which connector the operator directly solders to the board is.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the countermeasure 3 by silk printing described above is applied when the substrate is flown into the solder bath, and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has a rectangular shape shown in FIG. 209 (c). In each terminal of the enclosed area KSA1 and the DIP type small connector, the area KSA2 surrounded by the rectangular shape shown in FIG. 209 (f) prevented the occurrence of a solder bridge to prevent a solder short circuit. Instead of the rectangular shape, a region surrounded by another shape may be used to prevent the occurrence of a solder bridge to prevent a solder short circuit. 210 is a diagram (a) showing a modified example of FIG. 209 (c), and is a diagram (b) showing a modified example of FIG. 209 (f). Of the reference numerals in FIG. 210, the same components as those in FIG. 209 are designated by the same reference numerals. Further, in FIG. 210, the arrow shown by the solid line indicates the direction in which the solder flows when the substrate is poured into the solder tank, and the arrow shown by the alternate long and short dash line indicates the direction in which the substrate is poured into the solder tank.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 210 (a), the land KTH1 through which each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and each solder relief pattern KNP1. The back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is surrounded by silk printing in a shape that is about 3 times larger than each shape of, and each land KTH1 and each solder in the area KSA1'enclosed in this shape. The area excluding the escape pattern KNP1 is printed so as to be filled. Further, from the viewpoint of the resist, the silk-printed region KSA1'is a region of a small plateau. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side is flowed to the solder tank, the solder must flow over the resist and flow over the small high plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1'. The amount of solder flowing over the silk-printed area KSA1'can be suppressed, and each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 which are recessed areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1' When the solder flows in, the solder is separated by trying to stay without being able to get over the small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1'from each land KTH1 which is a recessed area and each solder escape pattern KNP1. By exerting a force, the solder bridge can be suppressed at each of the terminals PN and land KTH1 adjacent to each other in the vertical and horizontal directions and the solder relief pattern KNP1 adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction.

Further, in each terminal of the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 210 (b), from the respective shapes of the land KTH2 through which each terminal of the DIP type small connector is inserted and each solder relief pattern KNP2. Surrounded by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side with a shape about 3 times larger, each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are excluded from the area KSA2'enclosed in this shape. Print to fill the area. Further, from the viewpoint of the resist, the silk-printed area KSA2'is the area of the small plateau. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side is flowed to the solder tank, the solder must flow over the resist and flow over the small high plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2'. Each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which are recessed areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2', can suppress the amount of solder flowing on the silk-printed area KSA2'. When the solder flows into the area, the solder tries to stay on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2'from each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which are recessed areas, and the force to separate the solder works. As a result, the solder bridge can be suppressed at the terminals and land KTH2 adjacent to each other in the vertical and horizontal directions and the solder relief pattern KNP2 adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the terminal of the final stage and the solder escape pattern are connected and formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side, but they are separated by a predetermined distance. May be formed. FIG. 211 is a diagram showing a modified example in which the terminal of the final stage and the solder relief pattern are formed so as to be separated by a predetermined distance.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), the land KTH1 through which the terminal PN of the final stage of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted and the land KTH1 are long in the vertical direction. A solder relief pattern KNP1'(one side may have a rectangular shape having the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1) having a rectangular shape having a width equal to the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and a predetermined distance (may be one having a rectangular shape). For example, they are formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB and the copper foil surface of KBy at a distance of one-third to one-half of the outer diameter of the land KTH1. May be good. This solder escape pattern KNP1'is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or beta lands and is in an insulated state.

In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), the land KTH2 through which the terminal of the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted and the land KTH2 having a long width in the left-right direction have the outer diameter of the land KTH2. A solder relief pattern KNP2'having a rectangular shape (which may have a square shape on which one side is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) and a predetermined distance (for example, one third of the outer diameter of the land KTH2). It may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side at a distance of 1 to 1/2). This solder escape pattern KNP2'is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or beta lands and is in an insulated state.

Further, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the land KTH1 through which the terminal PN of the final stage of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted and the land KTH1 in the vertical direction. A rectangular shape with a long width that is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and a semicircular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1. It may have a semicircular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance (for example, one-third to one-half the outer diameter of the land KTH1). ) May be separated from each other and formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side. This solder escape pattern KNP1 ″ is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or beta lands and is in an insulated state.

In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the land KTH2 through which the terminal of the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted and the land KTH2 having a long width in the left-right direction have the outer diameter of the land KTH2. Solder escape pattern KNP2'' which is rectangular and has a semicircular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH2'' (one side has a rectangular shape with the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2 and is a semicircle on the opposite side of the land KTH2. It may have a shape) and the back surface of the main body frame side relay board KB separated by a predetermined distance (for example, a length of one-third to one-half of the outer diameter of the land KTH2). (Solder surface) It may be formed on the copper foil surface of KBy, respectively. This solder escape pattern KNP2 ″ is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or beta lands and is in an insulated state.

Further, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 211 (c), the land KTH1 through which the terminal PN of the final stage of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted and the land KTH1 in the vertical direction. A rectangular shape with a long width that is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and a solder relief pattern KNP1'''' that has a triangular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1. It may have a triangular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance (for example, one-third to one-half the length of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). It may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side by a distance from each other. This solder escape pattern KNP1 ″ is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or beta lands and is in an insulated state.

In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211 (c), the land KTH2 through which the terminal of the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted and the land KTH2 having a long width in the left-right direction have the outer diameter of the land KTH2. Solder escape pattern KNP2'''' which is rectangular and has a triangular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH2 (one side has a rectangular shape with the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2 and has a triangular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH2. (For example, a length of one-third to one-half of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) is separated from the back surface of the main body frame side relay board KB (for example, one having a length of one-third to one-half). Solder surface) It may be formed on the copper foil surface of KBy, respectively. This solder escape pattern KNP2 ″ is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or beta lands and is in an insulated state.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the solder escape pattern KNP1 (KNP2) having a rectangular shape is connected to the land KTH1 (KTH2) through which the terminal of the final stage is inserted, but it is connected to the terminal of the final stage. The shape of the solder relief pattern on the opposite side may be a semicircular shape (see the semicircular shape in FIG. 211 (b)) or a triangular shape (see the triangular shape in FIG. 211 (c)).

Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 209, the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath (that is, the direction of the arrow of the one-point chain line in FIGS. 209 (a) to 209) is predetermined. If the substrate can be flowed in the opposite direction to this direction in addition to the direction (that is, if the substrate can be flowed into the solder tank from both directions), the above-mentioned measures 1 to 3 by silk printing are applied. It may be possible to prevent the occurrence of a solder bridge and prevent a solder short circuit. In this case, a solder relief pattern having a rectangular shape is connected to the land through which the terminal of the final stage is inserted depending on the direction of flow. The shape of the solder relief pattern on the opposite side that is not connected to the terminal in the final stage is a semicircular shape (see the semicircular shape in FIG. 211 (b)) or a triangular shape (the triangular shape in FIG. 211 (c)). See.). Further, the terminal of the final stage and the solder relief pattern may be formed so as to be separated by a predetermined distance. The solder escape pattern described above may be formed at both ends of the connector with respect to the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath. Further, when it is not known from which direction the substrate is flown at the time of substrate design, the above-mentioned solder escape pattern is formed in both directions so that the substrate can be flown from either direction.

Incidentally, conventionally, various types of main control boards that control game progress and game profits, sub-control boards that control effects that are executed along with game progress, image control boards that control display of image display devices, and the like. A gaming machine in which a substrate is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, as in the gaming machines described in this document, although various substrates are flowed into a solder bath and the terminals of the parts are soldered, there is a problem that a solder bridge is formed at the adjacent terminals and a short circuit occurs due to soldering. was there.

[Prevention of peeling by overresist]
Next, prevention of peeling by overresist will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214. Here, first, the overresist applied to each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side will be described, and the overresist applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector will be described. FIG. 212 is a schematic view (a) of an overresist applied to each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side, and is a schematic view (b) of a cross section of XX rays in (a). FIG. 213 is a schematic view (a) of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the board on which the surface mount type connector is mounted, and is a schematic view (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the board. FIG. 214 is a continuation of FIG. 213, which is an enlarged view of a portion A of FIG. 213 (b) and is a schematic view (c) of an overresist applied to a housing fixing land of a surface mount type connector. It is a schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the YY line in c). In addition, in FIGS. 212 to 214, various wiring patterns and a substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter, may be referred to as “betagland”) may be omitted for the sake of readability of the drawings.

[Overresist applied to each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side]
Explaining the overresist applied to each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side, as shown in FIGS. 212 (a) and 212 (b), a through hole KTH1 having a land (hereinafter, simply "land"). In the case of "KTH1", a through hole is formed in the base material KBo of the main body frame side relay board KB, and the surface (mounting surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB and the copper foil surface of KBx are formed. Lands having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed by removing the copper foil on the back surface (solder surface) KBy copper foil surface of the main body frame side relay board KB. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB are The outer diameter is KTHD1 and the size is the same.

Although the resist liquid is applied on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the relay board KB on the main body frame side to form the resist layer KBxr on the surface (mounting surface) side, the surface (mounting surface) side In the region of the resist layer KBxr corresponding to the land KTH1, a surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed. Further, although the resist liquid is applied on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side to form the resist layer KByr on the back surface (solder surface) side, the back surface (solder surface) In the region of the side resist layer KByr corresponding to the land KTH1, a back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByla having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed.

In the present embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra have the same size. The substrate ground (GND) (that is, betagland) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the substrate ground formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. It is electrically connected to (GND) (that is, betagland) by a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, the region corresponding to the land KTH1 in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr has an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the resist opening KBxra on the surface (mounting surface) side is formed, the outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 is covered with the resist from the outer peripheral portion of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1. Is given. As a result, on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the relay board KB on the main body frame side, the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 can be covered with the resist, so that high peel strength can be applied to the land KTH1 from multiple directions. On the other hand, it can be uniform.

Further, in the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, the region corresponding to the land KTH1 in the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr has an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the resist opening KByra on the back surface (solder surface) side is formed, overresist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 is covered with the resist from the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1. Has been done. As a result, on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side, the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 can be covered with the resist, so that high peel strength can be applied to the land KTH1 from multiple directions. On the other hand, it can be uniform.

Although the front surface and the back surface of the base material KBo of the main body frame side relay board KB are formed by adhering the copper foil surface, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface is compared with the adhesion between the base material KBo and the copper foil surface. The bond between the and solder is stronger.

By the way, when the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is fixed to the main body frame side relay board KB, rivets are used as described above. By using the drawer connector, it is possible to automatically connect the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 by simply attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4, but the game board 5 is the main body. When mounting on the frame 4, a large force may be applied from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. This is to prevent the soldered surface of each pin type terminal PN in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN from peeling off on the back surface (solder surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB due to a large force.

However, by using the drawer connector, an external force is applied to the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side, so the surface (mounting surface) of the relay board KB on the main body frame side, the copper foil surface of KBx, and the main body. The land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBx of the frame-side relay board KB is peeled off from the base material KBo, and various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface are peeled off from the base material KBo together with the land KTH1. May be done.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, copper is further applied to the land KTH1 on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. By increasing the peeling strength so that the copper foil formed on the foil surface does not peel off from the base material KBo, the drawer connector can be used to make the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN by attaching or detaching the game board 5. Even if an external force is applied, the land KTH1 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx copper foil surface of the main body frame side relay board KB and the back surface (solder surface) KBx copper foil surface of the main body frame side relay board KB is the base material. It is possible to reliably prevent the peeling from the KBo and the various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface from the substrate KBo together with the land KTH1.

The outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 to which the overresist is applied has a region in which each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side is inserted into the land KTH1 and soldered. It is larger than the outer diameter of the land without overresisting. This is because the joint area when the terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side is soldered to the land KTH1 to which the overresist is applied is the terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side. This is because the area is larger than the joint area when soldered to a land that has not been overresisted. As a result, the bonding strength to the land KTH1 to which the overresist is applied can be made higher than the bonding strength to the land to which the overresist is not applied.

Also, depending on the presence or absence of overresist, even if the outer diameter of the land through which the terminal is inserted is the same, when overresisting is not applied, the land having a normal size outer diameter and when overresisting is applied It is necessary to prepare a land with an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the normal size at the board design stage. There is a problem that soldering defects may occur due to insufficient bonding between the land and the land.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, for a substrate (for example, a relay board KB on the main body frame side) in which even one land to be overresisted exists regardless of the presence or absence of overresist, for all the lands. , The same land as the land to which the overresist is applied is arranged as the land to which the overresist is not applied. As a result, the connection between the terminal and the land is sufficient, and the occurrence of soldering defects can be reliably prevented.

It should be noted that even for a game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted. The above-mentioned overresist is applied to the above-mentioned. In addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'is not shown separately from the main body frame side relay board KB'. The above-mentioned overresist is also applied to the land on the main body frame side relay board KB'not shown in the figure. Further, another game board side drawer connector (convex type) guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'not shown in the main body frame 4 (the other game board drawer connector (convex type) is the main body frame. Side drawer connector (concave type) Another game board side relay board (this) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 electrically connected to the DCN is mounted. The other game board side relay board is a game board side relay (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted. The above-mentioned overresist is also applied to the land for the land, which is different from the substrate.

In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB are different. Although the outer diameter is KTHD1 and has the same size, the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB is larger than that of the main body frame side relay board KB. The outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy may be increased or decreased. Further, in the present embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra are the same size, but the front surface (mounting surface) side (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra has the same size. The opening diameter KByrD1 of the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra may be larger or smaller than the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the surface) side resist opening KBxra.

[Modification example]
In the above-described embodiment, for a substrate (for example, a relay board KB on the main frame side) in which at least one land to be overresisted is present, regardless of the presence or absence of overresist, all the lands are covered. The same land as the land to which the overresist is applied is arranged as a land to which the overresist is not applied, but when the overresist is not applied, the land having a normal size outer diameter (that is, the land to be overresisted is applied). A land having a normal size outer diameter smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1) may be arranged. That is, a land to which overresist is applied and a land having an outer diameter of a normal size may be mixed when no overresist is applied. In this case, depending on the presence or absence of over-resist, even if the outer diameter of the land through which the terminal is inserted is the same, if over-resist is not applied, the land having a normal size outer diameter and the land with normal size are over-resisted. It is necessary to prepare a land having an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the normal size at the board design stage.

[Overregistration applied to the housing fixing land of surface mount type connector]
The overresist applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF of the surface mount type connector KCN mounted on the substrate KC will be described in FIGS. 213 (a) and 213 (b), and FIGS. 214 (c) and 214 (d). As described above, a pad KSP having a vertically elongated rectangular shape to which each terminal (for example, having six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN is soldered, and various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, respectively. Surface mount type connector A long rectangular shape in the vertical direction in which both sides (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides) of the KCN housing are soldered and fixed to the surface (mounting surface) of the board KC. The housing fixing pad KSPF having a shape has various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, each pad KSP, and each housing fixing by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. Each pad KSPF is formed. The housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is made of a non-conductive resin. Metallic housing fixing portions are provided on both sides (left side and right side) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN.

The perimeter KCxa of each pad KSP and various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP is the substrate ground (GND) (that is, betta land) by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. ) Is insulated without being electrically connected. On the other hand, the four corners of each housing fixing pad KSPF around each housing fixing pad KSPF are fixed to each housing by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. A thermal pattern KCxb is applied in which the pad KSPF is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) (that is, Betagland) via a cross-shaped pattern. By this thermal pattern KCxb, both sides (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side respectively) of the surface mount type connector KCN housing are placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the board KC and each housing fixing pad of KCx. When soldering to the KSPF, the heat that melts the solder can be prevented from being taken away from the outer periphery of each housing fixing pad KSPF. It should be noted that both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN housing (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side, respectively) are placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the board KC and each housing fixing pad KSPF of KCx. By soldering to, it is possible to strengthen the fixing of the surface mount type connector KCN to the board KC as compared with the case where each terminal of the surface mount type connector KCN is simply soldered to the board KC. , Surface mount type connector Both sides of the housing of the KCN housing (metal housing fixing parts provided on the left side and the right side respectively) are electrically connected to the board ground (GND) of the board KC and surface mounted. It is also possible to enhance the shielding effect for the signal connected to each terminal of the type connector KCN.

Although a resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC to form the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr, the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr is formed. In the area corresponding to each pad KSP, a resist opening on the pad surface (mounting surface side) side having the same shape as each pad KSP is formed, and the area corresponding to each housing fixing pad KSPF is formed. Is formed with a resist opening KCxra on the surface (mounting surface) side for the housing fixing pad having an opening rectangular shape smaller than the rectangular shape of each housing fixing pad KSPF. Further, a resist liquid is applied on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC to form the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr.

The substrate ground (GND) (that is, beta land) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the substrate ground (GND) (that is, beta land) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC. ) Is electrically connected by a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the region of the resist layer KCxr on the surface (mounting surface) side corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF has an opening rectangle smaller than the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF. Since the resist opening KCxra on the surface (mounting surface) side for the housing fixing pad having a shape is formed, the housing fixing pad is formed from the outer periphery of the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the housing fixing pad KSPF. An overresist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the KSPF is covered with the resist. As a result, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the resist can cover the entire outer peripheral portion of each housing fixing pad KSPF, so that high peel strength can be obtained in multiple directions with respect to each housing fixing pad KSPF. Can be uniform with respect to the load from.

Although the front and back surfaces of the base material KCo of the substrate KC are formed by adhering the copper foil surfaces, each pad KSP and each housing formed on the copper foil surface is compared with the adhesion between the base material KCo and the copper foil surface. The joint between the body fixing pad KSPF and the solder is stronger.

By the way, as the substrate KC on which the surface mount type connector KCN is mounted, in the present embodiment, for example, a substrate such as a main control substrate 1310 and a payout control substrate 633 can be mentioned. The various wiring and harnesses connected to the various connectors provided on the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are used for removing dust and tobacco tar accumulated on the pachinko machine 1, performing various inspections, etc. , After being removed by a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall, it will be reconnected after work. However, most of the staff in the game hall who perform such work are unfamiliar with the handling of the board, and when removing various wirings and harnesses from the connector or connecting various wirings and harnesses to the connector. , May be done by force (that is, with excessive force).

Then, among the plurality of connectors provided on the board KC such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, there are DIP type connectors and surface mount type connectors. Therefore, for example, the above-mentioned surface mount type connector KCN When the above-mentioned work is performed by a staff member such as a clerk of a game hall, the force associated with inserting and removing the harness from the surface-mounted type connector KCN is applied to the surface-mounted type connector KCN. Because it is applied, due to this large force, both sides of the housing of the surface-mounted type connector KCN (metal housing fixing parts provided on the left side and the right side, respectively) are the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate KC and the copper foil of KCx. Each housing fixing pad KSPF formed on the surface KCxp is peeled off from the base material KCo, and along with this, each pad KSP formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC is released from the base material KCo. It may be peeled off, or various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface KCxp may be peeled off from the base material KCo together with each pad KSP.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCzip by overresisting the housing fixing pad KSPF is prevented from peeling from the base material KCo. By increasing the peel strength, even if the force associated with inserting and removing the harness from the surface-mounted type connector KCN is applied to the surface-mounted type connector KCN, it is formed on the copper foil surface KCpp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. The housing fixing pad KSPF is not peeled off from the base material KCo, and along with this, each pad KSP formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC is peeled off from the base material KCo. It is possible to reliably prevent various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface KCxp from peeling off from the base material KCo together with each pad KSP.

[Modification example]
In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned overresist is applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF of the substrate KC on which the surface-mounted type connector KCN to which an external force is applied is mounted, but the main control board 1310 is dispensed. When a surface-mounted type connector into which various wirings and harnesses are inserted / removed is mounted in addition to a board such as a control board 633, a peripheral control board 1510, a power supply board 630, an interface board 635, various decorative boards, and various relays are mounted. The above-mentioned overresist may be applied to the housing fixing pad of the substrate such as a substrate and various drive substrates, or the substrate may be provided on a movable body operated by driving an electric drive source. When a load is applied to the movable board by wiring or harness that is electrically connected to the movable board as the body operates, the housing of the movable board on which the surface mount type connector is mounted. The above-mentioned overregistration may be applied to the fixed pad, or various switches having a pressing operation unit and of a surface mounting type mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. The above-mentioned overregistration may be applied to the housing fixing pad of the board for fixing the switch, or when some external force is applied to the board, a resistor, a capacitor, a diode, a transistor, an IC, etc. The above-mentioned overresist may be applied to the pad of the substrate to which various terminals of the lead type and surface mount type electronic components are soldered.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF is formed in the region of the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF. Since the resist opening KCxra on the surface (mounting surface) side for the housing fixing pad having a smaller opening rectangular shape is formed, the outer periphery of the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF is directed toward the inside of the housing fixing pad KSPF. An overresist was applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the housing fixing pad KSPF was covered with a resist, but the housing fixing pad KSPF was not overresisted and a through hole having a land around the housing fixing pad KSPF. May be formed so that each land is overresisted. FIG. 215 is a schematic view (a) of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the board on which the surface mount type connector in the modified example is mounted, and is a schematic view (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the board. be. FIG. 216 is a continuation of FIG. 215, which is an enlarged view of a portion B of FIG. 215 (b) and is a schematic view (c) of an overresist applied to a housing fixing land of a surface mount type connector. It is a schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the ZZ line in c). In addition, in FIG. 215 and FIG. 216, various wiring patterns and a substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter, may be referred to as “betagland”) may be omitted for the sake of readability of the drawings.

A modified example in which a plurality of through holes having lands are formed around the housing fixing pad KSPF without overresisting the housing fixing pad KSPF and overresisting is applied to each land will be described. As shown in (b) and FIGS. 216 (c) and 216 (d), each terminal (for example, having six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN has an elongated rectangular shape in the vertical direction to be soldered. The surface of the board KC (the metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides) of the pad KSP, various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, and the surface mount type connector KCN housing (the metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides, respectively). A housing fixing pad KSPF having a long rectangular shape in the vertical direction, which is soldered and fixed to a mounting surface), and a plurality of through-holes KCTH having lands (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "land KCTH"). The wiring pattern for connecting the betagland that connects the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH, and the betagland is the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate KC. Various wiring patterns connected to the KSP, each housing fixing pad KSPF, each land KCTH, and each beta land connection wiring pattern are formed. Further, each land KCTH is formed by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC. In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC are the same size. The wiring pattern for connecting the betagland that connects the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH, and the betagland also has a function as a thermal pattern of the housing fixing pad KSPF.

With respect to the housing fixing pad KSPF on the right side, three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and two rows are arranged so as to be adjacent to the right side of the housing fixing pad KSPF. With respect to the housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side, three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and two rows are arranged so as to be adjacent to the right side of the housing fixing pad KSPF.

Although a resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC to form the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr, the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr is formed. A surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed in the region corresponding to the land KCTH. Further, although the resist liquid is applied on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC to form the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr, the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr In the region corresponding to the land KCTH, a resist opening KCyra on the back surface (solder surface) side having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed. In this modification, the opening diameter of the resist opening KCxra on the front surface (mounting surface) side and the opening diameter of the resist opening KCyra on the back surface (solder surface) side are the same size. The substrate ground (GND) (that is, beta land) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the substrate ground (GND) (that is, beta land) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC. ) Is electrically connected by a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the region of the resist layer KCxr on the surface (mounting surface) side corresponding to the land KCTH has an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH (mounting surface). ) Side resist Since the opening KBxra is formed, an overresist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer circumference of the outer diameter of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH. Further, in the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC, the region corresponding to the land KCTH in the resist layer KCyr on the back surface (solder surface) side has an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH on the back surface (solder surface) side. Since the resist opening KCyra is formed, over-resisting is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer circumference of the outer diameter of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH. As a result, the peel strength can be increased so that the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp by overresisting each land KCTH does not peel off from the base material KCo.

As described above, the right housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, so as to be adjacent to the right side of the right housing fixing pad KSPF. As described above, the left housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and the left housing fixing pad KSPF. They are arranged next to each other on the left side of. As a result, even if the housing fixing pad KSPF is not overresisted, each land KCTH is overresisted. Therefore, the housing fixing pad KSPF and each land KCTH have the above-mentioned betaland connection wiring pattern. By being connected, even if the force associated with inserting and removing the harness from the surface mount type connector KCN is applied to the surface mount type connector KCN, it is formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. When the housing fixing pad KSPF is to be peeled off from the base material KCo, the peeling strength of each land KCTH formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC is increased accordingly. This makes it difficult for the housing fixing pad KSPF to peel off from the base material KCo.

In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC are the same size. However, the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC is compared with the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. May be large or small. Further, in this modification, the opening diameter of the resist opening KBxra on the front surface (mounting surface) side and the opening diameter of the resist opening KByra on the back surface (solder surface) side are the same size, but the surface (mounting surface) The opening diameter of the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra may be larger or smaller than the opening diameter of the side resist opening KBxra.

Further, in this modification, as described above, the right housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and the right housing fixing pad KSPF. On the left side of the housing fixing pad KSPF, there are two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, as described above. The left housing fixing pad KSPF is arranged adjacent to the left side, but instead of or together with this, the right housing fixing pad KSPF has two lands at equal intervals along the vertical direction. Two rows of KCTH may be arranged so as to be adjacent to each other above or / or below the housing fixing pad KSPF on the right side, or the housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side may be arranged along the vertical direction. Two rows of two lands KCTH arranged at equal intervals may be arranged adjacent to each other above and / or below the housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side.

Incidentally, conventionally, various types of main control boards that control game progress and game profits, sub-control boards that control effects that are executed along with game progress, image control boards that control display of image display devices, and the like. A gaming machine in which a substrate is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051) and FIG. 2). Since the connector provided on the board is loaded by inserting and removing the wiring, for example, when a person who is not accustomed to handling the board removes the wiring from the connector or connects the wiring to the connector, the force is excessive. There was a problem that the copper foil of the substrate was peeled off due to the load on the connector.

[Peripheral control unit configuration]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged behind the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 217 to 219. 217 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 218 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 219 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500. In FIG. 218, the terminals of the various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of the various connectors are inserted into the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. Although it protrudes from, it is omitted because it is easy to see the drawing.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a cover body 1501 having a box shape that is open at the rear and longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. Peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the effect based on the command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 and electricity. A liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and a base body 1502 for closing the opening of the cover body 1501 are provided. Various substrates such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. As a result, a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is configured by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, various control information (peripheral data) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 can be stored in the various boards mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having a region of about two-thirds when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface, and is arranged so as to be packed on the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 have a square shape in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in the remaining one-third area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back, and the upper right corner of the cover body 1501. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape that is twice as large as the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is placed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

The boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later. Is connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and are the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. There is.

The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded into an opaque black color. When viewed from the front thereof, the upper side and the left side of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm). The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are projected rearward (front side of the pachinko machine 1) on the lower side and the right side to form a box shape having an opening.

The cover flat plate 1501a is for mounting the air cooling fan FAN at a position slightly on the upper right side of the center thereof when viewed from the front and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to project toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. On the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa are formed along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center in the vertical and horizontal directions of the bottom surface. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a cylindrical shape to be inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air-cooled fan FAN having a square shape. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501ab4 having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooled fan FAN) are formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. By forming the arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of illegally taking out various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the cover flat plate 1501a is formed with a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 diagonally in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and mounted, the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan head screw with a seat, comes into contact with the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air-cooled fan FAN pops out from the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the front surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located at a higher position than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The wiring drawer recess 1501ab is formed so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooled fan FAN is attached to and fixed to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooled fan FAN can be drawn out from the wiring extraction recess 1501ab.

The cover flat plate 1501a includes connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof, and a volume control switch. A connector recess as a closed, almost horizontally long rectangular area (to be exact, a convex area with the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 at the top and connectors CN2 to CN7 at the bottom) with the position corresponding to 1510d as one closed. The 1501ac faces the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). It is formed by protruding. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 are located at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d, respectively. It is formed. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac generally occupies a region on the lower right side when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment. Two reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 elongated in the vertical direction are formed so as to project forward at predetermined intervals at positions that do not interfere with the holes 1501ac8.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. The connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume control holes 1501ac8 are exposed.

The cover flat plate 1501a has a position corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof when viewed from the front surface thereof. A position where the connector recess 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa as two closed horizontally long rectangular areas (a position having a long distance dimension compared to the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The cover body 1501 is formed so as to project toward the opening side, and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 have connector holes 1501ac9, 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. It will be exposed from each.

Further, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring outlet opening 1501ae formed at a position corresponding to CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side side thereof when viewed from the front surface thereof. The mounting recess 1501af for mounting the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that can communicate with the wiring outlet opening 1501ae and close the wiring outlet opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed at a high position (a position having a shorter distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501a) so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501. The mounting recess 1501af has a predetermined height of a cylindrical shape (a distance shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503) inserted into the through hole 1503a at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503. The protruding portion 1501afa having a dimension) is formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the mounting holes 1501afb1 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed, respectively.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. , The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the flexible flat cable (FFC (Flexible Flat)) that closes the wiring outlet opening 1501ae and is connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Abbreviation for Cable. In a flexible flat cable, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data are arranged in parallel to the effect display device 1600, and these plurality of flat conductors are coated with an insulator. )) The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the wire from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.

When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side cover side wall 1501c and project upward and downward at predetermined intervals in the center. At the same time, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and projecting outward and a hinge hanging portion 1501cd arranged below the guide portion 1501cc and projecting outward are formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc. On the other hand, L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda protruding forward are formed on the front side of the left end of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd. Further, in the center of the cover body 1501 of the cover side wall 1501e on the right side, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea protruding outward is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged so as to be packed on the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the positions, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed so as to project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1510rf1 to having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 and copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed, respectively. , 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Further, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed toward the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are formed. Is arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it in. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , And the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Become. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 via a metal pan screw. It is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is the same as the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, which are electrically connected to each other. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (ground) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan screw, the cover body 1501 is connected to the ground (ground) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to be the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan head screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inward from the end surface on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 are formed diagonally from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Has been done. The periphery of the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are formed, and these lands are formed. Each of the 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and the 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 has a wiring pattern formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Further, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a through hole formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed. The 1520r1 and 1520r3 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the land 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. ) And the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The bearing surface of the metal pan screw is in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 via a metal pan head screw. It is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1520rf1 to 1520rf4, 1520rb1 to 1520rb4. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the same as the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, which are electrically connected to each other. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (ground) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan screw, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (ground) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to be the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan screw inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side wall 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the cover flat plate. The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side of the 1501a is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 when viewed from the back surface so that the liquid crystal output board 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the position, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1,1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501an1,1501an2 are formed diagonally so as to project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. The periphery of the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1530rf1 to having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output board 1530. 1530rf4 and copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed, respectively. , 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively. Further, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is directed toward the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2, 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed. Is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1, 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to insert the cover flat plate. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the 1501a. In this state, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the metal. The bearing surface of the pan head screw is in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan head screw. It is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 to 1530rf4, 1530rb1 to 1530rb4. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the same as the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which are electrically connected to each other. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan screw, the ground of the peripheral control board 1510 is used. (GND) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected to be the same ground (GND).

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side and the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane. It is supposed to be done.

As described above, in a state where various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface of the various substrates (cover flat plate 1501a). A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, there is a gap (2.3 mm in this embodiment) between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa having the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimensions. Is formed.

In the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes are formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, respectively. When the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 to control the peripherals. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the up-down direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, there are gaps between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501. At the same time, a gap is formed between the volume adjusting switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjusting hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501. When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 become available. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. , Air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, and at the same time, the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven formed in the cover body 1501) are taken in. The gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the gaps formed in the volume control holes 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is taken in through the gaps formed in the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501.

The sum of the areas (total area) of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa is the area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The gaps formed in the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501), and the volume control switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. , The volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, the gap formed in the cover body 1501, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the two connector holes 1501ac9, 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. And the area in the gap formed in) is smaller than the sum. Therefore, when the wing portion of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The flow velocity of the air flowing into each can be kept small.

When the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wings. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. It is possible to keep the flow velocity of the air flowing into the fan small, but when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation sucks air through the wings and the surrounding area. Air may be sent out toward the control IC 1510a. In other words, the air-cooled fan FAN may not have the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply have the main purpose of air-cooling the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded into an opaque black color. The base side walls 1502b to 1502e are projected forward (on the back side of the pachinko machine 1) on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, to form a box shape having an opening. The size of the openings formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is one size larger than the size of the openings formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. As a result, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. Is fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

The base flat plate 1502a is positioned along the lower side of the base plate 1502a so as not to interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, the peripheral control board). Each terminal of the connector CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the 1510 is inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted. Peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the force when inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at the position (position that does not interfere with each protruding terminal because it protrudes from 1510y). Vertically elongated wire breakage prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the control board 1510 from being broken.

When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca protruding outward is formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the base body 1502 of the base side wall 1502c on the left side. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cc and 1502cad are formed at the corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 described above are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf described above. The hinged hooks 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hooks 1501cc and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, with the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf in contact with the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501. By wrapping around, the hinge receiving portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. It is designed to be able to engage.

Further, in the center of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, a base-side sealing portion 1502ea is formed so as to project outward at a position corresponding to the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, respectively.

[Various connectors]
The peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding the functions of various ROMs) and the effect display control unit 1512 (functions of various ROMs) described above are on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501. It also has the functions of (excluding)), and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I / O interfaces. Peripheral control IC1510a integrated on one semiconductor chip, and various schedule data that regulates the progress of various programs and productions that can control the progress and demonstration of the game production (demo production performed while waiting for the player). The control ROM 1510b (including the function of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above, the function of the display control ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above, etc.) and the peripheral data provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. A slide type SDRAM 1510c composed of an SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2 that can transfer and store various control information (peripheral data) stored in the ROM 1520a, and a slide type that can adjust the volume. A volume control switch 1510d, a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is turned off, a power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. I have. The backup power supply 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

The control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbit, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbit. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

As various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510, there are various serial I / O, various parallel I / O, and the like. Examples of various serial I / O include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Synchronous Receiver Transfer) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), various boards provided on the game board 5 side, and various boards provided on the door frame side. SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to the connector (communication is performed via the corresponding connector among the connector CN3, the connector CN6, and the connector CN7).

In the present embodiment, SPI communication or I2C communication is used to provide an electric drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicate via the connector CN6) provided on the game board 5 side, and a door frame. Drive data can be transmitted to the drive control IC that drives the electrical drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids that communicate via the connector CN3) provided on the 3 side, or the game board 5 side. Light emission data for the LED control IC for a plurality of LEDs (communication via the connector CN7) provided in the door frame 3 and a plurality of LEDs (communication via the connector CN3) provided on the door frame 3 side. Is transmitted, signals from various sensors (communication via the connector CN6) provided on the game board 5 side are received as detection data, and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (via the connector CN3) are received. It receives signals from (communication) as detection data. In the present embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

As various parallel I / O, there is GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general-purpose IO). In this embodiment, a signal from the air-cooled fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air-cooled fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. No signals from various sensors that confirm the operation of the controlled object and the position of the origin are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), and control signals for the controlled object provided on the game board 5 side (connector CN6) are sent from the GPIO. It outputs (via) or outputs a signal from GPIO to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1, SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , Connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and connector CN7 is assigned SPI communication. Is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (supports up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to the instruction of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , It is possible to transfer data to the DRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can realize high-speed data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the boards and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the boards are further provided. I have. The surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards. The surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in the form of a plurality of types of video signals. Examples of the plurality of types of video signal methods include a plurality of types such as an RGB method, an LVDS method, a MIPI (Mobile Indicator Interface) method, an eDP (Embedded DisplayPort) method, and a clockless method. In, four systems (a total of four systems) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. Further, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. A peripheral control board that uses, for example, an eDP system instead of the MIPI system, one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one eDP system. You can also create 1510.

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, LEDML1 is further located near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 is located near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 is located near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 is located near the special connector SCN2. , Is equipped. Various voltages (DC + 37V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The LEDML1 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current + 5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current + 5V is supplied. The LEDML2 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current + 12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current + 12V is supplied. The LEDML3 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current + 37V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current + 37V is supplied. The LEDML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained in the state where the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surface (cover) of the various boards is as described above. A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a (the surface facing the back surface side) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

On the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The special connectors SCN4 provided include connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and connectors CN8 to provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 in that they are provided with a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from CN10. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, respectively, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 do not move in the vertical direction when the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fitted.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively, and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530. (Mounting surface) The special connector SCN4 provided in 1530x is a socket, respectively.

By inserting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushing it into the socket and the plug. Fits. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is viewed in the front-rear direction (pachinko) when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range toward the back surface and the front surface of the machine 1. The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in a state in which the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 is the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to come into contact with the back surface of the 1501a.

By inserting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the socket and the plug can be separated. Fit. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket is viewed from the front of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) in the front-rear direction (pachinko machine 1). The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving within a predetermined distance range (direction between the back surface and the front surface). The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the predetermined distance range described above when viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to come into contact with the special connector SCN4.

Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is adopted for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is adopted for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can store various control information (peripheral data) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (the function of the image ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above) and the like. Including.). As various control information (peripheral data), image data such as a background image, a character image, a pattern image, etc. for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on the door frame 3, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc. Drive data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effect bodies provided can be mentioned.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND type flash (nonvolatile) memory, which is cheaper than the NOR type flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high-speed transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

In this way, by adopting a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to realize cost reduction, contribute to reduction of power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer speed. can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is easily affected by noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration of electrically connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripherals are not adopted. By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by the inter-board connector, the influence of noise invading the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 uses the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on its own surface (mounting surface) 1520x as the surface of the peripheral control board 1510. (Mounting surface) After inserting and pushing into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in 1510x, it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the error in the front-rear direction generated when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 is absorbed. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket, and to reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs during the operation, damage to the multiple connection terminals formed between the plug and the socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is established. It can be reliably formed.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, whereby the progress of the game effect on the effect display device 1600 (for example, to the player). An image telling that a jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state occurs, an image telling that the jackpot gaming state does not occur, and a state in which the jackpot gaming state does not occur but the jackpot gaming state occurs compared to the normal state. It is an important board for drawing images such as images that convey that you are approaching) and demonstrations (demonstration that is performed while waiting for the player). Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit the drawing data of the image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the boards of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board are not connected. By adopting a configuration in which the 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise invading the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on its own surface (mounting surface) 1530x on the surface (mounting) of the peripheral control board 1510. (Surface) The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 must be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after being inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in 1510x and pushed in. By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the floating mechanism, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket, and to reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-back direction that occurs at the time, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is surely established. Can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the front surface. Compared to the case of three-dimensional arrangement, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced. Therefore, for example, a large movable effect unit (movable effect body is operated on the game board 5). It can contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging the electric drive source and the drive mechanism that can be used, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operation position).

[How to assemble the peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

Subsequently, in order to mount the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the front surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ( The front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the mounting surface) 1520x and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are directed toward the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are provided on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 to be formed, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. .. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in.

Subsequently, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the metal (not shown) is not shown in the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a pan head screw made of metal and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As described above, among the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrain the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the cover flat plate 1501a. While the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restricted by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side, the peripheral control board 1510 has a mounting boss for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions. The protruding portion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are constrained, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is suppressed by the peripheral control board 1510. Dimensions of through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a when fixed to the back surface side of 1501a, respectively. This is because it can be absorbed with a sufficient margin.

Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 are provided. The guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502ca formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502ca, and the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the base body. The hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502.

Subsequently, a state in which the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. In a state where the base body 1502 is wrapped around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is covered with the cover body 1501 as it is, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is made of metal (not shown). A metal one-way screw into which an anchor rivet is inserted is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward in the base side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. The base-side sealing portion 1502ea and the sealed portion 1502ea are sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are inscribed (surface contact), and the base body 1502 is inscribed. The front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are in a conductive state. In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is a deterrent against illegal acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been enhanced.

Subsequently, the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501a formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooled fan FAN are connected from the wiring drawer recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the drawer and the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively.

Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 by inserting and attaching the connector. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5, the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front and is on the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500). The engaging portion 1502ca side) formed in the game panel 1100 is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is formed in the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Is inserted and screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix it.

In the above-mentioned assembly method, in the procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is placed at the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface.) The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. After fixing to the above-mentioned predetermined position on the side (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back surface), the surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the (mounting surface) 1520x is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is pushed. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in the above is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in the predetermined position described above (the peripheral control board 1510 is a cover). It is also possible to fix the body 1501 to the left side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back surface.). Even in the mounting procedure of such various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the error in the front-rear direction generated when pushing in is absorbed, and the plug and the socket can be used. It is possible to prevent damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and to surely form a transmission path between the boards of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510, and to form the liquid crystal output board 1530 and its surroundings. It is possible to reliably form a transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of gaming boards mounted on pachinko machines with different gaming specifications. In the present embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three parts and attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. The peripheral data corresponding to the above is stored as a board that depends on the game specifications of the game board, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board that depends on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the staging display device 1600, and becomes a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 provided with the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As described above, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems input to a display device such as a staging display device, such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these two types of methods are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced according to the method of the video signal input to the staging display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Is adopted, the liquid crystal output board 1530 corresponding to the method (LVDS method) of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the above-mentioned inter-board connector.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side by metal pan screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and are the same. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is passed to the substrate ground (ground of various substrates (GND)) to remove the noise. (Hereinafter, it may be described as "noise countermeasure effect by peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin"). As a result, it is not necessary for each of the various boards to be provided with a dedicated filter for removing such noise, which can contribute to cost reduction of the various boards.

Here, the arrangement of the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 219, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b can be visually recognized, that is, angles in multiple directions. The surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins can be confirmed from the above. Thereby, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, since the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is maintained in a lighting state in a state where the direct current + 5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, the direct current + 5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of being controlled, it also has a function as a spotlight to illuminate the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility between the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pin. It is possible to contribute to.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) Further, the product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the state of the IC pin. Are arranged in a distributed manner so that the data can be visually recognized, that is, a large area where the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the state of the IC pin can be substantially confirmed from multiple angles. As a result, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be modified into a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az having the above. Further, since the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lit state while the DC + 37V from the power supply board 630 of the substrate unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 37V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the supplied state, it is provided on the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having a function as a spotlight to brightly illuminate the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN3, the surface (mounting surface) of the special connector SCN1 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. ) It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN3 provided in 1520x.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. A region larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (a shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530). They are arranged in a distributed manner so as to be. As a result, the inter-board connector can be modified by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az having. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in a lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. By having a function as a spotlight, the inter-board connector can be visually recognized by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of sex.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The SDRAM 1510c1, so that the model and the state of the IC pin of the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 and the state of the IC pin can be confirmed from multiple angles. The regions are dispersed and arranged so as to be a region larger than the shape of 1510c2. Thereby, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where the direct current + 12V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function to confirm (monitor) the state in which DC + 12V is supplied, but it also has a function as a spotlight to illuminate the SDRAM 1510c brightly, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2) is further provided. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of visibility between the state of the IC pin and the state of the IC pin.

Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN). It is possible to confirm the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized substrate is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

In this embodiment, the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounted, wide with an angle of about 120 degrees, and have weak directivity. Is also suitable for use as lighting. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surface (cover) of the various boards is as described above. A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a (the surface facing the back surface side) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting, it is possible to brightly illuminate the space thus formed.

Further, LEDML1 to LEDML4 are emitted with respect to the region of the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 facing the light emitting surfaces of LEDsML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the periphery thereof. Reflecting portions (not shown) are formed to reflect the generated light and direct it toward the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 again. As the reflective portion (not shown), a colored paint having a gloss may be used in addition to the colored paint having a bright color such as white, or a metal sheet having a gloss may be attached.

Further, in the vicinity of the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5, so that a ball path composed of these is arranged. In, the game balls rub against each other to be charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 on which the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. Further, since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island equipment of the game hall, other pachinko machines may become a noise source and be affected by noise. As described above, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 and peripheral data are used. A configuration is adopted in which the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND). As a result, noise that enters through the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Noise can be removed by flowing it to a substrate ground (ground of various substrates (GND)) such as a liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

[Partial foil removal of Betta Land]
By the way, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and a region other than the region where various land patterns are formed are set as ground (GND). , So-called beta land (board ground) (also called "solid earth"), and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 also has a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals and a wiring pattern for supplying power. , The so-called beta land (board ground) (also referred to as "solid earth") is formed as a ground (GND) other than the region where various land patterns are formed. The beta land (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the beta land (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are peripheral control boards. Holes (copper) penetrating a plurality of through holes formed on both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the 1510 (both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the peripheral control board 1510). By being electrically connected by the holes to be plated)), they are the same ground (GND).

Further, as described above, the base flat plate 1502a does not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals along the lower side when viewed from the front thereof. Positions (that is, the terminals of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the peripheral control board is inserted. Since it protrudes from the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the 1510, it does not interfere with each of the protruding terminals). Vertically elongated wire breakage prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent the electric wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being broken due to the control board 1510 being warped.

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled and the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 are sealed, as described above. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are inscribed (surface contact), and the disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa1 formed on the base body 1502. The front surface of ~ 1502aa3 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side by metal pan screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and are the same. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is passed to the substrate ground (ground of various substrates (GND)) to remove the noise. You can do it.

By the way, the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. Betagland was formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the abutted portion, and the betagland was covered with a resist. A betaland was formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate 1510 and covered with a resist, and a betaland was not formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the contacted portion and covered with a resist. As a result of testing, it was found that the one covered with a resist without forming a beta land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the contacted portion had higher noise immunity. ..

When electromagnetic wave noise enters through the base body 1502, a high voltage is applied to the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist and invades the solid brand. When electromagnetic wave noise invades through such an unexpected route, an electronic component susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise and a wiring pattern electrically connected to the electronic component are formed on the base body 1502 to prevent disconnection. If the front surface of the portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is adjacent to the portion in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, malfunction or damage may occur.

Further, among the front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502, the electromagnetic wave noise passes through the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with which disconnection prevention rib portion. Since it is unpredictable whether or not it will invade, it is difficult to place an electronic component susceptible to electromagnetic noise and a wiring pattern electrically connected to the electronic component away from a specific disconnection prevention rib portion.

It should be noted that the electromagnetic wave noise passes through the resist and is solid due to the high voltage applied to the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. In order to invade the brand, when the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 and the beta clant are in contact with each other via a resist, a high voltage due to electromagnetic wave noise invading the base body 1502 is applied to the abutting portion. Therefore, it is considered that an unnecessary loop wiring in which electromagnetic wave noise invades from the disconnection prevention rib portion to the betaglan is formed.

Here, the solid surface of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. The shape of the gland will be described with reference to FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the shape of the betta land at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portion formed on the base body is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, and is the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. It is a schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface of the above, and is a schematic diagram (b) of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

As described above, the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 have an elongated shape in the vertical direction, and the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. As shown in FIG. 220 (a), the corresponding positions and their surroundings have a copper foil surface having a rectangular foil removing region 1510ya long in the vertical direction having a distance dimension dgw in the left-right direction and a distance dimension dgh in the vertical direction. It is formed at 1510 yp, respectively. That is, on the lower side of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, a region in which a part of the betagran is removed (removed) is formed.

In these foil removal regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg0 between the left side thereof and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. The distance between the left side of these foil removal regions 1510ya and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the lateral distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 as the length of dg0. The length is about twice to 3.0 times, and in the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg0 between the left side of these foil removal regions 1510ya and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The length is 1.5 times as long as the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction.

Further, in these foil removal regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side thereof and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. It is formed in each. Distance dimension between the right side of these foil removal regions 1510ya and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 As the length of dg1, the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the left-right direction is 1.0. The length is about twice to 3.0 times, and in the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of these foil removal regions 1510ya and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The length is 1.5 times as long as the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction.

Further, in these foil removal regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side thereof and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. It is formed in each. The distance between the upper side of these foil removal regions 1510ya and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 as the length of dg2. The length is about twice to 3.0 times, and in the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of these foil removal regions 1510ya and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The length is 1.5 times as long as the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction.

That is, the foil removing region 1510ya is formed on the copper foil surface 1510yp on which the beta land is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, so that the foil removing region 1510ya is not electrically connected to the beta land. It is an isolated area.

When the resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface 1510 yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510 yp of the peripheral control board, the resist liquid is also applied onto the foil removal region 1510 ya as shown in FIG. 220 (b), and the resist layer 1510 yr Is formed. The disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 come into contact with the resist layer 1510yr on the foil removing region 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. Betagland is formed on the copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board corresponding to the foil removal region 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. No defoaming region of the same shape is formed.

As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed by metal pan screws, they are electrically connected to these grounds (GND) and become the same ground (the same ground). It is configured to be GND). Therefore, in the present embodiment, noise that has penetrated into the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is peripherally controlled from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502 via the solder removal region 1510ya. A "route that does not allow noise to escape" is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate, and the noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is described above. Noise can be removed by forming a "route through which noise escapes" that flows to the substrate ground (ground of various substrates (GND)) via a metal pan screw.

[Reuse of peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the staging display device 1600, and is a common board. Because it is, it can be reused (reused).

As described above, the periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is a copper foil for soldering having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 (so-called "". Lands) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed, respectively. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and is formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the mounting boss holes by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. Therefore, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan of the metal pan head screw.

In this way, the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. By reusing the peripheral control board 1510, lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by repeated screwing and removal with metal pan screws. Mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are rubbed against the mounting surface (boss surface) and peeled off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, or the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 is a metal pan. It rubs against the seating surface (soldering surface of the head) of the screw pan and peels off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, or the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 and the peripheral control board 1510 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. If the copper foils of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4y on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side are exposed, the peripheral control board 1510 may be reused due to oxidation and electrical deterioration. There is a problem that it becomes difficult.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the surfaces thereof. Each copper foil is soldered so that it is not exposed. This solder electrically connects the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. While covering it so that it can be connected, the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (seat surface) of the pan of the metal pan screw are electrically connected. Covered so that it can be connected. This prevents the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 from rubbing against the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is possible to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from peeling off from the base material, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the seating surface (head) of the pan of the metal pan screw. It is possible to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from rubbing against the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, and to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from being peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. The copper foil portions of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are not exposed and oxidation can be prevented, and the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from being oxidized. It is possible to improve the electrical connectivity in a state where the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other, and solder. Electrical connection in a state where the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (sold surface) of the pan of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other due to the viscosity of the metal pan screw. The sex can be good.

As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, the noise that has penetrated into the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is passed through the metal pan screw to the board ground (grounds of various boards (GND)). ), The above-mentioned "route through which noise escapes" is surely formed, so that the noise countermeasure effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin can be stably maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are as described above. , The copper foil on the surface is soldered so as not to be exposed. As described above, the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 because the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw abuts. If the thickness is not uniform (that is, there is a part where the solder is raised), the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw There is a problem that the contact area is reduced and the electrical connectivity is deteriorated. Further, as described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. If the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, must be uniform (that is, if there is a raised portion of the solder) due to abutment, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. It is said that the area where the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the side and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other is reduced and the electrical connectivity is deteriorated. There's a problem. If the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is not uniform (that is, if there is a portion where the solder is raised), the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Distortion of the control board 1510 will occur, which may cause disconnection of various wiring patterns.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is used for the copper foil which is the front surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the bearing surface of the metal pan screw comes into contact. A metal mask is placed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the metal mask, and the solder paste is spread on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula) to apply it from the holes formed in the metal mask. By putting the back surface (solder surface) 1510y in a reflow furnace and drying the solder paste with heat, the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 is made uniform as the plate thickness of the metal mask. Can be done. Further, copper which is the surface of the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts on the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The foil is formed into a metal mask by placing a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and spreading the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula). By applying from the holes, putting the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 in a reflow furnace and drying the solder paste with heat, the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is increased. The plate thickness of the metal mask can be made uniform.

[Modification example]
In the above-described embodiment, the front surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the 1510x side, and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the 1510y side, are the surfaces thereof. The copper foil was soldered so that it would not be exposed, but the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the seat surface (solder surface) of the pan of the metal pan screw. The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the side and comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. (Mounting surface) The copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the 1510x side may be coated with a resist solution to cover the land. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, is also applied when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with the resist liquid. To. Even with this configuration, the metal pan head screws are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 are electrically connected via a metal pan head screw. Can be in a state. Further, copper which is the surface of the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts on the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By applying the foil with a resist liquid and covering it, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thickness of the resist layer at the portion corresponding to the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 becomes the same thickness, so that the through hole 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is formed. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw into ~ 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , Distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the land 1510rf1 to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts on the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil on the surface of 1510rf4, place a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and spread the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula). It was applied from the holes formed in the metal mask, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 was placed in a reflow furnace to dry the solder paste with heat, but the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 was dried. ) May be poured into a solder bath and soldered. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a come into contact with each other. To prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity from deteriorating, the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 should not be partially soldered. It needs to be uniform. FIG. 221 is a diagram showing the shape of the resist with respect to the land when the peripheral control board is flown to the solder bath.

For example, on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, a resist layer 1510xr which is partially coated with a resist liquid to be formed into a predetermined shape is formed. It will be soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as a "predetermined shape", a resist is predetermined for the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510, as shown in FIG. 221 (a). A shape in which a plurality of circles having a width are formed concentrically (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221 (b), the resist has a predetermined width. And a shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined length are arranged in a ring shape as the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. 221 (c), a vertical line in which the resist has a predetermined width. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of lines in the horizontal direction (a shape may be formed in which a plurality of lines are formed with a predetermined width separated by a predetermined distance dimension only in the vertical direction, or the resist has a predetermined width. A plurality of lines having only the lateral direction separated by a predetermined distance dimension may be formed.) As shown in FIG. 221 (d), the lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and rise to the right. A shape in which a plurality of diagonal lines are formed (a shape in which a plurality of lines having a predetermined width are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of downward-sloping lines are formed in a diagonal line), a small circular shape (not shown). The assembled shape and the like can be mentioned.

As described above, a part of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is coated with the resist liquid to form the resist layer 1510xr formed into a predetermined shape, and the periphery is formed. Since the copper foil is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape on the surface of the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as a predetermined shape coated with a resist liquid). Anything that can exert the effect of suppressing the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The soldering can be made uniform so that it does not rise in part. The solder soldered in this way has the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. It covers 1510rf4 so that it can be electrically connected.

It should be noted that the land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 in which a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is in contact with the seat surface (seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be applied to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder soldered in this way electrically connects the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (seat surface) of the pan of the metal pan head screw. Covered so that it can be connected to. Further, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering with the solder.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan head screw is used, but the metal pan head screw has a flat washer, a spring washer, and a tooth. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a washer (also referred to as “Kiku washer”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the cover 1501 made of a conductive resin, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover flat plate 1501a are formed. The land 1510rb1 is in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. When ~ 1510rb4 and the bearing surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan screw. Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 were electrically connected, and the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 were electrically connected. Instead of the resin cover 1501, a metal cover 1501'may be used. In this case, the base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 may be made of a conductive resin, or may be made of metal instead of the conductive resin, or the cover body 1501 may be made of metal. The wiring cover body 1503 that closes the wiring outlet opening 1501ae may be made of a conductive resin or a metal.

An amplifier board having a circuit for amplifying various sounds consumes a large amount of power and generates heat. Therefore, the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or is attached to a metal partial case. When the amplifier substrate is housed in the metal substrate box, the air heated by the heat generated by the amplifier substrate and the heat of the amplifier substrate itself are efficiently dissipated to the outside air by the metal substrate box. Further, when the amplifier board is attached to the metal partial case, the heat of the amplifier board itself can be efficiently dissipated to the outside air in the metal partial case.

The amplifier board is housed in a metal board box consisting of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or is attached to a metal partial case, so that it is made of a metal board box or metal. Noise may enter the partial case of. Therefore, like the peripheral control board 1510 described above (that is, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected to each other), a plurality of pieces are formed on the amplifier board. The land and the mounting surface (boss surface) of a plurality of mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the metal cover body of the metal substrate box or the metal partial case are in contact with each other. , Multiple lands formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the amplifier board and the bearing surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other, so that the metal is passed through the metal pan screw. The metal cover or metal partial case of the metal board box is electrically connected to the multiple lands formed on the amplifier board, and the metal cover or metal of the metal board box is made of metal. The partial case and the ground (GND) of the amplifier board can be electrically connected. In addition, the heat of the amplifier board itself is transferred from the ground (GND) of the amplifier board to the metal cover body or the metal partial case of the metal board box via the metal pan screw to efficiently dissipate heat to the outside air. You can also do it.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw. The cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 were electrically connected, but it can also be used for a two-story board (so-called "Kamenoko board"). can. For example, multiple lands on the parent board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the parent board, multiple lands on the child board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) on the child board, and multiple lands on the parent board. By screwing the land and the multiple lands of the child board at both ends of the metal support (spacer), electricity is supplied through the multiple lands of the parent board, the multiple lands of the child board, and the metal support (spacer). It can be in a connected state. As a result, the ground of the parent substrate (GND) and the ground of the child substrate (GND) can be made the same ground (GND) via the metal support (spacer).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin, but the main control board box 1320 and the payout control board 633 that house the main control board 1310 are housed. When the payout control board box 632 is configured to be made of conductive resin, the main control board box 1320 and the payout control board box 632 must be transparent according to the rules, and those made of conductive resin are used. Although it is not possible, the board box for accommodating the power supply board and the various relay board boxes for accommodating various relay boards are configured to be made of conductive resin, and the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the peripheral control board box. It may be fixed by the same method. By doing so, it is possible to exert the same effect as the noise suppression effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of the conductive resin described above on the board box accommodating the power supply board and various relay board boxes accommodating various relay boards. can.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. A ball tank includes a board-to-board connector with a special connector SCN1 and a special connector SCN3 provided on a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a board-to-board connector with a special connector SCN2 provided on a peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on a liquid crystal output board 1530. By arranging it closer to the center of 552, it can be arranged away from the tank rail 553. As described above, the tank rail 553 is provided with the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside via a plurality of notched portions 553aa formed on the lower side thereof (the lower side of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front). By arranging the above-mentioned inter-board connector away from the tank rail 553, the above-mentioned inter-board connector causes electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B. Can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN2 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 are used. The inter-board connector provided with the special connector SCN4 is a peripheral control unit on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In the state where the 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. 217, the area on the upper side of the inter-board connector can be reduced by arranging it long in the vertical direction, so that dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. can be generated. The area of adhesion can be minimized. When the above-mentioned inter-board connector is arranged long in the left-right direction, the area on the upper side of the inter-board connector becomes large, so that the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. adheres becomes extremely large. Become. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged long in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. 217, and the area of the upper surface of each connector is large. However, as described above, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is arranged so that the area where dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. adheres becomes extremely large. Due to the protruding wall of the cover flat plate 1501a, even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN9 are inserted, the plugs are hidden so that they cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Even if dust adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the flat plate 1501a, powder having some metallic property, or the like falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN1 to CN9. There is. In this way, the orientation in which the above-mentioned inter-board connectors are arranged and the orientation in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged so that dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. can be prevented from adhering to each electric terminal. Is selected.

In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the plugs of the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN4. However, it may be arranged so that the direction in which information or signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and correspondingly, the side that receives information or signals can be a socket (or plug). For example, in the above-described embodiment, various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral data The ROM board 1520 is the transmitting side, and the peripheral control board 1510 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket) as a plug, and the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a plug) that serves as a socket. Special connector) can be provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment, since the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a plurality of types of video signal methods to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is the transmission side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the reception side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that becomes a socket) as a plug, and correspondingly, the socket on the liquid crystal output board 1530 becomes a special connector (or a plug). It can be equipped with a special connector).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to be provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. Of the 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by one or a combination thereof except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. .. Even with this configuration, foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. It is possible to prevent intrusion. This makes it possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling on various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is formed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls and invades toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, and thus falls on various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because there is a high probability that trouble will occur.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to be provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. Of the 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505 by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the ventilation hole 1501az is passed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 and invades, so that the peripheral control board box 1505 falls onto various boards. This is because there is a high probability that electrical trouble will occur due to foreign matter.

[Other noise countermeasures by peripheral control unit]
In addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 constituting the peripheral control board box 1505 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the wiring cover body 1503 is configured to be made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above. At the same time, when various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) by metal pan screws, these are Since it is configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various boards and become the same ground (GND), noise invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is transmitted to the various boards. It is possible to remove the noise by flowing it to the ground (GND) of the above (hereinafter, described as "configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment"). Another configuration of the present invention in which noise countermeasures are taken by the peripheral control board box that can remove noise that has entered the peripheral control board box 1505 (hereinafter, "according to the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments". The configuration of noise countermeasures ”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 241. In addition, in FIGS. 222 to 241, the same reference numerals as those of the various members attached in the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 217 to 219 are added and represented by the same reference numerals. The description will be omitted except for a part in the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments.

In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is all conductive with carbon contained in polycarbonate as described above. In contrast to the configuration made of resin, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments, the wiring cover body 1503 is transparent in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. In addition to being made of a non-conductive resin, in the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fourth embodiments, a metal shield plate is housed in the peripheral control board box, while the first In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the metal shield plate is not housed in the peripheral control board box.

FIGS. 222 to 226 are configurations of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is covered with a metal shield plate, and the metal shield plate is used. A part of the shield plate is configured to abut against the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 via a conductive elastic member, and FIG. 222 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment. 223 is a rear view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, FIG. 224 is a front view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 225 is X of FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment. -X-ray cross-sectional view, FIG. 226 is a view taken along the line A of FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment.

FIGS. 227 to 230 are configurations of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, and further strengthen the noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and are peripheral control boards. The region where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of 1510 or the like is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are further in contact with each other via the conductive elastic member. 3 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, FIG. 228 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 229 is an arrow A of FIG. 224 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 230 is a perspective view, and FIG. 230 is a ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board that makes good contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board and the conductive elastic member. It is a figure which shows the taking-out method, and is the schematic diagram (bare example (a)) of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board, and the schematic diagram (bare example (b) of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board. )), Schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (example of arranging multiple through holes having lands (c)), schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (land) It is an example (d) in which a plurality of through holes having a plurality of through holes are arranged.

FIGS. 231 to 235 are configurations of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, in which the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is covered with a first metal shield plate and is formed. The back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is covered with a second metal shield plate, and the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is sandwiched between the first metal shield plate and the second metal shield plate. A part of the first metal shield plate and a part of the second metal shield plate are electrically connected to a ground (GND) such as a peripheral control board 1510, and FIG. 231 shows the first. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 232 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 233 is a peripheral control board and the like according to the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the mounting procedure, FIG. 234 is the figure (a) which shows the land formed around the through hole on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board or the like which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and shows the foil removal area. FIG. 235 is a diagram (a) showing a land formed around a through hole on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment, a land, and a screwing designation symbol. It is a figure (b) which shows, and the figure (c) which shows a foil removal area. In FIG. 227, the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate that can come into contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is omitted from the ease of viewing in the drawing, and in FIG. 228, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is used. The conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate that can be contacted is shown by a two-dot chain line for the sake of readability in the drawings.

FIGS. 236 to 241 are configurations for noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, and the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are made of a metal shield plate. Of the various substrates that are not covered at all and are housed in the peripheral control substrate box, the area where a part of the ground (GND) of a specific substrate is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are via a conductive elastic member. 236 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, FIG. 237 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 238 is a rear view. FIG. 1A shows a part of the rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and the figure shows a part of the base body constituting the peripheral control unit so that the state in which the conductive elastic member is inserted can be seen. It is a figure (b) which shows a part of the rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit cut out by the CL line in (a), FIG. 239 is a continuation of FIG. FIG. 240 is a view (c) showing a part of the rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit in which a part of the peripheral control unit is cut out so that the deformed state of being pressed against the back cover can be seen, and FIG. 240 is the tip of the contact probe. FIG. 241 is an enlarged view of a front portion of a cover body constituting a peripheral control unit having an opening through which a metal can be inserted and brought into contact with the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of a specific substrate. It is a figure which shows the method of taking out the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of a specific substrate which makes good contact with an elastic member, and is the schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate. Exposed example (a)), schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (exposed example (b)), schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (through hole having lands) It is an example (c) in which a plurality of through holes are arranged, and a schematic view (an example (d) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged) of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate.

[Comparison between the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of all polycarbonate with carbon as described above. It is made of a conductive resin contained in it, and various substrates such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are made of metal on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When each of them is fixed by a screw, it is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates and is configured to be the same ground (GND).

On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the box shape is opened in the rear and longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction. Peripheral control that can control the progress of the effect based on the command from the cover body 1501 molded of the transparent non-conductive resin and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. The board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. And the conductive elasticity attached (bonded) to a predetermined position of the metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the metal shield plate 1540. It includes a member 1545 and a base body 1502 molded of a transparent non-conductive resin that closes the opening of the cover body 1501. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to the predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540 to shield the metal. The plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various boards, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502 to form a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. ing.

[Cover body of peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment]
When the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501ag1, the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange like this. Then, among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, and the through holes 1540c1a and the metal shield are formed. It is arranged so as to match the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the plate 1540 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and is formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 correspond to each other. In addition to being in contact with each other, the land 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. Further, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metal shield plate is in a state of being electrically connected. The 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is the same as the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, which are electrically connected to each other. The metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board are connected. It will be connected to and to the ground (GND) of 1530. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity. The metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510.

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In this state, of the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the land 1520rf4 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3, the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss hole 1501ah1 are in contact with each other. In addition to being in contact with each other, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the bearing surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is in a state of being electrically connected to the peripheral data. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the same as the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, which are electrically connected to each other. The metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to connect to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. It will be connected to and to the ground (GND) of 1530. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity. The metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange so as to match the boss hole 1501 am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the liquid crystal display is screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lands 1530rf1 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss hole 1501am2 are in contact with each other. The land 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the bearing surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output board. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the same as the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which are electrically connected to each other. The metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 to connect to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board. It will be connected to and to the ground (GND) of 1520. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity. The metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to form the metal shield plate 1540. In a state where the cover body 1501 is sandwiched and fixed by various substrates, the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa have the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimensions. A gap (2.3 mm) having the above is formed.

As described above, the sum of the areas (total area) of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa is a plurality of ventilation holes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The area at 1501az and the gaps formed in the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501) and the peripheral control board 1510. The volume control switch 1510d provided, the gap formed in the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the two connectors formed in the cover body 1501. The area of the connector holes 1501ac9, 1501ac10, and the gaps formed in the connector holes) is smaller than that added. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wings. , A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, and a metal shield plate 1540 housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to be small.

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment]
The base flat plate 1502a is located on the right side when viewed from the front thereof, at a position corresponding to the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d formed by bending the metal shield plate 1540 described later, at a position corresponding to the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d. A rectangular through-hole 1502ab long in the vertical direction is formed, which is one size larger than the back surface shape of the 1540d.

On the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the region corresponding to the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is one in comparison with the outer shape of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The soldering regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 having a large turning shape are formed, respectively, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the soldering regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are grounds of the peripheral control board 1510 so that noise (electromagnetic wave noise) can be prevented from entering from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. Isolated from GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the beta land of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removing regions NR1, NR2, NR3. A "route that does not allow noise to escape" is formed.

[Metal shield plate of peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment]
The metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front. L-shaped shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the second embodiment) at the upper center of the left side and the lower center of the left side. Mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 are formed, respectively.

Further, the metal shield plate 1540 has predetermined distance dimensions (the second embodiment) on the upper right side and the lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. Then, L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 that are bent rearward by 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). An L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d that is bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (21 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the second embodiment) is formed between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end.

The shield flat plate 1540a is formed with notches around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and is substantially located at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the shield plate 1540 is formed. In a state where the cover body 1501 is sandwiched and fixed by various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer peripheral circumference of the shield flat plate 1540a, respectively, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover flat plate 1501a and The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is inserted without contacting the opening 1540a of the shield flat plate 1540a.

The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2 are arranged in the same plane. The back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed so as to be parallel surfaces. In the second embodiment, the distance dimension from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 are projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. It is one of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed in the above. As described above, the mounting boss hole 1501am1 is projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is one of the pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed.

Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 face the opening side of the cover body 1501 from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. Two of the four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed so as to be projected.

Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield plate 1540 becomes the cover body 1501. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed by various substrates, a predetermined height distance dimension between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (this first In the two embodiments, a space having 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging the metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

These two spaces have a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 225) having (12 mm in the second embodiment) and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. It is composed of a second space 1505b (see FIG. 225) having a second predetermined height distance dimension (1.6 mm in the second embodiment).

In the first space 1505a, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, real-time clock IC (not shown), backup power supply 1510e, power supply creation circuit (not shown), resistance (not shown), not shown). For capacitors, LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1, SCN2, etc.), various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connectors SCN3, etc.), and liquid crystal output board 1530. While various electronic parts and the like (resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connector SCN4, etc.) are accommodated, various electronic parts and the like are not accommodated in the second space 1505b. By accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, it is possible to take measures against noise (electromagnetic wave noise) and in the second space 1505b. This is because the heat generated from the various electronic parts and the like in the first space 1505a is efficiently transferred to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540 by not accommodating the various electronic parts and the like that generate heat. .. That is, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise).

In the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540, ventilation holes 1540az having the same shape are formed at positions corresponding to the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. That is, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm, similarly to the ventilation holes 1501az. There is. When the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wings. By taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation hole 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation hole 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) of the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[Conductive elastic member of peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning property (elasticity), and has a conductive coating portion 1545a and a conductive coating portion 1545a. It is composed of a foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered by the conductive coating portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive coating portion 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1545b include polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be mentioned. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (adhered) to another member.

The cross-sectional shape (round sliced shape) of the conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape (see FIG. 226) having a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c. Has a rectangular shape (see FIG. 226) having a width of about 2 mm and a height of about 0.035 mm.

[Assembly method of peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment]
The method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed into the plug.

Subsequently, a through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 for mounting the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is provided on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting boss is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side, and the through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arranged so as to be aligned with the hole 1501ah2, and the through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. do.

Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in.

Subsequently, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held. It is in a state of being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged as they are or finely adjusted because they are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. That is, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to cover the shield plate 1540. It is in a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the body 1501 and various substrates.

As described above, among the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrain the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the cover flat plate 1501a. While the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restricted by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side, the peripheral control board 1510 has a mounting boss for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions. The protruding portion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are constrained, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is suppressed by the peripheral control board 1510. Dimensions of through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a when fixed to the back surface side of 1501a, respectively. It can be absorbed with a sufficient margin.

Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 are provided. The guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502ca formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502ca, and the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the base body. The hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502.

Subsequently, a state in which the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. The base body 1502 wraps around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502 and covers the base body 1502 as it is. In the state of covering the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. A metal one-way screw is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward in the base side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. The base-side sealing portion 1502ea and the sealed portion 1502ea are sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502, and are inscribed (surface contact). Further, in the sealed state, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (protruding length) extending to the back surface of the above is 2.7 mm.

In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is a deterrent against illegal acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been enhanced.

Subsequently, the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501a formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooled fan FAN are connected from the wiring drawer recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the drawer and the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively.

Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 by inserting and attaching the connector. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. Attach (adhere) the adhesive tape 1545c of 1545.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to a mounting portion formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 and on the back side of a transparent synthetic resin box accommodating the effect display device 1600. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engagement portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box inserted into the mounting groove constituting the mounting portion formed in the above, and a metal pan screw (not shown) inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is fixed by screwing it toward the mounting hole constituting the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the.

The effect display device 1600 is composed of a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that closes the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. The frame-shaped metal frame houses a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected. It is housed in a non-conductive transparent synthetic resin box (protective cover body 1601 described above). Further, the staging display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of the display device 1600, and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as a peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. The same ground (GND) is obtained. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit connection piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. As shown in FIG. 226, the 1540d hits the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 through the conductive elastic member 1545 through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the second embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm) due to dimensional tolerances and assembly errors. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically and securely connected, and the peripheral control board housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated. The peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, Constructed around the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and various boards such as the liquid crystal output board 1530) and the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various boards such as the liquid crystal output board 1530). can do. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment are formed of a transparent non-conductive resin, and are contained in the internal space of the cover body 1501. , Peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, liquid crystal output board 1530, and other various boards are attached at predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various boards. Once fixed, the metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be connected to the grounds (GND) of the various substrates. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity. Is connected. Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 and the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading the effect display device 1600 are transmitted to the substrate via the metal shield plate 1540. It is possible to form a "route through which noise escapes" by guiding and removing the ground (ground (GND) of various substrates). As a result, it is not necessary for each of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) to be provided with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), and the cost of various boards (including the power supply board 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

Here, the arrangement of the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. And the arrangement of. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 224, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are peripheral control boards. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided in 1510, the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC and the part number). , Pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pin, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are confirmed from multiple directions. The regions are distributed and arranged so as to be a region larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b so that the control ROM 1510b can be formed. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. .. Further, since the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is maintained in a lighting state while the DC + 5V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of being printed, it also has a function as a spotlight to illuminate the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pin. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 and the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 in the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and is further provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively (for example). , Connector pin number, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board. The contents silk-printed on each of the 1520s are distributed and arranged so as to be a large area where the contents can be substantially confirmed from multiple angles. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the contents silk-printed on the special connector SCN3 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In addition to the correspondence with, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, since the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state while the DC + 35V from the power supply board 630 of the substrate unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 35V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the supplied state, it is a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the above-mentioned functions, the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pin is improved, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. ..

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 in the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. The contents silk-printed on the 1530 (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) are distributed and arranged so that they can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the silk-printed contents on the peripheral control board 1510, and the silk-printed contents on the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. can do. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in a lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 by the special connector SCN4. The visibility of the silk-printed contents on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is improved, and the visibility of the inter-board connector is improved by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , Can be contributed to.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa include the product number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pins of the 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2. And, the state of the IC pin and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are dispersed so as to be a region larger than the shape of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that the contents can be confirmed from multiple directions. Have been placed. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can be done. Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where the DC + 12V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function to confirm (monitor) the state in which DC + 12V is supplied, but it also has a function as a spotlight to illuminate the SDRAM 1510c brightly, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2) is further provided. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the IC pin, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pin, and the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN). The part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized substrate is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

The LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounted and have a wide angle of about 120 degrees, and have weak directivity. Therefore, they are used for lighting. Is also suitable. Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield plate 1540 becomes the cover body 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is set between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the second embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging the metal shield plate 1540 in this space. .. As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 224) having a distance dimension (12 mm in the second embodiment) and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. It is composed of a second space 1505b (see FIG. 224) having a second predetermined height distance dimension (1.6 mm in the second embodiment). As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a thus formed can be brightly illuminated by lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting.

Further, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has a gloss, and the region of the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 facing the light emitting surfaces of the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. And its surroundings, it also has a function as a reflecting unit capable of reflecting the light emitted by the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 and directing the light emitted to the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflective portions may be further configured to be coated with a glossy colored paint.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, and are discharged to the side of the game board 5. Since the units 560 are arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path composed of these units to be charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 on which the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are lined up opposite the island equipment in the game hall. As described above, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment extremely susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are transparently molded and configured as a non-conductive resin as described above, and the inside of the cover body 1501 is formed. In the space, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is attached to the cover body 1501 and various boards. By sandwiching and fixing it, a configuration was adopted in which the metal shield plate 1540 was electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. Further, in the second embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. By electrically connecting to the ground (GND) line of the above, the same ground (GND) configuration was adopted.

As a result, the cover body 1501 and the base of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Noise (electromagnetic noise) that has entered from the body 1502 is guided to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the metal shield plate 1540. Can be removed. In other words, the cover body 1501 and the base of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the body 1502 can be guided to and removed from the substrate ground (grounds of various substrates (GND)) via the metal shield plate 1540.

In the second embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to the predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540. In a state where the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the space between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in the second embodiment) is formed in the space, and two spaces are formed by arranging a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. These two spaces form a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. A second predetermined height distance dimension between the first space 1505a having (12 mm in the second embodiment) and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. It was composed of a second space 1505b having (1.6 mm in the second embodiment). In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height was formed to be larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. When a large effect unit (an electric drive source and a drive mechanism capable of operating a movable effect body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operation position) is arranged on the game board 5, it is in the depth direction. If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the same predetermined height distance dimension, or the second predetermined height may be configured. The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with this configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) in the first space 1505a, and at the same time, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic noise and the second space 1505b. By not accommodating various electronic components that generate heat inside, the heat generated from various electronic components in the first space 1505a is efficiently transferred to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540. Can be done.

Further, in the second embodiment, the metal shield plate 1540 is printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 by forming a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az. Visually check the product number and model (or control number), the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.). The part number and model printed on the surface of the DRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the silk-printed contents on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, of the IC). The orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, and the product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. The state of the IC pin and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, the number of pin of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. However, it can also be configured to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to the control ROM 1510b, the DRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the DRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 so that the surroundings thereof can be visually recognized. .. Further, the shape of the inter-board connector (special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to a larger area (a shape composed of the special connector SCN3), or to provide a peripheral control board 1510 and a liquid crystal output board. From the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector with the 1530 can be confirmed. It can also be configured to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to the large area.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the wing portion of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to flow through the wing portion of the peripheral control unit 1500. By ejecting air to the outside, air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in through the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to be small. However, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes air to be sucked in through the wings and sent out toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. May be good. In other words, the air-cooled fan FAN may not have the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply have the main purpose of air-cooling the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Even in the configuration of noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a squeegee (like a spatula) is placed on the metal mask. Apply through the holes formed in the metal mask by spreading the solder paste using a tool), put the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 into a reflow furnace, and dry the solder paste with heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into a solder bath and soldered. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a come into contact with each other. To prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity from deteriorating, the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 should not be partially soldered. It needs to be uniform.

For example, on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, a resist layer 1510xr which is partially coated with a resist liquid to be formed into a predetermined shape is formed. It will be soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), the resist is applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 as a "predetermined shape". A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221 (b), the resist A shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in a ring shape around the centers of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. 221 (c), a vertical resist having a predetermined width. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of directional lines and horizontal lines (a shape may be formed in which a plurality of vertical lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance dimension, or the resist is formed. A plurality of lines having a predetermined width separated by a predetermined distance dimension may be formed only in the lateral direction.) As shown in FIG. 221 (d), the lines having a predetermined width are separated by a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of lines rising to the right are formed diagonally (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines falling to the right are formed diagonally), although not shown. Examples thereof include a collection of small circular shapes.

As described above, a part of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is coated with the resist liquid to form the resist layer 1510xr formed into a predetermined shape, and the periphery is formed. Since the copper foil is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape on the surface of the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as a predetermined shape coated with a resist liquid). Anything that can exert the effect of suppressing the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The soldering can be made uniform so that it does not rise in part. The solder soldered in this way has the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. It covers 1510rf4 so that it can be electrically connected.

It should be noted that the land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 in which a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is in contact with the seat surface (seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be applied to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder soldered in this way electrically connects the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (seat surface) of the pan of the metal pan head screw. Covered so that it can be connected to. Further, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering with the solder.

Further, also in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan head screw is used, but it is made of metal. Peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by passing a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as "Kiku washer") through the pan head screw.

Further, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box, and this transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded as separate bodies. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded in this transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison between the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of all polycarbonate with carbon as described above. It is made of a conductive resin contained in it, and various substrates such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are made of metal on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When each of them is fixed by a screw, it is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates and is configured to be the same ground (GND).

On the other hand, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is further strengthened, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are further strengthened. A configuration is adopted in which a region where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the above is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are further in contact with each other via a conductive elastic member.

[Metal shield plate of peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment]
Specifically, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar to the shape of the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and is similar to FIG. 227 and FIG. As shown in FIG. 228, each side of the shield flat plate 1540a is moved backward as a measure against noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading from the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. The side wall 1540ae is formed by bending (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530). These side walls 1540ae are not formed with ventilation holes 1540az at all. Further, in a state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the end faces of these side walls 1540ae are predetermined from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since it has a distance dimension (for example, 3.9 mm) and is separated from each other, it does not come into contact with each other and does not come into contact with various electronic components mounted on various substrates. Since the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment described above, the shape thereof is the same. A detailed description will be omitted.

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment]
The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar to the shape of the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and has a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output. Conductivity for a substrate that can come into contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 at a position corresponding to the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) of the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the substrate 1530 is exposed. A plurality of insertion ports 1502az having a square into which the elastic member 1507 is inserted (a shape having both a vertical distance dimension and a horizontal distance dimension of about 8 mm) are formed on the base flat plate 1502a. Although these insertion ports 1502az are formed so as to project to the front side and the rear side of the base flat plate 1502a, the front end faces of the insertion ports 1502az are peripheral control boards 1510, peripheral data ROM boards 1520, liquid crystal output boards 1530, and the like. It has a predetermined distance dimension (for example, 1.5 mm) from the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates and is formed so as not to come into contact with each other, and the rear end surface of each insertion port 1502az is a metal shield plate. It is formed so as to be arranged on the same plane as the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of 1540.

There are seven regions ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed, and seven insertion holes 1502az are formed in the base flat plate 1502a at the corresponding positions, and the peripheral data ROM is formed. There is one region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate 1520 is exposed, and one insertion port 1502az is formed in the base flat plate 1502a at a position corresponding to this, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 There are two regions ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) is exposed, and two insertion openings 1502az are formed in the base flat plate 1502a at positions corresponding to these regions. That is, on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, a total of 11 region ROPs in which a part of the ground (GND) is exposed are provided. The base flat plate 1502a is provided with a total of 11 insertion ports 1502az at positions corresponding to each region ROP. Further, serial numbers 1 to 11 are formed on the back surface side of the base flat plate 1502a in the vicinity of each insertion port 1502az. This serial number indicates the order (work procedure) in which the worker of the manufacturer inserts the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate. As described above, since the base body 1502 is molded of a transparent non-conductive resin, the serial numbers 1 to 11 can be visually recognized from the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. Since the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. ..

[Conductive elastic member for substrate of peripheral control substrate box according to the third embodiment]
In the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, in addition to the conductive elastic member 1545 capable of electrically connecting the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, further peripherals. The area ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. It has a conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate that can be electrically connected. The conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is a conductive member having cushioning property (elasticity), and has a conductive coating portion 1507a and a foam material 1507b having a rectangular shape as a core material coated by the conductive coating portion 1507a. , Consists of. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1507a include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1507b include polyurethane foam having heat resistance.

The conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate has a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the front-rear direction (when the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate in FIG. 228 is viewed from the right side, the width is about 11 mm, the depth is about 8 mm, and the height is about 8 mm). have. When the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is inserted into the insertion slot 1502az of the base body 1502 described above, the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is guided by the inner wall of the insertion slot 1502az and has cushioning property (elasticity). By pushing the inner wall of the insertion slot 1502az, the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is hard to come off from the insertion slot 1502az.

[Exposure area of a part of the ground of various boards of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment]
Here, a region ROP in which a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is exposed will be described. The region ROP formed on a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has the same structure, and here, the peripheral control substrate 1510 has the same structure. The region ROP formed in a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) will be described. As shown in FIGS. 230 (a) and 230 (b), the region ROP formed on a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control substrate 1510 so that a part of the substrate ground (GND) (that is, beta solder) formed on the copper foil surface 1510 yp of 1510y is exposed in a shape larger than the front surface shape of the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate. A resist liquid is applied onto the copper foil surface 1510 yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510 y to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510 yr.

It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a method of using a through hole without exposing the betta land as the area ROP. For example, as shown in FIGS. 230 (c) and 230 (d), the region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the betagland on the front surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A plurality of through holes to be connected are arranged vertically and horizontally, and the copper is formed around each through hole on the copper foil surface 1510 yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. A resist solution can be applied onto the foil surface 1510 yp to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510 yr.

[Assembly method of peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment]
Since the method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 is basically the same as the method of assembling the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the procedure for inserting the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate described above will be described. Before mounting the peripheral control unit 1500 on the mounting portion formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 and on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box accommodating the effect display device 1600. The conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is inserted into the insertion port 1502az of the base body 1502 described above in order from the serial number 1 to the serial number 11 and pushed into the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The work is performed so that a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is in contact with the exposed region ROP.

As described above, the effect display device 1600 is composed of a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that closes the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. The frame-shaped metal frame houses a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected. It is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. Further, as described above, the staging display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of the effect display device 1600, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line such as the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. By being connected to, it becomes the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit connection piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. As shown in FIG. 229, the 1540d hits the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 through the conductive elastic member 1545 through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm) due to dimensional tolerances and assembly errors. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically and securely connected, and the peripheral control board housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated. It can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 to form the same ground (GND).

Further, the conductivity for each board in which one of the peripheral control boards 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the like are in contact with the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various boards is exposed. The other end of the elastic elastic member 1507 passes through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the corresponding transparent synthetic resin box and hits the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. 229. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), so that the dimensional tolerance is dimensional. The dimensional deviation due to the assembly error can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate. As a result, the state in which the external force is applied in the longitudinal direction of the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is maintained, and as the repulsive force, the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. , And the contact surface with the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) of the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, and the contact surface with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. The ground (solder surface) of the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, while maintaining a state in which the electrical connection is good. The GND) and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically and securely connected, and are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line such as the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. They can be connected to the same ground (GND). Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 and the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading the effect display device 1600 are further removed in addition to the metal shield plate 1540. Through the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate, it is possible to form a "route through which noise escapes", which is guided to a substrate ground (ground of various substrates (GND)) and removed. As a result, it is not necessary for each of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) to be provided with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), and the cost of various boards (including the power supply board 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

Also in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. Lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on the surface is not exposed, but they come into contact with the seating surface (seat surface) of the pan of the metal pan screw. The mounting surface (boss) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, which are soldered to the copper foils on the front surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the 1510x side of the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 that comes into contact with the surface), may be coated with a resist solution to cover the surface. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, is also applied when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with the resist liquid. To. Even with this configuration, the metal pan head screws are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 are electrically connected via a metal pan head screw. Can be in a state. Further, copper which is the surface of the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts on the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By applying the foil with a resist liquid and covering it, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thickness of the resist layer at the portion corresponding to the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 becomes the same thickness, so that the through hole 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is formed. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw into ~ 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , Distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to flow through the wing portion of the peripheral control unit 1500. By ejecting air to the outside, air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in through the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to be small. However, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes air to be sucked in through the wings and sent out toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. May be good. In other words, the air-cooled fan FAN may not have the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply have the main purpose of air-cooling the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Further, also in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a squeegee (like a spatula) is placed on the metal mask. Apply through the holes formed in the metal mask by spreading the solder paste using a tool), put the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 into a reflow furnace, and dry the solder paste with heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into a solder bath and soldered. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a come into contact with each other. To prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity from deteriorating, the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 should not be partially soldered. It needs to be uniform.

For example, on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, a resist layer 1510xr which is partially coated with a resist liquid to be formed into a predetermined shape is formed. It will be soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), the resist is applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 as a "predetermined shape". A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221 (b), the resist A shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in a ring shape around the centers of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. 221 (c), a vertical resist having a predetermined width. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of directional lines and horizontal lines (a shape may be formed in which a plurality of vertical lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance dimension, or the resist is formed. A plurality of lines having a predetermined width separated by a predetermined distance dimension may be formed only in the lateral direction.) As shown in FIG. 221 (d), the lines having a predetermined width are separated by a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of lines rising to the right are formed diagonally (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines falling to the right are formed diagonally), although not shown. Examples thereof include a collection of small circular shapes.

As described above, a part of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is coated with the resist liquid to form the resist layer 1510xr formed into a predetermined shape, and the periphery is formed. Since the copper foil is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape on the surface of the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as a predetermined shape coated with a resist liquid). Anything that can exert the effect of suppressing the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The soldering can be made uniform so that it does not rise in part. The solder soldered in this way has the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. It covers 1510rf4 so that it can be electrically connected.

It should be noted that the land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 in which a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is in contact with the seat surface (seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be applied to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder soldered in this way electrically connects the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (seat surface) of the pan of the metal pan head screw. Covered so that it can be connected to. Further, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering with the solder.

Further, also in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan head screw is used, but it is made of metal. Peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by passing a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as "Kiku washer") through the pan head screw.

Further, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box, and this transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded as separate bodies. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded in this transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison between the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of all polycarbonate with carbon as described above. It is made of a conductive resin contained in it, and various substrates such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are made of metal on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When each of them is fixed by a screw, it is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates and is configured to be the same ground (GND).

On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 231 and 232, the box shape is opened in the rear and longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction. Peripheral control that can control the progress of the effect based on commands from the transparent non-conductive resin molded cover body 1501 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. The board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. And a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield arranged on the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that invades various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A plate 1540, a conductive elastic member 1545 attached (bonded) to a predetermined position on a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board. A metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 arranged on the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates capable of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading various substrates such as 1530, and It includes a base body 1502 molded of a transparent non-conductive resin that closes the opening of the cover body 1501. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and metal substrate back surface. Peripheral control board box by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by being sandwiched between the (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and attached to a predetermined position of the cover body 1501 and closing the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502. 1505 (sealed board box) is configured.

[Cover body of peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
First, in the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. Are different in that they are formed as mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah4 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1502 of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. The difference is that the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 to be formed are formed as mounting boss holes 1501am3 and 1501am4 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. Further, in the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the backup power supply 1510e capable of supplying power to the real-time clock IC (not shown) provided in the peripheral control board 1510 even when the power is turned off is from a holder (not shown). A jump-out prevention portion 1501aw having a cylindrical shape is formed so as to protrude from the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 toward the front side of the backup power supply 1510e so as to pop out and not interrupt the power supply to the real-time clock IC (not shown). It is different from the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment in that. The end face of the pop-out prevention portion 1501aw is arranged so as to be separated from the backup power supply 1510e by a predetermined distance dimension (for example, 1 mm).

Further, when various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to the back surface side of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripherals are attached. Insert a metal pan screw (not shown) directly into the through holes (excluding those into which the mounting boss protrusion is inserted) of various boards such as the data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and insert the metal pan screw (not shown) directly into the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It was fixed by screwing it into the mounting boss hole formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board on the back surface side of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment. When mounting various boards such as 1530, a metal pan screw (not shown directly) is directly attached to a specific through hole among a plurality of through holes in various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. After performing the first fixing method of inserting and fixing by screwing into the mounting boss hole formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, various types such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are performed. Peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data ROM board 1520 are provided with through holes formed in the L-shaped mounting piece of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) side of the metal board so as to cover the back side (solder side) side of the board. , And other through holes other than specific through holes in various substrates such as the liquid crystal output board 1530, are arranged so as to match the corresponding through holes, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed with the base body 1502 to form the base flat plate 1502a. Each through hole formed in the L-shaped mounting piece of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through hole of the mounting boss formed on the front surface side. Other through holes in various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are passed through and fixed by screwing into the mounting boss holes formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. 2 Perform the fixing method.

In the first fixing method, when the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later will be described. Is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and penetrates formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. The holes 1540c2a are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are formed through the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. It is arranged so as to match the hole 1540c1a, the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, and the mounting boss hole 1501ag1, 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the periphery. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the control board 1510 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

In the first fixing method, when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. The 1540b1a is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 to 1501ah4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

In the first fixing method, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. Is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501an1 to 1501an4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Then, peripheral control is performed by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 as specific through holes among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The substrate 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other.

Then, among the through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 as specific through holes to be formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah2. As a result, of the lands 1520rb1, 1520rb2, 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the lands 1520rb1, 1520rb4 and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Will be. Further, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is made of metal by being electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. The shield plate 1540 on the board surface (mounting surface) side is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and are the same ground (GND). Therefore, the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to connect to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal display. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the output board 1530. Further, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Become.

Then, among the through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 as specific through holes, and the mounting is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward the boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am4. As a result, of the lands 1530rb1, 1530rb3, 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lands 1530rb1, 1530rb4 and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Become. Further, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to shield the metal. The plate 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. In the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected and are the same ground (GND). Therefore, the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to connect to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. Further, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. ..

After this first fixing method, in the second fixing method, a metal material described later is used so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Various through holes 1555b1a to 1555b4a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the substrate, such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Among the other through-holes other than the specific through-holes in the substrate, the corresponding through-holes include the through-holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through-holes 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the through-holes 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output board 1530. A metal pan screw (not shown) in the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6, which will be described later, are formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a by closing the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502. 1555b1a to 1555b4a through holes formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and Among other through holes other than specific through holes in various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, as through holes 1510r1, 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, through holes 1520r2, 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, as corresponding through holes, And, through the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, they are fixed by screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1,1501ag4,1501ah1,1501ah4,1501am3 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively.

By performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in order, the peripheral control board 1510 is made of metal with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal board surface (mounting surface) side. It is in a state of being sandwiched by the front surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the substrate. In this state, the lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. , Are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are mounted in an L shape. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. The shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the back surface (solder surface) of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND). The L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the side shield plate 1555 are made of metal by being electrically connected to the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. The shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. In the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and are the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is connected to the ground (GND) and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the ground (ground). Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the shield plate 1540 on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate and the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 to supply power. It will be connected to the ground (GND) line of the board 630.

Further, by performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in order, the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield. The surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the plate 1555 is in contact with the surface. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In this state, the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same ground. Since it is (GND), the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 is connected. Will be connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Further, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Become.

Further, by performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in order, the land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate. The surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of 1555 is in contact with the surface. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected and are the same ground (GND). Therefore, the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to connect to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. ..

Further, by performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in order, the conductive elastic member 1545 attached (bonded) to a predetermined position of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is made of metal. It is in a state of being pressed against and in contact with the front surface side of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the substrate. As a result, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected.

By mounting various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. A gap (2.3 mm) having the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimension is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and the model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa.

As described above, the sum of the areas (total area) of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa is a plurality of ventilation holes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The area at 1501az and the gaps formed in the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501) and the peripheral control board 1510. The volume control switch 1510d provided, the gap formed in the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the two connectors formed in the cover body 1501. The area in the connector holes 1501ac9, 1501ac10, and the gaps formed in the connector holes) is smaller than that added. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wings. , A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, and a metal substrate surface (mounting) housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The flow velocity of air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to be small when taking in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the side shield plate 1540. You can do it.

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
On the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502, through holes 1502ag1 are located at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 having ~ 1502ag6 are formed, respectively. A metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into and screwed into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 to fix the base 1502 to the cover body 1501.

On the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the region corresponding to the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is one in comparison with the outer shape of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The soldering regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 having a large turning shape are formed, respectively, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the soldering regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are grounds of the peripheral control board 1510 so that noise (electromagnetic wave noise) can be prevented from entering from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. Isolated from GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the beta land of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removing regions NR1, NR2, NR3. A "route that does not allow noise to escape" is formed.

[Shield plate on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control substrate box according to the fourth embodiment]
It is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) side of various boards that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that penetrates into various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate has a predetermined distance dimension on the upper center of the left side and the lower center of the left side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. In the fourth embodiment, L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 that are bent rearward by (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) are formed, respectively.

Further, the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is a predetermined distance on the upper right side and the lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 that are bent rearward by the dimensions (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the present fourth embodiment) are formed, and a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness:: An L-shaped circuit that is closer to the center (1.2 mm) and is bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (9.9 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the fourth embodiment) above the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1. A connection piece 1540d is formed. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end.

The shield flat plate 1540a is formed with notches around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and is substantially located at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to the predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. In this state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer peripheral circumference of the shield flat plate 1540a, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover flat plate 1501a and the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab are formed in the opening portion 1540a of the shield flat plate 1540a. It will be inserted without contact.

The metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is bent so that the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2 are arranged in the same plane. The back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed so as to be parallel surfaces. In the fourth embodiment, the distance dimension from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively.

Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively.

In a state where various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Is a space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is in a state of being formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 in this space.

These two spaces have a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. A distance of a second predetermined height between the first space having (12 mm in the present fourth embodiment) and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is composed of a second space having a dimension (1.6 mm in the present fourth embodiment).

In the first space, various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, real-time clock IC (not shown), backup power supply 1510e, power supply creation circuit (not shown), resistance (not shown), capacitor (not shown)). , LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1, SCN2, etc.), various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connectors SCN3, etc.), and liquid crystal output board 1530. While various electronic components and the like (resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connector SCN4, etc.) are accommodated, various electronic components and the like are not accommodated in the second space. By accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, it is possible to take measures against noise (electromagnetic wave noise) and in the second space 1505b. By not accommodating various electronic components that generate heat, heat generated from various electronic components in the first space is transferred to the second space 1505b via the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. This is to convey it efficiently. That is, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise).

The shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side has the same shape as the ventilation hole 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Ventilation holes 1540az are formed. That is, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm, similarly to the ventilation holes 1501az. There is. When the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wings. By taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation hole 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation hole 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) of the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

Further, noise entering from the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501 on the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. As a countermeasure against (electromagnetic noise), each side of the shield flat plate 1540a is bent backward (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530). Side walls 1540ae are formed respectively. These side walls 1540ae are not formed with ventilation holes 1540az at all. Further, in a state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the end faces of these side walls 1540ae are predetermined from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since it has a distance dimension (for example, 3.9 mm) and is separated from each other, it does not come into contact with each other and does not come into contact with various electronic components mounted on various substrates.

Further, the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side has a circular shape through which a protrusion prevention portion 1501aw having a cylindrical shape formed so as to project from the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 is passed. An opening 1540aw is formed.

[Shield plate on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate of the peripheral control substrate box according to the fourth embodiment]
It is arranged on the back surface (solder surface) side of various boards that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that penetrates into various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is the upper left side, lower left side, upper right side, and lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1555a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 that are bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (2.3 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1555a in the present fourth embodiment) are formed on the side, respectively. These L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 are formed by bending so that their respective surfaces are arranged on the same plane.

The shield flat plate 1555a is formed with cutout portions 1555aa1 to 1555aaa3 so as not to interfere with the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502, respectively. Further, the shield flat plate 1555a includes a mounting boss 1502af4 that abuts on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 among the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502. A notch portion 1555aa5 is formed so as not to interfere with the mounting boss 1502af5 that abuts on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Further, on the surface side of the shield flat plate 1555a, electricity other than the ground (GND) in various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 so as to correspond to the shape of the shield flat plate 1555a. A transparent insulating sheet (not shown) is attached (adhered) to prevent short circuits due to connection. Further, the shield flat plate 1555a is not formed with the side wall 1540ae and the ventilation hole 1540az formed on the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side.

The lower region of the cutout portion 1555aa5 on the front surface side of the shield flat plate 1555a is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d formed on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. It is a region where the conductive elastic member 1545 (which is adhered) is pressed and contacted.

In a state where a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is attached to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. By arranging the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 near the back surface side (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the shield plate 1555 is arranged. The various substrates absorb the heat generated from various electronic components and the like, and the absorbed heat is taken from the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 from the various substrates, so that the various substrates can be efficiently cooled. That is, the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise).

When the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the back surface side of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is in contact with the front surface of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502.

[Conductive elastic member of peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the shield plate 1540 on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate is a conductive member having cushioning property (elasticity). It is composed of a conductive coating portion 1545a, a foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered by the conductive coating portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive coating portion 1545a. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1545a include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1545b include polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be mentioned. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (adhered) to another member.

The cross-sectional shape (round sliced shape) of the conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape having a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a width of about 2 mm. , Has a rectangular shape with a height of about 0.035 mm.

[Method of assembling the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
The method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed into the plug.

Subsequently, in order to mount the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal board surface (mounting surface) side The through hole 1540c1a formed in the above is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is arranged. The through hole 1540c2a formed in the above is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is arranged. The through hole 1540b1a formed in the above is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is arranged. The through hole 1540b2a formed in the cover plate 1501a is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and are formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Through holes 1520r1, 1520r2, 1520r3, 1520r4 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The 1530r2, 1530r3, and 1530r4 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501am1,1501am3,1501am2,1501am4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 233, a metal pan not shown directly from the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 by the first fixing method. It is fixed by inserting a screw and screwing it into various mounting boss holes formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By this first fixing method, a screw fixing instruction mark and a serial number are printed on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates as silk printing in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark and the screw fixing instruction mark with respect to the through hole to be fixed. This serial number indicates the order (work procedure) in which the worker of the manufacturer inserts and screwes in a metal pan head screw (not shown) to fix it. The colors in which the screw fixing instruction mark and the serial number are printed as silk printing in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark are the surfaces (mounting surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. ), The area indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) in which the various electronic components to be mounted and the component number thereof are the same color as the color printed as silk printing (here, white).

Specifically, in the through hole 1520r1 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH1 that surrounds the land 1520rb1 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 with a solid white line is silk-printed. The white serial number 1 is surrounded by a rectangular white line in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH1 and is printed as silk printing. Further, in the through hole 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH2 that surrounds the land 1520rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 with a solid white line is printed as silk printing. A white serial number 2 is surrounded by a rectangular white line in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH2 and printed as silk printing.

Further, in the through hole 1530r1 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH3 that surrounds the land 1530rb1 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 with a solid white line is printed as silk printing. A white serial number 3 is surrounded by a rectangular white line in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH3 and printed as silk printing. Further, in the through hole 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH4 that surrounds the land 1530rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 with a solid white line is printed as silk printing. A white serial number 4 is surrounded by a rectangular white line in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH4 and printed as silk printing.

Further, in the through hole 1510r2 of the peripheral control board 1510, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH5 that surrounds the land 1510rb2 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 with a solid white line is printed as silk printing. A white serial number 5 is surrounded by a rectangular white line in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH5 and printed as silk printing. Further, in the through hole 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH6 surrounding the land 1510rb3 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 with a solid white line is printed as silk printing. A white serial number 6 is surrounded by a rectangular white line in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH6 and printed as silk printing.

The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are formed by the manufacturer's worker inserting and screwing in a metal pan head screw (not shown) in order to fix the serial number 1 to the serial number 4. There may be a slight deviation from the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Even in such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to constrain the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is suppressed. When the control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Since the data can be absorbed by the dimensional margins provided for each, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely adjusted in the position of the peripheral control board 1510 to cover the flat plate 1501a. It can be fitted to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side.

The serial number 1 and the serial number 2 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by the manufacturer's worker inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) in order and screwing it in to fix it. The lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 to be formed and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As a result, the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

The serial number 3 and the serial number 4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 by the manufacturer's worker inserting and screwing in a metal pan head screw (not shown) in order to fix the serial number 3. Lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 and the bearing surface of a metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to shield the metal. The plate 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530.

It is formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 by the worker of the manufacturer inserting the serial number 5 and the serial number 6 in order by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) and screwing it in to fix it. The land 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other.

When the worker of the manufacturer inserts the metal pan head screw (not shown) in order to fix the serial number 1 to the serial number 6, the worker of the manufacturer sequentially inserts the serial number 1 to the serial number 6. If you do not insert a metal pan head screw (not shown) and screw it in to fix it, but randomly insert a metal pan head screw (not shown) and screw it in to fix it, any of the serial numbers 1 to 6. There may be a mistake of inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the one indicated by the serial number and screwing it in to forget to fix it. When such a mistake occurs, the peripheral control board box 1505 (peripheral control unit 1500) is shipped with the fixing by the metal pan head screw (not shown) incomplete.

Further, the through holes 1520r1, 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the through holes 1530r1, 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the through holes 1510r2 of the peripheral control board 1510 are designated by the worker of the manufacturer. One or more of through holes other than 1510r3, that is, through holes 1520r2, 1520r3 of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, through holes 1530r2, 1530r3 of liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and through holes 1510r1, 1510r4 of peripheral control substrate 1510. Even if a metal pan head screw (not shown) is mistakenly inserted into the through hole of the cover and fixed by screwing it into the mounting boss hole formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and then the base body 1502 is put on the cover body 1501. Of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss corresponding to the erroneously inserted metal pan head screw and the erroneously inserted metal Since it always interferes with the head of the pan head, a gap is formed between the base body 1502 and the cover body 1501 so that the cover body 1501 cannot be completely closed by the base body 1502.

As described above, among the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, L of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The through holes 1555b1a and 1555b2a formed in the character mounting piece 1555b1 are arranged so as to match the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is L-shaped mounting. The through hole 1555b3a formed in the piece 1555b3 is arranged so as to match the through hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate. The through hole 1555b4a is arranged so as to be aligned with the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output board 1530. In this way, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is arranged so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Then, since holes such as ventilation holes are not formed at all in the shield flat plate 1555a of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate, the above-mentioned screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and serial numbers 1 to 1 are formed. The serial number 6 is also covered with the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate, which makes it difficult to see. In other words, look into the peripheral control board box 1505, which is molded as an assembled transparent non-conductive resin, from various angles, such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Even if it is crowded, the back side (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is that various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed by the above-mentioned first fixing method. It is obscured by the shield plate 1555, and the security of the peripheral control board box 1505 can be improved.

Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member 1545 is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. Attach (adhere) the adhesive tape 1545c.

Subsequently, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and are formed on the cover body 1501. Insert the L-shaped hooks 1501cc and 1501cd of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd into the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502. ..

Subsequently, a state in which the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. The mounting boss formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a by the second fixing method in a state where the base body 1502 is wrapped around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is covered with the cover body 1501 as it is. A metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of 1502af1 to 1502af6 and screwed in to fix it.

Specifically, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag1 of the mounting boss 1502af1 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is L-shaped. Through holes 1555b1a formed in the shape mounting piece 1555b1, through holes 1510r1 of the peripheral control board 1510, and through holes 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. It is fixed by screwing it into the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Further, an L-shaped mounting piece of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is inserted by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through hole 1502ag2 of the mounting boss 1502af2 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. Covers through the through hole 1555b2a formed in 1555b2, the through hole 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. It is fixed by screwing it into the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the flat plate 1501a. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 has an L-shape of the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. It is in a state of being sandwiched by the surfaces of the mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2. In this state, the lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. , Are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are mounted in an L shape. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. That is, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. In the connected state, the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side. The L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the shield plate 1555 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, to form a metal substrate. The back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, an L-shaped mounting piece of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is inserted by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through hole 1502ag3 of the mounting boss 1502af3 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. It is fixed by screwing through the through hole 1555b3a formed in 1555b3 and the through hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 into the mounting boss hole 1501ah1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate come into contact with each other. It will be in the state of That is, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As a result, the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

Further, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag4 of the mounting boss 1502af4 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and the through hole 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is passed through the through hole 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is fixed by screwing it into the mounting boss hole 1501ah4 to be formed. Further, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag5 of the mounting boss 1502af5 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a through the through hole 1530r2 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is fixed by screwing it into the mounting boss hole 1501am3.

Further, an L-shaped mounting piece of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is inserted by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through hole 1502ag6 of the mounting boss 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. It is fixed by screwing through the through hole 1555b4a formed in 1555b4 and the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 into the mounting boss hole 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate are in contact with each other. It becomes a state. That is, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

By this second fixing method, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a and screwed into the metal substrate surface. The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (bonded) to the (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is pressed against and in contact with the front surface side of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. As a result, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the fourth embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm) due to dimensional tolerances and assembly errors. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, a metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) that sandwich various substrates such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530. The periphery is sandwiched between the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 so that the side shield plate 1555 is electrically and securely connected. Noise (electromagnetic waves) can be obtained by electrically connecting to the ground (GND) lines of various substrates such as the control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form the same ground (GND). Peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, various boards such as liquid crystal output board 1530) and peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520) , And various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

Subsequently, a metal one-way screw in which a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. Screw in. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward in the base side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. The base-side sealing portion 1502ea and the sealed portion 1502ea are sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502, and are inscribed (surface contact).

In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is a deterrent against illegal acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been enhanced.

Subsequently, the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501a formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooled fan FAN are connected from the wiring drawer recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the drawer and the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively.

Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 by inserting and attaching the connector. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to a mounting portion formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 and on the back side of a transparent synthetic resin box accommodating the effect display device 1600. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engagement portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box inserted into the mounting groove constituting the mounting portion formed in the above, and a metal pan screw (not shown) inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is fixed by screwing it toward the mounting hole constituting the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the.

The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment are formed of a transparent non-conductive resin and are formed in the internal space of the cover body 1501. , Peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various boards such as liquid crystal output board 1530 are metal board front side (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, and metal board back surface (solder side) side shield board 1555. When the metal substrate is sandwiched and attached, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the grounds (GND) of various substrates. It is configured. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity. Is connected. Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is collected from the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface). It can be guided to and removed from the substrate ground (ground of various substrates (GND)) via the side shield plate 1555. As a result, it is not necessary for each of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) to be provided with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), and the cost of various boards (including the power supply board 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

Here, the arrangement of the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the plurality of shield flat plates 1540a formed in the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. The arrangement of the ventilation holes 1540az having a circular shape will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the surfaces of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the screen, the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.). That is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be checked from multiple angles. They are arranged in a distributed manner so as to have an area larger than the shape of the ROM 1510b. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. .. Further, since the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is maintained in a lighting state while the DC + 5V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of being printed, it also has a function as a spotlight to illuminate the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pin. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 and the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 in the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and is further provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively (for example). , Connector pin number, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board. The contents silk-printed on each of the 1520s are distributed and arranged so as to be a large area where the contents can be substantially confirmed from multiple angles. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the contents silk-printed on the special connector SCN3 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In addition to the correspondence with, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, since the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state while the DC + 35V from the power supply board 630 of the substrate unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 35V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the supplied state, it is a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the above-mentioned functions, the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pin is improved, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. ..

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 in the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. The contents silk-printed on each of the 1530s (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) are distributed and arranged so that they can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the silk-printed contents on the peripheral control board 1510, and the silk-printed contents on the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. can do. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in a lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 by the special connector SCN4. The visibility of the silk-printed contents on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is improved, and the visibility of the inter-board connector is improved by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , Can be contributed to.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa include the product number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pins of the 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2. And, the state of the IC pin and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are dispersed so as to be a region larger than the shape of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that the contents can be confirmed from multiple directions. Have been placed. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can be done. Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where the DC + 12V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function to confirm (monitor) the state in which DC + 12V is supplied, but it also has a function as a spotlight to illuminate the SDRAM 1510c brightly, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2) is further provided. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the IC pin, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pin, and the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN). The part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized substrate is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

The LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounted and have a wide angle of about 120 degrees, and have weak directivity. Therefore, they are used for lighting. Is also suitable. Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are made of a metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. In the state of being sandwiched and attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) is formed, and two shield plates 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate are arranged in this space. The space is formed. As described above, these two spaces are between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side. A first space having a distance dimension of a first predetermined height (12 mm in the fourth embodiment), and a surface and a cover plate of the shield plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. It is composed of a second space having a distance dimension (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment) of a second predetermined height between the back surface of the 1501a and the back surface. As described above, the first space accommodates various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. There is. The inside of the first space formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting.

Further, since the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is made of metal, it has a gloss and is a metal substrate facing the light emitting surfaces of LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. As a reflecting portion capable of reflecting the light emitted by the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 and directing the light emitted from the LEDML1 to the LEDML4 to the peripheral control board 1510 again with respect to the region of the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and its surroundings. It also has the function of. These reflective portions may be configured to be further coated with a glossy colored paint.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, and are discharged to the side of the game board 5. Since the units 560 are arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path composed of these units to be charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 on which the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are lined up opposite the island equipment in the game hall. As described above, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment extremely susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are transparently molded and configured as a non-conductive resin as described above, and the inside of the cover body 1501 is formed. In the space, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side. By being attached while being sandwiched by the shield plate 1555, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 can be grounded (GND) of various substrates. We adopted a configuration that connects electrically with. Further, in the fourth embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. By electrically connecting to the ground (GND) line of the above, the same ground (GND) configuration was adopted.

As a result, the cover body 1501 and the base of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading from the body 1502 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data via the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. It can be removed by guiding it to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In other words, the cover body 1501 and the base of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading from the body 1502 is passed through the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, and the substrate ground (ground of various substrates). (GND)) and can be removed.

In the fourth embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of metal, and the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side is made of metal, and the substrate is made of metal. In a state where it is sandwiched by the back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and attached to a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the cover flat plate 1501a A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this fourth embodiment) is formed between the back surface and the back surface, and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is formed in this space. Two spaces are formed by arranging the two spaces, and these two spaces are formed on the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. A first space having a distance dimension (12 mm in the fourth embodiment) of a first predetermined height between the shield flat plate 1540a and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a, and a shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. It was composed of a second space having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height was formed to be larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. When a large effect unit (an electric drive source and a drive mechanism capable of operating a movable effect body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operation position) is arranged on the game board 5, it is in the depth direction. If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the same predetermined height distance dimension, or the second predetermined height may be configured. The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with this configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) in the first space, and also in the second space. By not accommodating various electronic components that generate heat, heat generated from various electronic components in the first space is efficiently transferred to the second space via the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. I can tell you well.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az are formed in the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side, so that the peripheral control substrate 1510 is provided with control. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.). ), And the product number and model printed on the surface of the DRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510. The contents (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, and the product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. ), The state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.). However, a rectangular opening is provided at the position of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 corresponding to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. It can also be configured as follows. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, DRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, and peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening is provided at the position of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side so that the surroundings can be visually recognized. It can also be configured as follows. Further, the shape of the inter-board connector (special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. A rectangular opening can be provided at the position of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate corresponding to a larger area (a shape composed of the special connector SCN3), or the periphery can be provided. The shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate corresponding to the larger region.

[Around the through holes of various boards of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
Here, the periphery of the through holes formed in various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box according to the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 234 (a), the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is on the metal board surface (mounting surface) side. Lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 are formed which are in contact with the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 and are electrically connected. Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (a), the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through hole 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a metal substrate surface (mounting surface). ) A land 1520rf4 that abuts on the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the side shield plate 1540 and is electrically connected is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (a), the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r1 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. A land 1530rf1 that abuts on the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 and is electrically connected is formed.

These lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4, 1520rf4, 1530rf1 are electrically connected in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. Therefore, a "route through which noise escapes" is formed in which noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has penetrated into the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side flows to the substrate ground (grounds (GND) of various substrates). The surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is the mounting boss holes 1501ag1,1501ag4,1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , 1501am1's mounting surface (boss surface) comes into contact with each other. Therefore, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is generated from the mounting boss holes 1501ag1,1501ag4,1501ah2,1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1. , 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2, and even if they invade the lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4, 1520rf4, 1530rf1, the invading noise (electromagnetic wave noise) flows to the substrate ground (grounds (GND) of various substrates).

Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (b), the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The foil removing regions NR5 and NR6 having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 are formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 is the foil removing region NR5. , NR6, respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 234, the cover flat plate 1501a is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through holes 1520r1, 1520r2, 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Foil removal regions NR7, NR8, NR9 having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1,1501ah4 formed on the back surface side are formed, and the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4 are mounted. The surface (boss surface) abuts on the foil removing regions NR7, NR8, and NR9, respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 234, the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r2, 1530r3, 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The foil removing regions NR10, NR11, and NR12 having the shape of a circle slightly larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss holes 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 formed in the mounting boss holes 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 are formed. The boss surface) comes into contact with the foil removing regions NR10, NR11, and NR12, respectively.

These foil removal regions NR5 to NR12 prevent noise (electromagnetic wave noise) from entering from the mounting boss holes 1501ag2,1501ag3,1501ah3,1501ah1,1501ah4,1501am3,1501am2,1501am4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is isolated from the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 so that the peripheral control board 1510 can be used. In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is peripherally controlled from the mounting boss holes 1501ag2,1501ag3,1501ah3,1501ah1,1501ah4,1501am3,1501am2,1501am4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a via the foil removing regions NR5 to NR12. A "noise-free route" that cannot penetrate into the beta land of various substrates such as the substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 235 (a), the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 has the back surface of the metal substrate. Lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4 are formed which are in contact with the surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and are electrically connected. Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (a), the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through hole 1520r2 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a metal substrate back surface (solder surface). ) A land 1520rb2 that abuts on the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the side shield plate 1555 and is electrically connected is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (a), the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate. A land 1530rb3 is formed that abuts on the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 and is electrically connected.

These lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2, 1530rb3 are electrically connected in contact with the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3, 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate. Therefore, a "route through which noise escapes" is formed in which noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has penetrated into the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates). The back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3, 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is the mounting boss 1502af1, 1502af2, 1502af3 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of 1502af6 are in contact with each other. Therefore, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is formed from the mounting bosses 1502af1, 1502af2, 1502af3, 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b1 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate. Even if it invades 1555b2, 1555b3, 1555b4, and the land 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2, 1530rb3, the invading noise (electromagnetic wave noise) flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates).

Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), a metal pan head screw (not shown) is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. Lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 that are directly inserted and screwed in are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 that surround the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 with solid white lines are printed as silk printing. Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), a metal pan (not shown) is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 into which screws are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 surrounding the lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 with solid white lines are printed as silk printing. Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), a metal pan head screw (not shown) is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530 around the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530. Lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 that are directly inserted and screwed in are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 that surround the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 with solid white lines are printed as silk printing.

Even if a metal pan head screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, it is out of the area of the solid white line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6. Although the area near the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 side overlaps with the head of the metal pan screw (not shown), the outer peripheral part of the area of the solid white line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 is not shown. Since the head of the screw is formed larger than the outline of the head of the screw, the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown) is conspicuous by the solid white lines of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6, and is made of metal (not shown). It is possible to contribute to the suppression of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) such as inserting a pan head screw and screwing it in to forget to fix it. Further, even if a metal pan head screw (not shown) is directly inserted into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed in, the area of the solid white line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 Of these, the area near the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 side overlaps with the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown), but the outer peripheral part of the area of the solid white thick line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 is made of metal (not shown). Since the head of the pan head screw is formed larger than the outer line, the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown) is conspicuous by the solid white lines of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2, and is made of metal (not shown). It is possible to contribute to the suppression of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) of inserting and screwing in the pan head screw and forgetting to fix it. Further, even if a metal pan head screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, it is included in the area of the solid white line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4. Although the area near the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 side overlaps with the head of the metal pan screw (not shown), the outer peripheral part of the area of the solid white line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 is not shown. Since the head of the screw is formed larger than the outline of the head of the screw, the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown) is conspicuous by the solid white line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4, and is made of metal (not shown). It is possible to contribute to the suppression of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) such as inserting a pan head screw and screwing it in to forget to fix it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (c), the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x around the through hole 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. A foil removing region NR13 having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss 1502af4 is formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss 1502af4 abuts on the foil removing region NR13, respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (c), the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r2 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. A foil removing region NR14 having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss 1502af5 is formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss 1502af5 abuts on the foil removing region NR14, respectively.

These foil removal regions NR13 and NR14 are used as grounds (GND) of various substrates so that noise (electromagnetic wave noise) can be prevented from entering from the mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. Isolated from. In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is generated from the mounting bosses 1502af4, 1502af5 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a to the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the foil removal regions NR13 and NR14. A "route that does not allow noise to escape" is formed that cannot be invaded.

In this way, the through holes 1520r1, 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the through holes 1520r1, 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 in which the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 surrounded by the solid white wire are printed as silk printing, respectively, are formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 and the peripheral control board 1510 are through holes to which a metal pan head screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the cover body 1501. On the other hand, through holes 1510r1, 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 in which the screw fixing instruction mark is not printed at all as silk printing, through holes 1520r2, 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output. In the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 formed in the substrate 1530, metal pan screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502. The mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1501 when the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are screwed in, and the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. It is a through hole formed on the back surface side of the 1501a and sandwiched between the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, and 1501am2 and fixed together.

That is, a metal pan screw is directly inserted into a plurality of through holes provided in various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and screwed into the cover body 1501. When the through hole and the through hole that is sandwiched and fastened together when fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are mixed, the worker of the manufacturer silks the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Screw fixing instruction marks DTH1, DTH2 printed as printing, screw fixing instruction marks DTH3, DTH4 printed as silk printing on the liquid crystal output board 1530, screw fixing instruction marks DTH5, DTH6 printed as silk printing on the peripheral control board 1510. By visually observing, the through holes 1510r2, 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510 and the through holes 1520r1 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which are through holes that are directly inserted and screwed into the metal pan screw to be fixed to the cover body 1501. 1520r4, through holes 1530r1, 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and through holes 1510r1 of the peripheral control board 1510, which are through holes that are sandwiched and fastened together when fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. Since it is possible to distinguish between 1510r4, through holes 1520r2, 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and through holes 1530r2, 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a metal pan screw is directly inserted and screwed into the cover body 1501. Screwing work (screw and fix) to through holes 1510r2, 1510r3 of peripheral control board 1510, through holes 1520r1, 1520r4 of peripheral data ROM board 1520, and through holes 1530r1, 1530r4 of liquid crystal output board 1530, which are through holes to be fixed. Work) can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of work efficiency.

In the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected. In addition to being connected, it is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is shielded on the metal board surface (mounting surface) side. One or both of the plate 1540 and the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate are in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and are not electrically connected. In this case, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and other various boards are electrically floated. Since the electrically floating metal may function as an antenna for picking up noise and become a noise source, the electrically floating metal may be used as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, or the like. It is necessary not to make it for various boards. Therefore, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 are shown. In addition to the case where the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected by wiring that is not provided, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the above-mentioned metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 may be electrically connected by wiring (not shown). As described above, this metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 also functions as a body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the body frame base unit 300 to impart rigidity, and the body frame metal (not shown). It is electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame grounding board 559 via a grounding wire. The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via an island equipment ground wire (not shown).

In the configuration of noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. When arranged so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as, as described above, holes such as ventilation holes are formed in the shield flat plate 1555a of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate. Since it was not formed at all, the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and serial numbers 1 to 6 were also covered with the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, which made it difficult to see. A plurality of holes may be formed in the shield flat plate 1555a of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the substrate. In this way, whether or not the manufacturer's worker has fixed the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and other various boards through the plurality of holes by the first fixing method described above (that is,). It is possible to visually confirm (whether or not a metal pan head screw is inserted and fixed in the portion where the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 are present).

Further, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is shown in the figure. The screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6, which surround the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 in which the metal pan screws (not shown) shown in 235 (b) are directly inserted and screwed in, are surrounded by solid white lines, respectively, are printed as silk screen printing. Further, on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a metal pan screw (not shown) shown in FIG. Thread fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2, which surround the lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 that are directly inserted and screwed in by solid white lines, are printed as silk screen printing, and through holes 1530r1, 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. On the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the above, thick white lines around the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 in which a metal pan screw (not shown) shown in FIG. 235 (b) is directly inserted and screwed. The screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 surrounded by the solid line are printed as silk printing, but instead of the solid white line, a thick white chain line (one-point chain line, two-point chain line) may be used.

Further, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the colors in which the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are printed as silk printing are the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral data Areas and part numbers indicating the positions (including orientation designation) for arranging various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various boards such as the ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and their part numbers are used as silk printing. Although it is the same color (white) as the color to be printed, the area indicating the position (including the orientation specification) where various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various boards are placed and the component number thereof. May be different from the color printed as silk printing. For example, when the area indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) where various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various substrates are arranged and the component number is printed as silk printing is white. May be yellow or black as the color in which the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are printed as silk printing so as to have a color different from the white color.

Further, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the metal substrate surface (mounting surface). The back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the side shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other, and the land 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the surface of the metal substrate. The land 1530rf1 formed on the front surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the metal substrate are in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2. The back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 is not brought into contact with the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is not brought into contact with the land. The back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate is formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. It is configured so as to abut on the surface of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate without abuting on the land 1520rf4, and the L-shape of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate. The back surface of the mounting piece 1540b2 is not brought into contact with the land 1530rf1 formed on the front surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, but is in contact with the front surface of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate. It may be configured in. This is a state in which the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected by the above-mentioned conductive elastic member 1545. Because it can be done.

In this configuration, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It is configured so as not to come into contact with various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Further, in the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate, the penetrations formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 on the back surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate, respectively. Through holes are formed at positions corresponding to the holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, and 1540b2a, respectively. Further, the base body 1502 corresponds to through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side, respectively. Through holes are formed at the respective positions. Further, on the back surface side of the cover body 1501, through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, which are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. Screw holes are formed at positions corresponding to 1540b2a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the surface of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 came into contact with each other. Cover body in a state (that is, a state in which the electrical connectivity between the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 can be improved). A screw hole formed on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through hole formed in the base body 1502 so as to be sandwiched and fixed between the 1501 and the base body 1502. Each can be screwed toward and fixed.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to flow through the wing portion of the peripheral control unit 1500. By ejecting air to the outside, air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. Air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 when taken in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate. However, when the wing of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, this rotation sucks air through the wing and heads for the peripheral control IC1510a. You may try to send out air. In other words, the air-cooled fan FAN may not have the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply have the main purpose of air-cooling the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Further, also in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 234 (Fig. For the copper foil which is the surface of the land 1510rf1, 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in a), a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Apply through the holes formed in the metal mask by spreading the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula), and put the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 into a reflow furnace to heat it. Although the solder paste is dried in the solder paste, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into a solder bath and soldered. In this case, the land 1510rf1, 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1, 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side are in contact with each other. To prevent the contact area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity from deteriorating, the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 should not be partially soldered. Need to be uniform.

For example, on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, a resist layer 1510xr which is partially coated with a resist liquid to be formed into a predetermined shape is formed. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), the resist is applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 as a "predetermined shape". A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221 (b), the resist A shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in a ring shape around the centers of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. 221 (c), a vertical resist having a predetermined width. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of directional lines and horizontal lines (a shape may be formed in which a plurality of vertical lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance dimension, or the resist is formed. A plurality of lines having a predetermined width separated by a predetermined distance dimension may be formed only in the lateral direction.) As shown in FIG. 221 (d), the lines having a predetermined width are separated by a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of lines rising to the right are formed diagonally (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines falling to the right are formed diagonally), although not shown. Examples thereof include a collection of small circular shapes.

As described above, a part of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is coated with the resist liquid to form the resist layer 1510xr which is formed into a predetermined shape. Since the copper foil on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to the region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the land 1510rf1 and 1510rf4, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as a predetermined shape coated with a resist liquid). Anything that can exert the effect of suppressing the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The soldering can be made uniform so that it does not rise in part. The solder soldered in this way is the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side and the land 1510rf1 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. , 1510rf4 and the like so as to be electrically connectable.

A predetermined figure formed by such a resist may also be formed on the copper foil which is the front surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. Further, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the land 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering with the solder.

Further, also in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan head screw is used, but it is made of metal. Peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by passing a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as "Kiku washer") through the pan head screw.

Further, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box, and this transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded as separate bodies. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded in this transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison between the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of all polycarbonate with carbon as described above. It is made of a conductive resin contained in it, and various substrates such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are made of metal on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When each of them is fixed by a screw, it is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates and is configured to be the same ground (GND).

On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, the box shape is opened in the rear and longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction. Peripheral control that can control the progress of the effect based on the command from the cover body 1501 molded of the transparent non-conductive resin and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. The substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the transparent non-conductive material that closes the opening of the cover body 1501. It includes a base body 1502 molded of a sex resin. Various substrates such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. As a result, a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is configured by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, in addition to the fact that the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of transparent non-conductive resin, T The liquid crystal output board 1530 is such that the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate is fitted on the back surface side of the base flat plate 1502a so that a part of the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a character shape protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502. The area ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed is provided on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the ground (GND) test pad of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the liquid crystal output board 1530. Noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment in that it is provided on the surface (mounting surface) side of the cover body 1501 and that an opening for contacting the probe with the test pad is formed in the cover body 1501. It is different from the configuration of.

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment]
The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment is largely similar in shape to the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, and is on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. A long rectangular shape in the vertical direction in which a conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate that can come into contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is fitted at a position corresponding to the region RO P where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed. The rib portion 1502aw is formed so as to project forward from the front surface of the base flat plate 1502a with a predetermined distance dimension (distance dimension that does not come into contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). An insertion port 1502az having a square (one side is 8 mm) is formed in the base flat plate 1502a at the center of the rectangular rib portion 1502aw in the vertical and horizontal directions. The conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a T-shape is a conductive member having cushioning property (elasticity), and has a T-shape as a core material covered by the conductive coating portion 1508a and the conductive coating portion 1508a. It is composed of the foam 1508b having the foam. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1508a include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1508b include polyurethane foam having heat resistance. The T-shaped firing body 15808b has a base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the vertical direction (when the T-shaped firing body 15808b in FIG. 237 is viewed from the right side, the width is about 3.5 mm and the depth is about about 3.5 mm. When the projecting portion (8 mm, height of about 16 mm) having a rectangular parallelepiped shape long in the front-rear direction from the center to the rear (the firing body 15808b having a T-shape in FIG. 237 is viewed from the right side, the width is about 11. It has 5 mm, a depth of about 8 mm, and a height of about 8 mm). After assembling the peripheral control unit 1500, the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate is the same as the method for assembling the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. ), The base portion having the shape of a rectangular body long in the vertical direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a T-shape is inserted into the insertion port 1502az formed in the base body 1502 and pushed in the vertical direction to be fitted. As a result, as shown in FIG. 238 (a), the protruding portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped long in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a T-shape protrudes rearward from the back surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. It will be in the state of.

When the base portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped long in the vertical direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a T-shape is inserted into the insertion port 1502az formed in the base body 1502 and pushed in, FIG. 238 (b). ), The front surface of the base portion having the shape of a long rectangular parallelepiped in the vertical direction is pressed against the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed and touched. The shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the vertical direction and the upper and lower back sides of the base that has the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the vertical direction (that is, the protrusion that has the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the front-rear direction is not connected). The back surface of the base portion having the above) is locked to the front surface of the base flat plate 1502a.

In this way, the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate has a T-shape, and the rib portion 1502aw and the rib portion 1502aw are formed in the center of the rib portion 1502aw in the vertical and horizontal directions on the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502, which is extremely simple. When the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate is inserted into the insertion port 1502az and pushed in to fit the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate, as described above, the base portion of the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a vertically long rectangular shape. The upper back surface side and the lower back surface side (that is, the back surface of the base portion having a vertically long rectangular body shape to which the protrusion having a long rectangular body shape in the front-rear direction is not connected) are locked to the front surface of the base flat plate 1502a, respectively. In this state, the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate can be made difficult to come off from the insertion port 1502az, and it is easy to handle by hand.

On the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the region corresponding to the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is one in comparison with the outer shape of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The soldering regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 having a large turning shape are formed, respectively, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the soldering regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are grounds of the peripheral control board 1510 so that noise (electromagnetic wave noise) can be prevented from entering from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. Isolated from GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the beta land of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removing regions NR1, NR2, NR3. A "route that does not allow noise to escape" is formed.

As described above, the effect display device 1600 is composed of a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that closes the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. The frame-shaped metal frame houses a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected. It is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, a rectangular body long in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. A state in which the protrusion having the shape of is crushed by being in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 (in the fifth embodiment, the protrusion having the shape of a long rectangular body in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate). The portion is crushed by about 4.5 mm in the front-rear direction and spreads in the vertical direction), and the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a T-shape is deformed into an H-shape, and as its repulsive force, it is used for a substrate. The conductive elastic member 1508 has a contact surface with the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, and a contact surface with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. , And maintain a good electrical connection, the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, and The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM. It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1520) and can be the same ground (GND). As a result, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is passed through the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the peripheral control board. It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral data ROM board 1510), and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. Since it can be electrically connected to the line and have the same ground (GND), an environment resistant to noise (electromagnetic wave noise) can be created in the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and peripheral data ROM board 1520). It can be constructed around the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various boards such as the liquid crystal output board 1530). Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment are formed of a transparent non-conductive resin, and are contained in the internal space of the cover body 1501. , Peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, liquid crystal output board 1530, and other various boards are attached at predetermined positions, and then the T-shaped conductive elastic member for the board 1508 is a rectangular body that is long in the vertical direction. When the shaped base portion is inserted into the insertion port 1502az formed in the base body 1502 and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, The metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is via the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the peripheral control board 1510 and the periphery. It is configured to be connected to the ground (GND) of the data ROM board 1520 (which is electrically connected). Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity. Is connected. Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the staging display device 1600 is guided to the substrate ground (grounds of various boards (GND)) via the metal back cover of the staging display device 1600 and removed. A "route to exit" can be formed. As a result, it is not necessary for each of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) to be provided with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), and the cost of various boards (including the power supply board 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

On the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 () (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 () is the peripheral control board 1510 or the peripheral data ROM board 1520. A test pad (not shown) is provided on the surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As shown in FIG. 240, the cover body 1501 is referred to as a tip portion of a contact probe (hereinafter, simply referred to as “contact probe”) with respect to a test pad (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It may be described. It may be a “test lead” that checks the continuity of a so-called “tester”) to form an opening 1501 at that can be brought into contact with the test lead. By bringing this contact probe into contact with the test pad, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected. The inspection company can easily perform the inspection work of whether or not it is connected.

[Exposure area of a part of the ground of various boards of the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment]
Here, a region ROP in which a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed will be described. As shown in FIGS. 241 (a) and 241 (b), the region ROP formed on a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A part of the substrate ground (GND) (that is, betagland) formed on the copper foil surface 1530 yp of 1530y has a rectangular shape long in the vertical direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate, which is larger than the front shape of the base portion. The resist liquid is placed on the copper foil surface 1530 yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be arranged inside the rectangular rib portion 1502 aw formed on the surface of the base flat plate 1502a and exposed. Is applied to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1530yr.

It is also possible to adopt a method of using a through hole without exposing the betta land as the area ROP. For example, as shown in FIGS. 241 (c) and 241 (d), the region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the betagland on the front surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A plurality of through holes to be connected are arranged vertically and horizontally, and the copper is formed around each through hole on the copper foil surface 1530 yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A resist solution can be applied onto the foil surface 1530 yp to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1530 yr.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the wing portion of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to flow through the wing portion of the peripheral control unit 1500. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 by ejecting to the outside, a plurality of air is taken into the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. It is possible to keep the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the formed ventilation holes 1501az small, but when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the wings are rotated by this rotation. Air may be sucked in and sent out to the peripheral control IC 1510a via the air. In other words, the air-cooled fan FAN may not have the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply have the main purpose of air-cooling the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Even in the configuration of noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a squeegee (like a spatula) is placed on the metal mask. Apply through the holes formed in the metal mask by spreading the solder paste using a tool), put the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 into a reflow furnace, and dry the solder paste with heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into a solder bath and soldered. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a come into contact with each other. To prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity from deteriorating, the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 should not be partially soldered. It needs to be uniform.

For example, on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, a resist layer 1510xr which is partially coated with a resist liquid to be formed into a predetermined shape is formed. It will be soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), the resist is applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 as a "predetermined shape". A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221 (b), the resist A shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in a ring shape around the centers of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. 221 (c), a vertical resist having a predetermined width. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of directional lines and horizontal lines (a shape may be formed in which a plurality of vertical lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance dimension, or the resist is formed. A plurality of lines having a predetermined width separated by a predetermined distance dimension may be formed only in the lateral direction.) As shown in FIG. 221 (d), the lines having a predetermined width are separated by a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of lines rising to the right are formed diagonally (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines falling to the right are formed diagonally), although not shown. Examples thereof include a collection of small circular shapes.

As described above, a part of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is coated with the resist liquid to form the resist layer 1510xr formed into a predetermined shape, and the periphery is formed. Since the copper foil is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape on the surface of the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as a predetermined shape coated with a resist liquid). Anything that can exert the effect of suppressing the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The soldering can be made uniform so that it does not rise in part. The solder soldered in this way has the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. It covers 1510rf4 so that it can be electrically connected.

It should be noted that the land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 in which a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is in contact with the seat surface (seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be applied to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder soldered in this way electrically connects the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (seat surface) of the pan of the metal pan head screw. Covered so that it can be connected to. Further, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering with the solder.

Further, also in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan head screw is used, but it is made of metal. Peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by passing a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as "Kiku washer") through the pan head screw.

Further, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box, and this transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded as separate bodies. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded in this transparent synthetic resin box.

Incidentally, conventionally, a main control board that controls the progress of a game and a game profit, a sub control board that controls an effect performed with the progress of a game, a board such as an image control board that controls the display of an image display device, etc. Has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, like the gaming machines described in this document, since the gaming machines are arranged in a plurality of rows facing back to the hall, the board on which the electronic components are mounted is affected by the noise generated from the gaming machines facing back. It was in an environment where it was exposed, and there was a risk that the board would malfunction due to noise.

In addition, conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a ROM for storing image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, characters, and an effect control board on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images is mounted. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall to the game machine are charged with static electricity due to the game balls rubbing against each other when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the island.

In addition, conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a ROM for storing image data such as a design, various background images, characters, and characters, and a substrate on which electronic components such as a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images are mounted. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, since some of the various boards provided in the gaming machine are housed in the board box, it is necessary to perform the work for housed the board in the board box, and it is required to improve the work efficiency.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable]
Next, a flexible flat cable connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 242 to 244. FIG. 242 is a front perspective view of the flexible flat cable, and FIG. 243 is a diagram (a) showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector on the back side of the effect display device, and the flexible flat cable is a liquid crystal. It is a figure (b) which shows the state of being electrically connected with the connector of an output board, and is the partially enlarged view of the part B shown in (a) and part C shown in (b), and the flexible flat cable is FIG. 244 is a diagram (c) showing a state of being electrically connected to each connector through a notch, and FIG. 244 shows a state in which the flexible flat cable is not normally electrically connected to the connector on the back side of the effect display device. FIG. 2A is a diagram showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is not normally electrically connected to the connector of the liquid crystal output board. In addition, in FIG. 243 (c), the direction of the connector CN10 shown in FIG. 243 (b) is shown as a state of being rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

[Shape of flexible flat cable]
In the flexible flat cable LFC electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data are arranged in parallel to the effect display device 1600. In addition, these multiple flat conductors are coated with an insulator, which is one-third to five of the thickness (diameter) of a normal round electric wire as compared with a normal round electric wire. As shown in FIG. 242, electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors are specified on the back surface side of the main body LFCa on the upper end side of the vertically long strip-shaped main body LFCa having a thickness of about one-third and having a predetermined width. To reinforce the electrode LFCba, which has a length and is arranged barely, has a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body LFCa, and has a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the exposed electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors. On the lower end side of the main body LFCa, electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors have a predetermined length and are exposed on the back surface side of the main body LFCa, while the reinforcing plate LFCca of the main body is formed. A reinforcing plate LFCcc for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb having a predetermined thickness and having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the exposed electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors is formed on the surface side of the LFCa.

The electrodes LFCba of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa are the connectors 1600ca of the control board 1600c provided on the metal back cover 1600b covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the staging display device 1600 (FIG. 243). While electrically connected to (a)), the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided in the above.

The flexible flat cable LFC is formed by being bent 90 degrees to the left at a portion having a predetermined distance dimension in the vertical direction from the upper end of the main body LFCa, and thus has a linear bent portion LFCd rising to the right (the predetermined distance dimension in the vertical direction is: It is a distance dimension from the upper end of the main body LFCa to the center point of the right-up straight line), and a predetermined distance dimension in the left-right direction from this bent portion LFCd (center point of the right-up straight line) (in this embodiment, a predetermined distance dimension in the vertical direction). The bent portion LFCe, which is smoothly bent toward the front and can be smoothly bent to the right as it is, is formed so as to be parallel in the front-rear direction (depth direction). ing.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the staging display device]
As shown in FIG. 243 (a), the electrodes LFCba of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC cover the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. It is electrically connected to the connector 1600ca of. The control board 1600c is an LED that constitutes various electronic components and a backlight of the liquid crystal panel 1600a that restores drawing data transmitted from the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and displays an image on the liquid crystal panel 1600a. Alternatively, various electronic components that adjust the brightness of the cold cathode fluorescent lamp) are mounted.

The electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not normally inserted all the way into the connector 1600ca, so that the electrodes LFCba of the plurality of flat conductors and the plurality of flat conductors are formed. Poor contact may occur between the electrode LFCba of the connector and the electrode of the connector 1600ca corresponding to the connector 1600ca, and the electrode LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is the connector 1600ca. By being inserted diagonally with respect to a plurality of flat conductors, one electrode LFCba of the electrodes LFCba becomes an electrode of the connector 1600ca corresponding to the one electrode LFCba, and another electrode adjacent to this electrode. When they come into contact with each other, a short circuit may occur and various electronic components mounted on the control board 1600c and the control board 1600c may be damaged.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally attached to the connector 1600ca on the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. In the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left outside near the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) so as to serve as a mark for insertion. The long solid guideline G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction and the right vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is engraved on the right outer side). The guidelines G1L and G1R are stamped on the metal back cover 1600b in the press working process with a press machine.

Further, in the present embodiment, on the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally connected to the connector 1600ca. After being inserted, the electrodes LFCba of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may be disconnected from the connector 1600ca, or the plurality of electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In order to prevent a short circuit between the flat conductor electrode LFCba and the electrode of the connector 1600ca corresponding to each electrode LFCba, they are slanted and come into contact with other adjacent electrodes, so that the flexible flat cable LFC is made of metal. As an area for attaching the fixed seal SFC having a long rectangular shape in the left-right direction to be fixed to the back surface side of the lid 1600b, the brackets (“)” are located slightly outward from the positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal SFC. Each of these four bracket (") -shaped guidelines G2, G2, G2, G2 is stamped with a metal back cover 1600b in the process of pressing with a press machine. By fixing the flexible flat cable LFC to the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b by the fixed seal SFC, the posture of the flexible flat cable LFC can be fixed.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the LCD output board]
As shown in FIG. 243 (b), the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is electrically connected. In this liquid crystal output board 1530, in addition to the connector CN10, the above-mentioned connectors CN8 and CN9, and a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards are also mounted. The special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the special connector SCN2 of the peripheral control board 1510 described above and electrically connected to display the effect display device from the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. The drawing data of the image to be drawn on the device is input to the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the special connector SCN2 from the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the flexible flat cable is input from the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is input to the control board 1600c via the LFC and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600.

Since the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10, the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors and the plurality of flat conductors Poor contact may occur between the electrode LFCbb and the electrode of the corresponding connector CN10, and the electrode LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is the connector CN10. By being inserted diagonally with respect to, one of the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors, the electrode LFCbb, the electrode of the connector CN10 corresponding to this one electrode LFCbb, and the other electrodes adjacent to this electrode, When they come into contact with each other, a short circuit may occur, and various electronic components mounted on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 electrically connected to the liquid crystal output board 1530 may be damaged.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper end of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the upper side and the outer side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) so as to serve as a mark. The guideline G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) Is printed with a long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction by silk printing.

In this embodiment, no through hole is formed in the region where the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is arranged. This is because the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC rubs against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed, the flat of the exposed flexible flat cable LFC. This is to prevent the mold conductor from being short-circuited due to the through hole.

[Relationship between flexible flat cable reinforcing plate and connector]
When the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are inserted into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600, it is flat. The electrode LFCba of the mold conductor faces the electrode of the connector 1600ca and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable LFC, whereas the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is on the front side of the flexible flat cable LFC. Become. As a result, the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC normally cover the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 to the depth of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca are arranged in a positional relationship that coincides with each other in the front-rear direction and overlaps. It should be noted that the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC must be inserted all the way into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. That is, when the pushing amount is insufficient, the peripheral portion of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is exposed from the connector 1600ca.

Further, when the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are inserted into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the flat conductors are used. The electrode LFCbb of the above is facing the electrode of the connector CN10 and is on the back surface side of the flexible flat cable LFC, whereas the reinforcing plate LFCcc for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is on the front surface side of the flexible flat cable LFC. As a result, the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Then, as shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship that coincides with each other in the front-rear direction and overlaps. It should be noted that the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not inserted all the way into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, that is, the pushing amount. When the amount is insufficient, the peripheral portion of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is exposed from the connector CN10.

[Flexible flat cable is not connected properly]
The electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. As shown in FIG. 244 (a), the left end side of the main body LFCa cannot be visually recognized by covering the guideline G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction, and the right end side of the main body LFCa cannot be visually recognized. The lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba becomes inclined with respect to the lower end side of the connector 1600ba, and the electrode LFCba becomes inclined with respect to the guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction. A part of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the connector is exposed from the connector 1600ba. In this way, the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC by the guidelines G1L, G1R and the reinforcing plate LFCca form the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. It can be easily visually determined whether or not the control board 1600c to be covered is normally inserted all the way into the connector 1600ca. As a result, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the operator can display the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC on the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the display device 1600. When the electrode LFCba is inserted into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the above, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the efficiency of the confirmation work.

Further, the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are slanted without being normally inserted to the depth of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. As shown in FIG. 244 (b), the upper end side of the main body LFCa cannot be visually recognized by covering the guideline G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction, and the lower end side of the main body LFCa is in the left-right direction. The left end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb (the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcc in FIG. 243 (c)) is the left end side of the connector CN10 while being inclined with respect to the guideline G3L extending linearly. The side (in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the connector CN10) is inclined, and a part of the reinforcing plate LFCcc for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is exposed from the connector CN10. As described above, the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 by the guidelines G3U, G3L and the reinforcing plate LFCcc. It can be easily visually determined whether or not the connector CN10 provided is normally inserted all the way to the back. As a result, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the operator attaches the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. When the electrode LFCbb is inserted into the connector CN10 provided with the connector CN10, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the efficiency of the confirmation work.

[Modification example]
In the above-described embodiment, the left-right direction is in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the upper side and the outer side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was printed by silk printing, but the inside of the rectangular shape area with the guideline G3U as the upper side and the guideline G3L as the lower side is solidly printed by silk printing. You may be. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the solid-painted rectangular area can function as the guideline G3U, and the lower side of the solid-painted rectangular area can function as the guideline G3L. Further, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed by rubbing the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC with the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 covered with the resist is not exposed by preventing the resist from being peeled off due to the peeling of the silk print in the rectangular area where the 1530x is solidly coated. In addition, it is possible to prevent the flat conductor of the exposed flexible flat cable LFC from short-circuiting.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the left-right direction is in the vicinity of the upper end of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the upper side and the outer side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was printed by silk printing. A foil removal region may be formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the output substrate 1530. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the rectangular area from which the foil has been removed can function as the guideline G3U, and the lower side of the rectangular area from which the foil has been removed can function as the guideline G3L. Further, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed by rubbing the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC with the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Even if the resist of 1530x is peeled off, the copper foil surface does not exist in the first place, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, so that the flat conductor of the exposed flexible flat cable LFC is short-circuited. Can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lateral direction is in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the vicinity of the upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), Which is a long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction, was printed by silk printing. Guidelines G3U and G3L may be formed by pulling out, or when applying the resist liquid to the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the guideline is not to apply a part of the region with the resist liquid. G3U and G3L may be formed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. After that, the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are disconnected from the connector CN10, or the plurality of flats formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In order to prevent a short circuit between the electrode LFCbb of the type conductor and the electrode of the connector CN10 corresponding to each electrode LFCbb, which is slanted and comes into contact with other adjacent electrodes, the flexible flat cable LFC is attached to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A fixing seal having a long rectangular shape in the vertical direction may be attached to be fixed to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x. In this case, as an area for attaching the fixed seal to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, for example, a hook bracket (")" is located slightly outward from the position corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal. The guideline of the shape (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed by printing by silk printing, or a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 may be formed. By removing the copper foil, a guideline in the shape of a hook bracket (") (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed, or a resist may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 of 1530x. When applying the liquid, a guideline in the shape of a hook bracket (“) (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed by not applying a part of the area with the resist liquid. The flexible flat cable LFC is a fixed seal. By fixing to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the posture of the flexible flat cable LFC can be fixed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected by using the flexible flat cable LFC. However, in the case where a substrate is provided on a movable body that is operated by the drive of electric drive electricity, a flexible flat cable is used as an electrical wiring that electrically connects the substrate to the drive substrate. May be good. Since a load is applied to the movable body due to the electrical wiring accompanying the operation of the movable body, this load may be too large to be ignored. Therefore, by using a flexible flat cable instead of wiring and harness as electrical wiring, the load on the movable body due to the flexible flat cable due to the operation of the movable body is suppressed, and the overload of the electrical drive source is reduced. Can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lateral direction is in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the vicinity of the upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is printed by silk printing, so that the operator can use the flexible flat cable LFC on the lower end side of the main body LFCa in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine. When the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors to be formed are inserted into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, visually check whether the electrodes LFCbb are normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10. However, for example, the substrate near the standby position (original position) of the movable body indicates the standby position (in-situ position) of the movable body operated by the drive of the electric drive electric wire. A figure such as a line or a symbol indicating the standby position (original position) of the movable body may be printed by silk printing. By doing this, when a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall manually moves the movable body to the standby position (original position) without turning on the power of the pachinko machine when inspecting the pachinko machine, a mark is used. Can be. In addition, even when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on, it can be used to determine whether or not the movable body is displaced from the standby position (original position), so it is used to check for defects in the movable body. You can also do it.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the vertical direction is in the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the left outer side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G1L, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the right vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right outside near the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ) Is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, and the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid guideline G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction in the upper vicinity (that is, the vicinity of the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the upper / outer side of the position corresponding to the upper end side), and the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction in the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to (that is, the lower and outer sides of the vicinity of the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) is attached to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Although it was formed, instead of the solid line, it may be a one-point chain line, a two-point chain line, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the vertical direction is in the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the left outer side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G1L, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the right vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right outside near the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ), A long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction was formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, but corresponds to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid guideline G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction near the right side of the position (that is, the right inner side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) and the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction near the left side of the position corresponding to the side (that is, near the left inner side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) is the effect display device 1600. It may be formed on the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b in the above. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lateral direction is in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the vicinity of the upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, but the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the flexible flat). A long solid guideline G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the cable LFC and the lower inner side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. That is, a long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction may be formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 on the upper and inner sides of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the vertical direction is in the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the left outer side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G1L, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the right vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right outside near the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ), A long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction was formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, but corresponds to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. The long solid line guideline G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction at the position and the long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction at the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are the effect display device 1600. It may be formed on the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b in the above. That is, the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G1L are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlap each other, and the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G1R are aligned in the front-rear direction. It becomes an overlapping positional relationship. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lateral direction is in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the vicinity of the upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, but extends linearly in the left-right direction at a position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guideline G3U and a long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction at a position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may be formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. That is, the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G3U are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlap each other, and the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G3L are aligned in the front-rear direction. It becomes an overlapping positional relationship. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connector 1600ca of the control substrate 1600c in which the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC cover the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. In the state where it is normally inserted to the back of the connector, as shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap in the front-rear direction. As a result, the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca was the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCba was normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca. Further, in a state where the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted to the depth of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. As shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship so as to coincide with each other in the front-rear direction and overlap, so that the upper end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb is arranged. The distance between the and the lower end side was the same as the length (insertion length) at which the electrode LFCbb was normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca. If the distance between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is longer than the length (insertion length) at which the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca, in other words, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In a state where the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the control board 1600c are normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600, the reinforcing plate LFCca When the lower end side and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca do not match in the front-rear direction and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is arranged in a positional relationship so as to be separated from the lower end side of the connector 1600ca in parallel, the lower end of the reinforcing plate LFCca. Whether or not the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca by separating the side and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca is determined by the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca. It becomes difficult to distinguish by using it. Similarly, the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb was the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCbb was normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10, but the upper end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. When the distance between the and the lower end side is longer than the length (insertion length) at which the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10, in other words, it is formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In a state where the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors are normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcc, the lower end side of the connector CN10, and the lower end side of the connector CN10. Does not match in the front-rear direction, and when the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb is arranged in a positional relationship so as to be separated in parallel from the lower end side of the connector CN10, the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged. It becomes difficult to determine whether or not the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10 by using the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcc and the lower end side of the connector CN10. ..

Therefore, in such a case, when the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca, it is on the extension line of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca as a guideline indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca. , A solid line extending linearly to the left in the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left outer side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). Instead of the solid line, it may be a one-point chain line or a two-point chain line, or it may be an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca.) The guideline G1L'(this guideline G1L'is described above. It may intersect with the guideline G1L, or may be an L-shape integrally formed with the guideline G1L described above), and the right vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, flexible). A solid line extending linearly to the right (instead of the solid line, a one-point chain wire or a two-point chain wire may be used, or the reinforcing plate LFCca The guideline G1R'(this guideline G1R' may be an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side) may intersect with the above-mentioned guideline G1R, or may be an L-shape integrally formed with the above-mentioned guideline G1R. It is preferable that is stamped on the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600.

Further, as a guideline for indicating the position of the lower end side of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFC bb in a state where the electrode LFC bb is normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10, the flexible flat cable is on the extension line of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFC bb. A solid line extending linearly upward in the vicinity of the upper end of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the LFC (that is, the vicinity of the upper side and the outer side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) (instead of the solid line). , It may be a one-point chain line or a two-point chain line, or it may be an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb.) Guideline G3U'(this guideline G3U' intersects with the above-mentioned guideline G3U. It may be an L-shape integrally formed with the above-mentioned guideline G3U, or it may have a rectangular shape having a vertical distance dimension of the guideline G3U'and a horizontal distance dimension of the above-mentioned guideline G3U. The inside may be solid-painted by silk printing.)) And the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A solid line extending linearly downward (instead of the solid line, a one-point chain line or a two-point chain line may be used, or the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb) indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. The guideline G3L'(this guideline G3L' may be an arrow line) may intersect with the above-mentioned guideline G3L, or may be an L-shape integrally formed with the above-mentioned guideline G3L. A rectangular shape having the vertical distance dimension of the guideline G3L'and the horizontal distance dimension of the guideline G3L described above (the inside thereof may be solid-painted by silk printing) may be formed. It is preferable that the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is printed by silk printing.

Instead of silk printing, the guideline G3U'and G3L' can be obtained by removing the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as in the above-mentioned modification. It may be formed, or when the resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the guidelines G3U'and G3L' are formed by not applying the resist liquid to a part of the region. You may. Further, as in the above-mentioned modification, the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is removed, and the vertical distance dimension of the guideline G3L'and the above-mentioned guideline G3L are obtained. Guideline G3U, G3L, and guideline G3U', G3L'are formed by forming a rectangular shape having a distance dimension in the left-right direction (the copper foil inside this rectangular shape may also be removed). You may.

[Connecting method of connector]
Next, it is connected to the connector provided in the relay board that relays various wirings to the peripheral control board 1510, the relay board that relays various wirings to the main control board 1310, and the relay board that relays various wirings to the payout control board 633. The wiring and the connector of the harness will be described with reference to FIG. 245. FIG. 245 is a diagram (a) showing the arrangement of the connectors of the relay board, and is a diagram (b) showing a state in which the connectors of the wiring and the harness are normally connected to the connectors of the relay board. It is a figure (c) which shows the state which the connector of a wiring and a harness is not connected normally with respect to.

By the way, if the wiring or harness connector is not properly inserted into the relay board connector, poor contact may occur between the electrodes of the connector, and the wiring or harness connector is slanted with respect to the relay board connector. When the connector is inserted into the connector, adjacent electrodes of the connector come into contact with each other to cause a short circuit, which may damage the relay board and various electronic components mounted on various control boards electrically connected to the relay board.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 245 (a), the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD is arranged with the connector SCK on the socket side into which the connector PLG on the plug side of the wiring and the harness KDCBL is inserted. There is. The connector SCK on the socket side is of the right angle type (also referred to as "side type"), and has a box shape in which an opening SCKb is formed with respect to the lower side surface SCKaa of the main body SCKa having a rectangular shape long in the left-right direction. Is formed in. The plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG is inserted into this opening SCKb. The lower side surface SCKaa on which the opening of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD having a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The connector PLG on the plug side has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction and has a size smaller than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb having the same distance dimension as the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the main body SCKa. The plug portion PLGa having a long rectangular shape in the left-right direction is integrally formed. As described above, the lower side surface SCKaa on which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed has a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD and is the surface (mounting surface) of the relay board KD. Although it is arranged in KDx, in the present embodiment, the predetermined distance dimension dw1 is the vertical distance dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side.

When the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side, the entire upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa is the connector on the socket side. The opening SCKb of the SCK is in contact with the lower side surface SCKaa on which the SCKb is formed, and is in a state of surface contact. In this state, as shown in FIG. 245 (b), the surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side (that is, the main body of the connector PLG on the plug side). The lower side surface PLGbb) of the PLGb) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are arranged in a positional relationship that coincides with each other in the front-rear direction and overlaps.

As described above, the connector SCK on the socket side is arranged with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD and having a vertical distance dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side. Therefore, when the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side, the main body formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side. The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the PLGb (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are in the front-rear direction. It will be arranged in a positional relationship that matches and overlaps with. As a result, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, when the operator normally inserts the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side, the operator puts it on the operator's finger. The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower end side of the relay board KD. The plug part PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is opened to the opening of the connector SCK on the socket side by the tactile sensation that the KDeg (that is, the end of the board of the relay board KD) is placed on the same plane by touching. It is possible to easily determine whether or not the SCKb is normally inserted all the way to the back, and the staff such as the clerk of the game hall can also perform the inspection work of the pachinko machine on the same plane as described above. By the tactile sensation of being arranged, it can be easily determined whether or not the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the efficiency of the confirmation work.

In the state where the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is not normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side and is inserted diagonally, as shown in FIG. 245 (c), the plug side. The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG of the connector PLG (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is). , The board end of the relay board KD) has a protrusion amount dSP, and the layout is such that it protrudes. As a result, the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side is the lower end of the relay board KD by the amount of protrusion dSP for the workers in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine and the staff of the game hall who inspect the pachinko machine. By projecting from the side KDeg, the surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side on the finger of the operator or the clerk of the game hall, etc. (that is, , The lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are touched by the tactile sensation of having a step. It can be easily determined that the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is not normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side.

[Modification example]
In the above-described embodiment, the connector SCK on the socket side has a distance dimension (thickness) dcw in the vertical direction of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side as a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side, and is integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side. The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are front and rear. It was supposed to be arranged in a positional relationship that matches the direction and overlaps, but the component placement line indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side is printed by silk printing with a solid line larger than the outer shape of the connector SCK on the socket side. At the same time, the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side in a state where the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side. Arranged so that the surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower side of the component arrangement line indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side match. May be done. FIG. 246 is a modification of FIG. 245, which is a diagram (a) showing the arrangement of the connector of the relay board and the arrangement line of the part product, and the wiring and the connector of the harness are normally connected to the connector of the relay board. It is a figure (b) which shows the state, and is the figure (c) which shows the state which the connector of a wiring and a harness is not normally connected to the connector of a relay board.

For example, on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), a connector SCK on the socket side into which the connector PLG on the plug side of the wiring and the harness KDCBL is inserted is arranged. The connector SCK on the socket side is formed in a box shape in which an opening SCKb is formed with respect to the lower side surface SCKaa of the main body SCKa having a rectangular shape long in the left-right direction. The plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG is inserted into this opening SCKb. The lower side surface SCKaa on which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed has a first distance dimension dw2 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (for example, the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. 245 (a) is a relay board. The surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD having a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg, which is about twice the distance dimension and at least 5 mm. Is located in.

The reason why the lower side surface SCKaa on which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed is arranged so as to be separated from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD by the first distance dimension dw2 is simply explained by the mounter. When mounting components or flowing the board into a soldering tank, it is necessary to form a so-called "discard plate (range where electronic components cannot be mounted)", and it is 3 mm to 5 mm inward from each end of the board. It is not possible to mount electronic components over the entire range (the range from each end of the board to its surroundings). When mounting electronic components without forming this waste plate (that is, when mounting electronic components in the range from each end of the board to its surroundings), a grip jig for fixing the board and prevention of board warpage It is necessary to use a jig, but even in this case, the area of the substrate sandwiched by the gripping jig or the substrate warp prevention jig is about 5 mm inward from the end side of the substrate, and electronic components cannot be arranged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. 245 (a) has a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD as the first distance dimension dw2 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. It is about twice the distance dimension and has at least 5 mm. As a result, when the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side, the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side. The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is arranged above the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD, so that it is arranged on the inner side of the relay board KD. Will be done.

Around the connector SCK on the socket side, there is a rectangular component placement line DSLK indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side, at least the lower side surface SCKaa on which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed, and the socket. The lower side DSLKeg of the component arrangement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the side has the second distance dimension dw3 and is printed on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD by silk printing. The connector PLG on the plug side has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction and has a size smaller than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb having the same distance dimension as the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the main body SCKa. The plug portion PLGa having a long rectangular shape in the left-right direction is integrally formed. As described above, a rectangular component placement line DSLK indicating the component position of the socket SCK is formed around the socket SCK, and at least an opening SCKb of the socket SCK is formed around the socket SCK. The lower side surface SCKaa and the lower side DSLKeg of the component placement line DSLK of the socket side connector SCK have a second distance dimension dw3 and are printed on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD by silk printing. In the present embodiment, as the second distance dimension dw3, the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. 245 (a) is arranged with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The distance dimension is the same (that is, the distance dimension (thickness) dcw in the vertical direction of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side).

When the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side, the entire upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa is the connector on the socket side. The opening of the SCK is in contact with the lower side surface SCKaa of the SCKb and is in surface contact. In this state, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), the surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side (that is, the main body of the connector PLG on the plug side). The lower side surface PLGbb) of the PLGb) and the lower side DSLKeg of the component placement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the socket side are arranged so as to match. As a result, the workers in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine and the staff of the game hall who inspect the pachinko machine can use the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side as the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side. It is possible to easily visually determine whether or not the insert is normally inserted all the way to the back. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the efficiency of the confirmation work.

In a state where the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is not normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side and is inserted diagonally, as shown in FIG. 246 (c), the plug side. The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is the component placement line of the connector SCK on the socket side. The arrangement is such that it has a protrusion amount dSP from the lower side of the DSLK and protrudes. As a result, the workers in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine and the staff of the game hall who inspect the pachinko machine can use the component placement line DSLK for the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side by the amount of protrusion dSP. By protruding from the lower side DSLKeg, it can be easily visually determined that the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is not normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side.

Incidentally, conventionally, various types of main control boards that control game progress and game profits, sub-control boards that control effects that are executed along with game progress, image control boards that control display of image display devices, and the like. A gaming machine in which a substrate is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051) and FIG. 2). Some of the connectors provided on the board have wiring inserted and removed, and some have a connector whose one end is electrically connected to the wiring. It was necessary to make an electrical check to the connector in the connection work, and the check work took time.

[Wiring groove]
In the present embodiment, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front side in a state where the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the game board 5 is paid out on the left side back surface of the game board 5 at a distance of a predetermined distance dimension as described above. The left portion 551e of the back plate in the payout base 551 of the base unit 550 is arranged. A ball guidance unit 570 attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e is arranged on the upper side of the left back surface of the game board 5, and is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e on the center side of the left back surface of the game board 5. The payout device 580 is arranged, and the upper full tank path unit 600 attached to the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate is arranged on the lower side of the left back surface of the game board 5.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the left back surface of the game board 5 and the front surface of the left back plate 551e are formed by the back plate left portion 551e arranged so as to be separated from the rear left back surface of the game board 5 by a predetermined distance. A space is formed. In this space, as shown in FIGS. 110 and 113, a plurality of protective cover bodies 1601 molded from a non-conductive transparent resin that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. The L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a to be formed is arranged along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601, and various wirings are locked by the L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a.

The game ball B is polished in the island equipment of the game hall or rubs against each other in the circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged to emit electromagnetic noise. Therefore, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guidance unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 capable of retaining the game ball B are attached. ..

That is, since the ball guidance unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate, the front surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate and the back surface of the left side of the game board 5 The formed space (hereinafter, referred to as “wiring routing space”) is in an environment that is easily affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

Further, as various electric wires routed in the wiring route space, for example, there are wirings for transmitting control signals and wirings for supplying various power sources, and a plurality of various electric wires are mixed in the wiring route space. The wiring that transmits the control signal is vulnerable to noise and troubles due to electromagnetic noise (for example, regular data changes to other data and is garbled, or the signal is output even though it is not originally output. It is easy to be affected by electromagnetic noise because it becomes a signal, etc.), whereas the wiring that supplies various power supplies is resistant to noise and is not easily affected by electromagnetic noise.

Then, among the various wiring routed in the wiring route space, it is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise that can avoid troubles caused by electromagnetic wave noise for the wiring that transmits the control signal that is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise. On the other hand, it is not necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise for wiring that supplies various power sources that are not easily affected by electromagnetic noise.

Therefore, a configuration (hereinafter, referred to as "wiring groove according to the first to second embodiments") in which wiring grooves for routing various wirings are provided on the left back surface of the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 252. do. FIG. 247 is a partial perspective view (a) of a game board for explaining a region to which a wiring groove is attached, and a diagram (b) showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back surface side of the game board. 248 is a continuation of FIG. 247, and is a diagram (c) showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back surface side of the game board, and FIG. 249 is based on the first embodiment. FIG. 250 is a perspective view showing various wiring states when the wiring groove is mounted on the back surface side of the game board and the game board is viewed from behind. FIG. 250 shows the wiring groove according to the first embodiment of the game board. FIG. 251 is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the game board is viewed from the front while being mounted on the back surface side of the game board. FIG. 251 shows the wiring groove according to the second embodiment mounted on the back surface side of the game board. It is a perspective view which shows the state of various wirings when the game board is seen from the back in the state which was done, and FIG. 252 is the state which the wiring groove which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is attached to the back surface side of a game board. It is a perspective view which shows the state of various wirings when the game board is seen from the front. In addition, in FIG. 247 (b) and FIG. 248 (c), only the flexible flat cable is shown as the wiring routed to the wiring groove for the first and second electromagnetic noise countermeasures for the sake of readability of the drawings, and other various wirings are omitted. .. Further, in FIGS. 249 to 252, the game board is omitted because the drawings are easy to see.

[Area to attach wiring groove]
In the above-described embodiment, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front side in a state where the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the left side of the back plate is arranged so as to be separated from the rear left side of the back side of the game board 5 by a predetermined distance. A space is formed between the left back surface of the game board 5 and the front surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate by the portion 551e. In this space, various wirings locked to the L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed on the protective cover body 1601 covering the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600 are the protective cover body. It is arranged along the vertical direction of 1601. In the wiring groove according to the first to second embodiments, as shown in FIG. 247 (a), a mounting boss hole is provided in the protective cover body 1601 instead of the L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed in the protective cover body 1601. Two 1601d are formed on the upper side and two on the lower side.

[Wiring groove according to the first embodiment]
As shown in FIGS. 247 (b), 249, and 250, the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is a conductive metal wiring groove 1605, and is a thin metal flat plate (plate thickness 2) long in the vertical direction. The left and right sides of (0.0 mm to 2.6 mm) are bent by press working to form a groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section, and the left and right walls of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section are formed. L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed by being bent by press working on the upper side and the lower side, respectively. L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed on the upper and lower sides of the left side wall of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section by press working, so that the cutout portion 1605c corresponds to the L-shaped mounting piece 1605b. 1605b L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed by pressing on the upper and lower sides of the right side wall of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. Notches 1605c are formed in the corresponding portions, respectively. A notch hole 1605bb is formed at the tip of the mounting surface 1605ba of the L-shaped mounting piece 1605b by press working.

The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the board ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground (GND) as the ground (board ground (GND)) of various boards provided in the game board 5. ). This prevents the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 from being electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided in the game board 5. That is, since the electrically floating metal may function as an antenna for picking up noise and become a noise source, the electrically floating metal is not made for various substrates provided in the game board 5. ..

The notch holes 1605bb formed in the mounting surface 1605ba of the four L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b in the metal wiring groove 1605 are arranged so as to correspond to the four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in the protective cover body 1601. After inserting the mounting boss hole 1601d into the notch hole 1605bb, the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting boss hole 1601d is the same as or smaller than the plate thickness dimension of the notch hole 1605bb). In a state where a metal pan screw (not shown) is screwed from the notch hole 1605bb toward the mounting boss hole 1601d and fixed, the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 A groove outer space is formed between the bottom outer surface and the bottom outer surface 1605d. Further, in a state where the game board 5 to which the metal wiring groove 1605 is fixed is mounted on the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 is the payout base unit 550 described above. By being sealed by the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e in the base 551, an in-groove space is formed in the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605.

In other words, the space between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e in the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 is provided by the metal wiring groove 1605 to the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the metal wiring groove 1605. An outer groove space can be formed between the front surface of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section, and an inner space can be formed in the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605. It has become. That is, the space outside the groove formed between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 is a space that does not face the source side of electromagnetic wave noise. On the other hand, the space inside the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 is a space facing the source side of the electromagnetic wave noise. The height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H1 of the space outside the groove is larger than the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H2 of the space inside the groove.

Since the ball guidance unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, they are formed on the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. The space, that is, the wiring routing space, is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but since the metal wiring groove 1605 has conductivity, electromagnetic wave noise is transmitted from the groove inner space to the groove. The metal wiring groove 1605 can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion into the outer space.

As a result, troubles due to electromagnetic wave noise can be avoided by routing the wiring that transmits the control signal that is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, and the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be avoided. Wiring that supplies various power sources that are difficult to receive can be routed to the groove inner space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

For example, in addition to the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a sub-effect display device (not shown) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In this case, the flexible flat cable 1606 from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above (FFC (abbreviation of Flexible Flat Cable. The flexible flat cable) transmits drawing data (control signal) to a sub-effect display device (not shown). Multiple flat conductors for this purpose are arranged in parallel, and these multiple flat conductors are covered with an insulator.)) The mountain folds and valley folds are repeated multiple times and bent to form a three-dimensional structure. It is an important wiring for transmitting drawing data (control signal) to a sub-effect display device (not shown), and is an effect image displayed on a sub-effect display device (not shown) when affected by electromagnetic noise. It is routed to the groove outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in order to prevent troubles such as disturbance or an image such as a sandstorm. Further, various wirings for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above, a twist pair cable for transmitting control signals by the positive side wiring and the negative side wiring, and a peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500. The various wirings to which the detection signals from various sensors input to 1510 are transmitted are those in which the circumference of the conductor (single wire material or twisted wire material) is covered with an insulating material, and when affected by electromagnetic noise, the surroundings are covered. The regular data output by the control board 1510 changes to other data and is garbled and received (input) at the output destination, or it is output as a signal that is output even though it is a signal that was not originally output. It is pulled into the groove outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in order to prevent troubles such as receiving (input) earlier or accurately receiving (inputting) detection signals from various sensors to the peripheral control board 1510. It is turned. The twisted pair cable and various wirings routed in the groove outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 are routed upward or downward along the groove outer space.

On the other hand, the wiring for supplying various power sources (including ground (GND)) such as + 24V, + 12V, and + 5V created by the above-mentioned power supply board 630 is a conductor (single wire material or twisted wire material). Since the circumference of the wire is covered with an insulating material and the voltage of various power sources (including ground (ground)) is stabilized, the electromagnetic noise is compared with the control signal. Even if it is affected by this, the fluctuation of the voltage due to this influence is extremely weak and it is not easily affected by the electromagnetic noise, so that it can be routed to the groove inner space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

Various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are connected to the game board by various power supply lines electrically connected from the above-mentioned main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5. To the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity so that various wirings supplied to the game board 5 and supplying various power sources from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 are not arranged close to the flexible flat cable 1606. It is routed toward the metal wiring groove 1605 and formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 via a notch 1605c formed on the right side wall and the lower side of the left side wall of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. It is drawn around in the grooved space, and is drawn upward along the inside of the groove, and is drawn from the upper end of the metal wiring groove 1605 to various substrates provided in the game board 5.

In this way, the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 allows the space through which the wiring is passed (the space around the wiring), the space outside the groove around which the wiring that transmits the control signal susceptible to electromagnetic noise, and the electromagnetic noise. Since it can be configured as a two-story building divided into a grooved space around which wirings that supply various power sources that are not easily affected are routed, the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the game board 5 described above can be configured. It is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B in the space (wiring routing space) formed on the left back surface.

Here, the flexible flat cable 1606 will be described. In the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data (control signals) are arranged in parallel to a sub-effect display device (not shown), and these plurality of flat conductors are coated with an insulator. Compared to the normal round electric wiring, it has a thickness of about 1/3 to 1/5 of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring, and the liquid crystal of the peripheral control unit 1500. The left and right sides have a predetermined width and are bent by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times from the output board 1530 toward a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. On the upper end side, which is the left side of the strip-shaped main body 1606a long in the direction, electrodes 1606ba of a plurality of flat conductors have a predetermined length and are exposed on the back surface side of the main body 1606a, and are predetermined on the front surface side of the main body 1606a. While a reinforcing plate 1606ca for reinforcing the electrode 1606ba having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the electrodes 1606ba having a thickness and a plurality of exposed flat conductors is formed, the lower end of the main body 1606a is formed. On the side, electrodes 1606bb of a plurality of flat conductors having a predetermined length are arranged in a bare manner on the back surface side of the main body 1606a, and a plurality of flat molds having a predetermined thickness and being exposed on the front surface side of the main body 1606a. A reinforcing plate 1606 bb for reinforcing the electrode 1606 bb having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the electrode 1606 bb of the conductor is formed.

The electrodes 1606ba of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body 1606a are electrically connected to the connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above. The electrodes 1606bb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 1606a cover the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the lid.

A capacitor called a bypass capacitor, such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown), is located between the power supply line and the board ground (GND) in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected. Is mounted, and by lowering the power supply impedance, the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. Further, the power supply line and the board ground (GND) in the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown) covering the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub-effect display device (not shown) to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected. A capacitor called a decoupling capacitor, such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown), is mounted between them. By lowering the power supply impedance, noise resistance to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is achieved. The sex is improving.

The flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5. It is drawn to the outer groove space formed by the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 through the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the area except for the display area, and is guided downward along the outer groove space. It is routed into the board holder 1200 which is attached to the back surface of the game board 5 as it is, and is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel in the sub-effect display device (not shown). Will be done.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to the connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the effect display of the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the game board 5. It is routed between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the device 1600 except for the display area and the outer space formed by the conductive metal wiring groove 1605. Further, as described above, in the effect display device 1600, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is covered with a metal back cover. As a result, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can function as a shield member capable of preventing electromagnetic noise entering toward the flexible flat cable 1606 in the passing area.

[Modification example]
The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground as the ground of various substrates provided in the game board 5 (board ground (GND)). (GND), but instead of, or in addition to this, the bottom of the groove portion 1605a of the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is pressed with an L-shaped connection piece toward the protective cover body 1601. By providing a connection piece opening in the protective cover body 1601, the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece is passed through the connection piece opening provided in the protective cover body 1601 in the protective cover body 1601. It may be in a state of being electrically connected in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, or a connection provided in the protective cover body 1601 by attaching a conductive elastic member to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece. Through the one-sided opening, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 in the protective cover body 1601 and the surface of the conductive elastic member (the surface opposite to the surface attached to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece) come into contact with each other. The connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece may be electrically connected (in other words, the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece is made of metal of the effect display device 1600 in the protection cover body 1601 through the connection piece opening provided in the protection cover body 1601. It may be in a state of being electrically abutted with the back cover via a conductive elastic member). The conductive elastic member is a conductive member having cushioning property (elasticity), and is attached to a conductive coating portion, a foam having a rectangular shape as a core material covered by the conductive coating portion, and a conductive coating portion. It is composed of a conductive adhesive tape to be used. Examples of the covering portion include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam include polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be mentioned. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion is attached (bonded) to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece.

Further, the wiring for transmitting the control signal output from the main control board 1310 described above to the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner when the game board 5 is viewed from the front is formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 outside the groove. It may be routed to the space and routed upward along the inside of the groove outer space. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance to the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to the wiring to the function display unit 1400.

Further, the metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground as the ground of various substrates provided in the game board 5 (board ground (GND)). Although it is (GND), even if the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided in the game board 5, it functions as an antenna for picking up noise and is a noise source. If there is no risk of this, or if the electromagnetic noise from the noise source is negligibly small, the metal wiring groove 1605 is not electrically connected to the board ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown). , It may be in an electrically floating state.

Further, the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by pressing a thin metal flat plate long in the vertical direction, but has the same shape as the metal wiring groove 1605 and has a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605. It may be configured as'. In this case, the entire front and back of the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605'is subjected to conductive plating (for example, precious metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating), and the portion to which the conductive plating is applied. Is electrically connected to the board ground (GND) via wiring (not shown), and is the same ground (GND) as the ground (board ground (GND)) of various boards provided in the game board 5. Even with this configuration, the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605'with conductive plating has the same effect as the above-mentioned conductive metal wiring groove 1605 (that is, electromagnetic noise. It can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion from the groove inner space toward the groove outer space.). It should be noted that the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605'with conductive plating functions as an antenna for picking up noise even when it is electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided in the game board 5. If there is no risk of becoming a noise source, or if the electromagnetic noise from the noise source is negligibly small, electrically connect the conductive plating to the substrate ground (GND) via wiring (not shown). Instead, it may be in an electrically floating state.

Further, the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by pressing a thin metal flat plate long in the vertical direction, but the conductive resin wiring groove 1605'having the same shape as the metal wiring groove 1605'. It may be configured as'. Even with this configuration, the conductive resin wiring groove 1605'' has the same effect as the above-mentioned conductive metal wiring groove 1605 (that is, electromagnetic noise is transmitted from the space inside the groove to the space outside the groove). It can function as a shield member that can prevent it from invading toward it.).

Further, in the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel, but the flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) between the flat conductors. The flat conductors that transmit control signals and the flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) may be arranged alternately. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise immunity against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for a plurality of flat conductors that transmit control signals.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel, but the control signal which is particularly vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise (that is, easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise) is transmitted. The flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter referred to as "flat conductor vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise") is adjacent to the flat conductor vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise, so that it is adjacent to the substrate ground (GND) and electricity. The flat conductors that are connected to each other are arranged so that the flat conductors that are vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise are sandwiched and arranged by the flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). You may. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to the flat conductor which is vulnerable to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel, but as these plurality of flat conductors, in addition to the flat conductor for transmitting the control signal, In the case of being configured to include a flat conductor electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) and a flat conductor for supplying various power sources, the substrate ground (GND) and the power source are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. In this case, as this power supply, when the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, the resistance rises sharply and the overcurrent protection element such as a thermista that suppresses the current, or the resistance is small below the rated current and cuts off. An overcurrent protection circuit that shuts off the circuit when a current is reached (for example, a circuit that has a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. This polyswitch rapidly increases the resistance value from a specific temperature in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature. The main body generates heat, and this heat lowers the conductivity to cut off the current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and recovers.) It is preferable to do so. This is because, as described above, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a thickness of about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring. Because it is thin, it is possible to prevent a short circuit of the flexible flat cable 1606 by an overcurrent protection circuit or an overcurrent protection circuit when an overcurrent flows through the flat conductor that supplies power, and it is possible to ensure safety and damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[Wiring groove according to the second embodiment]
As shown in FIGS. 248 (c), 251 and 252, the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 and has a long cross-sectional U-shape in the vertical direction. A groove portion 1608a is formed, and a mounting piece 1608b projecting outward is formed on the left side wall and the right side wall of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section and integrally molded. The mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b is formed to be flush with the bottom outer surface 1608c of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section, and a mounting hole 1608bb is formed at the tip of the mounting piece 1608b. Has been done. Further, a notch for wiring insertion 1608d is formed in a substantially central portion of the left side wall when the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section is viewed from the opening side. The resin wiring groove 1608 may be molded from a transparent non-conductive resin, or may be molded from a colored non-conductive resin such as black. The thickness of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section of the resin wiring groove 1608 is 2.0 mm to 2.6 mm, and the height of the mounting piece 1608b of the resin wiring groove 1608 is 4.0 mm to 5.0 mm. be.

The mounting holes 1608bb formed on the mounting surface 1608ba of the four mounting pieces 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 are arranged in the mounting holes 1608bb so as to correspond to the four mounting boss holes 1601d formed on the protective cover body 1601. After inserting the mounting boss holes 1601d, the height dimension of the mounting boss hole 1601d (distance dimension in the depth direction) is smaller than the height dimension of the mounting piece 1608b (distance dimension in the depth direction). ), In a state where a metal pan screw (not shown) is screwed from the mounting hole 1608bb toward the mounting boss hole 1601d and fixed, the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section of the resin wiring groove 1608. The bottom outer surface 1608c is in contact with the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b is in contact with each other. Further, in a state where the game board 5 to which the resin wiring groove 1608 is fixed is mounted on the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 is the payout base unit 550 described above. By being sealed by the front surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate in the base 551, an in-groove space is formed in the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608.

The height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) from the mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 to the opening side surface of the left side wall and the right side wall of the groove portion 1608a, and the L-shape in the metal wiring groove 1605. The height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) from the mounting surface 1605ba of the mounting piece 1605b to the opening side surface of the left side wall and the right side wall of the groove portion 1608a is the same dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction). It is the same height. Further, the height (distance dimension in the depth direction) H3 of the groove inner space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 is the groove outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. H1 and the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H2 of the space in the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. , Is added.

Since the ball guidance unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, they are formed on the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. The space, that is, the wiring routing space, is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, and the resin wiring groove 1608 has non-conductivity. The resin wiring groove 1608 cannot function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion into the groove inner space formed by the above.

For example, in addition to the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a sub-effect display device (not shown) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In this case, the flexible flat cable 1609 (FFC (abbreviation of Flexible Flat Cable. Flexible flat cable) from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above transmits drawing data (control signal) to a sub-effect display device (not shown). Multiple flat conductors for this purpose are arranged in parallel, and these multiple flat conductors are covered with an insulator.)) The mountain folds and valley folds are repeated multiple times and bent to form a three-dimensional structure. It has the same shape as the flexible flat cable 1606 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above, and it is important to transmit drawing data (control signal) to a sub-effect display device (not shown). If the wiring is affected by electromagnetic noise, the effect image displayed on the sub-effect display device (not shown) may be disturbed or the image may look like a sandstorm.

Therefore, of the flat both sides of the flexible flat cable 1609, a shielded wire 1610 woven into a mesh is provided on the entire surface of the flexible flat cable 1609, and a special structure is adopted in which the shielded wire 1610 is covered with a transparent resin. The shielded wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground of the board to which the upper end side of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected (ground (ground)), and the ground of the board to which the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected (board). It is electrically connected to the ground (GND)).

When the flexible flat cable 1609 is bent by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times to be formed three-dimensionally, a notch for wiring insertion formed in the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. From the portion drawn to the groove inner space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 through the portion 1608d and bent toward the lower end side of the groove inner space, the groove inner space extends from the lower end side by a predetermined distance dimension. As for the portion extending to the portion, the surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided is formed so as to face the opening side of the groove portion 1608a. That is, in the groove inner space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 and the surface on which the shielded wire 1610 is provided on the flexible flat cable 1609. The space formed between them (that is, the small space in which the flexible flat cable 1609 is placed) is a space that does not face the source side of the electromagnetic noise, whereas the shielded wire 1610 is connected to the flexible flat cable 1609. The space formed from the surface provided with the groove to the opening side of the groove portion 1608a is a space facing the source side of the electromagnetic wave noise.

Since the ball guidance unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, they are formed on the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. The space, that is, the wiring routing space, is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but the flexible flat cable 1609 has a direction in which electromagnetic wave noise invades the surface where the shielded wire 1610 is provided. It is formed so as to face the.

Further, the wiring for supplying various power sources (including ground (GND)) such as + 24V, + 12V, and + 5V created by the above-mentioned power supply board 630 is provided around the conductor (single wire material or twisted wire material). Since it is covered with an insulating material and the voltage of various power sources (which may include ground (GND)) is stabilized, it is more affected by electromagnetic noise than the control signal. Even if it is received, the fluctuation of the voltage due to this influence is extremely weak and is not easily affected by the electromagnetic noise, so that it can be routed to the groove inner space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608.

Since the flexible flat cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various power sources coexist in the groove inner space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 not provided with the shielded wire 1610 is used. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shielded wire 1610 is directed toward the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608, and the groove portion having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. Turn to the opening side of 1608a. Then, various power sources from the power supply board 630 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shielded wire 1610.

Various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are connected to the game board by various power supply lines electrically connected from the above-mentioned main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5. Various wirings supplied to the game board 5 and supplying various power sources from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610. The space inside the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 from below the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section of the resin wiring groove 1608 while being routed toward the resin wiring groove 1608 having non-conductivity. It is routed upward along the space inside the groove, and is routed from the upper end of the resin wiring groove 1608 to various substrates provided in the game board 5.

In this way, the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 shields the space through which the wiring passes (the space around which the wiring is routed) to the flexible flat cable 1609, which is the wiring that transmits the control signal that is easily affected by electromagnetic noise. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the wire 1610 and not provided with the shielded wire 1610 is directed toward the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608, and the shielded wire 1610 is provided. A space formed on the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 described above by directing the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 toward the opening side of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. It is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B in (wiring routing space).

Further, by arranging various power supplies from the power supply board 630 along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shielded wire 1610, the flexible flat is a wiring that transmits a control signal that is easily affected by electromagnetic noise. The cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various power sources that are not easily affected by electromagnetic noise can coexist and be arranged in the groove inner space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608.

The non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608, which is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment, is different from the conductive metal wiring groove 1605, which is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment described above. Various wiring for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, a twist pair cable for transmitting the control signal by the positive side wiring and the negative side wiring, and input to the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Various wirings to which detection signals from various sensors are transmitted cannot be routed by using the resin wiring groove 1608 itself.

Here, the flexible flat cable 1609 will be described. In the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data (control signals) are arranged in parallel to a sub-effect display device (not shown), and these plurality of flat conductors are coated with an insulator. Compared to ordinary round electric wiring, it has a thickness of about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of ordinary round electric wiring, and is flexible as described above. Of the flat both sides of the flat cable 1609, a shield wire 1610 woven in a mesh pattern is provided on the entire surface of the flat cable 1609, and the shield wire 1610 is covered with a transparent resin so as to have a special structure. The flexible flat cable 1609 is three-dimensionally bent by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 toward a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. On the upper end side, which is the left side of the strip-shaped main body 1609a having a predetermined width and long in the left-right direction, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba have a predetermined length and are exposed on the back surface side of the main body 1609a. A reinforcing plate 1609ca is formed on the surface side of the main body 1609a to reinforce the electrode 1609ba having a rectangular shape longer than the predetermined length of the electrodes 1609ba of a plurality of flat conductors exposed. On the other hand, on the lower end side of the main body 1609a, electrodes 1609bb of a plurality of flat conductors have a predetermined length on the back surface side of the main body 1609a and are exposed and arranged on the front surface side of the main body 1609a. A reinforcing plate 1609 bb for reinforcing the electrode 1609 bb having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the electrodes 1609 bb of a plurality of flat conductors having a thickness and being exposed is formed.

The electrodes 1609ba of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above, and are not shown. While the shielded wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (board ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the connector, the electrodes of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 1609a. The 1609bb is electrically connected to a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. The shielded wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground of the control board (board ground (GND)) via the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown).

A capacitor called a bypass capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown) is located between the power supply line and the board ground (GND) in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected. Is mounted, and by lowering the power supply impedance, the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. Further, a power supply line and a board ground (GND) in a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) covering the upper side of the back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub-effect display device (not shown) to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected. A capacitor called a decoupling capacitor, such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown), is mounted between them. By lowering the power supply impedance, noise resistance to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is achieved. The sex is improving.

The flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5. Through the wiring insertion notch 1608d formed in the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 passing between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering except for the display area. The back side of the liquid crystal panel in the sub-effect display device (not shown) that is drawn into the groove inner space, guided downward along the groove inner space, and is drawn into the substrate holder 1200 that is directly attached to the back surface of the game board 5. It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover that covers the upper side.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to the connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the effect display of the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the game board 5. A notch for wiring insertion formed in the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 having non-conductivity passing between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering the device 1600 except for the display area. It can be routed to the groove inner space formed in the resin wiring groove 1608 via 1608d. Further, as described above, in the effect display device 1600, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is covered with a metal back cover. As a result, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can function as a shield member capable of preventing electromagnetic noise entering toward the flexible flat cable 1609 in the passing area.

[Modification example]
The flexible flat cable 1609 provided with a shielded wire 1610 woven into a net on one surface is formed by bending a strip-shaped main body 1606a having a predetermined width in the left-right direction by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times. However, a shielded wire 1610 may be provided in which a strip-shaped main body 1606a is woven into a mesh on one side of a short flexible flat cable 1609'that has been folded once in a mountain fold or a valley fold. For example, when two boards are arranged in an environment affected by electromagnetic noise, a short flexible flat cable 1609'provided with a shielded wire 1610 in which a mesh is woven between the two boards on one surface is used. By electrically connecting, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. In this shielded wire 1610, the upper end side of the flexible flat cable 1609'is electrically connected to the ground (board ground (GND)) of one of the two boards, and the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 1609'is connected. It is electrically connected to the ground (board ground (GND)) of the other of the two boards.

Further, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 passes between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can function as a shield member capable of preventing electromagnetic noise entering toward the flexible flat cable 1609 in the area where the cable is located. Further, in this region, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shielded wire 1610 is formed so as to face the metal back cover of the staging display device 1600. Therefore, by combining mountain folds and valley folds of the flexible flat cable 1609 before and after this area, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 not provided with the shield wire 1610 in this area is combined with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. It may be formed so as to face each other, and the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610 may be formed so as to face the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. By doing so, the shield wire 1610 is provided in the area passing between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 that is not provided can prevent electromagnetic noise entering toward the flexible flat cable 1609 by a shield called a metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, and a shield wire 1610 is provided. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 can be shielded with a shielded wire 1610 to prevent electromagnetic noise from entering toward the flexible flat cable 1609.

Further, although the protective cover body 1601 covering the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 were configured separately, the protective cover body 1601 If it is made of non-conductive resin, the protective cover body 1601 and the resin wiring groove 1608 may be integrally molded to form the protective cover body 1601.

Further, the electrodes 1609ba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a of the flexible flat cable 1609 are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 described above. A plurality of shielded wires 1610 are electrically connected to the ground (board ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a connector (not shown), and are formed on the lower end side of the main body 1609a of the flexible flat cable 1609. The flat conductor electrode 1609bb is electrically connected to a control board connector provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the underside of the game board 5. At the same time, the shielded wire 1610 was electrically connected to the ground of the control board (board ground (GND)) via the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown). Therefore, for example, among the electrodes 1609ba of a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel, the flat conductors arranged on both ends may be electrically connected to the shielded wire 1610. Even with this configuration, the shielded wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (board ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The control board can be connected to the control board via the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It can be electrically connected to a ground (board ground (GND)).

Further, in the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel, but the flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) between the flat conductors. The flat conductors that transmit control signals and the flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) may be arranged alternately. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise immunity against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for a plurality of flat conductors that transmit control signals.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel, but the control signal which is particularly vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise (that is, easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise) is transmitted. The flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter referred to as "flat conductor vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise") is adjacent to the flat conductor vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise, so that it is adjacent to the substrate ground (GND) and electricity. The flat conductors that are connected to each other are arranged so that the flat conductors that are vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise are sandwiched and arranged by the flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). You may. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to the flat conductor which is vulnerable to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel, but as these plurality of flat conductors, in addition to the flat conductor for transmitting the control signal, In the case of being configured to include a flat conductor electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) and a flat conductor for supplying various power sources, the substrate ground (GND) and the power source are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. In this case, as this power supply, when the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, the resistance rises sharply and the overcurrent protection element such as a thermista that suppresses the current, or the resistance is small below the rated current and cuts off. An overcurrent protection circuit that shuts off the circuit when a current is reached (for example, a circuit that has a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. This polyswitch rapidly increases the resistance value from a specific temperature in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature. The main body generates heat, and this heat lowers the conductivity to cut off the current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and recovers.) It is preferable to do so. This is because, as described above, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a thickness of about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring. Because it is thin, it is possible to prevent a short circuit of the flexible flat cable 1609 by an overcurrent protection circuit or an overcurrent protection circuit when an overcurrent flows through the flat conductor that supplies power, and it is possible to ensure safety and damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[Other decorative devices]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the back-up effect unit 3400 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5. Here, a case where a light emitting effect unit 5000 is provided instead of the backside effect unit 3400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 253 to 259. FIG. 253 is a perspective view of the light emitting effect unit from the front, FIG. 254 is a perspective view of the light emitting effect unit from the back, and FIG. 255 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 256 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit disassembled and viewed from behind, FIG. 257 is a front view showing the arrangement relationship between the LED bare chip and the light guide plate, and FIG. 258 is arranged on the surface of the light guide plate. FIG. 259 is a front view showing a spread sheet, and FIG. 259 is a view (a) showing a state in which a flexible flat cable is electrically connected to a connector of an LED board, and is an enlarged view of a Z portion shown in (a). It is a figure (b) which shows the state which the insertion into the connector of the LED board of a flexible flat cable is normal, and it is the enlarged view of the Z part shown in (a), and it is the LED board of a flexible flat cable. It is a figure (c) which shows the abnormal state which the insertion into a connector is insufficient. In FIGS. 253 to 256 and 259, only the lower end side of the flexible flat cable is shown and other parts are omitted for the sake of readability of the drawings.

[Light emitting production unit]
As shown in FIGS. 253 to 258, the light emitting effect unit 5000 includes a light emitting effect main body 5010 having a circular shape, and a main body mounting portion 5020 having a T-shape for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part in the back box 3010. Light emission effect along the back surface side of the main body mounting portion 5020 Light emission effect A control signal output from the effect drive board 1720 is emitted in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above while being guided into the main body 5010. Flexible flat cable 5030 (FFC (Flexible Flat Cable)) to be transmitted to the main body 5010. The flexible flat cable is formed by repeating mountain folds and valley folds multiple times and is formed three-dimensionally. The conductor is coated with an insulator.)) And. Here, first, the light emitting effect main body 5010 will be described, and the method of assembling the main body mounting portion 5020, the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emitting effect unit 5000 will be described in order.

[Light emission effect body]
The light emitting effect main body 5010 is processed from a decorative body 5040 molded from a circular transparent resin and a thin circular transparent resin plate housed inside the decorative body 5040 and having a notch in a part on the upper side. The diffusion sheet 5050 to be molded and the guide molded from a transparent resin having a circular shape and being housed inside the decorative body 5040 in a state of being arranged on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 and having a notch in a part on the upper side. The light plate 5060, the LED substrate 5070 having a circular shape and being housed inside the decorative body 5040 in a state of being arranged on the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060 and having a notch in a part on the upper side, and the rear opening of the decorative body 5040. It is provided with a lid 5080 molded of a transparent resin having a circular shape having a notch on the upper side while closing the lid.

[Decorative body]
At the center of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 molded of a circular transparent resin, a convex portion 5040a that matches the outer shape of the character protrudes forward, and the character is printed on the entire surface of the convex portion 5040a. There is. Of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040, the outer peripheral portion of the convex portion 5040a excluding the entire surface on which the character of the convex portion 5040a is printed and the entire surface 5040x area of the decorative body 5040 excluding the convex portion 5040a are the world view of the character. A background pattern (not shown) with a design that shows is printed. Although the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is printed with a character or a background pattern, the light emission mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is emitted from the front of the light emitting effect unit 5000 (that is, the pachinko machine 1) in response to the light emission by the LED substrate 5070. It can be easily seen by the player who sits in front of the decoration body 5040, and can inform the player of the change in the light emitting mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040.

On the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040, a member accommodating recess 5040b is formed, which has a circular shape having a notch in a part of the upper surface and accommodates the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070, leaving the upper side thereof. ing. On the upper left side of the member accommodating recess 5040b when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from behind, a reverse arrangement preventing piece for preventing the front and back surfaces of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 from being inverted and accommodating. The 5040c is formed so as to project from the inner surface of the bottom of the member accommodating recess 5040b toward the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 with a length of the first distance dimension. Further, when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from behind, the positions of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 are restricted on the upper left, right, and lower sides of the member accommodating recess 5040b, and a lid that closes the member accommodating recess 5040b. The mounting boss hole 5040d for fixing the 5080 to the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 protrudes from the inner surface of the bottom of the member accommodating recess 5040b toward the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 with a length of the first distance dimension, respectively. (A total of three mounting boss holes 5040d). Further, on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y side of the decoration body 5040 when the decoration body 5040 is viewed from behind, mounting boss holes 5040e for fixing the main body mounting portion 5020 are provided at a second distance rearward from the back surface 5040y of the decoration body 5040. It has a length of 2 and is formed so as to protrude (a total of two mounting boss holes 5040e).

[LED board]
In the LED substrate 5070 having a circular shape having a notch in the upper part, the notch 5070a is formed at a position corresponding to the reverse arrangement preventing piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040, and the decorative body 5040 is formed. Through holes 5070b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recesses 5040b.

A plurality of LED bare chips are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. This LED bare chip (also referred to as "LED element") is enclosed in a surface mount type, chip-on-board type, bullet type or the like package, and is an extremely small electronic component. In this embodiment, the LED package in which the LED bare chip is enclosed is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. We adopted a configuration that is directly mounted on the LED.

Examples of the method of electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to the predetermined electrode of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 include wire bonding, flip chip bonding, and the like. In this embodiment, flip chip bonding is used. It was adopted. In this flip chip bonding, the electrode of the LED bare chip and the predetermined electrode of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 are not electrically connected by using a wire as in wire bonding, but are bumped to the electrode of the LED bare chip. A protrusion called a protrusion is formed and electrically connected to a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. This connection portion is reinforced with solder, resin, or the like.

On the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, five LED rows in which LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a predetermined number of rows separated by a predetermined distance dimension are provided in five stages in the vertical direction, and the first stage from the bottom 5070c1. Six LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction on the fifth row 5070c5 from the bottom, and LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction on the second row 5070c2 from the bottom and the fourth row 5070c4 from the bottom. In the third row 5070c3 from the bottom, eight LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction.

The LED row of the third stage 5070c3 is arranged on the center line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. The third stage is on the intermediate line parallel to the center line and the upper side of the LED board 5070, and the fourth stage is one above the LED row of 5070c3. The LED row of 5070c4 is arranged. Then, on an intermediate line parallel to this center line and a straight line parallel to this center line and passing through the lowest point of the circumference of the LED substrate 5070, and passing through almost the middle point and parallel to this center line and the above-mentioned straight line. The LED row of the second stage 5070c2, which is one lower than the LED row of the third stage 5070c3, is arranged in the third stage. One of the LED rows of the fourth stage 5070c4 on the vertical straight line passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the first LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the third stage 5070c3. The second LED bare chip 5075 is arranged, the first LED bare chip 5075 is arranged in the LED row of the second stage 5070c2, and the eight LED bare chips 5075 and the fourth stage of the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 are arranged. The seven LED bare chips 5075 in the LED row of 5070c4 are arranged so as not to line up in a row in the vertical direction, and the eight LED bare chips 5075 in the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 and the LED row 7 of the second stage 5070c2. The two LED bare chips 5075 are arranged so as not to be lined up in a row in the vertical direction. The seven LED bare chips 5075 in the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4 and the seven LED bare chips 5075 in the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction.

On the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5, which is on the upper side of the LED board 5070 and is one above the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4 below the two through holes 5070b. Is arranged, and the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 which is one lower than the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 is arranged above one through hole 5070b on the lowest side of the circumference of the LED board 5070. Has been done. A straight line in the vertical direction passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the first LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4 and one from the left side of the LED row of the second stage 5070c2. The vertical straight line passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the second LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 coincides, and the first LED from the left side of the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 is on this straight line. The bare chip 5075 is arranged, and the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 is arranged, and the seven LED bare chips 5075 and the fifth stage 5070c5 of the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c3 are arranged. The six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row are arranged so as not to line up in a row in the vertical direction, and the seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 and the six LED rows of the first stage 5070c1. The LED bare chips 5075 are arranged so as not to be lined up in a row in the vertical direction. The first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 and the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 are arranged on the above-mentioned straight line. Further, since the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 is also arranged, the six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 and the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 Of these, the second to seventh six LED bare chips 5075 and the six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 are arranged side by side in a row in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, a connector 5070d for transmitting a control signal for controlling a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is mounted. The connector 5070d is electrically connected by inserting the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 5030. The upper end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into a connector (not shown) of the staging drive board 1720 and electrically connected. The control signal output from the effect drive board 1720 is transmitted to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emitting mode of the LED bare chip 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is controlled. Will be done.

The front surface (mounting surface) 5070x and the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 are coated with a green resist liquid except for various lands and through holes. The surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is further printed entirely by white silk printing except for various lands and through holes. That is, the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white, while the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is green, and the colors of the front surface and the back surface are different even though they are the same substrate. It's different. The reason why the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is white is that the light emitted by the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is refracted by other members. Surface (mounting surface) of LED board 5070 The surface (mounting surface) of LED board 5070 functions as a reflective sheet that can efficiently re-reflect the returned light forward when returning toward 5070x. This is to give it to the 5070x.

[Modification example]
The LED board 5070 drives a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 by inputting a control signal from the effect drive board 1720 via the flexible flat cable 5030. Was there. That is, in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect drive board 1720 is controlled from an electronic component for LED control (for example, an IC such as an LED driver or a gradation control driver) mounted on the peripheral control unit 1500. The signal was output to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030. The LED control electronic component mounted on the effect drive board 1720 may be configured to be mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. Since the connector 5070d is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, any electronic component for LED control having a height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) comparable to the height of the connector 5070d. Even if the electronic component for LED control is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, it can be used as it is without changing the dimensions of the decorative body 5040 and the lid 5080. This can contribute to the miniaturization of the staging drive board 1720. Further, by configuring in this way, the control signal is output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030 to drive the LED bare chip 5075. You can also.

Further, although flip-chip bonding is adopted as a method of electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, wire bonding may be adopted instead of flip-chip bonding. good.

[Light guide plate]
The light guide plate 5060 molded of a transparent resin having a circular shape having a notch on the upper side has a notch 5060a formed at a position corresponding to the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. At the same time, through holes 5060b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recesses 5040b of the decorative body 5040.

The back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state of being in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. On the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, a notch is provided in a part on the upper side so as to cover the LED bare chip 5075 at a position corresponding to a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. It has a cylindrical shape (hereinafter referred to as "semi-cylindrical shape"), and the axis of this semi-cylindrical shape is tilted slightly downward with respect to the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, so that the curved surface of the semi-cylindrical shape is tilted diagonally. The incident recesses 5060c are formed respectively. The bottom of the incident recess 5060c does not penetrate the surface 5070x of the light guide plate 5060 and remains in the light guide plate 5060. When the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state of being in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the LED bare chip 5075 is arranged on the axis of the semi-cylinder. At the same time, the LED bare chip 5075 is enclosed in the incident recess 5060c.

The back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 has a flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape formed from the opening side of the incident recess 5060c in a section from the center point through which the axis of the semi-cylinder passes to the position of concentric circles separated by a predetermined distance dimension. A notch is formed in the upper part of the flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape, and the flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape and the opening side of the incident recess 5060c are similar to each other.

When the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 exceeds the section formed by the flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape from the center point through which the axis of the semi-cylinder is passed, a prism pattern having a substantially triangular cross section is formed concentrically. A prism portion 5060e is formed in which the distance between the prism patterns having a substantially triangular cross section increases as the distance from the center point through which the axis of the semi-cylinder passes increases. The distance dimension in the left-right direction of the prism portion 5060e is the distance dimension of a straight line connecting the center points of adjacent LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 (hereinafter, "block reference distance in the left-right direction"). It may be described as "dimensions"). On the other hand, the vertical distance dimension of the prism portion 5060e is one below the step of the LED bare chip 5075 enclosed in the incident recess 5060c from the notch formed in the upper part of the flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape. It is the distance dimension to the prism pattern of the final stage passing through the center point of the nearest LED bare chip arranged in the stage (hereinafter, may be referred to as "block reference distance dimension in the vertical direction").

On the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, an incident recess 5060c, a flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape, and a prism portion 5060e are located at positions corresponding to a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. A single prism block 5060f composed of the above is formed and serves as a prism surface. The distance dimension in the left-right direction of the single prism block 5060f is the block reference distance dimension in the left-right direction, and the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the single prism block 5060f is the block reference distance dimension in the vertical direction. Of the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x, the one closest to the left and right outer peripheral portions of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 (LED row of the first stage 5070c1 to the LED of the fifth stage 5070c5). The left side of the LED bare chip 5075, which is the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the row, and the LED bare chip 5075, which is the sixth LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED rows of the first stage 5070c1 and 5 cross sections, and the LED rows of the second stage 5070c2 and the fourth stage 5070c4. 7th LED bare chip 5075, 8th LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the 3rd stage LED row), the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the single prism block 5060f is not the block reference distance dimension in the left-right direction. The final stage prism pattern is formed by extending to the outer peripheral end of the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060.

On the other hand, a plurality of single prism blocks 5060f are formed on the front surface 5060x side of the light guide plate 5060 and on the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, whereas the surface is flat without any processing. ing.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is mounted on the surface of the LED substrate 5070. (Mounting surface) A configuration that is directly mounted on the 5070x is adopted. As a result, as the plate thickness of the light guide plate, the surface mount type, the chip-on-board type, the bullet type, etc. are compared with the plate thickness of the light guide plate when the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. It can be made smaller by the amount of the depth distance dimension in the package of the above, and the size of the depth distance dimension of the light emitting effect main body 5010 of the light emitting effect unit 5000 is secured larger and contributes to the three-dimensional modeling of the light emitting effect main body 5010. be able to. Since the LED bare chip is an extremely delicate electronic component, even if the impact caused by the player hitting the door frame 3 or the like is directly transmitted to the door frame 3, the light emitting effect unit 5000 provided in the game board 5 is struck. It is unlikely that the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 will be damaged by the impact caused by the impact.

[Modification example]
In this embodiment, the LED package in which the LED bare chip is enclosed is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the LED substrate 5070. ) A configuration that is directly mounted on the 5070x is adopted, but if the depth distance dimension of the light emitting effect main body 5010 of the light emitting effect unit 5000 does not interfere with the three-dimensional modeling of the light emitting effect main body 5010, the side type is used instead of the LED bare chip. The LED package having the surface mount type of the above may be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. In this case, the dimensional distance of the single prism block 5060f composed of the incident recess 5060c, the flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape, and the prism portion 5060e becomes large, and the plate thickness of the light guide plate also becomes large. The light emitting surface of the LED package having the side type surface mount type does not face the diffusion sheet 5050, but faces downward of the incident recess 5060c, and the light emitted from this light emitting surface passes from the prism portion 5060e via the prism portion 5060e. Proceed to the front diffusion sheet 5050.

[Diffusion sheet]
The diffusion sheet 5050 formed by processing from a thin-walled circular transparent resin plate having a notch on the upper side is notched at a position corresponding to the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. Along with the formation of the portion 5050a, a through hole 5050b is formed at a position corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. The back surface of the diffusion sheet 5050 is coated with a white paint and processed into a satin finish having fine irregularities, and light from a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. When the light is incident through the light guide plate, the incident light can be diffused.

The back surface 5050y of the diffusion sheet 5050 is housed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state of being in contact with the surface surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 molded from a transparent resin. The back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state of being in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. As described above, on the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, an incident recess is provided so as to cover the LED bare chip 5075 at a position corresponding to a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. 5060c are formed respectively.

As described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, five LED rows in which LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a predetermined number of rows separated by a predetermined distance dimension are provided in five stages in the vertical direction. The LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the stage are each enclosed in the incident recess 5060c formed on the back surface 5060y side of the corresponding light guide plate 5060. When the light emitting surface of the LED bare chip 5075 emits light, the space of the incident recess 5060c is brightly illuminated, so that the LED of each stage of the LED row enclosed in each incident recess 5060c is compared with the region where the incident recess 5060c is not formed. The light from the bare chip 5075 passes through the light guide plate 5060 molded of a transparent resin, exits from the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060, and the brightness of the light emitted from the space of each incident recess 5060c is increased. Then, the region where the space of each incident recess 5060c exists is arranged like a point light source, and it is difficult to uniformly illuminate the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060.

Therefore, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 coated with a white paint and having a long band shape in the left-right direction are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of each stage. At the same time, a diffusion region 5050d is formed in which the white paint is sprayed in dots on the regions other than these five regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 to diffuse the light. The portion coated with the white paint becomes an opaque area in which the rear or the front cannot be visually recognized via the diffusion sheet 5050. No paint is applied to the surface 5050x side of the diffusion sheet 5050.

Specifically, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, a white band region 5050c1 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 of the LED substrate 5070, and the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 of the LED substrate 5070. A white band region 5050c2 is formed at a position corresponding to the above, and a white band region 5050c3 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 of the LED board 5070, which corresponds to the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4 of the LED board 5070. The white band region 5050c4 is formed at the position corresponding to the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 of the LED substrate 5070, and the white band region 5050c5 is formed at the position corresponding to the LED row.

The vertical distance dimensions of the white band region 5050c1 to 5050c5 have the same distance dimension. For example, the vertical distance dimension of the white band region 5050c1 is at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1. Each of them has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape constituting the single prism block 5060f of the above-mentioned light guide plate 5060. Further, among the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white band regions 5050c1 and 5050c5 have the same distance dimensions, and for example, the left-right direction of the white band region 5050c1. Has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape constituting the single prism block 5060f of the above-mentioned light guide plate 5060 formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1. are doing. Further, among the left-right distance dimensions of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the left-right distance dimensions of the white band regions 5050c2 and 5050c4 have the same distance dimensions, and for example, the left-right direction of the white band region 5050c2. Has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape constituting the single prism block 5060f of the above-mentioned light guide plate 5060 formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the second stage 5070c2. are doing. Further, among the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white band region 5050c3 are the above-mentioned light guide plates 5060 formed at positions corresponding to the LED rows of the third stage 5070c3. It has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape constituting the single prism block 5060f.

In this way, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a long band shape in the left-right direction coated with the white paint are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of each stage. By doing so, the light emitted from each incident recess 5060c can be refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 and directed toward the light guide plate 5060, so that the region where the space of each incident recess 5060c exists is like a point light source. It is possible to soften the state of light emission.

Further, since the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white as described above, it is refracted in the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 and passed through the light guide plate 5060 to pass through the surface of the LED substrate 5070. (Mounting surface) The light returned toward 5070x can be efficiently refracted forward again.

Further, the light emitted from the prism portion 5060e constituting the single prism block 5060f is diffused by the diffusion region 5050d. That is, the light emitted from each incident recess 5060c is refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 to soften the state in which the region where the space of each incident recess 5060c exists toward the light guide plate 5060 emits light like a point light source. At the same time, the light returned toward the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is refracted by the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the white LED substrate 5070 and efficiently emitted forward again, and the emitted light is a prism. Since the light can be diffused by the diffusion region 5050d through the portion 5060e, it can contribute to a mode in which the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 is uniformly illuminated. This can contribute to uniformly illuminating the surface (surface 5060x) of the light guide plate 5060 facing the diffusion sheet 5050, so that it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort due to the light emission effect of the decorative body 5040. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the light emission effect.

[Cover]
The lid 5080 molded of a transparent resin having a circular shape having a notch on the upper side has a notch 5080a formed at a position corresponding to the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. At the same time, through holes 5080b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recesses 5040b of the decorative body 5040.

Further, the lid 5080 is formed in a state where long ventilation holes 5080c in the left-right direction are aligned vertically and horizontally, and the flexible flat cable 5030 is located at a position corresponding to the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. A wiring opening 5080d for passing through is formed.

Further, on the left and right sides of the center of the back surface 5080y side of the lid body 5080 when the lid body 5080 is viewed from behind, mounting boss holes 5080e for fixing the main body mounting portion 5020 are a third distance dimension from the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080 toward the rear. It has a length of 2 and is formed so as to protrude (a total of 2 mounting boss holes 5080e). The outer diameters of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 are the two mounting bosses formed on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010 described above. It has the same outer diameter as the hole 5040e.

[Main body mounting part]
The main body mounting portion 5020 having a T-shape for mounting the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part in the back box 3010 has a T-shaped groove portion in which side walls are formed rearward except for the upper left and right ends of the T-shaped flat plate. Two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, which have a symmetrical shape and reinforce the base body 5020a along the side walls of the base body 5020a except for the upper side and the lower side of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. It includes a 5020b and a metal plate 5020c that reinforces the base body 5020a along the upper side wall of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a.

At the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, there are positions corresponding to two mounting boss holes 5040e formed on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5040, and the light emitting effect main body 5010. Through holes 5020d are formed at positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080. Further, when the base body 5020a is viewed from the rear, a plurality of metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and a plurality of metal plates 5020c are fixed to the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. The mounting boss holes 5020e of the above are formed so as to project rearward from the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a with a length of a fourth distance dimension (a total of 11 mounting bosses). Hole 5020e). The outer diameter of the mounting boss hole 5020e is the outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080 described above (the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010). The outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5040e formed in the above) is about two times smaller.

The two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b attached to the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a have two formed on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010. Through holes 5020ba are formed at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 5040e and positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 of the light emitting effect main body 5010. At the same time, through holes 5020bb are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. Further, the metal plate 5020c attached to the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a penetrates at a position corresponding to a plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove. Holes 5020ca are formed respectively.

Further, when the base body 5020a is viewed from the rear, a flexible flat cable 5030 is attached to the bottom portion of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a and the lower side wall of the base body 5020a connected to the bottom portion. A wiring opening 5020f through which the wire is passed is formed. Although not shown, a plurality of through holes for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part in the back box 3010 are formed at the bottom of the T-shaped groove portion formed in the base body 5020a.

Further, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via wiring (not shown), and the grounds of various substrates provided in the game board 5 are provided. It is the same ground (GND) as (board ground (GND)).

[Flexible flat cable]
In the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal output from the effect drive board 1720 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are arranged in parallel, and these are arranged in parallel. Multiple flat conductors are covered with an insulator, and compared to ordinary round electric wiring, it is about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of ordinary round electric wiring. Although not shown, it is bent three-dimensionally by repeating mountain folds and valley folds multiple times from the effect drive board 1720 to the light emission effect body 5010, and further, the body mounting portion 5020. Along the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the above, pass between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c, and fold the mountain into the light emitting effect main body 5010. It is formed three-dimensionally by being bent by repeating valley folds multiple times, and is formed on the back side of the main body 5030a, although not shown on the upper end side of the strip-shaped main body 5030a having a predetermined width and long in the left-right direction. An electrode having a predetermined length and being arranged barely, having a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body 5030a, and having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the electrodes of a plurality of exposed flat conductors. While a reinforcing plate is formed to reinforce the main body, electrodes 5030bb of a plurality of flat conductors have a predetermined length and are exposed on the back surface side of the main body 5030a on the lower end side of the main body 5030a. A reinforcing plate 5030 bb is formed on the surface side of the main body 5030a to reinforce the electrode 5030 bb having a rectangular shape longer than the predetermined length of the exposed electrodes 5030 bb of a plurality of flat conductors. ..

The electrodes of a plurality of flat conductors (not shown) formed on the upper end side of the main body 5030a are electrically connected to the connectors (not shown) provided on the effect drive board 1720, whereas they are formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a. The electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors to be formed are electrically connected to the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 of the light emitting effect main body 5010.

A capacitor called a bypass capacitor, such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown), is located between the power supply line and the board ground (GND) in the effect drive board 1720 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected. Is mounted, and by lowering the power supply impedance, the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. Further, between the power supply line and the board ground (GND) in the LED board 5070 of the light emitting effect main body 5010 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected, a decoupling capacitor (not shown), a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown), etc. A capacitor called a decap is mounted, and by lowering the power supply impedance, the noise resistance to electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved.

As described above, since the flexible flat cable 5030 is three-dimensionally bent and routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100. There is also a part where the cable 5030 is routed. As described above, the game ball B is polished in the island equipment of the game hall or rubs against each other in the circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged to emit electromagnetic noise. .. Therefore, when the game ball B flows down the game area 5a of the game board 5, the back surface of the game panel 1100 and its vicinity are in an environment susceptible to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. ing. The flexible flat cable 5030 that transmits the control signal to the light emitting effect main body 5010 is vulnerable to noise and has troubles due to electromagnetic noise (for example, regular data is changed to other data and garbled, or is a signal that is not originally output. Nevertheless, it can be mentioned that it becomes an output signal, etc.), so it is easily affected by electromagnetic noise, but as mentioned above, it is near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is susceptible to electromagnetic noise. There is also a part that is drawn around.

Therefore, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 facing the source side of the electromagnetic wave noise in the width direction (hereinafter, referred to as "end end sides" may be described. The electrodes of the flat conductor of.) Are used as a ground (GND) line as a power supply line so that the power supply line is arranged together. As a result, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors, the electrodes other than the electrodes of the flat conductors on both the end ends are removed from the game ball B by the ground (GND) line which is the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends. By arranging a ground (GND) line between the source of electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge and other electrodes (electrodes containing control signals) other than the electrodes of the flat conductors on both sides of the end, It is possible to improve the noise resistance to electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to other electrodes (electrodes including a line for transmitting a control signal) other than the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends. ..

Further, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 are set as the ground (GND) line as the power supply line so that the power supply line is arranged together, and the end end. A power supply line (for example, a + 5V line) is arranged on an electrode adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductors on both sides. Since the power supply line (for example, + 5V line) is resistant to noise and is not easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise, it may be arranged on the electrode close to the electrodes on both ends of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030. preferable. Of the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductors on both sides of the end, the electrodes adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the onemost end side and the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductor on the other end side. A power supply line is arranged on one of the electrodes adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the onemost end side and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the other end side.

Further, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 are both ground (GND) lines, and the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends of the end are shown. However, in the portion routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, two metal L-shaped plates are formed along the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020 of the light emitting effect main body 5010. It is routed so as to pass between the 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. That is, in the flexible flat cable 503, the portion routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is easily affected by electromagnetic noise, is shielded by two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. , It is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors coated with an insulator. The color of this insulator is white, and the entire flexible flat cable 5030 is white. The reason for adopting the white color is that the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, and is therefore mounted on various decorative boards provided in the back unit 3000. By functioning as a reflector that reflects the light emitted by the LED by itself, it suppresses the light that leaks to the rear of the back unit 3000 as much as possible, and contributes to the reduction of the effect of the light emission effect by the light emitted by the LED. be.

[Modification example]
In order to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, the power lines are connected to both of the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends. Although the ground (GND) line is used as the power supply line so as to be arranged, a power supply line (for example, + 5V line) may be used as the power supply line so that the power supply line is arranged instead of the ground (GND) line. This is because the power supply line (for example, + 5V line) is resistant to noise and is not easily affected by electromagnetic noise. In this case, among the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends, the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the onemost end side and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the other end side. A ground (GND) line is arranged on one of the electrodes, or both the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the onemost end side and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the other end side. ing.

Further, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, the electrodes of the flat conductors on both end ends are routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, and the main body mounting portion of the light emitting effect main body 5010 is provided. It is routed along the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the 5020 so as to pass between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. However, at least one of the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed along the metal L-shaped plate 5020b of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b. It may be done. In this way, in the flexible flat cable 503, the portion of the flexible flat cable 503 that is routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is susceptible to electromagnetic noise, is routed along the metal L-shaped plate 5020b, so that the metal L-shaped plate is routed. It is shielded by 5020b and can contribute to the improvement of noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel, but the flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) between the flat conductors. The flat conductors that transmit control signals and the flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) may be arranged alternately. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise immunity against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for a plurality of flat conductors that transmit control signals.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel, but the control signal which is particularly vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise (that is, easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise) is transmitted. The flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter referred to as "flat conductor vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise") is adjacent to the flat conductor vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise, so that it is adjacent to the substrate ground (GND) and electricity. The flat conductors that are connected to each other are arranged so that the flat conductors that are vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise are sandwiched and arranged by the flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). You may. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance to the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for the flat conductor which is vulnerable to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel, but as these plurality of flat conductors, in addition to the flat conductor for transmitting the control signal, In the case of being configured to include a flat conductor electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) and a flat conductor for supplying various power sources, the substrate ground (GND) and the power source are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. In this case, as this power supply, when the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, the resistance rises sharply and the overcurrent protection element such as a thermista that suppresses the current, or the resistance is small below the rated current and cuts off. An overcurrent protection circuit that shuts off the circuit when a current is reached (for example, a circuit that has a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. This polyswitch rapidly increases the resistance value from a specific temperature in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature. The main body generates heat, and this heat reduces the conductivity to cut off the current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and recovers.) It is preferable to do so. This is because, as described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a thickness of about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring. Because it is thin, it is possible to prevent a short circuit of the flexible flat cable 5030 by an overcurrent protection circuit or an overcurrent protection circuit when an overcurrent flows through the flat conductor that supplies power, and it is possible to ensure safety and damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[How to assemble the light emitting unit]
Next, a method of assembling the light emitting staging unit 5000 will be briefly described. First, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 are arranged in order according to the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 and the mounting boss hole 5040d, and finally the member. A lid 5080 that closes the accommodating recess 5040b is arranged. In this state, the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 and the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 are arranged on the same plane to be flush with each other, and the end surface of the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c and the end surface of the mounting boss hole 5040d are lids. The above-mentioned first distance dimension is preset so as not to protrude from the back surface 5080y of the body 5080 and to fit between the front surface 5080x and the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed from the through hole 5080b formed on the back surface 5080y side of the lid body 5080 toward the mounting boss hole 5040d and fixed. As a result, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 are arranged and accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from the front.

Subsequently, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plates 5020c are formed with a plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020. A metal pan screw (not shown) is screwed from the through holes 5020bb formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b toward the mounting boss hole 5020e and fixed, and is made of metal (not shown). The pan screw is screwed from the through hole 5020ca formed in the metal plate 5020c toward the mounting boss hole 5020e and fixed. The end faces of the mounting boss holes 5020e do not protrude from the back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b, and the metal plates 5020c, and the front and back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plates 5020c. The above-mentioned fourth distance dimension is preset so as to fit between and.

Subsequently, the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 through the wiring opening 5080d formed in the lid 5080. Then, the upper end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is passed through the wiring opening 5020f formed in the main body mounting portion 5020. The method of attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED substrate 5070 will be described later.

Subsequently, the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020 is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 5040e formed on the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 and the mounting boss hole 5080e formed on the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080. A metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed from the through holes 5020ba formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b toward the mounting boss holes 5040e and 5080e to fix them. The above description is made so that the end faces of the mounting boss holes 5040e and 5080e do not protrude from the back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and fit between the front and back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b. The second distance dimension and the third distance dimension are preset.

Subsequently, a flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c along the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020. The assembly of the light emitting effect unit 5000 is completed by routing it so that it passes through.

Incidentally, conventionally, a main control board that controls the progress of a game and a game profit, a sub control board that controls an effect to be executed along with the progress of a game, a board such as an image control board that controls the display of an image display device, etc. Is arranged on the back side, and a gaming machine in which various wiring members are routed around has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051) and FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall to the game machine are attracted to the game machine because the game balls are charged with static electricity by rubbing against each other when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the gaming ball for various wiring.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the LED board]

Here, a method of attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED substrate 5070 will be described with reference to FIG. 259. The electrodes 5030bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 and inserted all the way. It is electrically connected.

The electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not normally inserted all the way into the connector 5070d, so that the electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors and the plurality of flat conductors are formed. Poor contact may occur between the electrode 5030bb of the above and the electrode of the corresponding connector 5070d.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 259 (a), on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, electrodes 5030bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are attached to the connector 5070d. Near the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, near the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) so as to be a mark for normal insertion and insertion. A long solid guideline G4U extending linearly in the left-right direction (upper and outer) and a lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). To reinforce the long solid guideline G4L extending linearly in the left-right direction (near the lower outside near the corresponding position) and the electrodes 5030bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030. A solid guideline G4V extending in a straight line that matches the vertical straight line of the left end side 5030 cba of the reinforcing plate 5030 cab is printed by silk printing.

No through hole is formed in the region where the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 is arranged. This is because the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, so that even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed, the flat type of the exposed flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed. This is to prevent the conductor from being short-circuited due to the through hole.

[Relationship between flexible flat cable reinforcing plate and connector]
When inserting the electrodes 5030bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the flat type is used. The electrode 5030bb of the conductor faces the electrode of the connector 5070d and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable 5030, whereas the reinforcing plate 5030ca for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb is on the front side of the flexible flat cable 5030. .. As a result, the electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are normally inserted to the back of the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 259 (b), the left end side 5030 cba of the reinforcing plate 5030 bb and the guideline G4V are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap in the vertical direction and overlap. It should be noted that the electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not inserted all the way into the connector 5070d provided on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, that is, the insertion amount ( When the push-in amount) is insufficient, as shown in FIG. 259 (c), the left end side 5030 cab of the reinforcing plate 5030 bb for reinforcing the electrode 5030 bb is separated from the guideline G4V by the insertion shortage amount SRT. As described above, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the operator attaches the electrodes 5030bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. When the electrode 5030bb is inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the connector 5070d, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode 5030bb is normally inserted all the way to the back of the connector 5070d. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the efficiency of the confirmation work.

It should be noted that the electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not normally inserted to the back of the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. In the state of being inserted diagonally, the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a cannot be visually recognized by covering the guideline G4U extending linearly in the left-right direction, and the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a extends linearly in the left-right direction. It will be in a state of having an inclination with respect to the guideline G4L. In this way, the electrodes 5030bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 by the guidelines G4U, G4L and the reinforcing plate 5030cc. It can be easily visually determined whether or not the connector 5070d is normally inserted all the way to the back. As a result, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the operator attaches the electrodes 5030bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. When inserted into the mounted connector 5070d, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode 5030bb is normally inserted all the way into the connector 5070d. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the efficiency of the confirmation work.

[Modification example]
In addition, it extends linearly in the left-right direction in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the upper side and the outer side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). Long solid line guideline G4U and the lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side and outer side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4L extending linearly was printed by silk printing, but the inside of the rectangular shape area with the guideline G4U as the upper side and the guideline G4L as the lower side may be solidly printed by silk printing. .. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the solid-painted rectangular area can function as the guideline G4U, and the lower side of the solid-painted rectangular area can function as the guideline G4L. Further, when the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed, the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is exposed. The back surface (solder surface) of the LED substrate 5070 covered with the resist is exposed without exposing the copper foil surface of the LED substrate 5070, which prevents the resist from peeling off due to the peeling of the silk print in the solidly painted rectangular area. It is possible to prevent the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 from being short-circuited.

Further, it extends linearly in the left-right direction in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the upper side and the outer side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). Long solid line guideline G4U and the lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side and outer side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4L extending linearly was printed by silk printing, but the back side of the LED substrate 5070 corresponding to the rectangular area with the guideline G4U as the upper side and the guideline G4L as the lower side and the inside of the rectangular area. (Solder surface) A foil removal region may be formed on the copper foil surface of 5070y. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the rectangular area from which the foil has been removed can function as the guideline G4U, and the lower side of the rectangular area from which the foil has been removed can function as the guideline G4L. Further, when the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed and the resist of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is exposed. Even if it is peeled off, the copper foil surface does not exist in the first place, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the LED substrate 5070 is exposed, so that it is possible to prevent the flat conductor of the exposed flexible flat cable 5030 from short-circuiting. can.

Further, it extends linearly in the left-right direction in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the upper side and the outer side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). Long solid line guideline G4U and the lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side and outer side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The guideline G4L, which is a long solid line extending linearly, was printed by silk printing. However, by removing the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the guideline G4U , G4L may be formed, or when the resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the guidelines G4U and G4L are formed by not applying the resist liquid to a part of the region. You may.

Further, after the electrodes 5030bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are normally inserted into the connector 5070d on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700, the flexible flat cable The electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the 5030 are disconnected from the connector 5070d, or the electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030. The flexible flat cable 5030 is attached to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700 in order to prevent a short circuit between the respective electrodes 5030bb and the electrodes of the corresponding connector 5070d, which are slanted and come into contact with other adjacent electrodes. A fixing seal having a long rectangular shape in the vertical direction for fixing may be attached. In this case, as an area for attaching the fixed seal to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700, a place slightly outward from the position corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal, for example, in the shape of a hook bracket (“)”. The guidelines (which may be figures such as lines and symbols) may be printed and formed by silk printing, respectively, or the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700. A guideline in the shape of a hook bracket (“) (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed by removing the above, or the resist liquid may be applied to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700. In this case, a guideline in the shape of brackets (“) (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed by not applying a part of the area with the resist solution. The flexible flat cable 5030 is an LED substrate with a fixed seal. By fixing to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the 50700, the posture of the flexible flat cable 5030 can be fixed.

Further, it extends linearly in the left-right direction in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the upper side and the outer side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). Long solid line guideline G4U and the lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side and outer side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The guideline G4L, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the vertical direction of the left end side 5030 cba of the reinforcing plate 5030 bb for reinforcing the electrodes 5030 bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030. A straight line guideline G4V that matches a straight line was formed on the LED substrate 5070, but instead of the solid line, a one-point chain line or a two-point chain line may be used, and the guideline G4U and G4L are inserted. It may be an arrow line indicating a direction, or for the guideline G4V, it may be an arrow indicating the position of the left end side 5030 cba of the reinforcing plate 5030 cc.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the light emitting effect unit 5000 of FIG. 255 is provided as a decorative member. The light emitting effect unit 5000 includes an LED substrate 5070 of FIG. 255 as a substrate, a light guide plate 5060 of FIG. 255 as a light guide member, a diffusion sheet 5050 of FIG. 255 as a transparent member, and a decorative body 5040 of FIG. 255 as a decorative body. .. The LED substrate 5070 is equipped with the LED bare chip 5075 of FIG. 255 as a light emitting means. The light guide plate 5060 is arranged in front of the LED substrate 5070 and can emit the light emitted by the LED bare chip 5075 forward. The diffusion sheet 5050 is arranged in front of the light guide plate 5060. The decorative body 5040 is arranged in front of the diffusion sheet 5050. The diffusion sheet 5050 has five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a long band shape in the left-right direction coated with white paint on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 of FIG. 258 as an opaque region at least at a position corresponding to the LED bare chip 5075. Is formed.

As described above, the light emitted by the LED bare chip 5075, which is a light emitting means, is emitted to the diffusion sheet 5050, which is a transparent member, via the light guide plate 5060, which is a light guide member, but to the diffusion sheet 5050, which is a transparent member. Is formed with five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 coated with a white paint on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, which is an opaque region, at a position corresponding to the LED bare chip 5075 which is a light emitting means and has a long band shape in the left-right direction. Therefore, the position where the LED bare chip 5075, which is a light emitting means, is mounted is applied with a white paint on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, which is an opaque region that does not shine brightly in the decorative body 5040, which is a decorative body like a point light source. It is softened by five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a long band shape in the left-right direction. This can contribute to uniformly illuminating the surface 5060x, which is the surface of the light guide plate 5060, which faces the diffusion sheet 5050, which is a transparent member. It is difficult to give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the light emission effect.

[Light emission from the back of the pachinko machine]
Conventionally, the back side of the pachinko machine or the like is only equipped with a control board or the like and is not a part to be recognized by the player, so that no particular device has been taken except for measures against fraud. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 of this example adopts a novel configuration which has not been conventionally used so that various work efficiencies on the back side and the like of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Hereinafter, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 265.

FIG. 260 is a side view schematically showing the light from the light emitting ornament in the standby position when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, and FIG. 261 is the appearance position when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side. It is a side view schematically showing the light from a light emitting decoration body, FIG. 262 is a view showing a back-rear decorative substrate provided with a plurality of holes, and FIG. 263 is a view showing a light emitting region on the back surface side of a pachinko machine. FIG. 264 is a perspective view showing a light emitting region on the side surface side when the gaming board is viewed from the front left, and FIG. 265 is a perspective view showing the light emitting region on the side surface side when the gaming board is viewed from the rear left. Is.

(About the light from the luminous decoration)
The game board 5 of this example is provided with an effect display device 1600 having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image, and is visually recognized from the front side around the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is provided with a plurality of luminous ornaments. Further, the back unit 3000 is provided with a back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box shape whose front is open and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, whereas the various units having the light emitting decoration are located inside the back box 3010 and in front of the effect display device 1600. It is attached.

As the light emitting decorative body of this example, the back upper front rotating decoration body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back upper rear decorative body 3451, the back upper movable decorative body 3110 and the like are provided, and these light emitting decorative bodies are provided. The LED mounted on the above may emit light as a part of the effect when the symbol is variablely displayed, or as a decoration of the game board 5 when the symbol is not variablely displayed.

First, the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421 will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. As described in detail above, when visually recognized from the front side of the game board 5, the back-up front decoration body 3421 of the back-up effect unit 3400 is provided on the upper side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the back-up front decoration is provided. At the position on the center front side of the body 3421, the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 is attached. More specifically, the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom, and is composed of a non-translucent portion and a translucent lens portion. In addition, the back upper front decoration body 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back upper front rotation decoration body 3410 stacked in the center in the left-right direction, and the petals on the rear side are the petals on the front side. It is formed in a shape that is rotated so as to be located between the two, and there is almost no non-transmissive part, and almost the entire part is a translucent lens part. The "translucent lens portion" is a portion having a lens-cut shape that bends light, and makes the light emitting decoration more brilliant when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 260, on the rear side of the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421, a back-up front decorative board 3422 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface is attached. The back-up front decorative substrate 3422 extends to the left and right over substantially the entire length of the back-up front decorative body 3421 in the left-right direction. Then, the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs is the lens of the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-top front decoration body 3421. Upon reaching the portion, the lens portions of the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421 can be light-emitting decorated.

Further, a top view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player). The top view type LED can irradiate light toward the front (player side) of the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back side. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portions of the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 and the back-up front rotation decoration body 3421 located in the front, and the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3410 can be efficiently irradiated with light. The lens portion of 3421 can be brightly decorated with light emission.

Further, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the surface portion of the front surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 excluding the plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting parts. A coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portions of the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421 with light, and the lens portions of the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421. Can be brightly decorated with light emission. Further, in the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, the front surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 is a player through the lens portions of the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. It may be visible from the side. In this regard, by having the front surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 having a coating film made of white solder resist, the lens portions of the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421 can also be passed through. From the player side, the lens portion can be recognized only in white, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest caused by the front surface of the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back surface being visible.

Further, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear surface (the rear surface facing the back surface of the gaming machine) of the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back surface of this example. As a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative board 3422, a top-view type LED is mounted, and the rear side of the back-up front decorative board 3422 (opposite to the player side, in other words, pachinko). It is possible to irradiate light toward the back side of the machine 1).

Further, the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 has a coating film made of white solder resist on the surface portion excluding a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting parts not only on the front surface but also on the rear surface. are doing. As described above, the coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the rear of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422.

As shown in FIG. 260, in the state where the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back-up rear rotation decoration is behind the left side portion of the back-up front decoration substrate 3422 in the left-right direction. Since the body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are located, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 is emitted from the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451. It will be irradiated toward. A part of such light is reflected on the back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up and rear decorative body 3451, and the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 (back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and back-up front decorative body 3421). Light leaks from the gap between the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451, and such leaked light (light leakage) can be visually recognized by the player. Become. In this way, not only the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421 emit light, but also the light leaks out on the rear surface side of the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421. Therefore, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect that makes the player feel a sense of depth.

Further, in the state where the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back-up front rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up The rear decoration body 3451 is not located. Further, in the state where the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is not located behind the upper portion in the vertical direction of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422. Further, the staging display device 1600 is not located behind the upper portion of the front decorative substrate 3422 in the vertical direction. From this, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 includes the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, and the back-up rear movable decoration body 3110. The light is directly applied to the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 without being blocked by the effect display device 1600. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion allows light to pass through with high transmittance. Therefore, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further, the transparency of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 is transparent. The light emitting region L1 near the portion can be visually recognized brightly.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, in the state where the back-up rear rotation decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are in the appearance position, the back-up is behind all the parts of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 in the left-right direction. The rear-rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are not located. Further, in the state where the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the appearance position, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is not located behind the upper portion in the vertical direction of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422. Further, the staging display device 1600 is not located behind the upper portion of the front decorative substrate 3422 in the vertical direction. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 is the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440, the back-up rear decorative body 3451, the back-up rear movable decoration body 3110, and the effect display device. Irradiation is directed toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 without being blocked by the 1600. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion allows light to pass through with high transmittance. Therefore, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further, the transparency of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 is transparent. The light emitting region L1 near the portion can be visually recognized brightly.

Next, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. As described in detail above, behind the back-up front decoration body 3421, a back-up rear decoration body 3451 of the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 is provided, and at a position on the front side of the back-up rear decoration body 3451. , The back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440 is attached. More specifically, the back-up and post-rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom, and is composed of a non-translucent portion and a translucent lens portion. In addition, the back-up rear decoration body 3451 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 stacked back and forth, and the petals on the rear side are located between the petals on the front side. It is formed in a shape that looks like it is rotated, and there are almost no non-translucent parts, and almost the entire part is a translucent lens part. The "translucent lens portion" is a portion having a lens-cut shape that bends light, and makes the light emitting decoration more brilliant when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 260, on the rear side of the back-up / rear-rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up / rear-decorative body 3451, a back-up / rear-decorative substrate 3452 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface is attached. The back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs is applied to the lens portions of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451. Upon reaching this point, the lens portions of the back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up and rear-upper decorative body 3451 can be light-emitting decorated.

Further, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 make it possible to move from the retracted position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. In the state where the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, they are located behind the back-up front decorative body 3421 and are invisible to the player. At this time, the tank rail 553 is located behind the upper part of the back-up / rear-rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up / rear-rotating decorative body 3451, whereas the back-up / rear-rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up / rear-decorating body 3451 are located behind. The staging display device 1600 is located behind the lower part of the above. Further, in the state where the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 have been moved to the appearance position, they are located in front of the effect display device 1600 and can be visually recognized by the player.

Further, a top view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player). The top-view type LED can irradiate light toward the front (player side) of the decorative substrate 3452 after the back surface. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portions of the back-up / back-rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up / back-decoration body 3451 located in the front, and the back-up / back-rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up / back-decoration body 3440 and the back-up back decoration. The lens portion of the 3451 can be brightly decorated with light emission.

Further, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the surface portion of the front surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 excluding the plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting parts. A coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portions of the back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up and rear-decorating body 3451 with light, and the lens portions of the back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up and rear-decorating body 3451. Can be brightly decorated with light emission. Further, in the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, the front surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 is a player through the lens portions of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. It may be visible from the side. In this regard, by having the front surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 having a coating film made of white solder resist, the lens portion of the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 can also be passed through. From the player side, the lens portion can be recognized only in white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the decorative substrate 3452 being visible after the back surface.

As shown in FIG. 260, in a state where the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, in front of the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, the back-up front The rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 are located. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 is reflected by the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421, and is reflected on the back-up front decorative substrate 3452. It will be irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion allows light to pass through with high transmittance. Therefore, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the front decorative substrate 3452 on the back passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further, the transparency of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 is transparent. The light emitting region L1 near the portion can be visually recognized brightly.

Further, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear surface (the rear surface facing the back surface of the gaming machine) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 of this example. As a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up rear decorative board 3452, a top-view type LED is mounted, and the rear side of the back-up rear decorative board 3452 (the side opposite to the player side, in other words, the pachinko). It is possible to irradiate light toward the back side of the machine 1).

Further, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface portion excluding a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface and other mounting parts not only on the front surface but also on the rear surface. have. As described above, the coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the light toward the rear of the decorative substrate 3452 after the back surface.

As shown in FIG. 260, in the state where the back-up / rear-rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up / rear decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back-up / rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position or not. The rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is not located behind the upper portion of the decorative substrate 3452 in the vertical direction. Further, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper portion in the vertical direction of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 is not blocked by the back-up rear movable decorative body 3110 and the staging display device 1600, and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452. It will be directly irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located at the rear. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion allows light to pass through with high transmittance. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, in the state where the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 are in the appearance position, they are located in front of the staging display device 1600. Light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface is not emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553. Therefore, in the state where the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 are in the appearance position, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up rear decoration board 3452 are controlled so as not to emit light. ..

Next, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. As described in detail above, a back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100 is provided behind the back-up rear decorative body 3451. More specifically, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 that extends in the left-right direction and has a decoration that forms a part of the decorative portion 3150 by the unevenness of the relief shape. A transparent sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112 provided behind the decorative body 3111 and having a decoration (picture) constituting the rest of the decorative portion 3150, and provided behind the decorative sheet 3112. It is provided with a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide radiation plate 3113 and a back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113 and on which a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b are mounted on the front surface. There is. The back-rear decorative substrate 3114 causes the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface to emit light, so that the light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the decoration body 3111 and the decoration body 3111 (rear back). The movable decorative body 3110) can be light-emittingly decorated.

As shown in FIG. 261, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 makes it possible to move from the retracted position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. In the state where the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, it is located behind the back-up front decorative body 3421 and is invisible to the player. At this time, the tank rail 553 is located behind the upper part of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110, while the effect display device 1600 is located behind the lower part of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. .. Further, in the state where the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, it is located in front of the staging display device 1600 and can be visually recognized by the player.

Further, on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player), as a plurality of LEDs, a plurality of side-view type first LEDs 3114a and a plurality of top-view type second LEDs 3114b are displayed. Is implemented. The side-view type first LED 3114a can irradiate light toward the front (player side) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, whereas the top-view type second LED 3114b can irradiate the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to irradiate the light toward the side of the 3114. Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide radiating plate 3113, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 emit light toward the light guide radiating plate 3113. By irradiating, the light guide emitting plate 3113 emits light toward the front, and the decorative body 3111 can be uniformly irradiated with the light as a whole. ) Can be easily visually recognized and decorated with light emission.

Further, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the front surface portion of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 excluding the plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting parts. A coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the decorative body 3111 with light, and it is possible to brightly illuminate the decorative body 3111 (back-back movable decorative body 3110). Further, in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, there is a possibility that the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be visually recognized from the player side through the decorative body 3111 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. be. In this regard, by making the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 have a coating film made of white solder resist, the decorative body 3111 is seen from the player side even through the decorative body 3111 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. Can only be recognized as white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the decorative substrate 3114 being visible after the back.

As shown in FIG. 260, in the state where the back-upward movable decoration body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410, the back-up front rotation decoration body 3421, and the back-up front rear decoration body 3110 are in front of the back-up rear movable decoration body 3110. The decorative body 3451 is located. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-upper decorative substrate 3114 is reflected on the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410, the back-up front decoration body 3421, and the back-up top rear decoration body 3451. The light is emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion allows light to pass through with high transmittance. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

Further, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is diffused by the light guide radiation plate 3113 and is emitted toward the front of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The light is also emitted from the upper, lower, left and right ends of the radiation plate 3113 toward the side of the light guide radiation plate 3113. That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 passes through the light guide radiating plate 3113 from the upper, lower, left and right ends of the light guide radiating plate 3113, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 ( The light is emitted toward the side surface of the back box 3010 located on the side of the light guide emitting plate 3113). The back box 3010 uses a transparent member (transparent portion) in a part thereof, and the transparent portion can allow light to pass through with high transmittance. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 emits light near the transparent portion on the side surface of the back box 3010 on the side of the pachinko machine 1 via the light guide radiating plate 3113. The region L2 and the light emitting region L3 can be visually recognized brightly.

Further, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is emitted from the upper, lower, left and right ends of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the upper end portion of such a light guide radiation plate 3113 is emitted. A part of the light emitted from the back is emitted toward the upper rear of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. In the state where the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the staging display device 1600 is not located above and behind the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is blocked by the effect display device 1600 from the upper end portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 via the light guide radiation plate 3113. Instead, the light is emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located above and behind the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 (light guide radiation plate 3113). The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion allows light to pass through with high transmittance. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further emits light in the vicinity of the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The region L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 260, in the state where the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is in the appearance position, since it is located in front of the effect display device 1600, a plurality of back-rear movable decoration bodies 3110 mounted on the front surface of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110. The light from the LED is not emitted toward the back box 3010 or the tank rail 553.

In this example, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide radiation plate 3113, and light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is guided. Although it is diffused in the light emitting plate 3113, the light guide emitting plate 3113 may not be provided. In such a case, the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is irradiated with light toward the side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and toward the upper and rear of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is preferable that the LED 3114a is provided. Also by this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is irradiated toward the side surface of the back box 3010 located on the side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the pachinko machine 1 The light emitting region L2 and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the side surface of the back box 3010 on the side of the back box 3010 can be visually recognized brightly. Further, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located above and behind the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and is applied to the back box 3010. The light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized brightly after passing through the transparent portion of the above.

Although the back box 3010 of this example is partially provided with a transparent portion, a penetrating portion may be provided in the back box 3010 instead of the transparent portion. Even in such a case, the light from the LED of the light emitting decoration can pass through the penetrating portion of the back box 3010. For example, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back passes through the through-light portion of the back box 3010, and further on the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion can be visually recognized brightly.

Further, the back box 3010 of this example is provided with a translucent portion which is a transparent portion and a non-transmissive portion, but the non-transmissive portion is the back surface side (the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1). The side that becomes) is provided with white printing or white painting, or mirror surface printing or mirror surface processing, and it is possible to reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). I have to. As a result, the light directed to the non-transmissive portion can efficiently reflect the light to the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized brightly.

Further, with respect to the above-mentioned light emitting decorative body, the light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of various decorative substrates is not only irradiated toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but also on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Although it is illuminated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located in, it is mounted on the front surface of a decorative substrate (such as a decorative substrate of a light emitting decoration other than the above-mentioned light emitting decoration) that should be specialized for directing. The light from the plurality of LEDs is configured so as not to be emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, for decorative substrates that should be specialized for production, the mounting surface is formed with a coating film made of green or black solder resist, or enclosed in a box to diffuse the light from the LEDs. The light from the LED is clearly visible by suppressing the light emission.

As another example, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 may be provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. Such another example will be described with reference to FIG. 262. As shown in FIG. 262, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3114 is emitted toward the decorative body 3111 located in front of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452. A part of the light emitted toward the decorative body 3111 is reflected and directed toward the rear of the decorative body 3111. When the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes, the reflected light of the light emitted toward the decorative body 3111 passes through the plurality of holes and heads toward the rear of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It becomes possible. A decorative body base 3115 is attached to the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 so as to cover the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Holes are provided at the corresponding positions. As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is partially reflected by the decorative body 3111, and is passed through the plurality of holes provided in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the rear of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. That is, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is reflected by the decorative body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind (upper rear) the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are irradiated, pass through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further, the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the above can be visually recognized brightly.

In the above, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, but the size of these holes is as small as possible, and is mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, for example. It is preferably formed smaller than the LED. For example, when the size of the hole provided in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is large, the light from the rear of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 (for example, the light emitted from the staging display device 1600) is the back-rear decorative substrate. It is easy to enter through the hole provided in the 3114, and even when the LED mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is turned off, it may appear as if it is turned on. By reducing the size of the holes provided in the rear decorative substrate 3114, such adverse effects can be reduced.

Similarly, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, but the number of these holes is as small as possible, and is mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, for example. It is preferably formed in less than the number of LEDs. For example, when the number of holes provided in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is increased, the light from the rear of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 (for example, the light emitted from the staging display device 1600) is emitted from the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is easy to enter through the hole provided in the 3114, and even when the LED mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is turned off, it may appear as if it is turned on. By reducing the number of holes provided in the rear decorative substrate 3114, such adverse effects can be reduced.

In the above, the back-upper decorative substrate 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. Similarly, the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 also have a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. Holes may be provided. Also by this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 is partially reflected by the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421, and the back-up Light can be efficiently irradiated toward the rear of the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back surface through a plurality of holes provided in the front decorative substrate 3422. Further, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 is reflected on the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 to decorate the back-up rear decoration. Light can be efficiently irradiated toward the rear of the decorative substrate 3452 after the back surface through the plurality of holes provided in the substrate 3452. That is, part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 becomes reflected light, and the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452. It is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the 3452, passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further passes through the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. It can be visually recognized brightly.

Next, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 are not shown in FIGS. 260 and 261 but will be described below. As described in detail above, when visually recognized from the front side of the game board 5, the back front left decorative body 3713 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 is provided on the left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the effect display is provided. On the right side of the display area of the device 1600, the back front right decorative body 3813 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 is provided. More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 are decorated with patterns such as characters, items, logos, etc. in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and are non-transparent parts and transparent. It is composed of a light lens part. The "translucent lens portion" is a portion having a lens-cut shape that bends light, and makes the light emitting decoration more brilliant when viewed from the front.

On the rear side of the back front left decorative body 3713, a back front left decorative board 3714 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface is attached. Then, the back front left decorative substrate 3714 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that the light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713, and the back front left. The lens portion of the decorative body 3713 can be decorated by light emission. Further, in the back front left decorative board 3714, there is a possibility that the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 can be visually recognized from the player side through the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. There is. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 with a coating film made of white solder resist, the lens portion can be seen from the player side even through the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713. It can only be recognized as white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 being visible.

Further, side view type LEDs are mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player). In the side view type LED, light is reflected on the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714, and it is possible to irradiate the light toward the front (player side) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713 located in the front with light, and it is possible to brightly illuminate the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713.

Further, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting parts. A coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713 with light, and it is possible to brightly illuminate the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713.

In the above, the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is provided with the side view type LED facing left so that the light is emitted toward the left side of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. That is, on the left side of the back front left decorative board 3714, the left side of the back box 3010 on the side of the back box 3010 closer to the back back decorative board 3114 is located, and the direction of the side view type LED. Is provided facing the left side of the back box 3010. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 is emitted toward the left side surface of the back box 3010 located on the left side of the back front left decorative board 3714. It becomes. The back box 3010 uses a transparent member (transparent portion) in a part thereof, and the transparent portion can allow light to pass through with high transmittance. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 264, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is a light emitting region near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 behind the pachinko machine 1. L2 can be visually recognized brightly.

The back front right decorative body 3813 has the same configuration as the back front left decorative body 3713, and the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front right decorative board 3814 is the back front right decorative board 3814. It is configured to irradiate toward the right side surface of the back box 3010 located on the right side side of the box. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 265, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is a transparent portion of the light emitting region L3 on the right side surface of the back box 3010 behind the pachinko machine 1. The vicinity can be visually recognized brightly.

Next, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. As described in detail above, when visually recognized from the front side of the game board 5, the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 of the lower back middle production unit 3300 is provided in the lower center of the display area of the effect display device 1600. More specifically, in the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, six numerical decorations formed in relief shape from "1" to "6" on the entire surface are 60 degrees in the clockwise direction around the center. It is arranged on the circumference at each angle, and is composed of a non-transmissive part and a translucent lens part. The "translucent lens portion" is a portion having a lens-cut shape that bends light, and makes the light emitting decoration more brilliant when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 260, on the rear side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the lower lower middle first decorative board 3322 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is attached. Then, the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that the light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the lens portion of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 and the back side. The lens portion of the lower middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be light-emitting decorated.

As shown in FIG. 261, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 makes it possible to move from the retracted position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. In the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position, it is located behind the game panel 1100 forming the game area 5a and is visible to the player. At this time, the back box 3010 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are located behind the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310. Further, in the state where the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back is moved to the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600 and can be visually recognized by the player.

Further, a top view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back. The top-view type LED can irradiate light toward the front (player side) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 located in the front with light, and it is possible to brightly illuminate the lens portion of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310.

In addition, a coating film made of white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, excluding a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted parts. There is. A coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 with light, and it is possible to brightly illuminate the lens portion of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310. Further, in the lower back middle first decorative board 3322, the front surface of the lower lower middle first decorative board 3322 can be visually recognized from the player side through the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. There is a possibility that it will be possible. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 with a coating film made of white solder resist, the player can see through the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. The lens portion can be recognized only in white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back being visible.

Further, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear surface (the rear surface facing the back surface of the gaming machine) of the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back of this example. As a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310, a top view type LED is mounted, and the rear side of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 (the side opposite to the player side). In other words, it is possible to irradiate light toward the back side of the pachinko machine 1).

As shown in FIG. 260, in the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position, the back box 3010 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are located behind the lower lower middle first decorative board 3322. ing. The back box 3010 uses a transparent member (transparent portion) in a part thereof, and the transparent portion can allow light to pass through with high transmittance. However, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is located behind the back box 3010, and the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back is behind the main control board 1310. Although it is irradiated so as to brighten the vicinity of the light emitting region L4 near the transparent portion of the back box 3010, it is blocked by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, in the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the appearance position, it is located in front of the staging display device 1600. Therefore, in the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the appearance position, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the lower lower middle first decorative board 3322 are controlled so as not to emit light.

From the above, as the light emitting decorative body that brightens the back surface side and the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, the back top front rotation decoration body 3410, the back top front decoration body 3421, and the back top rear decoration body are used. 3451, a back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided on the left side of the game board 5, and three back front right decorative bodies are provided on the right side of the game board 5. A unit 3810 is provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 263, the light emitting decoration provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 264. The light emitting decoration provided on the left side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from the rear and brightens the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). As shown in FIG. 265, the light emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 allows the pachinko machine 1 to be visually recognized from behind, and is near the transparent portion of the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1). The light emitting region L3 of the above is brightened.

(About the advantage of providing a light emitting area on the back side of the pachinko machine)
Generally, the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility provided in a game hall. Specifically, a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row on one side of the island equipment, or a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row on both sides of the island equipment. It is done. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 is blocked and darkened. By the way, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, control members such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, wiring connecting the control members, a supply mechanism for the game ball B used for the game, and the like are arranged. , Maintenance may be required for a predetermined location on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row on both sides of the island equipment, the pachinko machine 1 on one side of the island equipment is opened and the pachinko machine 1 on the other side is opened. Although it is possible to maintain the back surface, since the inside of the island equipment is dark, the visibility of the parts to be maintained is poor, and it is difficult to visually check the back surface of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the pachinko machine 1 can open and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 with one side as the axis, and for the pachinko machine 1 requiring maintenance, the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 It is possible to maintain the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 by opening the machine. However, in a state where the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, light from the outside (light of the hole) is emitted to the portion of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 far from the open axis of the main body frame 4. While it is easy to reach and can be visually recognized brightly, it is difficult for external light (hole light) to reach the part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 that is close to the open axis of the main body frame 4. It cannot be seen brightly. That is, when the part to be maintained is a part close to the open shaft of the main body frame 4, the visibility of the part to be maintained is poor, and it is difficult to visually work on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1 for the purpose of decoration by a plurality of light emitting decorative bodies provided on the game board 5, the back side and the side surface side are also other than decoration. It is configured to brighten for the purpose of. Specifically, the light from the LED mounted on the light emitting decoration body is directed not only to the front side of the pachinko machine 1 but also to the back side and the side surface side, and the light is directed to the transparent part of the back box 3010. By configuring the pachinko machine 1 so as to pass through, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 and the light emitting region L2 and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1 are brightened. be able to. For example, the light irradiating the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 can pass through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 to further brighten the rear of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment, the inside thereof is blocked and darkened, but by brightening the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the island equipment can be brightened. As a result, when the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the visibility of the portion to be maintained becomes good, and the efficiency of the visual work on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In this example, the plurality of light emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 have both a role of brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and a role of brightening the back side and the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1. It is configured to do. For example, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to brighten the rear of the pachinko machine 1 by providing an LED capable of emitting light toward the rear side. The number of parts will increase and the cost will increase. In this respect, it is possible to prevent the cost from increasing by having the plurality of light emitting decorations that brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1 also serve to brighten the back side and the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1. can.

In this example, the light from the LEDs of the plurality of light emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 is configured to brighten the back surface side and the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1, but the pachinko machine 1 Since it is not desirable for the LED light source to be seen directly during maintenance on the back surface side or side surface side, the LED light source is used for the light from the LED that brightens the back surface side or side surface side of the pachinko machine 1. It is configured to be indirect light that is not directly viewed. For example, the back-up front decorative body 3421 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, and makes it possible to emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, when the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is visually recognized from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, when the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is visually recognized), a cover body is provided on the LED so that the light source of the LED is not directly viewed. The light from the LED is configured to be indirect light. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, it is possible to prevent the light from the LED that brightens the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 from hindering the work.

(About the characteristic configuration of the luminous ornament in this example)
The light-emitting decorative body of this example has been devised in various ways not only to brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1 for decorative purposes but also to brighten the back surface side and the side surface side for purposes other than decoration. Although the details have been described above, the following configurations can be mentioned as specific configurations.

First, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and makes it possible to emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. In the state where the back-up movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410, the back-up front decoration body 3421, and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 are located in front of the back-up front movable decoration body 3110. There is. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-upper decorative substrate 3114 is reflected on the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410, the back-up front decoration body 3421, and the back-up top rear decoration body 3451. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are indirectly irradiated. As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 emits and decorates the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and in addition to the role of brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the back box After passing through 3010, it can play a role of brightening the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 and brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of this example receives light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and is decorated by light emission. The upper front rotating decoration body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, and the back upper rear decorative body 3451 have a larger area than the back upper rear movable decorative body 3110. From this, when the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-upper decorative substrate 3114 is reflected on the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410, the back-up front decoration body 3421, and the back-up top rear decoration body 3451. In addition, it will be diffused to a wider area than the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. As a result, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 555 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be widened, and the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be efficiently brightened.

In the above, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the rear surface of the back surface front decorative body 3421 and the rear surface of the back surface rear decorative body 3451. A coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-upper decorative substrate 3114 is reflected with high reflectance on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative body 3421 and the rear surface of the back-up rear decorative body 3451. Therefore, the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are efficiently irradiated. As a result, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 555 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be efficiently brightened.

Next, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and makes it possible to emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, as described as another example, by providing a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the reflected light of the light emitted toward the decorative body 3111 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is generated. , It becomes possible to go to the rear of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 through a plurality of holes. That is, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is reflected by the decorative body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The light is emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind (upper rear) the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 emits and decorates the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and in addition to the role of brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the back box It can play a role of brightening the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 555 behind the pachinko machine 1 and brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 by passing through the transparent portion of 3010.

Next, the back-up front decorative body 3421 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, and makes it possible to emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. There is. Behind the back-up front decorative body 3421, there are a part where the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, the back-up movable decoration 3110 are located in the retracted position, and the back-up rear rotating decoration. There are a portion where the 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 and the back-back movable decorative body 3110 are not located. Of these, the portion where the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440, the back-up rear decorative body 3451, and the back-up rear movable decoration body 3110 are located at the retracted position is mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422. Light from the plurality of LEDs is reflected on the back-up / rear-rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up / rear-rear decorative body 3451 and the back-up / rear movable decorative body 3110 located at the rear, and directed toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. Will be irradiated. On the other hand, for the portion where the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 and the back-up rear movable decoration body 3110 are not located, the back box 3010 and the tank rail located behind the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 are located. It will be directly irradiated toward 553. As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back side passes through the back box 3010 and passes through the back box 3010 in addition to the role of brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1. It can play a role of brightening the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 in the rear and brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, as the light emitting decorative body, the back upper front rotating decoration body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back upper rear decorative body 3451, and the back upper movable decorative body 3110 are provided in the upper part of the game board 5. On the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided, and on the right side of the game board 5, three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided, and they are provided separately from each other. Has been done. The light emitting decoration provided on the upper part of the gaming board 5 brightens the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and the light emitting decoration provided on the left side of the gaming board 5 is , The pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear to brighten the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1), and the light emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 is , The pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear, the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and a plurality of regions on the back surface side and the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1 are displayed. It makes it possible to make it brighter.

Further, the light emitting decoration includes an LED capable of emitting light toward the front side (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 and an LED capable of emitting light toward the rear side (back surface side) of the pachinko machine 1. Is provided. As for the LED capable of emitting light toward the front side (front side) of the pachinko machine 1, the light is reflected by the member located in front of the LED and directed toward the rear side (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. The back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened by the indirect light. On the other hand, with respect to the LED capable of emitting light toward the rear side (back surface side) of the pachinko machine 1, the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened by the direct light. At this time, of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, an LED capable of emitting light toward the front side (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 is used, and the area that can be brightened by the indirect light and the pachinko machine 1 An LED capable of emitting light toward the rear side (back surface side) of the slingshot may be used, and the region may be configured to be separated from the region that can be brightened by the direct light thereof.

In the above, as the area that can be brightened by the direct light from the LED, the part of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 that can be worked by a worker such as a hall manager can be targeted. Is suitable. As will be described in detail later, examples of the portion where a worker such as a hall manager can perform the work include an operation portion 640a and a detachable portion of the back cover 640. The operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are provided at positions where direct light from the LED can be received, so that the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion can be visually recognized brighter than receiving direct light from the LED and receiving indirect light. can. As a result, when working on various boards such as the main control board 1310 attached to the game board 5, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4, but the back cover 640 By making the operation unit 640a and the attachment / detachment part brightly visible, the operator can easily confirm the object to be operated, the back cover 640 can be easily attached / detached to the main body frame 4, and the hall manager's inspection work. Can be facilitated.

In addition, when the direct light from the LED is irradiated to the part where the worker such as the hall manager can perform the work as described above, the substrate on which such the LED is mounted is used. It is preferable that the mounting surface is a dark color (for example, green or black). When a dark-colored mounting surface is used, the light is not easily reflected by the dark-colored mounting surface, so that the direct light from the LED does not diffuse much, and it is pinpoint to the part where the direct light from the LED is irradiated. It becomes possible to irradiate light. Thereby, for example, when the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are provided at a position where the direct light from the LED can be received, the direct light from the LED is received pinpointly. Due to the difference in light and darkness from the peripheral portion, the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 can be clearly seen.

(Regarding the adjustment of the amount of light in the light emitting area provided on the back side of the pachinko machine)
There are various hall environments in which the island equipment is provided. For example, it is conceivable that the inside of the island equipment is separately brightened regardless of the brightness of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration for brightening the back surface side, but there is a possibility that it is not necessary to brighten the back surface side. In addition, although the inside of the island equipment is dark, if the number of pachinko machines 1 that brighten the back side as a game machine installed in the island equipment is small, only the back side is brightened with normal brightness. Then, it may not be possible to brighten the inside of the island facility sufficiently. Therefore, an example in which the brightness of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted according to the hall environment will be described below.

The light emitting decoration of this example includes an LED capable of emitting light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 and an LED capable of emitting light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, for these LEDs, the amount of light is gradually increased by performing a light amount adjusting operation using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. It is possible to adjust. For example, it is possible to adjust the stage of the LED light amount from 1 (minimum light amount) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light amount), and the larger the stage, the larger the LED light amount. .. That is, the LED of the light emitting decoration is configured so that the light is directed toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1 and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is brightened, but the amount of light of the LED can be adjusted. This makes it possible to change the brightness of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. For example, when the inside of the island facility is a bright hall environment, a worker such as a hall manager may adjust the amount of LED light so that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is darkened. When the inside of the island facility is a dark hall environment, a worker such as a hall manager may brighten the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by adjusting so that the amount of LED light is increased. In this way, by making it possible to adjust the brightness of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 according to the hall environment, when the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the visibility of the part to be maintained becomes good. The efficiency of visual work on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In the above, by making the amount of light of the LED of the light emitting decoration adjustable, the brightness of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed, and the degree of freedom of the visual recognition mode with respect to the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. However, assuming that the light intensity of the LEDs is adjusted collectively for all the light emitting decorations provided on the front side of the gaming board 5, for example, when the light intensity of the LEDs of all the light emitting decorations is reduced. , The front side of the pachinko machine 1 becomes too dark, and there is a possibility that the original effect (customer attraction, etc.) of using the light emitting decoration is lost while the worker is working during the hall business. Further, even when the worker reduces the amount of light of the LED of the light emitting decoration and neglects to return the amount of light of the LED after the work is completed, the original effect of using the light emitting decoration is lowered. There is a possibility that it will end up. In this respect, in this example, among the light emitting decorative bodies for decorative purposes provided on the front side of the game board 5, the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421, the back-up top rear decoration body 3451, and the back Since the rear movable decorative body 3110 and the like also have a role of brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 as described above, the LED light intensity is adjusted by the light intensity adjustment operation. Of these, the front surface of the game board 5 is used. Among the light emitting decorations for decorative purposes provided on the side, the light emitting decoration having the first prize opening decoration substrate 2420 for emitting and decorating the first prize opening 2005 is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It does not have a role of brightening the light, and is considered to be a light emitting decorative body that brightens with an emphasis on the purpose of attracting customers, and is not subject to the adjustment of the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjustment operation. That is, among the light emitting decorative bodies for decorative purposes, at least the light emitting decorative body having a role of brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is targeted for adjusting the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjusting operation. Thereby, even if the amount of light of the LED of the light emitting decoration is adjusted and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is darkened, for example, the light emitting decoration provided on the front side of the game board 5 for the purpose of attracting customers is bright. The purpose of attracting customers can be maintained well without darkening.

The light intensity adjusting operation of the LED of the light emitting decoration can be performed in either the standby state in which the symbol is not variablely displayed or the variable display in which the symbol is variablely displayed. Further, in this example, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the staging operation unit 301 in the staging operation unit 300 are used to enable the player to perform the light amount adjusting operation. A separate operation unit may be provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 so that the hall manager can perform a light intensity adjusting operation. At this time, the adjustment target of the LED light amount by the light amount adjustment operation for the operation unit for the hall manager is the same as the adjustment target of the LED light amount by the light amount adjustment operation for the operation unit for the player. In addition, even if the light amount adjustment operation for the operation unit for the player is adjusted to the minimum light amount, the light amount cannot be reduced to zero and the LED cannot be completely turned off, but for the operation unit for the hall manager. As for the light amount adjustment operation, when the light amount is adjusted to the minimum amount, the light amount may be set to zero and the LED may be completely turned off.

(About the visibility of the wiring provided on the side of the pachinko machine)
Further, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (the back surface side of the back box 3010), various substrates and wiring for connecting the various substrates are provided. Since the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration that brightens the back surface side by using the light from the light emitting decoration provided on the game board 5, the wiring exposed to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. Is easy to check the state from the outside, but it is difficult to check the state from the outside for the wiring that is not exposed to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, an example that makes it possible to easily check the state of the wiring that is not exposed to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 from the outside will be described below.

In this example, as a light emitting decorative body that brightens the back surface side and the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided on the left side of the game board 5, and on the right side of the game board 5. Three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 264, the light emitting decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from the rear, and is a transparent portion of the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). The light emitting area L2 in the vicinity is brightened, and as shown in FIG. 265, the light emitting ornament provided on the right side of the gaming board 5 allows the pachinko machine 1 to be visually recognized from the rear and the left side surface of the back box 3010 (pachinko machine 1). The light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion (on the left side surface of the above) is brightened.

Further, on the back surface of the back box 3010, a staging drive board 1720 for driving a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc. provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 is attached in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. Has been done. The effect drive board 1720 is electrically connected to the decorative board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like by a plurality of wirings, and these wirings are along the left side surface and the right side surface inside the back box 3010. I tried to arrange it like this. In this regard, the light emitting decoration provided on the left side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from the rear, and provides a light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). Since the light is irradiated so as to make it brighter, it is possible to clearly see the state of the wiring along the right side surface inside the back box 3010. Similarly, the light emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from the rear, and provides a light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1). Since the light is irradiated so as to make it brighter, it is possible to clearly see the state of the wiring along the left side surface inside the back box 3010. For example, if the decorative board, drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. do not operate normally, the wiring along the left side surface or right side surface inside the back box 3010 may be broken or disconnected from the connection terminal. However, by irradiating light so as to brighten the left side surface and the right side surface, the visibility of the wiring from the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1 becomes good, and the wiring condition can be confirmed. Efficiency can be improved.

Further, in a state where the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear on the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 is a portion far from the open shaft of the main body frame 4. Light from the outside (light of the hall) can easily reach the left side surface of the pachinko machine, and it can be visually recognized brightly, whereas the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1 which is a part close to the open axis of the main body frame 4 However, the light from the outside (light of the hall) is difficult to reach, and it cannot be visually recognized brightly. For this reason, when the back surface side or the side surface side is not brightened like a conventional gaming machine, wiring is arranged near the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1 which is a part close to the open axis of the main body frame 4. It was especially difficult to check the condition of the wiring when it became necessary to do so. In this regard, in this example, the light is irradiated so as to brighten the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the right side surface of the back box 3010, and the wiring that needs to be arranged near the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is not provided. , It was arranged along the right side surface inside the back box 3010. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the state of the wiring along the right side surface inside the back box 3010 cannot be visually recognized.

In this example, as the wiring along the side surface inside the back box 3010, the wiring for connecting the effect drive board 1720 to the decorative board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like is mentioned, but other than that. In addition, for example, the wiring may be connected to the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game. For example, the main control board 1310 outputs information about the game to the outside (hall computer) via an external terminal board 558 connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring. It is supposed to be. At this time, if the wiring connecting the main control board 1310 and the external terminal board 558 is illegal, the information about the game cannot be normally grasped from the outside (hall computer), and the pachinko machine 1 There will be a situation where it is easy to cheat. That is, among the various wirings, the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 can be said to be of high importance in advancing the game. In this regard, by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with light so as to brighten the side surface, the visibility of the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 is improved, and such wiring is illegally performed. Can be prevented.

Further, with respect to the wiring along the left side surface and the right side surface inside the back box 3010, a plurality of wirings are bundled by the hook portion integrally formed with the back box 3010 and the bundling wire. These hook portions and bundled wires are made of a translucent member, and are provided at positions that can be visually recognized through the transparent portions on the left side surface and the right side surface of the back box 3010. As a result, light is irradiated so as to brighten the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface (left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) of the back box 3010. At that time, the hook portion and the bundled wire itself can be brightened, and the state of the wiring can be clearly seen. Further, when irradiating light so as to brighten the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface (left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) of the back box 3010. In addition, it does not hinder the progress of light and can prevent the brightness of such a light emitting region from decreasing.

Further, regarding the wiring along the left side surface and the right side surface inside the back box 3010, a plurality of wirings thereof so as not to block the transparent portion of the left side surface and the right side surface of the back box 3010 by a plurality of wirings. Wiring is provided by superimposing or bundling the left side surface and the right side surface of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction. For example, if a plurality of wires are provided so as to be parallel to the left side surface and the right side surface of the back box 3010, the transparent portion on the left side surface and the right side surface of the back box 3010 is blocked, and the left side of the back box 3010. It is difficult to maintain the brightness of the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion of the surface and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion of the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1). By providing a plurality of wirings so as not to block the transparent portion on the left side surface or the right side surface, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

(About the change in the visual recognition mode of the light emitting area when the state changes)
In addition, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in the island equipment and the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is open for maintenance, the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island equipment are used. Even if an abnormality occurs, it is difficult to notice the occurrence of the abnormality because the front side of the pachinko machine 1 in which the abnormality has occurred cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, an example in which the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be recognized even from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

In this example, as the light emitting decorative body, the back upper front rotating decoration body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back upper rear decorative body 3451, and the back upper movable decorative body 3110 are provided in the upper part of the game board 5. On the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided, and on the right side of the game board 5, three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided. In addition, with regard to these light-emitting decorations, if some abnormality occurs, such as detecting fraud due to magnets or vibration, and it becomes impossible to play a game, the light-emitting decoration will be used until the abnormality is resolved. The LED provided on the body is controlled to blink. On the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 and the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1) are the light emitting regions that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration. ), The light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) are provided, and the LED provided on the light emitting decoration is controlled to blink. At that time, it was decided that these light emitting areas would blink. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in the island equipment, the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island equipment can be compared. When an abnormality occurs, the light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration of the other pachinko machine 1 blinks, so that the occurrence of the abnormality can be recognized through the inside of the island equipment. Become. That is, even during maintenance by opening the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to detect an abnormality with respect to another pachinko machine 1 in the same island equipment at an early stage through the inside of the island equipment, which in turn is possible. It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities against the other pachinko machine 1.

Further, with respect to the LED of the light emitting decoration body, the light amount can be adjusted stepwise by performing a light amount adjusting operation using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. It is possible. For example, it is possible to adjust the stage of the LED light amount from 1 (minimum light amount) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light amount), and the larger the stage, the larger the LED light amount. .. And, as described in detail above, with respect to the LED of the light emitting decoration, the brightness of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed by making the amount of light of the LED adjustable. However, if the LED of the light emitting decoration that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is configured to blink and control with an adjusted amount of light when some abnormality such as detection of fraud due to a magnet or vibration occurs, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to be brightened. When the adjusted amount of light was dimmed, the occurrence of an abnormality may not be noticed from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. Further, even when the operator reduces the amount of light of the LED of the light emitting decoration and neglects to return the amount of light of the LED after the work is completed, the amount of light of the LED is small and the light amount of the LED is small from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Then, I sometimes did not notice the occurrence of the abnormality. In this regard, in this example, during the period when some abnormality occurs such as detecting fraud due to a magnet or vibration and the game cannot be performed, the amount of light of the LED of the light emitting decoration that brightens the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 The adjustment is disabled, and the LED is controlled to blink at a predetermined amount of light (for example, step 5 which is the upper limit of the amount of light that can be adjusted at normal times). As a result, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, when the light emitting region that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration blinks, the light emitting region does not become too dark. That is, even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to reliably detect the abnormality without noticing the occurrence of the abnormality, and by extension, the other pachinko machine 1 is fraudulent. Can be prevented.

Similarly, for the light emitting decoration, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 3, the LED provided in the light emitting decoration is controlled to blink until the main body frame 4 is closed. I have to. On the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 and the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1) are the light emitting regions that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration. ), The light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) are provided, and the LED provided on the light emitting decoration is controlled to blink. At that time, it was decided that these light emitting areas would blink. For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in the island equipment and the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is open for maintenance, the main body of another pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island equipment is being maintained. Even if the fraudulent person opens the frame 4 illegally, it is difficult to notice the illegally opened act because the front side of the illegally opened pachinko machine 1 cannot be visually recognized. However, in this example, when the main body frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island equipment is illegally opened by an unauthorized person, it can be brightened by the light emitting decoration of the other pachinko machine 1. By blinking the light emitting area, it becomes possible to recognize the illegally opened act through the inside of the island facility. That is, even if the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, the act of illegally opening the pachinko machine 1 to another pachinko machine 1 in the same island facility through the inside of the island facility is discovered at an early stage. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activities against the other pachinko machine 1.

As for the light emitting decorative body, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 3, a certain time elapses not only until the main body frame 4 is closed but also after the main body frame 4 is closed. Until this is done, the blinking control of the LED provided on the light emitting decoration may be continued. As a result, when the main body frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island equipment is illegally opened by an unauthorized person, even if the opening is short, the light emitting decoration of the other pachinko machine 1 is performed. The blinking of the light emitting area, which can be brightened by the body, will continue for a certain period of time, and it is possible to prevent the situation of overlooking the illegally opened act through the inside of the island facility as much as possible.

Further, regarding the light emitting decoration, when the state shifts to the standby state in which the symbol change is not performed, the amount of light of the LED provided in the light emitting decoration is measured until the symbol change is started and the standby state ends. I try to control the decrease. On the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 and the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1) are the light emitting regions that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration. ), The light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) are provided to reduce the amount of light of the LED provided on the light emitting decoration. It was decided that these light emitting regions would become dark when controlled. For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on the island equipment and the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is open for maintenance, the front of the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island equipment. Since the side cannot be visually recognized, it is difficult to grasp whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in the game. However, in this example, when the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island equipment shifts to the standby state, the light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration of the other pachinko machine 1 is darkened. , It becomes possible to grasp whether or not the game is being played through the inside of the island facility. That is, even if the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, it is possible to grasp whether or not another pachinko machine 1 in the same island facility is playing through the inside of the island facility. , Whether it is necessary to strengthen monitoring to prevent fraud during the standby state, etc. can be determined.

(About the change in the visual appearance of the light emitting area when the light emitting decoration is in operation)
Further, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 cannot be visually recognized, so that the movable front side thereof is provided. It is difficult to check whether the body works normally. Therefore, an example in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the movable body operates normally even from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

In this example, as a light emitting decorative body that brightens the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper A rear decorative body 3451 and a back rear movable decorative body 3110 are provided, and the light emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. are doing. Of these, the back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440, the back-up and rear-rear decorative body 3451, and the back-up and rear movable decorative body 3110 make it possible to move from the retracted position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. .. Then, when the back-up / rear-rotating decorative body 3440, the back-up / rear-rear decorative body 3451, and the back-up / rear movable decoration body 3110 are moved to the appearance positions, the light from the LEDs of these light-emitting decorations is transparent to the tank rail 553. It was prevented from reaching the light emitting region L1 near the site. In particular, the light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back-up rear decorative body 3451 is prevented from reaching the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. On the other hand, with respect to the light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440, the back-up rear decorative body 3451, and the back-up rear movable decoration body 3110 move to the appearance position. As a result, the light is not blocked because it is not located behind the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back side, and it reaches the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. That is, when the light emitting decoration that can be operated is operated among the plurality of light emitting decorations, the brightness in the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 changes and is visually recognized from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. The visual mode of the light emitting region L1 can be changed. As a result, even from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to grasp whether or not the light emitting decorative body is operating by changing the visual mode of the light emitting region L1.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initial operation of the light emitting decoration that can be operated is performed among the plurality of light emitting decorations. Specifically, the operation of moving the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, the back-up rear decoration body 3451, and the back-up rear movable decoration body 3110 from the retracted position to the appearance position and then from the appearance position to the retracted position. Repeatedly, an operation is performed to confirm that these luminescent ornaments can move to the appearance position. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and operate the power switch of the power supply board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Occasionally, it was not possible to directly visually confirm whether or not the initial operation of the light emitting decoration was normally performed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and it was particularly difficult to confirm the operation. In this respect, in this example, the brightness of the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is changed according to the operation of the light emitting decorative body, and the light emitting region L1 is changed even from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. By visually recognizing the change in the visual recognition mode, it is possible to confirm that the initial operation of the light emitting decoration is normally performed. As a result, although the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized when the power switch is operated, the visual mode of the light emitting region L1 changes from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 when the initial operation of the light emitting decoration body is performed. It is only necessary to confirm whether or not the light emitting decoration is used, and the efficiency of the visual work for the initial operation of the light emitting decoration can be improved.

Of the plurality of light emitting decorations, the brightness in the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is configured to change when the light emitting decoration that can operate is operated. It is preferable to configure the light emitting decoration so that the change in brightness becomes large depending on the state in which the light emitting decoration is in the retracted position and the state in which the light emitting decoration is in the appearance position. For example, an LED that emits light toward the light emitting region L1 is mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, but the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 located behind the back-up front decorative substrate 3422. When the back-up rear decorative body 3451 and the back-up movable decorative body 3110 move to the appearance position, the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative board 3422 may be turned off, or the back side may be turned off. The LED itself may not be mounted on the rear surface of the upper front decorative substrate 3422. In such a configuration, when the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 located behind the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and the back-up rear movable decorative body 3110 move to the appearance position, the back-up The light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the front decorative substrate 3422 does not reach the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, and the brightness of the light emitting region L1 can be dimmed. As a result, the change in brightness in the light emitting region L1 becomes large depending on whether the light emitting decoration is in the retracted position or the appearance position, and whether the light emitting decoration is operating from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. You can easily figure out whether or not.

(About the light from the back side of the staging display device)
Further, the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration in which the back surface side is brightened by using the light from the light emitting decorative body provided on the game board 5. However, among the back surface sides of the pachinko machine 1, the effect display is displayed. Regarding the area behind the device 1600, the light from the LED of the light emitting decoration is blocked by the effect display device 1600, and it is possible that the portion to be brightened on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 cannot be brightened only by using the light emitting decoration. There is sex. For example, in the area behind the staging display device 1600, if the part where the hall manager needs to work is dark, it becomes difficult to work on that part. Therefore, an example in which a predetermined portion can be brightened even in the region behind the staging display device 1600 on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

First, the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 266. FIG. 266 is a diagram showing an opening provided on the back surface side of the staging display device. As shown in FIG. 266, the effect display device 1600 is provided so as to close a box-shaped box body 1611 (metal frame) having openings in the front and rear and an opening on the front side of the box body 1611, and displays a predetermined image. A transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate 1613 provided behind the liquid crystal panel 1612 and capable of irradiating light toward the liquid crystal panel 1612, and provided below the light guide plate 1613. A light emitting substrate 1615 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the light guide plate 1613 are mounted, and a light emitting substrate 1615 is provided behind the light guide plate 1613 so as to close an opening on the rear side of the box body 1611. It is provided with a metal back panel 1614 (metal back cover) capable of blocking light from the light plate 1613 to the rear. Further, although not shown, the effect display device 1600 includes a panel drive substrate for driving the liquid crystal panel 1612.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted side by side on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 can irradiate light toward the light guide plate 1613 located above the light emitting board 1615. Further, the light guide plate 1613 can receive light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 and emit light on the front surface side of the light guide plate 1613, and is located in front of the light guide plate 1613. It is possible to irradiate light toward the liquid crystal panel 1612. Therefore, the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be visually recognized brightly.

Further, the light emitting substrate 1615 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface and other mounting components. The coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be visually recognized brightly.

Further, on the light emitting substrate 1615, a connector 1615a for electrically connecting to the staging drive substrate 1720 is mounted on the upper surface thereof. The connector 1615a is an opaque member. The connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 is connected to the light emitting board 1615 by connecting to the connector on the wiring side where the terminal surface is facing rearward and the wiring from the effect driving board 1720 is bundled. It can be electrically connected to the drive board 1720. Thereby, the effect drive board 1720 can control the presence / absence of lighting of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615, the brightness adjustment, and the like.

The light guide plate 1613 is configured to receive light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 so that the front side of the light guide plate 1613 emits strong surface light, but only on the front side of the light guide plate 1613. However, the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 are also configured to emit weak light. As described above, the light emitting substrate 1615 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface and other mounted components. Not only the front side of the light plate 1613, but also the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613, the light emission becomes strong.

The back panel 1614 is configured to block light backward from the light guide plate 1613 that receives light from a plurality of LEDs and emits light, but the back panel 1614 receives light from the light guide plate 1613. A plurality of openings that can be passed through are intentionally provided at predetermined positions. As a result, the light from the rear surface side or the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 that receives the light from the plurality of LEDs and emits light is emitted from the plurality of openings toward the rear (rear of the staging display device 1600). It is possible.

Specifically, visually recognizing from the rear of the effect display device 1600, the opening A of the back panel 1614 is provided at the lower left of the back panel 1614, and two openings B are provided slightly closer to the center on the right side of the back panel 1614. The opening C is provided on the right side along the right end of the back panel 1614, and the opening D is provided on the upper side along the upper end of the back panel 1614.

First, the opening A of the back panel 1614 is provided at a position corresponding to the rear of the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615. Further, the opening A is one size larger than the connector 1615a. As a result, the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615 can be visually recognized from the opening A. Then, since the light from the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 that receives the light from the plurality of LEDs and emits light is emitted from the opening A, the light emitting region L5 around the connector 1615a is brightened. It can be visually recognized. As a result, the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 needs to be connected to the connector 1615a on the wiring side where the wiring from the effect drive board 1720 is bundled, but the light emitting region L5 around the connector 1615a is connected. By making it brightly visible, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is normally connected to the connector on the wiring side, and it is possible to facilitate the inspection work of the hall manager.

By the way, although the light emitting board 1615 is provided with a plurality of LEDs, the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615 can be visually recognized from the opening A, whereas any of the plurality of LEDs can be visually recognized. It is configured to be impossible. That is, among the plurality of LEDs mounted on the light emitting board 1615, even the LED that is in close contact with the opening A is not provided at a position that can be visually recognized from the opening A. For example, when light from some of the plurality of LEDs is directly irradiated through the opening A, when working on the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615, the work is performed. The direct light from the LED gets into the eyes of the operator, making it difficult to do the work. On the other hand, since the light from the plurality of LEDs is only indirectly irradiated through the opening A, it becomes difficult to work on the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615. It can be prevented. Similarly, the openings B to D of the back panel 1614 are configured so that none of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615 can be visually recognized from the openings B to D.

Two openings B of the back panel 1614 are provided side by side at a position slightly closer to the center than the opening C on the right side of the back panel 1614 when viewed from the rear of the staging display device 1600. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front, but when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the rear side of the game board 5 is attached. A back cover 640 is provided so as to cover the above. The back cover 640 is visible from the rear of the pachinko machine 1 and can be opened and closed with the left side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 as an axis. On the right side of the back cover 640, two operation units 640a are provided vertically separated so that the operator can operate them, while the main body frame 4 corresponds to each of the two operation units 640a. Two detachable parts are provided at the positions where the two operation parts 640a can be attached and detached, and by attaching and detaching the operation part 640a to the detachable part, the back cover 640 is attached to the main body frame 4. Can be opened and closed. The back cover 640 (operation unit 640a) and the detachable portion are both transparent or translucent members.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are provided at positions corresponding to the rear of the opening B of the back panel 1614 (rear of the staging display device 1600). ing. That is, since the light from the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 that receives the light from the plurality of LEDs and emits light is emitted from the opening B, the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 Is provided at a position where it can receive such light. As a result, the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 receive the light from the opening B, and the light emitting region L6 in the vicinity of the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 can be visually recognized brightly. When working on various boards such as the main control board 1310 attached to the game board 5, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4, but the operation unit 640a of the back cover 640 And by making the light emitting area L6 near the detachable part brightly visible, the operator can easily confirm the object to be operated, and the back cover 640 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 4, and the hall manager. It is possible to facilitate the inspection work of.

Further, the main body frame 4 is visible from the rear of the pachinko machine 1 and can be opened and closed with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 located on the right side of the outer frame 2 as axes. That is, the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are provided at positions close to the open shaft of the main body frame 4. A plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side on the game island, and the inside of the game island is darkened in a closed space. Then, in a state where the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, light from the outside (light of the hole) reaches the portion of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 far from the open axis of the main body frame 4. While it is easy and bright to see, it is difficult for external light (hole light) to reach the part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 that is close to the open axis of the main body frame 4, and it is bright and visible. Can not do it. In this respect, the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are located on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 near the opening axis of the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. Even if it is, it is difficult for the light from the outside (the light of the hole) to reach, but by receiving the light from the opening B, the operation portion 640a of the back cover 640 and the light emitting region L6 near the detachable portion can be visually recognized brightly. Can be done.

The opening C of the back panel 1614 is provided on the right side so as to be visible from the rear of the effect display device 1600 and along the right end of the back panel 1614. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front, but when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it is behind the opening C. A payout unit 560 is provided at the position. The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full-filled ball path unit 610 that guides the board unit to the 620 side is provided, but behind the opening C, the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full-filled ball path unit of the payout unit 560 are provided. 600 is located. Of the payout units 560, at least the ball guidance unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are transparent members.

Since the light from the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 that receives the light from the plurality of LEDs and emits light is emitted from the opening C, the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560, The light emitting region L7 in the vicinity of the payout device 580 and the upper full tank path unit 600 can be visually recognized brightly. As a result, in the payout unit 560, ball clogging may occur when the game ball B is guided downward from the tank rail 553. However, by making the light emitting region L7 in the vicinity of the payout unit 560 brightly visible, the game is played. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the ball is clogged in the passage for guiding the ball B, and when the ball is clogged, the ball clogging can be easily removed. The work can be facilitated.

The opening D of the back panel 1614 is provided on the upper side so as to be visible from the rear of the effect display device 1600 and along the upper end of the back panel 1614. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front, but when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it is above and behind the opening C. A tank rail 553 is provided at this position. The tank rail 553 uses a transparent member, and can allow light to pass through with high transmittance. Since the light from the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 that receives the light from the plurality of LEDs and emits light is emitted from the opening D, the light emitting region near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is emitted. L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

As described in detail above, the light-emitting decorative body provided on the game board 5 is abnormal when some kind of abnormality occurs, such as detecting fraud due to magnets or vibration, and the game cannot be played. The LED provided in the light emitting decoration is controlled to blink until the problem is solved. That is, of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 and the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1) are the light emitting regions that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration. ), The light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) are provided, and the LED provided on the light emitting decoration is controlled to blink. As a result, these light emitting areas are supposed to blink.

In addition, if some abnormality occurs, such as detecting fraud due to magnets or vibration, and the game cannot be played, if an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the outer frame 3 will be used. It may be necessary to open the main body frame 4 and perform maintenance on the member provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. For example, in order to perform maintenance on various boards arranged inside the back cover 640, it is necessary to operate the operation unit 640a of the back cover 640 to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4. In some cases, ball clogging may occur in the payout unit 560, and it may be necessary to remove the ball clogging. However, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the LED provided on the light emitting board 1615 of the staging display device 1600 is configured to blink and be controlled in the same manner as the LED provided on the light emitting decoration body. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the work object. In this regard, in this example, even if some abnormality occurs in the effect display device 1600, such as detecting fraud due to a magnet or vibration, and the game cannot be played, the effect display device 1600 is used. Instead of controlling the blinking of the LED provided on the light emitting board 1615, the lighting is always controlled as in the normal state. That is, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, as a light emitting region capable of receiving light from the opening of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 to brighten the light, the periphery of the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615. The light emitting region L5, the light emitting region L6 near the operation unit 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640, the light emitting region L7 near the payout unit 560, and the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 are provided. By constantly controlling the lighting of the LEDs provided on the light emitting board 1615 of the device at the time of expression 1660 as in the normal state, it is assumed that the visibility for these light emitting regions does not change. As a result, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the LED provided on the light emitting decoration is controlled to blink, but the parts that require high maintenance are controlled to be constantly lit as in normal times. By providing the light emitting region, the visibility does not change, and the efficiency of maintenance work at the time of abnormality on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

(About the visibility of the gap between the control boards provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1)
Further, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (the back surface side of the back box 3010), various substrates and wiring for connecting the various substrates are provided. The pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration in which the back surface side is brightened by using the light emitting decorative body provided on the game board 5 and the light from the opening of the back panel 1614 in the effect display device 1600. If all the areas on the back side of the machine 1 are brightened, it will be easier for the hall manager to perform maintenance work in the island equipment, but on the other hand, for various boards provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. This makes it easier for fraudsters to cheat. Therefore, an example in which a fraudster is less likely to cheat on various substrates provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 while being configured to brighten the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below. ..

As shown in FIG. 263, as the light emitting decorative body that brightens the back surface side and the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410, the back-up front rotation decoration body 3421, and the back-up front rear decoration body are used. A decorative body 3451 and a back-rear movable decorative body 3110 are provided, and three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided on the left side of the game board 5, and three back front right on the right side of the game board 5. A decorative unit 3810 is provided. The light emitting decoration provided on the upper part of the gaming board 5 brightens the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and the light emitting decoration provided on the left side of the gaming board 5 is , The pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear to brighten the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1), and the light emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 is The pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear, and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened.

Further, as a characteristic configuration for brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the opening of the back panel 1614 in the staging display device 1600 can be mentioned. Specifically, an opening A is provided on the lower left side of the back panel 1614, an opening B is provided slightly closer to the center on the right side of the back panel 1614, and an opening C is provided on the right side of the back panel 1614. An opening D is provided on the upper side of the back panel 1614. Then, the light from the opening A of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 brightens the light emitting region L5 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615, and the light from the opening B operates the back cover 640. The light emitting region L6 near the portion 640a and the detachable portion is brightened, the light from the opening C brightens the light emitting region L7 near the payout unit 560, and the light from the opening D is near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. The light emitting region L1 is brightened. The light from the opening A of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 brightens the light emitting region L6 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615, but the main control is behind the opening A. Since the main control board 1310 of the unit 1300 is located, the light from the opening A is blocked by the main control board 1310, and it is difficult to visually recognize the light emitting region L6 from the rear of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the panel relay board 1710 of the drive board unit 1700. And the effect drive board 1720 are each provided with a pilot lamp at a position that can be visually recognized from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. The pilot lamp is a member for notifying whether or not each substrate is operating normally by the light emitting mode of the LED. Then, the light from the pilot lamp of the peripheral control board 1510 brightens the light emitting region L8 in the vicinity of the pilot lamp, and the light from the pilot lamp of the effect drive board 1720 brightens the light emitting region L9 in the vicinity of the pilot lamp. However, the light from the pilot lamp of the main control board 1310 brightens the light emitting region L10 in the vicinity of the pilot lamp. That is, these configurations can also be mentioned as configurations for brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1.

The light emitting region described above is the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the drive board unit 1700 on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. It is provided around the control board group including the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720. That is, of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, except for the control board group attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the light emitting region is configured to be bright. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment, the inside thereof is blocked and darkened, but by brightening the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the island equipment can be brightened.

On the other hand, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the panel relay board 1710 of the drive board unit 1700. In the area where the control board group consisting of the effect drive board 1720 is provided, the light emitting area is not provided. That is, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the gap between the control boards constituting the control board group (the gap between the main control board 1310 and the panel relay board 1710 and the staging drive board 1720, the peripheral control board 1510, and the panel. The gap between the relay board 1710 and the staging drive board 1720) is configured to be dark. The panel relay board 1710 is a board that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, is connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring, and is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by wiring. Then, such wiring is arranged in the gap between the control boards constituting the control board group. Of these, since the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game, if the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 is fraudulent, the fraudster will benefit. There is a problem that an unjust situation arises. In this respect, while brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, darkening the gap between the control boards constituting the control board group makes it difficult to visually recognize the wiring arranged in the gap. It is possible to prevent the wiring and the like connected to the control board 1310 from being illegally performed.

(Visibility for the composition of metal powder countermeasures)
Next, an electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via a plurality of cutout portions 553a formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) Can be avoided with reference to FIGS. 263 and 267. FIG. 267 is an enlarged schematic view showing a part of a cross section cut along the line CC of FIG. 99 (a), and shows an outline of the configuration of measures against metal powder.

In the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553, the metal powder is peeled off from the game ball B and falls due to wear such as the game balls B colliding with each other or rubbing against each other. Therefore, when the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adheres to the main guide portion 553a, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is obstructed, so that the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. It becomes difficult to supply the game ball B to the payout device 580, and the payout of the game ball B is stopped.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 263, in this example, a plurality of notched portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Has been done. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B naturally falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa, so that the metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. Metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adhering to the main guide portion 553a due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide portion 553a falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa. As a result, the metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a, and a cotton rod is inserted into the cutout portion 553aa by a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall, which is caused by wear of the game ball B attached to the main guide portion 553a. By performing the work of removing the metal powder, the metal powder can be removed from the main induction portion 553a.

By the way, metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from a plurality of notched portions 553a formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged below the tank rail 553. Then, an electrical trouble occurs, which causes a malfunction or malfunction of the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with an IC such as a peripheral control IC, ROM, and SDRAM described later, and the peripheral data ROM board described later is provided with an IC such as a peripheral data ROM. As the pin spacing of these ICs becomes smaller, the pin spacing of the various connectors 1615a and the special connector 1615a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 becomes narrower, and the number of connectors 1615a in the peripheral control board 1510 increases, so that the various connectors 1615a Since the distance between the connectors 1615a and the special connector 1615a is also narrowed, it is necessary to take measures against electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

First, as shown in FIG. 267, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are located on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Compared to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface, the deviation toward the rear (in this embodiment, about half the diameter of the game ball B). It is arranged so that it is offset by the distance dimension of.

As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 on which the tank rail 551 is arranged is from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a staircase shape that bends downward in accordance with the direction). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, the first eaves portion 551da extended to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the lower end portion of the top plate portion is substantially on the same surface as the rear surface of the tank rail 553. .. Further, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4, the upper end portion of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first eaves portion 551da.

As a result, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553a can be received and adhered to by the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. There is. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553a by the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a is the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. By suppressing the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen toward the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553a and entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the game is played. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the sphere B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

Although the details have been described above, as shown in FIG. 263, in this example, as a light emitting decorative body that brightens the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration A body 3421, a back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, a back-up rear decoration body 3451, and a back-up rear movable decoration body 3110 are provided, and the light emitting decoration body provided at the upper part of the game board 5 is located behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is brightened. That is, since the light from the LEDs of these light emitting decorations is emitted toward the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B is generated by the tank rail 553. When the tank rail 553, which is a transparent member, is visually recognized from the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the metal powder emerges like a black dot, and the visibility to the metal powder is good. It has become a thing. As a result, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not metal powder is attached to the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553, and it is also possible to efficiently remove the metal powder from the cutout portion 553aa of the main guide portion 553a. It can be carried out.

Further, the light emitting region L1 also includes the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a located below the main induction portion 553a. The first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and the back cover 630 are transparent members. That is, since the light from the LED of the light emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 is irradiated toward the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a in the light emitting region L1, the cutout portion 553aa is formed. When the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside adheres to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a located below, the transparent member is attached from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. When the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a is visually recognized, the metal powder emerges like a black dot, and the visibility to the metal powder is good. As a result, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the metal powder is attached to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, and also for the work of removing the metal powder from the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. , Can be done efficiently.

Regarding the above, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the closed pachinko machine 1 By opening the main body frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B in the closed pachinko machine 1 is generated by the tank rail 553. It can be easily confirmed whether or not it is attached to the main guide portion 553a of the above and the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. The light from the LEDs of the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 and the back-up front rotation decoration body 3421, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451, and the back-top movable decoration body 3110 of the pachinko machine 1 is a tank. Although the light is emitted toward the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the rail 553, it is not desirable that the LED light source is directly viewed during the maintenance of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, so that the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is not directly seen. The light from the LED is configured to be indirect light that the light source of the LED is not directly viewed.

Further, after confirming the adhesion of the metal powder, when removing the metal powder from the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 Light emitting decorative body (back top front rotating decoration body 3410 and back top front decoration body 3421, back top rear rotating decoration body 3440 and back top rear decoration body 3451, back top rear movable body) that brightens the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the It is also possible that the light from the decorative body 3110) interferes with the work of removing it. Therefore, after confirming the adhesion of metal powder by opening the main body frame 4 of another pachinko machine 1, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 for which metal powder is to be removed is opened, the rear of the pachinko machine 1 is opened. Light emitting decorative body (back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and back-up front rotating decoration body 3421, back-up top-back rotating decoration body 3440 and back-up top rear decoration body 3451) that brightens the light-emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. , The LED of the movable decorative body 3110) may be turned off so as not to brighten the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, not only the light emitting decoration that brightens the light emitting region L1 but also the LED light that may interfere with the work of removing the metal powder may be turned off. This makes it possible to prevent the light from the LED that brightens the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 from hindering the work of removing the metal powder.

However, depending on the hall environment, it may be preferable that the hall itself is dark and the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is bright when maintaining the pachinko machine 1 such as removing metal powder. Therefore, in a state where the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is open, a light emitting decorative body (back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and back-up front rotating decorative body 3410) that optionally brightens the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. It is also possible to provide a light emission start switch capable of starting the LED emission of the back-up front decorative body 3421, the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440, and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, and the back-up rear movable decoration body 3110). Such a light emitting start switch is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the main body frame 4 is open. As a result, the hall manager can freely operate whether or not to start the light emission of the LED that brightens the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 in the state where the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened, and adjusts to the hall environment. be able to.

Further, the tank rail 553 is molded of a transparent material (polycarbonate resin or the like), and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball gummy) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be achieved. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553, so that the game board 5 can be visually recognized. When a movable defect occurs in the movable staging unit or the like, the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and the above-mentioned phase can be confirmed. It can produce the same effect as the effect.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 is in contact with the first eaves portion 551da so as to cover at least a part behind the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Since it extends downward from the top plate portion, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa and adhered to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a is the top plate portion. When the metal powder falls from the first ridge portion 551da of 551a, this metal powder is on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The metal powder of the game ball B that falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the peripheral control unit 1500, and eventually falls from the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, covers the peripheral control unit 1500. It is possible to suppress the entry into the body 1501 and suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the top plate portion 551a and the back cover 640 of the payout base 551 are the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Is prevented from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eaves or cover that can be used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the first eaves portion 551da is provided below the notch portion 553aa, the main part is through the notch portion 553aa not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. The metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the guide portion 553a can be received and adhered to by the first eaves portion 551da, and the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa. The metal powder falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa is the peripheral control unit. It is possible to suppress the entry into the cover body 1501 of 1500, and to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In the above example, in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end portion of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first eaves portion 551da, but the upper end portion of the back cover 640 and the first eaves are in contact with each other. It may be arranged so as to be separated from the part 551da. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553a in cooperation with the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da is contained in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The arrangement of the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da does not matter as long as it suppresses entry.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached effect display device 1600 (rear side) is displaced in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 (in this embodiment, about 2 minutes of the diameter of the game ball B). Due to the arrangement (that is, the structure is such that the peripheral control unit 1500 is not arranged directly under the cutout portion 553aa), the game ball B from the tank rail 553 is arranged. It is effective as a countermeasure against metal powder that can prevent electrical troubles caused by metal powder.

Further, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface (cover flat plate described later) of the cover body 1501, whereas the upper side and the left side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later). Since it is not provided on each cover side wall provided on the lower side and the right side, the metal powder of the game ball B temporarily adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). However, it is possible to make it difficult to invade the inside of the cover body 1501.

Of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, one or a combination of the cover side walls 1501b provided on the upper side is used for ventilation holes. A plurality of 1501az may be formed. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. .. Even with this configuration, foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. It is possible to prevent intrusion. This makes it possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling on various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is formed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls and invades toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, and thus falls on various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because there is a high probability that trouble will occur.

Further, when the ventilation holes 1501 are not provided on the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the heat dissipation function is supplemented by increasing the number of ventilation holes 1501 provided on the other surfaces or expanding the area of the ventilation holes 1501. You may. This can contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505, and can suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles such as thermal runaway.

Further, the upper surface of the cover body 1501 when attached to the pachinko machine 1 is in a substantially horizontal state. Therefore, when the metal powder of the game ball B falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553a and adheres to the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the metal powder can be fastened to the upper surface of the cover body 1501. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from entering the inside of the cover body 1501. A part or all of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 may be tilted as long as the metal powder of the game ball B is not dropped toward the ventilation hole 1501az formed in the cover body 1501.

Further, the first eaves member 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 may be attached to the top plate portion 551a as a separate member (another structural component).

Further, when the upper part or the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is covered by the first eaves part 551da or / and the back cover 640 of the top plate part 551a, or to the gutter-shaped main guide part 553a of the tank rail 553. A plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a, such as when the cutout portions 553aa formed in plurality and the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are arranged so as to be displaced in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. If there is a low probability that the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a will head toward the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, one of the upper surfaces of the cover body 1501 in the state of being attached to the pachinko machine 1. A ventilation hole 1501az may be provided in a portion (for example, a corner portion of the cover body 1501, most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 is closed, but a ventilation hole 1501az is formed in a part of the portion).

Further, the present technical idea is not limited to completely preventing the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. As compared with the conventional pachinko machine, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553a is prevented from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 in a state of being attached to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a corner portion of the cover body 1501 and most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 are closed, but a ventilation hole 1501az is provided for a part of the cover body 1501. Those provided with ventilation holes 1501az in (formed, etc.) also fall under this technical idea.

Further, a plurality of slit holes are formed in the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500. Further, the cover body 1501 has seven connectors to be described later provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 along the lower side thereof, and seven connector holes and seven connector holes at positions corresponding to the volume control switch. A volume adjustment hole is formed, and two connector holes are formed at positions corresponding to the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board described later. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed from the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole formed on the cover body 1501. The volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from this volume control hole. Further, in a state where the liquid crystal output board described later is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output board and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are exposed from these two connector holes.

The cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is a shield plate that accommodates air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. A gap formed in the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501) while being taken in through a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the 1540. The volume control switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the volume control hole formed in the cover body 1501, the gap formed in, the two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output board, and the two connectors formed in the cover body 1501. It will be taken in through the hole and the gap formed in).

Incidentally, when the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 takes in the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500, a heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B is affected by the air flow and heads toward the inner space of the cover body 1501. There is a high probability that the metal powder will be sucked in, and due to electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the sucked metal powder, various electronic components provided in various boards such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 mounted inside the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. There will be a problem (failure) in the above.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), a game ball is formed by forming a first eaves portion 551da along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500. It can be configured to have a function as an eave to prevent heavy powder called metal powder of B from being sucked into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 from a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of notched portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. However, a notch, a hole, or a groove may be formed in the ball passage through which the game ball B rolls, as in the case of the notch 553aa. Specifically, in the ball guidance unit 570 having one guide passage 570a that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, the metal powder of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a is introduced from the guide passage 570a. Notches, holes, or grooves that can be removed to the outside can be formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571 of the induction unit 570. A payout device 580, a board unit 620, and the like are arranged below the ball guidance unit 570. The payout device 580 has a board and the like on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted, and the board unit 620 is a power supply board 630. , The payout control board 633, the interface board 635, and the like, and various boards are arranged. Therefore, when a notch, a hole, or a groove is formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571, a game ball that falls through the notch, the hole, or the groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the metal powder of B from adhering to various substrates arranged below the induction unit 570. Therefore, a canopy-shaped member can be formed so as to project rearward along the upper side of the rear lid 582 of the payout device 580, and a notch portion formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571 can be formed. , The position of the hole or groove and the position of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the payout device 580 is mounted can be configured by shifting, and both can be adopted and configured. You can also. Further, a canopy-shaped member is formed so as to project rearward along the upper side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, and the like. The location of the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571 and the location of the power supply board cover 631, the payout control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be configured. It can be configured in a staggered manner, or it can be configured by adopting both.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to suitable embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine is exemplified as the game machine, but it can also be applied to other game machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrange ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums using a game medal ( It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates a spinning drum or a reel. Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. 268. FIG. 268 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 268, the slot machine 6000 is configured to include a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body portion (box body) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body portion (box body) 6004 are connected to each other via hinges (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, insert the key into the keyhole 6005 of the metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turn it clockwise to turn the front door (front frame) 6002 into the main body. It can be released from the part (box body) 6004.

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of the metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and cooperates with the locking unit (not shown) to form the main body (box body) 6004. It is used for opening and closing and locking with the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device is attached to a metal columnar cylinder body (not shown) extending back and forth, a metal keyhole 6005 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body, and the rear side of the cylinder body. It comprises a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates with the rotation of a regular metal key. The cylinder body of the metal locking device penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit from the rear, and the rear end is mounted on the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and is located at positions facing each other across the central axis from the rear end to the front. It has a pair of notched notches. The rotation transmission member is formed so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004, the metal transmission cylinder of the metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear. By inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted in the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder to be rotated. When the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other in a state where the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004, it is made of metal. The locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

The door frame reinforcement unit also functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to impart rigidity, and the main body part (via the door frame metal ground wire (not shown)). Box body) It is electrically connected to the grounding board provided inside the 6004. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. This grounding board (not shown) can once aggregate electromagnetic noise generated in various places and ground (earth) to the island equipment of the game hall, and can be grounded to the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire (not shown). It is electrically connected to the ground of the equipment.

An open switch (not shown) capable of detecting the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 is arranged on the main body portion (box body) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. There is. This release switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal due to the opening / closing operation by the metal locking device. The opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 is detected with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 independently of the opening / closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the release switch is not placed near the vicinity of the metal locking device, and is located below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that has entered the metal locking device. An release switch is arranged on the portion (box body) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. As described above, even if the electromagnetic wave noise invades the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative portions. Some of these various decorative parts are not decorated at all, while others are plated on the front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is a precious metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and since it has conductivity, electromagnetic noise may invade. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit constituting the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some of the various decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and the conductive member is directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. Some are electrically connected). As a result, electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative parts is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcing unit, so that it is possible to prevent the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative parts from entering the substrate ground. In addition, among various decorative parts, electromagnetic noise that has penetrated into those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and the door frame metal ground wire is connected. It is transmitted to the ground board provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004, and is transmitted from the ground board to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

An electrostatic elimination pad may be provided as a static eliminator at a predetermined position on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002, or when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body portion (box body) 6004. An electrostatic eliminator pad may be provided as a static eliminator on a portion on the open side opposite to the side where the hinge is arranged (closed side). The static electricity removal pad can remove noise (electromagnetic wave noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

Further, the front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and is provided with various decorative parts. Some of the various decorative parts are not coated with decorative plating at all, and the front and back sides are provided. Some of the decorative parts are decoratively plated on the entire surface, and among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to a metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). The ground board provided inside the main body (box body) 6004 was electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, but the door frame metal ground wire was connected to. Instead of electrically connecting to the ground board, electrically connect to the terminals of the power supply board of the power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body (box body) 6004, and connect the metal door frame reinforcement unit and the power supply board. May be electrically connected. The power supply board is supplied with AC 24V from the island equipment in the game hall. This alternating current 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that transiently protects from excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. This surge protection element (surge absorber) usually has a high resistance value and hardly flows current, but when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value instantly drops and current flows, and when the excessive voltage disappears. , It has the performance to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcing unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) from the N terminal of the power supply board by the surge protection element (surge absorber) and is removed from the slot machine 6000. ..

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a protruding portion protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002. A medal insertion slot 6008, a bet button 6010, 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. Further, a storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, storage settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Has been done. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300, and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004.

The main control board box 1320 also houses a setting change board 1311 on which a setting key switch 1311a capable of changing a set value is mounted, together with the main control board 1310. That is, since the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004, the setting key switch is used. The 1311a is arranged inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and may be attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004, or the main body. It may be attached to and fixed to the housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box body) 6004. In addition to the setting key switch 1311a, the setting change board 1311 has a setting switching button for selecting and switching the setting value, and a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311. The setting display 1310g composed of the above-mentioned setting change permission lamp 1310z and the like may be mounted.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a position approximately in the center of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 through this display window, an effect device (not shown), and the like are shown. It can be seen through. Three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached to and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. On the other hand, the staging device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

On these variable rotating bodies, a translucent symbol band on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information is attached to each tubular frame. ing. Such a tubular variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and when the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, a plurality of types of symbols continuously change from the top to the bottom from the above-mentioned display window. It is designed to look like.

The staging device includes a plurality of movable staging bodies (not shown), the staging display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and a peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of a plurality of movable staging bodies, the drawing control of the staging display device 1600, the light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, etc., based on various commands from the main control board 1310. By performing various controls, the progress of the production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

In the main control board 1310, a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008 as a game medium, and the variable display of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, and the right The variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information has a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as a game medium to the tray 6026.

In the fusion gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008', and in the main control board 1310, a predetermined number of game balls are thrown into the ball slot 6008' as a game medium, and the start lever 6014 is operated. Based on this, the variable display of the symbol information is started, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information has a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of the game ball as a game medium to the tray 6026.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 3000 Back unit 3100 Back rear production unit 3110 Back rear movable decorative body 3111 Decorative body (decorative member, decorative board body)
3111a First decorative protrusion 3111d Metal decorative part 3112 Decorative sheet (decorative member, decorative plate)
3113 Light guide radiation plate (decorative member, radiation plate)
3113a Main body 3113b Flange (peripheral wall)
3113c 1st LED accommodating part 3113d 2nd LED accommodating part 3113e Reflecting part 3114 Back rear decorative substrate (decorative substrate)
3114a First LED (LED, specific LED)
3114b Second LED (LED)
3114c Substrate body 3114d Copper foil 3114e Electronic component 3115 Decorative body base 3115a Cover plate part 3115b Flange part EL Creeping distance SL Predetermined distance

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that displays a variation of a symbol based on the satisfaction of a predetermined start condition and gives a profit to a player based on the result of the variation display of the symbol.
A game board on which a predetermined game area is formed,
A light emitting portion provided on the gaming board and light emitting and decorating a predetermined decorative portion visible from the front side of the gaming machine.
A rear bulging portion provided on the gaming board and bulging toward the rear side of the gaming machine,
The transmissive portion provided in the rear bulging portion and the transmissive portion
A movable body provided on the gaming board and operating so as to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine is provided.
The light emitting unit is provided separately from the movable body, and is arranged and configured so that the light emitted by the light emitting unit can be visually recognized from the rear side of the gaming machine through the transmitting unit.
The mode of viewing the light of the light emitting portion, which is visible from the rear side of the gaming machine through the transmitting portion, changes depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the movable body.
Further, a predetermined front body having the decorative portion is located in front of the light emitting portion, and at least a part of the light of the light emitting portion can be reflected by the front body, and the reflected light is the reflected light. It becomes visible from the rear side of the game machine through the transmissive part.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images